: ee ; ee Se : Bey thy vee eins Toate Daath Suet Rireehs SAS pte ee de rahanes ‘ : C WRK Peco wiciced eke “s AS AS ft a otha arp sansa ‘ ia fe oe PERNA ER vane ae nen has, eye ce v isislecsted ary a? . 4) p Dobe Bhicetadecadieten \ ‘ ary rams Pots “4 15 7 3 sek ak 4 . t vanaf SNS RS phn ve “M ie ae Pedy Na what A Smee Mes yRane , ie% ’ Ind — 2 a ee eee a ee ” > F F ewes : mb ne oa op ear ie eye — Pliner ee ee Hen Be aay EO : 7 aoe EE ene ~~ - - , = . . < ae eee RE OS ; GE SW, EE SS ee Sana SRE Wy, See o Ary Seite? (i La Ge ‘0 "Tate at “i Wn i. es “ ep V fee nol Nia SS pei OF LR, a” an K he : “ip : - “K le x iy —_ wees %, ah, Con .f; eevee 4 i ) nH, & = Sone XN eh UO ey “p, ES SS Yo, || SRM / 7 ae | eo " | i, is 3 , A Ca: Zaeenines y = “ay & i (EAE Vy, gins 2 ee ©, a) Division of Mollusks Wi Vo NZ Linton a Lo a y | Sectional Library At ©) i. x Tae oF = as Za aOLIN Gs Gy, oa \ C,, Ne ? ng 4 << & HH 2% “il Ky ae LD: i ert ay EES Xo y, is he “all it 2 i. Mi v s ac / Aa aii oo lal >, yy 4 “ “€ ae 2 ) ye > Ne irae a ate ae a eras 2a o Ay £% i Sy, : Mil “ih iy er >, YEE a Se Veet a 46 or roke va > e Og, ig se ai, i% oe << i <— “ SA thcron = 05 WD. 2 oS ong Min il i zs te) | fii i! ('( ‘ it Wi es ie” AM ange Ae £) 1 he M MY, j “Al £2) 4 ase NY: te Urn ane, oh/ SCs Be a or ws ¢ of ‘a a e ib iil so 4. x > va 3 . JElE % tea Se A May eR Z ee 3 ats Sona Stony aves Se i a at an = MT a) . i mi Il (a ai 2 F 1 Y 4 nll sai | Mi i MF J a S x io i " ts Sei ni en Divie; “4310N of WV,3), Sect One) 7 Molise, EE VELIGER A Quarterly published by CALIFORNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY, INC. Berkeley, California Volume 7 July 1, 1964 to April 1, 1965 Volume 7 THE VELIGER Page III TABLE OF CONTENTS A new cowrie race from North West Australia. F A. Scuiwver & W. O. CERNOHORSKY ........ 225 A new name for Murex rhyssus DALL, 1919. WVITIELTAN IEE MERSON Uiniiait crave sialic cieleiale «sie, 5 A new species of Primovula from the Philippines. CRAWEORD) ING: GATE (is yreiete ssi sieye leyeicueisiss sieves seis 102 A new species of the lamellibranch genus Aligena from western Canada. IL, MICHIE COMMAS Gogac0ood 6o dopo poneodeDoedne 108 A proposed reclassification of the family Marginellidae. EUGENE B GOANG slay sereneeicneser shaloipisuete rerajshoieiiosovee. 184 A statistical study in fossil cowries. BRAN ZV AIEERED) SCHIEDER « aiatasic se shen ses seis 236 Books, Pertopicats & PAMPHLETS .. 58, 153, 203, 255 Burrowing limitations in Pelecypoda. WEEE MBRGP ARMSTRONG rat cies siege sien sleiersieisiniesie « 195 Cypraea, a list of the species. JERRVAR DON OMUE Carrside cid eisinitaser catenin 219 Discussion of the Mytilus californianus community on newly constructed rock jetties in Southern California DONALDS MIREISH 325 Gio s tele: Gist Gelagals oem 95 Function of the cephalic tentacles in Littorina planaxis PHILIPPI. IRONAUDUIOWRETERS) sinc a. scacieds ss ee cues ne os 143 Growth of three species of Acmaea. SEIGERM WN ERAN KM hs ciescln a/sicrue te site dealers retrace 201 Habitats and breeding seasons of the shelf limpet, Crepidula norrisiarum WILLIAMSON. Nettie MacGrinitige « Grorce E. MacGinitir .. 34 Kitchen midden mollusks of San Luis Gonzaga Bay. AU GENER COANE ea ric tesa cc aires lod eoeeba eet eta 216 Macroscopic algal food of Littorina planaxis Puitippr and Littorina scutulata GouLp. PARTELURY VON MID ATT cei ane sie cine aialecic ne belt ¢ 139 Mating behavior in Littorina planaxis Putviprt. DANIET] G» GIBSON, TT) 225.6 oh acne sec ee oe ee 134 Microscopic algal food of Littorina planaxis Puiiprt and Littorina scutulata Goutp. IMIGHAR IS SMINOSTERS . ays) 2/2.c.4 ncn ena orecos ache ciers): 149 Musculus pygmaeus spec. nov., a minute mytilid of the high intertidal zone at Monterey Bay, California. IBETERMW i GLYININIGH ion xn Ser ns a oe ee ihm wine Soins 121 New and otherwise interesting species of mollusks from Guaymas, Sonora, Mexico. Donatp R. SHasky & G. Bruce CAMPBELL ..... 114 New information on the distribution of marine Mollusca on the coast of British Columbia. MS NIGMS COWAN Marae eeiskecharaacsvacis avg) cue ci slcletnes 110 New species of mollusks from the coast of Brazil. BERNARD TuRSCH & JEAN PIERRET ............ 35 New species of Recent and fossil West American aspido- branch gastropods. James H. MCLEAN «20.2. .2.-0.s0creeceee ee 129 New terebrid species from the Indo-Pacific ocean and from the Gulf of Mexico, with new locality records and provisional lists of species collected in Western Australia and at Sabah, Malaysia. Re WBURCHeME ere erry ister cts -rerepereciates- eer 241 Note on a range extension and observations of spawning in Tegula, a gastropod. INVUNIGIS) IP WIVUCIE oooccocc0snn00000GdDOnUDKS 233 INOTESHS NEW SIERO r ne 58, 152, 201, 254 Notes on the peculiar egg laying habit of an antarctic Prosobranch . Oat, Wh le laMes oootcdoosodannoCoOUeCOOS 45 On the distribution of Tresus capax and Tresus nuttalli in the waters of Puget Sound and the San Juan Archipelago. GIR IR IBINROS coococodsdodoospodcoeDonodGoe 166 Predator-prey reactions between two prosobranch gastro- pods. JEFFERSON |=) GONORMEeE saeiaere cise os aia 228 Provisional classification of the genus Notocypraca ScuiLper, 1927. ERANZE SEEREDE SCEMUDERS errei siiye a < ec-fele ete 21) Systematics of the Hawaiian Littorina FERUSSAC. \DANNias, AL \WiEMIAUS Sobdcoscngo00cc0des- 155 Ten new species of Typhinae (Gastropoda: Muricidae ) A. Myra Keen & G. Brucr CAMPBELL ........ 46 The color pattern of Hermissenda crassicornis (EscHscnortz, 1631). WrRikre Eye DUR GCINGHEI acorns ora ctor aec 205 The Conidae of Fiji. WALTER OLivER CERNOHORSKY ...........+-. 61 The cowries established by Corn in 1949. RRANZ PAT EREDES CHIEDERM nn reeierieciereeianaiiee 103 The egg capsule and young of Beringius eyerdami SmirH (Neptuneidae). Io UM IGE COMIN wiotieg adibpcdu ce DO oda GOo pea 43 The fine structure of the follicle gland of the snail, Lymnaea auricularia (Gastropoda: Pulmonata). R. S. Nisuioka, L. Stimpson «& H. A. BERN ... 1 The geographical distribution of cowries. BRAN Ze ALERED)-OGHIVDER stats) si-leyeieie sells ie oie 171 The Mollusca of the Santa Barbara County area. Part I - Pelecypoda and Scaphopoda. EUGENE COANI RELY err iitoicin ese eee ines 29 Three dimensional reconstructions of the nests of Helix aspersa. EREDERIERZ BERGE Am Eee Giacinto ee ee 234 Western Australian cowries. CRAY ORD ENE CATER EEE een nner 7 Page IV THE VELIGER Volume 7 UU SEES AUTHOR INDEX Anion, Downy Ci oo0cg0000000090000 (59), (255) ARMSTRONG UGE Ra ae Oo ener cre 195 BEUCIK, VERANCISIy Eee ener cioiia roe cio re ors 233 Bern, Howarp A. see NisHioka, R. S., L. Simpson & — Bur eri RD ai icy ic ech eee 241 BURGIN; UERIKE wien iss cca eer restorer 205 CaMPBELL, G. Bruce see Kren, A. Myra & — see SHASKy, DONALD R. & — CATE a CRAW HORDE NITE eer ere 7, 102 Cave; JEANS Meee eee vice ioe (59) a @53)) COAN, BEUGENER Were rar car 29, 184, 216 GOWAN, TEMG TS Oa eilene aise creiens oyens euler 43, 108, 110 CERNOHORSKY, WALTER OLIVER ..........-- 61, 152 see also SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED & — IDATEHL,, ARIE ILKAON scooccocccco00b 000000006 139 DONOHUE JERR YanMer ccc trio hoe criere yori 2t9 DURHAM, WATER alae loot isles scorer ecoics one lereteiere (153) linvmasomy, Wii IS occoooccedo00c000000000 5 Foster, MICHARWRISS 00a lo. cio aac omen kettle te 149 FRANK. RETER) Willi cide ecu sles cketercnctetrerelionieniae 6 201 GinSon DANTE RNG UGK everte erence nse rcis 134 GiVNNGRETER | Wee. ciiac codec aioe eters loaeea a 121 GoNOR OG JERRERSON WAM sais ae ona seen raeiee 228 PLEDGPET HA AJOELUW 5 uegnoletsin sections ceeena es 45, (203) HEeErTLEIN, LEo GEorGE .......... (8) @l53))203)) HERZBERG, ERED Ig cuptetersicke oases cheno e a one rere aie cauenorees 234 Krenn Ay Myrapee erase cance (G3), (QD), (28S) Kren, A. Myra & G. BRUCE CAMPBELL ........ 45 MacGinitiz, Nettie & Grorce E. MacGinitie .. 34 Mclean, JAMES UEeg ak asics acts sclceera cece 129 NisHioKA, R. S., L. Simpson & H. A. Bern ...... 1 PEARCE? AJACKY Bui visi Seetelauts se Sena ee eee 166 PETERS RONALD issn siete tain oie or etieaeteencee ayers 143 PiERRET, JEAN see TuRSCH, BERNARD & — SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED ........ 37, 103, 171, 236 ScHILDER, FE A. & W. O. CeRNOHORSKY .......... 225 Suasky, Donatp R. «& G. Bruce Camppett .... 114 Stmpson, L. see NisHioka, R. S., —, « H. A. Bern STOHLERS SRUDOLE Se ee aaat ee ae (154) Turscu, BERNARD & JEAN PYERRET ............. 35 WHIPPLE JJEANNETREVAG 9 sc o> bist one oie 155 VELIGER A Quarterly published by CALIFORNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY, INC. Berkeley, California VOLUME 7 JuLy 1, 1964 NuMBER I CONTENTS The Fine Structure of the Follicle Gland of the Snail, Lymnaea auricularia (Gastropoda : Pulmonata) Plates 1 to 4 Ricuarp S. Niswioka, LEoNarpD Simpson, & Howarp A. BERN . . ... . . =I A New Name for Murex rhyssus Dau, 1919. (Mollusca : Gastropoda). AV VME ETI ENTERS ONG ee) ee Mele eed ds coc) al) Versa) yal Wer Gyei een iG Western Australian Cowries (Mollusca : Gastropoda). (Plate 5; 1 Map) Crawrorp N. Care “I The Mollusca of the Santa Barbara County Area. Part I- Pelecypoda and Scaphopoda. EucENE CoANn i HED OG GAN tS OR ERAS AU AA aL AN a eI gE) Habitats and Breeding Seasons of the Shelf Limpet Crepidula norrisiarum WILLIAMSON (Mollusca : Gastropoda) . (Plate 6) NEriEe MAcGinimiry ss GEORGEPEAy MACGININE, yp 3 eH New Species of Mollusks from the Coast of Brazil. (5 Text figures) BERNARD MOURSCHE& PAN VOIERRE Tot Wiesel Sa con 6EF ne ee ey ce se BG Provisional Classification of the Genus Notocypraea SCHILDER, 1927 (Cypraeidae). RAN Ze AUEREDSOCELEDER) (1 hy Wamihn tee Cusine IS el ee Coe wk ep eee a Deh a OM The Egg Capsule and Young of Beringius eyerdami SmitH (Neptuneidae) (Mollusca : Gastropoda). (Plate 7) I. McT. Cowan Ree ea MET ot, to et ei em Melee aia NM oe ee te Coy veh Nao Ve [ Continued on Inside Front Cover | AR" A SS OS ESSE SE EI = Distributed free to Members of the California Malacozoological Society, Inc. pee ee et ee es ee Subscriptions (by Volume only) payable in advance to Calif. Malacozoological Soc.,Inc. Volume 7: $7.50 Domestic; $7.90 in the Americas; $8.10 all other Foreign Countries. $2.50 for single copies of current volume only. Postage extra. Send subscriptions to: Mrs. JEAN M. Cate, Manager, 12719 San Vicente Boulevard, Los Angeles, California 90049. Address all other correspondence to: Dr. R. STOHLER, Editor, Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley, California 94720. Second-Class Postage paid at Berkeley, California. CONTENTS — Continued Notes on the Peculiar Egg Laying Habit of an Antarctic Prosobranch (Mollusca : Gastropoda). (1 Text figure) Jor W. HepcPreTu Ten New Species of Typhinae (Gastropoda : Muricidae). (Plates 8 to 11; 3 Text figures) A. Myra Keen « G. BRucE CAMPBELL . NOTES & NEWS BOOKS, PERIODICALS & PAMPHLET'S Gigy fi z My \ : ey f Ue is i i a al | AL oh “SNA i { 7 a . SNA ee ie Va as ul i ne a egy ‘ CZ CA Ge Z Z yey Zi, a “G2 SS ‘ Sen ss = - 45 . 46 . 58 . 58 Note: The various taxa above species are indicated by the use of different type styles as ‘shown by the following examples: ORDER, Suborder, DIVISION, Subdivision, SECTION, SUPERFAMILY, FAmILy, Subfamily, Genus, (Subgenus). New Taxa Wolk Now| THE VELIGER Page | The Fine Structure of the Follicle Gland of the Snail, Lymnaea auricularia (Mollusca: Gastropoda) BY RICHARD S. NISHIOKA LEONARD SIMPSON AND HOWARD A. BERN Department of Zoology and its Cancer Research Genetics Laboratory, University of California, Berkeley, and Diablo Valley College, Concord, California (Plates 1 to 4) INTRODUCTION THE FOLLICLE GLAND of the cerebral ganglion of pulmon- ate gastropods was first described by pE Nazias (1898) and by PELSENEER (1901). It has recently been reinvesti- gated by Lever and his colleagues in Amsterdam (LEveER, 1958; Lever et al., 1959; Lever and Joosse, 1961) in several basommatophoran and stylommatophoran species. On the basis of light-microscope observations, Lever has raised the possibility that the follicle gland is a neuro- endocrine organ with neurosecretory activities. WAUTIER et al. (1961) consider the gland in Gundlachia as devoted exclusively to secretion. In Arion, VAN Mot (1960) describes an equivalent structure as a non-neural endo- crine organ (the “cephalic gland”), and this opinion is apparently shared by Notte (1963), who terms a similar organ “cerebral gland” in the Helicidae. However, an embryonic vesicle giving rise to neurons but disappearing in later development is also described by SANCHEZ & Borp (1958) in Helix aspersa. Whether all these cerebral vesicles represent the same entity is difficult to decide. The present study of the ultrastructure of the follicle gland was undertaken initially in the hope of finding a simple neurosecretory system, spatially restricted in scope, in which the formation, transport, and release of neuro- secretion could be studied in neurons with short axonal processes. In addition, the gross structural similarity of this gland to the epistellar body of the octopus and to the parolfactory vesicles of squids has raised the possibility that mollusks generally might possess a family of related vesicular organs associated with the nervous system (cf. Nisuioka e¢ al., 1962; BERN & Hacaporn, 1964). MATERIALS anp METHODS The adult freshwater snails, Lymnaea auricularia (identi- fied by Dr. R. Stohler), used in this study were collected from Grayson Creek near Concord, California. The speci- mens used for light microscopy were fixed in Stieve’s and Helly’s fixatives, embedded in paraffin, sectioned at 5y1 and stained with paraldehyde fuchsin. The animals used for electron-microscope observations were fixed in 1% osmium tetroxide buffered with veronal-acetate (pH 7.5) and embedded in Maraglas-Cardolite (FREEMAN & SPUR- Lock, 1962). Thin sections were cut on a Porter-Blum microtome, picked up on formvar-coated copper grids backed with carbon, stained with uranium acetate (WatT- SON, 1958) and lead citrate (REyNotps, 1963), and examined in a RCA EMU 3G electron microscope. OBSERVATIONS The follicle gland is located laterally in the lateral lobes of the cerebral ganglion, adjacent to the epineurial cap- sule. ‘The follicle itself consists of a single layer of low columnar epithelioid cells surrounding an ovoid lumen (Figure 1). In adult specimens, the follicle has an average diameter of about 30u, and its epithelial wall is about 10 thick. Paraldehyde fuchsin-positive colloidal material is pres- ent within the lumen. Most of this material is generally found just apical to the follicle cells. The presence of a low, irregular brush-border is discernible on the follicle cells in areas where only a small amount of colloid sub- stance is present. There were no neurons filled with paraldehyde fuchsin- positive droplets in the lateral lobe of Lymnaea auricula- ria, as have been described by Lever (1958), Lever et al. (1959), and Lever & Joosse (1961) in several species of Basommatophora, including L. stagnalis. Only a haze of fuchsinophilic material was observed in a few neuron perikarya and axons. As a result neuronal processes were difficult to trace with certainty in our preparations. Most Page 2 THE VELIGER Vol. 7 Now of the nerve processes of the lateral lobe neurons appear to enter the neuropil of the adjacent cerebral lobe. Other processes were directed toward the follicle, but it could not be determined whether they terminated in associ- ation with the follicle. Ultrastructural observations failed to establish the pres- ence of neurosecretory material in the lumen of the follicle gland. Instead, the lumen is occupied by randomly-ori- ented microvilli and cilia, except for a small, clear central area (Figures 2 and 3). The branching microvilli extend from the apices of the epithelioid cells to form a dense network. Intermingled with the microvilli are cilia, which extend into the lumen from the processes of less common neuron-like cells that also contribute to the follicle wall. The cytoplasm of the epithelioid cells is dense, except at the apical margin, and contains many ribosomes, some of which are associated with cisternae of the endoplasmic reticulum (Figures 4 and 5). The mitochondria and Golgi apparatus appear typical in form. Some multivesicular bodies and lysosome-like bodies are also present. The nuc- lei are generally ovoid, oriented perpendicular to the capsule. The processes of the neuron-like cells can be distin- guished from the cytoplasm of epithelioid cells owing to their lack of density (Figures 2 to 5). A few ribosomes are found in the cytoplasm, in addition to some small vesicles of variable size. The mitochondria are large and irregular in shape. The cristae are distantly spaced, there- by giving the mitochondria an empty appearance (Figures + and 5). Vhe nuclei of the neuron-like cells are larger than those of the epithelioid cells. Some of the former cells we prescnt within the capsule surrounding the follicle; the perikarya of others are presumably located outside the capsule (Figure 3). The neurons present in the small area of the lateral lobe adjacent to the follicle were cursorily examined in the electron microscope. These neurons possessed the usual organelles, and some also contained numerous vesicles of assorted sizes. Certain of these neurons contained mito- chondria resembling those found in the processes of the follicle gland. No typical elementary neurosecretory gran- ules (electron-dense, in the 1000 to 3000A range) were found in any of the neurons examined in the lateral lobe. However, many neurons with typical neurosecretory granules have been encountered in the cerebral ganglion proper. DISCUSSION The follicle gland of Lymnaca auricularia superficially las a neuroendocrine appearance at the light-microscope level, Liver (1958), Lever et al. (1959), and Lever «& Joosse (1961) have studied this structure in several specics of Basommatophora and Stvlommatophora and have rcported that an occasional bipolar neuron sends a process into the limen; the lumen is often filled with densely-staining material, which they assume is neuro- secretion. On the clectron-microscope level no electron-dense neurosecretory granules could be found in the follicle gland or in the lateral lobe of the cerebral ganglion in which it is located. The fuchsinophilia of the follicle contents is ascribed to accumulations of microvilli. The fuchsinophilic “secretion” of the octopus epistellar body also proved to be stacks of microvilli (NisHIoKA et al., 1962). It is of interest that pe Nasias (1898) described the presence of cilia in the lumen of the follicle gland, which were attached to processes of the surrounding bipolar cells. To this pioneer investigator, the neuron-epithelium rclation in the follicle gland was reminiscent of that seen in the vertebrate olfactory receptor. It is conceivable that the masses of randomly arranged microvilli of the follicle gland located within the “brain” could reflect a former photoreceptive function of this structure, in an ontogenetic or a phylogenetic sense. Studies of the eye of two land gastropods, Helix aspersa (Eakin, 1963) and Helix pomatia (ROHLICH & TOROK, 1963), have shown that their photoreceptors are rhabdo- meric in type, composed of microvilli radially arranged on the sensory cell process. Although the molluscan photo- receptor is typically rhabdomeric, CLarK (1963) has reported that the eye of Vivzparus maleatus is of the ciliary type. Accordingly, the presence of cilia on the presumably neuronal processes extending into the lumen could also be in accord with a possible photoreceptive structure. However, it would be too facile to suggest that all closed vesicles, such as the follicle gland, associated with the protostome nervous system, are vestigial photo- receptors. In fact, the persistent follicles in gastropods are remnants of the embryonic cerebral tubes, at one time connected to the exterior. Some special sensory function of these structures (cf. DE NaiAs, 1898) is certainly con- ceivable, but there is no good basis for emphasizing photo- reception. A combined light- and electron-microscope study of neurosecretory phenomena in another basommatophoran snail, Helisoma tenue, now in progress, has demonstrated that the structural characteristics of the follicle gland in this animal are in accord with those described herein for Lymnaea. In sum, the ultrastructural attributes of the follicle gland fail to support a neurosecretory role for this organ, and the data in favor of a photoreceptive function are meager at best. The true nature of the follicle “gland” remains unknown, but a sensory function of some sort, at least in embryonic life, remains a possibility. Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 3 SUMMARY Lever, J. . 1958. On the occurrence of a paired follicle gland in the The follicle gland of Lymnaea auricularia has been investigated with the light and the electron microscopes for evidence of neurosecretory function. Paraldehyde fuchsin-staining material is present in the follicle gland. At the electron-microscope level numerous microvilli and some cilia are found projecting into the lumen from the cells forming the vesicle wall. Two cell types, one epi- thelioid and the other neuron-like, contribute to the make-up of the follicle. The microvilli project from the apical ends of the epithelioid cells, and the cilia are attached to processes of the neuron-like cells. No elemen- tary neurosecretory granules were encountered in the follicle gland, and the role of the organ is enigmatic, although a sensory function in early life remains a possibility. ACKNOWLEDGMENT We are indebted to Mr. John Soubier for photographic assistance. Aided by National Science Foundation Grant G - 8805. LITERATURE CITED Bern, Howarp A. & Irvine R. Hacaporn 1964. | Neurosecretion. Chapter 6 in Buttock « Horripce: Structure and function in the nervous system of invertebrates. W. H. Freeman Co., San Francisco (in press) CxiarKk, ALLEN W. 1963. Fine structure of two invertebrate photoreceptor cells. Journ. Cell Biol. 19: 14A (abstract) bE Nasias, B. 1898. Recherches sur le systéme nerveaux des Gastéropodes Pulimonés aquatiques. Cerveau des Limnées (Limnaca_stag- nalis). Soc. Sci. d’Arcachon (Stat. Zool.) : 43 - 72 agin, Ricuarp M. 1963. Lines of evolution of photoreceptors. In: General physiology of cell specialization, D. Mazia and A. Ty.er, eds., 393 - 425, McGraw-Hill, New York Freeman, James A. « Ben O. Spurtock 1962. A new epoxy embedment for electron microscopy. Journ. Cell Biol. 13: 437 - 443 lateral lobes of the cerebral ganglia of some Ancylidae. Proc. Kon. Ned. Akad. v. Wetensch., Amsterdam, C 61: 235 - 242 Liver, J.. H. H. Borr, R. J. Tu. Durven, J. J. LAMMENS & J. WaATTEL 1959. Some observations on follicle glands in pulmonates. Proc. Kon. Ned. Akad. v. Wetensch., Amsterdam, C 62: 139 to 144 Luver, J. & J. Joosse 1961. | On the influence of the salt content of the medium on soe special neurosecretory cells in the lateral lobes of the cerebral ganglia of Lymnaea stagnalis. Proc. Kon. Ned. Akad. v. Wetensch., Amsterdam, C 64: 630 - 639 Nisuioxa, Ricuarp S., Irvine R. Hacaporn « Howarp A. Bern 1962. Ultrastructure of the epistellar body of the octopus. Zeitschr. Zellforsch. 57: 406 - 421 No te, A. 1963. Eine Cerebraldriise bei Heliciden (Gastropoda). Licht- und clektronenoptische Untersuchungen. Gen. Comp. Endo- crinol. 3: 721-722 (abstract) PELSENEER, P. 1901. Etudes sur des Gastéropodes Pulmonés. Roy. Belgique 54: 1 - 76 Mém. Acad. ReyNoLps, Epwarp S. 1963. ‘The use of lead citrate at high pH as an electron-opaque stain in electron microscopy. Journ. Cell Biol. 17: 208 - 212 ROH LIcH, P « L. J. Torox 1963. Die Feinstruktur des Auges der Weinbergschnecke (Helix pomatia L.). Zeitschr. Zellforsch. 60: 348 - 368 SANCHEZ, SIMONE & CoLETTE Borp 1958. Origine des cellules neurosécrétrices chez Helix aspersa Mull. C. R. Acad. Sci. 246: 845 - 847 Van Mot, J.- J. 1960. Etude histologique de la glande céphalique au cours de la croissance chez Arion rufus Linné. Ann. Soc. Roy. Zool. Belgique 91: 45 - 55 Watson, M. L. 1958. Staining of tissue sections for electron microscopy with heavy metals. | Journ. Biophys. Biochem. Cytol. 4: 475 - 478 Wactier, J., M. Pavans pE Ceccatty, M. RicHarpot, B. Buisson « M.-L. Hernanpez 1961. | Note sur les complexes neuro-endocriniens de Gund- lachia sp. (Mollusque Ancylidae). Bull. Mens. Soc. Linn. Lyon 30: 79 - 87 Page 4 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Explanation of Plate 1 Figure 1: Lateral lobe attached to portion of cerebral ganglion. Follicle gland (fg) containing small amount of fuchsinophilic material is outlined by broken line. ca: capsule; cg: cerebral ganglion; Il: lateral lobe. Paraldehyde fuchsin with counterstains. x870. Figure 2: Portion of follicle gland sectioned centrally to show dense concentration of microvilli and cilia projecting into lumen. Two epithelioid cells (ec) with nuclei and three processes of neuron-like cells (nc) are shown. Explanation of Plate 2 Figure 3: Montage of an elongate follicle gland sectioned at the periphery of the lumen (lu). Microvilli and cilia fill the lumen which is divided into two parts in this plane of section. Neuron-like cells and processes (nc) are less dense and contain irregular mitochondria. Some neuron-like cells are located external to the follicle wall and send processes through the capsule into the lumen. Epithelioid cells (ec) have small nuclei and dense cytoplasm. Connec- tive tissue capsule (ca) separates the follicle gland from the lateral lobe. Explanation of: Plate 3 Figure 4: Section through wall of follicle gland. Neuron-like cell processes (nc) contain irregular mitochondria (mn) and less cytoplasmic structure. The epithelioid cell processes (ec) contain many ribosomes and typical mito- chondria (me). Soma of a neuron-like cell, with its nucleus (nx), as indicated by the nature of its mitochondria, is located at the bottom of the figure. Small double-walled cavities (mv) in cell processes presumably represent sec- tions through bases of microvilli. c: cilium. Explanation of Plate 4 Figure 5: Apical part of neuron-like cell processes (nc) with three cilia (c) and basal bodies (bb) are shown. Irre- gular mitochondria (mn) are present in the process. Parts of two epithelioid cells (ec) containing many ribosomes are also shown. me: mitochondrion of epithclioid cell; mv: microvilli; ps: polystyrene particles. Tue VEuicErR, Vol. 7, No. 1 [Nisuioka, SIMPSON, & BERN] Plate 1 Tue VEuicrEr, Vol. 7, No. 1 [NisH1oKa, Simpson, & BERN] Plate 2 Figure 3 r Tue VE.icER, Vol. 7, No. 1 [Nisu10oKaA, Srmmpson, & Bern] Plate 3 Figure 4 i v 7 ' 7 ; _ r = ’ iD ty 3 WV : ‘ = : t : i y r = - a -)» & ¥ ro - ° ; se ‘ : : f i 4 Ci ‘ , , ; ; ; iy By 1 ‘i “ Sw i , i ' t / 4 7 { i} i ¥ i} 4 aN { eee, - = a i i 2 S, i = i i \ on on { ‘ os) ys 2 1 ? 2 Nin ane D coe = One 1 y i 4 1 1 Lae, es: s 1 WD tan eth ro : r 7 >» ee th me pe i i ioe i t i ; oe iy : ao Te - u j i = 1 : ae an mi : : 7 fw r oT) ay ‘ = } \ iM # FA a . x ‘ = ‘ t a = , é = Hay r i 4 : : ie : : 5 i : q ; i = 1 " ser! wy p Mh yy : aia i At Bee ton = ty v : r : 7 A , ; eran \ ' = yi ogy : = 2 2 le " = & im 1 4 7 a ce = 4 = 5 di { z } ) fs i ; t = ' ) 1 L no , ——e, v i x : - = x & ay u ny i By es 5 i nn G Tue VE.icER, Vol. 7, No. 1 [Nisuioka, Simpson, & Bern] Plate 4 . ’ i oY i i ; ie in ¥ iy : AK : . 7” 7 eg ee ‘5 t 5 2! iy “Fe i (i) Ht a ! i es oS ~ — te as v oe, 3 > ¢ * 4 = Yr Av = Y i : ie na 1 i id ve erature ie , re e, Fy fog & ee ’ ry i eH SSSR 5 : : oI om , See. ane. - : i ee) eine iets Ane ee coe: ‘J 4 “* - { ~ a ~ ye Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 5 A New Name for Murex rhyssus DALL, 1919 (Mollusca: Gastropoda) BY WILLIAM K. EMERSON Department of Living Invertebrates American Museum of Natural History Seventy-ninth Street and Central Park West, New York, New York 10024 IN A PAPER in this journal entitled “On the Identity of Murex macropterus DesHAyEs, 1839,” I figured the type specimen and presented a synonymy of a related west American species that was described by Dati (1919) under the name of Murex (Alipurpura) rhyssus (see Emerson, 1964, p. 153, pl. 20, fig. 1). Mrs. Emily H. Vokes of Tulane University has kindly informed me that DaLw’s taxon is preoccupied by ALurex (Pteronotus) rhysus {sic} Tate (1888), a fossil from the Tertiary of Australia. Under the present Code (Article 58, section 6), “Iwo or more species-group names of the same origin and meaning and cited in the same nominal genus or collective group are to be considered homonyms if the only difference in spelling consists of the use of a single or double consonant” (Stott, et al., 1961, pp. 55, 56). I take pleasure in renaming Murex (Ali- purpura) rhyssus Dart (1919) in honor of Mrs. Vokes, who is an avid student of the Muricacea. Pteropurpura (Pteropurpura) vokesae, new name Murex (Pteropurpura) petri Dati, Dati, 1902, PleesAan ove Wear SaiNee Wis icat. nos 122553) Not Murex petri Darr, 1900. Murex (Alipurpura) rhyssus Dat, 1919, vol. 56, p. 332; type locality: off San Pedro, California; type depository: holotype, in the U.S. National Museum, Washington, D. C., cat. no. 160500. Murex (Alipurpura) rhyssa Dati, Otproyp, 1927, p. 9, pl. 30, fig. 1 [figure of holotype]. Murex petri Dati, Oxrproyp, 1927, pl. 28, fig. 7 [copy of Dart (1902), pl. 34, fig. 7]. Not Murex petri Dat, 1900. Pteropurpura (?Pteropurpura) rhyssa (DALL), Emerson, 1964, p. 153, pl. 20, fig. 1 [figure of holo- type] Not Murex (Pteronotus) rhysus TATE, 1888, pp. 95, Jom plait, figs 7. Type locality: Off San Pedro, California by original selection of Dati (1919). Holotype: U.S. National Museum, cat. no. 160500 by original designation of Dati (1919). Remarks: This species has been dredged off the coast of southern California, from San Pedro to San Diego, in depths of 10 to 50 fathoms. Although beach specimens are rarely found, specimens sometimes are found in kelp holdfasts that have been washed ashore. Before proposing a new name for Dall’s taxon, I undertook to determine the biological validity of this species, which approaches some specimens of the Ocene- bra erinaceoides complex, especially the form named Murex californicus by Hinns (1844a). Through the courtesy of Dr. Leo George Hertlein of the California Academy of Sciences and Mr. Emery P. Chace of the San Diego Natural History Museum, I recently examined the large series of specimens representing these taxa that are contained in the collections of these institutions. As a result of this study, I was able to conclude that Dall’s taxon does not represent a northern population of the Ocenebra erinaceotdes complex. In contrast to Pteropur- pura vokesae, which occurs subtidally, O. erinaceoides (VALENCIENNES) occurs commonly in the intertidal zone, ranging along the west coast of Baja California at Scam- mon Lagoon, San Ignacio Lagoon, Santa Maria Bay, and Magdalena Bay and occurs in the upper half of the Gulf of California from Punta Penasco, Sonora and Puerte- citos, Baja California southward to Guaymas, Sonora and Concepcion Bay, Baja California. These distributional patterns suggest that Pteropurpura vokesae is restricted to the subtidal waters of the Californian faunal province, whereas the northern populations of O. erinaceoides are apparently limited to the warm waters of several of the bays in the southern transitional zone of the Californian province and the subtropical to tropical waters of the extreme northern part of the Panamic faunal province. It should be noted in passing that the original descrip- tion of Murex erinaceoides VALENCIENNES (1832, p. 302) is largely undiagnostic, a conclusion reached by CarPENTER (1857 a, p. 527) more than one hundred Page 6 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. | years ago. Although VaLeNciENNES did not illustrate this species, he did compare it with Murex erinaceus Lrynaeus from Europe and gave “Habitat ad portum Acapulco” [Guerrero, Mexico] for the type locality. CarPENTER (1857 b, pp. 170, 172) also pointed out that several of the species described by VALENCIENNES from Acapulco are foreign to Mexican waters, and the descriptions of the species were written nearly thirty years after the collections were made, a factor which might account for additional errors in WALENCIENNES’ report. Inasmuch as specimens answering VALENCIENNES’ description of Murex erinaceoides have not been sub- sequently reported from this section of the Mexican coast, an attempt should be made to locate and determine the identity of the type specimens of this taxon. Murex californicus Hinps (1844a), on the other hand, was figured by Hinps (1844 b) and was cited from “Califor- nia,” presumably Baja California, Mexico. HErTLEIn (1953) briefly discussed the species of the Ocenebra erinaceoides complex and suggested that a subspecific name, O. erinaceoides californica (Hinps), be applied to specimens from Baja California. In recent years, the trivaricate species that form the group of Pteropurpura generally have been placed in the muricid genus Pterynotus (sensu lato). This assignment, however, is not tenable owing to the presence of a pur- puroid operculum in the group of Pteropurpura Jous- SEAUME (Emerson, 1964). For the present time, I pro- pose to recognize Pteropurpura as a polynominate genus in the subfamily Ocenebrinae for several groups of closely related species having three prominent varices (EMERSON, 1960). ADDENDUM I should like to take this opportunity to record a postscript to my recent paper on the identity of Murex macropterus Dresuayes (Emerson, 1964). Dr. A. Myra Keen and Mr. James H. McLean of Stanford University have called my attention to the fact that Brrry (1956, p. 150) gave a historical review of this taxon and stated with reference to Pteropurpura carpenteri (Dax), “It appears not impossible that the oldest name for this species is Murex macropteron [sic| DesHayes.” Dr. Berry’s conclusion apparently was based largely on com- parisons of the Californian shells with drawings in REEVE (1845) and Sowerry (1880), neither of which appears to represent the holotype of Murex macropterus. The original figures of Mf. macropterus (DesHayes, 1841, pl. 38) were copied by Ktener (1843, Murex pl. 32, figs, 2, 2°), Reeve (1845, Murex pl. 27, sp. 123) figured a second specimen, from “the collection of Miss Saul,” Kuster & Koper (1878, Murex pl. 34, figs. 10, 11) illustrated what may represent a_ third specimen. Sowerby (1880, p. 24, Murex pl. 11, fig. 111) gave a poor copy of Reeve’s figure and stated that there was another specimen in the British Museum (Natural His- tory) which is probably the one figured by EMERSON (1964, pl. 19, fig. 3). Tryon (1880, pl. 40, fig. 517) presented a crude copy of REEve’s figure. LITERATURE CITED BERRY, SAMUEL STILLMAN 1956. Mollusca dredged by the Orca off the Santa Barbara Islands, California, in 1951. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci., 46 (5): 150-157; 9 figs. (May 1956) CARPENTER, PuiLip PEARSALL 1857a [1855-1857]. Catalogue of the collection of Mazat- lan shells in the British Museum collected by Frederick Reigen. London; xvi + 552 pp. [July 1855 - June 1857, each part dated at foot of first pagel]. 1857 b. Report on the present state of our knowledge with regard to the Mollusca of the west coast of North America. Rept. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1856: 159 - 368; plts. 6 - 9. Dati, Wittiam HEALEY 1900. A new Murex from California. 14: 37 - 38 1902. _— Illustrations and descriptions of new, or imperfectly known shells, chiefly American, in the U. S. National Museum. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 24: 499 - 566; plts. 27 - 40. 1919. Descriptions of new species of Mollusca from the North Pacific Ocean in the collection of the United States National Museum. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 56: 293 - 371 DrEsHAYES, GERARD PAUL 1841. | Mollusques. plt. 38 and text. The Nautilus Mag. Zool. d’Anat. Comp. et Palaeont.: Emerson, WILuiaM K, 1960. | Remarks on some eastern Pacific muricid gastropods. Amer. Mus. Novitates no. 2009: 15 pp.; 7 figs. 1964. On the identity of Murex macropterus DEsHAYES, 1839 (Mollusca:Gastropoda). The Veliger 6 (3): 151 - 154; plts. 70), Pile (Jan. 1, 1964) HeErt.ein, Leo GrorcE 1953. Ocenebra erinaceoides and allied species. [Abstract] Amer. Malacol. Union Ann. Report for 1953: 28 - 29. Hinps, RicHArRD BRINSLEY 1844 a. Descriptions of new species of Scalaria and Murex, from the collection of Sir Edward Belcher, C. B. Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1843: 124-129 [March, 1844] 1844b. The zoology of the voyage of H. M. S. Sulphur, under the command of Captain Sir Edward Belcher ... during 1836-42. London, Mollusca, 2(1): 1-24; plts. 1-7 [July, 1844] Kiener, L. C. 1843, Spécies général et iconographie des coquilles vivantes, Genre Rocher; 130 pp., 47 plts. Kuster, H. C., «& WitHELM KosELT 1878. Mollusca Gasteropoda Purpuracea. Systematisches Con- chylien-Cabinet. Nuremberg, 3 (2): 1 - 336; pits. 1-77. Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 7 Otxproyp, Ipa SHEPARD 1927. The marine shells of the west coast of North America. Stanford Univ. Publ. Univ. Ser., Geol. Sci., 2 (1): 1 - 297; plts. 1-29; 2 (2): 1 - 304; plts. 30 - 72 REEVE, Lovett Aucustus 1845. | Conchologia Iconica. 1 suppl. plt. SoweErsBy, GrorcE BrETTINGHAM (second of name) 1880. Thesaurus conchyliorum, or monographs of genera of shells. London, 4 (pts. 33, 34), Murex: 1-55; plts. 1 - 24. SToLL, N. R., et al. 1961. ‘International Code of Zoological Nomenclature adopted by the XV International Congress of Zoology. London; xvii + 176 pp. London, 3, Murex: plts. 1 - 36; Tate, RaLpH 1888. The gastropods of the older Tertiary of Australia. (Part 1). Trans. and Proc. and Report, Roy. Soc. South Aus- tralia, for 1886 - 1887, 10: 91-176; plts. i- xiii. Tryon, GrorcE WASHINGTON, JR. 1880. Manual of conchology. Philadelphia, ser. 1, 2, Mu- ricinae, Purpurinae: 1 - 289; plts. 1 - 70 VALENCIENNES, A. 1832. | Coquilles univalves marines de Amérique Equinoxiale. In Humpotnt, FH. A. von, « A. J. A. BonpLAND, Voyage aux régions équinoxiales du Nouveau Continent. Paris, pt. 2, Re- cueil d’observations de zoologie et d’anatomie comparée: 2: 262 - 339; plts. 53 - 57. Western Australian Cowries (Mollusca: Gastropoda) CRAWFORD N. CATE 12719 San Vicente Boulevard, Los Angeles, California (Plate 5; 1 Map) ‘A SEARCH OF PERTINENT LITERATURE reveals that little is known about the distribution of the cowrie fauna of Western Australia. Since MENKE’s report “Mollusks of Nova Hollandia” (1843), most of the studies and research on Australian mollusks has been confined to the south- eastern and Queensland regions. H. EF Ancas worked on this area from 1865 to 1878; JouHN Brazier, from 1872 to 1875; and Cuartes HeEptey, from 1894 to 1908. The work of ANnGAs was restricted principally to the study of cowrie distribution in the area of Port Jackson (Syd- ney); Brazier referred to the western species rather generally, and with incomplete data; HEDLEY seems to have produced the first checklist of Western Australian Cypraea, drawing upon the reports of other authors to compile his list of 34 species. All these lists furnish infor- mation about certain species found at different points in the western area but deal largely in generalities where locality is concerned, and in some instances other data are vague or lacking. During the past three years, with the able assistance of active collectors in the field. I have endeavored to bring the records up to date, compiling a list of verified species and localities, determining when possible the popu- lation centers, and recording other pertinent data not previously published. The present paper is not intended to be an exhaustive treatment of the Cypraeidae of Western Australia but an attempt to furnish as complete a list as possible of the different known forms. These records will be based entirely upon the field work of men known to me personally and upon specimens in my own collection that carry reliable collecting data. From the beginning I have had the enthusiastic assist- ance of one of the most active collectors of Cypraea in Western Australia, Mr. A. R. Whitworth; his help has provided the basic framework for nearly all of the present study. I have also had substantial help from Mr. Ted Crake of Broome, who has contributed generously with specimens, maps, and information on ecology. Locality records for specimens not collected by either Whitworth or Crake have been verified though correspondence with the late B. E. Bardwell of Broome or with other reliable collectors. Some of the records were furnished by Dr. Tom Richert and Mr. Clifton S. Weaver of Honolulu, who collected 29 species of Cypraea at Long Island in Exmouth Gulf while participating in the Davina Expe- DITION in 1960. Special thanks are also due to Dr. E A. Schilder, who very kindly furnished his manuscript list of Western Australian cowrie species as well as his statis- Page 8 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. | we tics for a comparative study of Cypraea caputserpentis reticulum GMELIN, 1791 and C. c. kenyonae SCHILDER & ScHILDER, 1938, two races whose ranges apparently over- lap to a certain extent along a part of Australia’s west coast. Although I originally intended to prepare only a check- list of cowrie species from the Exmouth Gulf area where most of our field work was done, I have more or less been obliged to extend the boundaries of the area studied in order to encompass the natural ranges of the various species; therefore the area covered here is from Cape Leeuwin in the south to Port Darwin in the north, the latter locality having been generally recognized as the northern limit of the Dampierian Region. The actual presence of several species reported from Western Australia is yet unverified. Since this paper deals only with unquestionably reliable records, several given in the literature have been omitted intentionally, pending collection of additional material. They include such species as C'ypraea contaminata SoweERBy, 1832, C. childreni Gray, 1825, C. gangranosa Dittwyn, 1817, C. maculifera ScuivpEerR, 1932, C. mauritiana regina Gmeutn, 1791, C. felina Gmetin, 1791, C. microdon Gray, 1828, C. interrupta Gray, 1824, C. scurra GMELIN, 1791, C. punctata Linnagus, 1771, C. thersites contraria IREDALE, 1935, and C. (Umbilia) armeniaca VeErco, IG, For the most part, Western Australia is a lonely, virgin coastline with scores of islands, reefs, bays, and jutting headlands. The tides along these coasts vary greatly; along the south and southwest coasts diurnal tides pre- dominate, the rise averaging two and a half feet or less — the least tides in all Australia. In the vicinity of the and northwest coasts the tides are mainly of the regular or semi-diurnal type, with a maximum range at Collier Bay of 36 feet — the largest tides in all Australia. These unusual tides unquestionably have some effect on the distribution of molluscan species, and may in part explain the large gap in occurrence of certain cowrie species that would normally be expected to have a continuous range from North West Cape northward, but it would be pre- mature at this time to theorize on the reasons for some of the unexplained problems of this particular fauna. Far more study is needed before an accurate picture may be obtained; the present paper is only a first step toward this goal. Since the long coastline of Western Australia remains largely uninhabited, many of its landmarks and localities are known only by local names not found on any maps. Therefore it became necessary to devise some method of locating many of the collecting stations mentioned; this has been accomplished through an index of the presently accepted place-names, arranged in alphabetical order, each followed by its latitude and longitude bearings. Some of the more important of these have been indicated on the accompanying map. Many of the listings of species in this paper extend the known range for those species considerably. Several represent potential new geographical races, one of which, a nomen nudum, has been given a new name. Another, because of its morphological differences and apparent geographical isolation from its nearest typical form, has been described as a new subspecies. The largest and smallest shells of each species used in this study have been measured with a caliper to within one-tenth millimeter. It can probably be assumed that typical Western Australian examples of those species will vary in size somewhere between the two extremes given. Population densities are indeterminable at this time for some of the species, but perhaps some indication of relative abundance or scarcity may be gleaned from the number of specimens made available to me; this is mentioned under the discussion of each species. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS My thanks are extended to many people for their help. In addition to those already mentioned, I want to express my thanks to Mrs. Emily Reid for adapting a crude drawing into an excellent map; to Dr. Myra Keen for taxonomic advice; to Dr. Rudolf Stohler for translating source material and to Jean Cate whose extensive assist- ance in many ways made this work finally possible. It can well be said that this report would not have been completed without their combined interest and effort. Index of Localities of West Australian Cypraea This list is arranged alphabetically. In the subsequent discussion of the various species, reference is made to these localities by their order numbers only; moreover, the localities are listed there according to the relative abun- dance of the species, i.e., the locality where the species is most common is listed first. S. Lat. E. Long. 1 Abrolhos Islands 28msil4 113°45’ 2 Albany 34°57’ 117°58’ 3 Anson Bay 13°20’ 130°08’ 4 Barrow Island 20°41’ 115°26’ 5 Beagle Bay NS 12224 5aBlack rocks 24°32’ 113°27’ 6 Botany Bay 335) ey 1532 Broome W597 122°14’ 8 Buccaneer Archipelago 16°15’ 12350 9 Bunbury Som 200 WN) hi" 10 Busselton Bake 115°20’ 11 Cable Beach WONG W210)” 12 Cambridge Gulf 14°55’ 128°15/ 13 Cape Bossut 18°42’ WB 7” 14 Cape Cuvier 24°13'30” 113°24’ Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 9 15 Cape Jaubert 16 Cape Leeuwin 17 Cape Leveque 18 Cape Naturaliste 19 Cape Vallaret 20 Carnac Island 21 Carnarvon 22 Carpentaria Gulf 23 Cervantes Island 24 Clifton’s Main Reef 25 Clifton’s Reef, Outer Knob 33°31’05” 25aCollier Bay 26 Cottesloe Island Daley Heads Dampier Archipelago 29 Dampier Island (Reef) 30 Depuch Island 31 Dirk Hartog Island 32 Disaster Bay 33 Dunsborough 34 Eagle Hawk Island 35 Eighty Mile Beach 36 Encounter Bay 37 Entrance Point 38 Esperance 39 Eucla 40 Exmouth Gulf 41 Fort George 42 Fremantle 43 Gantheaume Point 44 Garden Island 45 Geographe Bay 46 Geraldton 47 Gourdon Bay 48 Houtman Rocks (Abrolhos) 49 King Sound 50 Lagrange Bay 51 Lancelin Island 52 Leighton Beach 53 Long Island 54 Low Point 55 Ludlow Beach 56 Monte Bello Islands 57 Nickol Bay S. Lat. E. Long 19°02’ 121°30/30” 34°22’ 115°08’ 16°24’ bay Bom 115°00’ 1Sl0/30/I2 210/307 S20 115°40’ 24°58’ 113°40’ 15°00’ 138°00’ 30°32’ 115°03’ Bom MOD ual om 2403 On 115°24’28” 16°10’ 124°15’ 32°00’ 115°46’ locality unknown; see ALLAN, 1956 20mIon iMGe3 5: 25°24’ 113°04’ 20°38’ 117°42’ 25°45’ 113°00’ GRO: 2B? 33°46’ iiltomO 5. 20°39’ G27 Ie)? Bey 121°00’ Bi) Bhs) 138°42’ 18°01’ 1DD™ Ney 33°40’ IDS gy 31°40’ 128°46’ 22°00’ 114°15’ see Port George 32°04 115°45’ W597 NDDE il? Sy 115°41’ 33°34’ Le SiellO; 28°47’ 114°12’ 18°26’ WD Sy Domoilia 113°45/ 16°50’ W225)" 182357 121°42’ 30°59’ IG rey Bil HS? Sy Desi 114°40’ 17°47’ I DD™ 32°00’ 115°45’ 20°25’ WD Bile 20°40’ IG Say 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 Normanville North West Cape Onslow Old Onslow Peak Island Pelsart Island Point d’Entrecasteaux Point Maud Point Murat 66aPoint Samson 67 68 Point Willunga Port Darwin 69 Port Essington 69aPort George IV 70 Port Hedland 71 72 73 74 1) 76 Ue 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 Port Walcott Price’s Point Quobba Point Recherche Archipelago Riddell Point Robert Point (Mandurah) Roebuck Bay Rottnest Island Rowley Shoals Sandy Point Shark Bay Sorrento Reef Spencer Gulf St. Vincent Gulf Stradbroke Island Sunday Island Swan River 87aThevenard Island 88 89 Torres Strait Troughton Island 89a Turtle Dove Shoal 90 91 92 93 94 Vlaming Head Walcott Inlet Wallaby Islands Ward Reef York Sound S. Lat. E. Long. locality unknown De ATE 114°10’ 21°40’ 1S O77 21°43’ 114°56’ 21°45’ 114°25/ 28°30’ 113°45’ 34°51’ 116°00’ 23°08’ 113°46’ 2497 114°11’ 20°36’ Itsy sy _ locality unknown e280 130°45’ 10°05’ 132°30’ 15250 124°04’ 20° 20’ 1835) 20834 ila 7/ alloy 17°47’ 1221243, Om 24°30! 11326; 34°00’ 122°30’ 18°00’ Ve BD yy 115°43’ 18°05’ D> By 32 OO". les a0, 17°10’40” 118°50’ to 119°40’ Swale roll 25304 113°30’ 31°30’ 115°30’ (approx. ) 33505; Nie 220 34°55" 138° 10’ ie Bey 153297 16°25’ 123 nelle 32°04’ iy Aey Zi Diy 115°00’ 10°00’ 142°30’ 13°04’ 126°09’ 29°04’ 114°52’ 21°48’ 114°07’ 16°22’ 124°30’ 28°27’ 113°40’ ZL gyy Oy 14°55’ 125°07’ Page 10 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 a ~ Darwin 9 ) a \\ 7 BUCCANEER 4, 4 @ ARCH. “ja \ CAPE v., 0 LEVEQUE ~~ *# ROWLEY ee é MC cine aeun NORTHERN \ TERRITORY 20° DAMPIER aE MONTE BELLO |S, ARCH ©Port Hedland VLAMING HEAD ¢ de CAPRICORN, | Jil U5 12 0eeaaaae TROPIG| Se paeeee =) \ WESTERN | \ AUSTRALIA | {args Soule ! AUSTRALIA a8 Geraldton i 30° HOUTMAN *s aa Y ABROLHOS IS. % ae \ SORRENTO REEF \ Perth. Se N OeT BSNS ROTTNEST IS. ¢ Se GARDEN IS. ¢“&Fremantle Nae U Esperance: 7 GEOGRAPHE BAY 3 A ie Oe sais 2. CAPE NATURALISTE— , GREAT Ze CAPE LEEUWIN Meare ib any AUSTRALIAN BIGHT DOD = S LY O C & A WV Ht AS LN lc | Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER annulus, Monetaria ............- 15 GrANGO, WCE gooocc0c000 G00 24 OPES, TNT eossnagandooonoc 24 asellus, Palmadusta ..........5. 17 bistrinotata, Pustularia .......... 12 bizonata, Palmadusta ........... 18 WOKE, LEGIOWGD, Bo0a000000 000000 16 brevidentata, Blasicrura ......... 20 brunnescens, Mauritia ........... 24 cameroni, Blasicrura .........+0+ 19 caputserpentis, Erosaria ......... 13 COINCOLANCWHTGE «0.026% 25> 27 GING. LOMO sooocononnbenaco0G 21 ECT, IBTIOROD sooococacoos00e 16 CHUCEs, JOGO s00b05000000000 13 childreni, Pustularia ............. 8 Ghinensis) Gribraria \..¢.- 4.64 +. 20 cicercula, Pustularia ............. 11 citrinicolor, Erosaria .........+++ 13 clandestina, Palmadusta ......... 17 contaminata, Palmadusta ........ 8 CDMA, lL8EADRGB .cocbo00000000 15 coutunen. Miauritia 2.0265 .0+0. 24 COMME TLONE Sen cherans eins) s oaseechoreie 16 CHICO, GaaonEHO s60c005000000 21 EN UNATICOMETIONEG, bani ees = 6. 16 GECUBICNS ALONG ea icts wis erelsie sialere 66 22 CBORD, OFOSTHUD sa0a00000060056 14 WORKANS, IBIORED so0065000006006 15 eglantina, Mauritia ............. 24 OSD, AONB. Sameera s00e Gone 22 COG, ISGVOSHUB, 50:0000000000000¢ 14 OONDs lEGTOBAE 905000000000000¢ 16 JOB, SIPVOVOGE .oieoob0000000¢ 12 CyPRAEIDAE Nariinae Pustularia Swainson, 1840 (Pustularia Swainson, 1840) 1. Pustularia (P) cicercula cicercula (Linnarus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 725 Localities 90, 59 Weaver (1960): 53 Index of Species and Subspecies HUGO NCATE sx000an0n0en0KC 21 CU RALMAdUsta neice erie 8 fimbriata, Palmadusta ........... 18 GIL, TAG ano nanbaodoan soon 23 gangranosa, Erosaria ............ 8 GlobulussPustularia’ yee. se: 12 Oraciis wh almadustay a rleiyy.elel-\- « 18 hammondae, Palmadusta ....... 18 helvolawhiosariameeenieeeeen ten 13 hillili, JRA ROIS 5600000000060 18 hinundo, Blasicrura meee cee eee 19 ITI, MICRTBHE Go000000000nb00 25 interrupta, Blasicrura ........... 8 iaella, LWA soopaeoadconcnoKc 24 KEnVONde ETOSATIG ‘ole lcla\ele lei eieiclole 13 labrolineata, Erosaria .........+. 12 limacina, Staphylaea ........... 12 lutea, Palmadusta ............0. 18 sii, (OYWCED, co660000500000006 26 maculifera, Mauritia ........... 8 Re (AGUS e00000000000000 23 mauritiana, Mauritia ........... 8 microdon, Palmadusta .......... 8 RAMOS LEGOTHIO ss400000000000c 14 moneta, Monetaria ...........4. 15 nucleus, Staphylaea ............. 12 OOO IBOLER sse0c000b0800000 16 pallidulamBlasverura r-rel 19 (EONS, (SHRUB 0660060040000 26 perconfusa, Mauritia ........... 24 (DOE, !VOLGIE oo 5000060000006 14 (RODD IHGOWAB 00006006000000008 16 pulicaria, Notocypraea .......... 17 punctata, Palmadusta ........... 8 purissima, Erosaria ......+.++05+ 14 pyriformis, Erronéea ........++0+- 15 quadrimaculata, Blasicrura....... 19 ATID, (WOW, poooane 600000000 26 regina, Mauritia ........+++++++- 8 reticulum, Erosaria ...........-. 13 rhomboides, Monetaria .......... 15 Onna lh, TAWA so00c0ncbe0d0G0000 22 UND, JEU so da0d9u0b0000000 24 SaulaemPalmadustay spies jeri eles 17 QA, MICE So60cd000000000 8 SiMmuUlanS WDIGSIGTIU OM Peierls 19 SUA, JETODAD o>o0005000000000C 15 GORA TGIS, (AHI Gac00050000000 22 sowerbyana, Erronea ........... 16 staphylaea, Staphylaea .......... 12 GahGla, JMAGGLUIB 0o000000000060 20 SUDUINIAIS WE TTONEA ren eile eiee 15 tal paral partamsactt-\triey iter 24 UGS (Glo. oo c0 0000000000000 20 thersiteswZ01l Gee 8 BAB, IMASICHUTD. 2600600000000C 19 tigrisnGy praca ttre seie ce 26 UnSCLLUSSPBIGSICTIUT een tence 19 Wp A, GNVQ b000000n0000006 26 COMING, OUD, Eoco00b000000000C 22 VETCOLN/O1l OR ee oe 23 DERG COUR?, JEGGSTHUB, oc0000000000 13 GUANIG, (GYHETE. Beebaccaccouedd 26 DAN CT, IEMTORAD cogss000000000c 15 westralis, Mauntian ese: 25 whitworthi, Cribraria ........... 20 wilhelmina, Enosa7ia 2... 14 BYCW 6, INDIGO oo00000600000C 18 the Weaver (1960) report represents the first mention of the species in Western Australia. IREDALE (1939) stated “I recorded Pustularia cicercula and P. globulus from Queensland, the latter only from Western Australia.” ALLAN (1956) cited northern Australia. The western shells seem to compare favorably with the morphology of the typical species. The dorsal pustulation and general appearance agree, although the shell is gener- ally somewhat larger and more globular; the basal denti- L W H lip col’ Largest shell: WSO) SS) 20) BG DP Smallest shell: WO WS NO De} De 2 ee ae = Two shells were examined that were picked up in the 2 am beach drift in the immediate area below the Vlaming oa ms Head lighthouse. As far as I have been able to determine, tion extends deeply into the margins; the fossula is * L = length of sheil, in millimeters W = width of shell, in millimeters height of shell, in millimeters number of teeth on outer lip number of teeth on columella, excluding terminal ridge Page 12 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 shallower and less concave though more heavily ribbed with teeth. Possibly the Pustularia bistrinotata SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1937, reported by authors is a mistaken identification of this species. 2. Pustularia (P) globulus globulus (Linnatus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 725 Localities 14, 73 IREDALE (1939), ALLAN (1956) : Western Australia Scuitper (1941): 7, 12, 79 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: Tog Boll ol AS us Smallest shell: 1® BO 7.2 29 ie Two shells were examined, both collected after a storm, washed up with beach rubble. This species is rare in West Australian waters. The western shells are small for the species and compare favorably with those from the Sey- chelle Islands; the eastern Pustularia globulus attains nearly twice this size. An additional dead specimen was taken on the beach at Quobba Point. At present, nothing further is known about its distribution on the west coast of Australia. Staphylaea JoUSSEAUME, 1884 (Staphylaea JousSEAUME, 1884) 3. Staphylaea (S.) staphylaea (Linnaeus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 725 Localities 40, 59, 90, 77 Corton (1950): 43 (B. E. Bardwell) Scuitper (1941): 88 (as. S. descripta IREDALE, 1935) Arran (1956): 48 Weaver (1960): 53 L W H lip col Largest shell: NS) WO. B33 Bil Be Smallest shell: IS jl - O 20) le Five shells were examined. The Dampierian shells seem to be generally smaller though apparently typical of the species. The aperture is narrower than that of Staphylaea staphylaea descripta and the shell more compact in form. 4. Staphylaea (S.) limacina facifer (IREDALE, 1935) Austral. Zool., 8 (2): 119; plt. 8, fig. 6 Localities 40, 48, 90, 59, 7 SCHILDER (1941) : 88 : L WwW Ey lipymcol Largest shell: WS 10.8 2 19) 5 Smallest shell: Ise 2 Of} - 2D 8 Three shells were examined. The species is fairly com- mon; the center of distribution for this subspecies appears to be from the southern shore of Exmouth Gulf to Viaming Head, an extreme extension of range for the subspecies which is apparently living in this area as an isolated geographical group. The shells are conspicuous because of their smaller size in comparison with the other races. (Nuclearia JouSSEAUME, 1884) 5. Staphylaea (N.) nucleus nucleus (LinNaEus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 724 Localities 40, 93 Weaver (1960): 53 L W H lip col 10 aS One shell was examined. So far as it is now known the species is rare. A single dead bleached and beach-worn specimen was collected at Point Murat in Exmouth Gulf. Although subfossil, the shell is sufficiently well preserved to exhibit the species’ typical morphological characters, including the yellow-buff color above the terminal open- ings. The shell appears more bulbously inflated than any of the other subspecies studied; the teeth are fewer, and considerably shorter on the base as well. This is an extreme extension of range for the species, which was apparently first recorded from Western Australia by WEavER (1960), from beach drift at nearby Long Island. Whitworth has also reported a third dead specimen collected at Ward Reef. Shell measurements: 22.7 Erosaria TRoscHeEL, 1863 (Ravitrona IREDALE, 1930) 6. Erosaria (R.) labrolineata labrolineata (Gasxorn, 1849) Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1848: 97 (13 March, 1849) Localities 90, 59, 40 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: IQS) ALG) fe} Nfs} iN Smallest shell: IO SH ey IG iil Five shells were examined, two from Vlaming Head and three from Exmouth Gulf. Although it would consti- tute a long range extension, I have grouped these shells with those of the nominate subspecies after comparing them with Evosaria labrolineata nashi IREDALE, 1931. The Dampierian shells are narrower; the lateral edge of the right margin is more sharply angled yet less pronounced; the teeth are finer, particularly on the base and do not cross the fossula as they do in the E. J. nashi of eastern Australia; the lateral spots are also more numerous, Wolsey Nol 7. Erosaria (R.) cernica viridicolor (Cate, 1962) The Veliger 4 (4): 175; plt. 40, figs. 1-9 Localities 73, 90, 59, 40, 62, 42, 5a, 87a, 89a L WwW H lip col Largest shell: RD 18 WR 20) iy Smallest shell : 16O 100 Bil We 1s Forty-one shells were examined. The subspecies appears to be common at only one station, as far as we have been able to determine; this is just below the lighthouse at Vlaming Head, which is the type locality. Shells were also collected in Exmouth Gulf, to Point Murat. It has been collected by Barry Wilson in 70 feet of water, under stones, off Peak Island. A dead specimen was found on the beach near Fremantle, also by Mr. Wilson (personal communication) . 8. Erosaria (R.) helvola citrinicolor TREDALE, 1935 Austral. Zool., 8 (2): 116 Localities 40, 90, 59, 18, 46, 31, 49, 7 Hepiry (1915) ex Brazier, 1882: 79 TREDALE (1939): 31, 81 SCHILDER (1941) : 45, 42, 87, 81, 46, 21, 68 STEADMAN & Corton (1946) : Northwest Australia ALLAN (1956): Western Australia Weaver (1960): 53 L W H lip col Largest shell: DO 129 OS Ws Ta Smallest shell: NGS) NO) tS) alt} Twenty-eight shells were examined. Although this sub- species is widely distributed along the western coast, it cannot be classed as common. Exmouth Gulf proved to be the most productive among the localities cited above. Six shells were collected at Broome, Roebuck Bay over a two-month period; none have been seen since that time. Brazier (1882) erroneously referred to this form from Rowley Shoals as Cypraea citrina Gray, 1824, confusing it with the distinct east African species. According to ALLAN (1956), Corron has examined series of these shells from Cottesloe and Rottnest Island which he con- sidered typical of Erosaria helvola helvola (LINNAEUS, 1758). A specimen from Leighton, however, was con- sidered by him to be typical of IREDA1E’s subspecies. 9. Erosaria (R.) caputserpentis reticulum (GMELIN, 1791) Syst. Nat., Ed. 13, p. 3407 Localities 90, 59, 40, 73, 7, 43, 11, 5, 17 Kenyon (1898), IRepare (1935), and ALLAN (1956) : Western Australia TREDALE (1914): 56 Hepiey (1915); 44 (ex Menke, 1843); Verco, 1914) 46 (ex THE VELIGER Page 13 Scuiiper (1941): 7, 12, 79 Corton (1950): 40 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: ED 5, Oma 1 Smallest shell: BLP PRgo ae — ley, 1 ~ Seventy-two shells were examined. This common species ranges generally from south of Cape Naturaliste to Cape Leveque. It seems to possess interesting morphological differences at opposite ends of its range; certain physical aspects become sufficiently altered to divide the species into two distinct allopatric races. The area of Exmouth Gulf to Shark Bay seems to be the middle ground where examples of both forms may be found mingling and living together as individuals, yet at the same time intergrading variants are also present. The two subspecies involved are Erosaria caputserpentis reticulum (GmEuin) and E. c. kenyonae SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938. Dr. Schilder has very kindly given me permission to quote from his reply to a letter of mine: “Since 1938 I have examined far more specimens which alter our views in some respects: ken- yonae is a race which exhibits no geographical exact limits separating its populations from those of caputserpentis (reticulum) but it is a so called “cline”: the populations gradually pass from pure caputserpentis in the tropics to pure kenyonae, which seems restricted to southwest Aus- tralia, between Abrolhos Archipelago to Pallinup and C. Entrecasteaux on the south coast. In northwest Australia from Broome to Shark Bay the populations exhibit an increasing number of extreme shells which agree in all characters with the true kenyonae, while true caputser- pentis become gradually less frequent, mostly replaced by intermediates in one or the other respect. One cannot say that the two “races” are living together, as there is one population with a range of variation from caputserpentis to kenyonae, so that it may be called intermediate. These intermediate populations show increasing influence of the warm caputserpentis and the cold kenyonae, according to its habitat further north or south. On the east coast of Aus- tralia from Torres Strait to. Sydney there is a similar passing of C. caputserpentis argentata DAUTZENBERG - Bouce, 1933 into C. caputserpentis caputanguis PHILIPPI, 1849.” The base of these shells is relatively flat; the terminals are greyish-blue, the base a pastel variation of yellow- orange, beige and white; the teeth are finer, more delicate, and are white; the interstices and more of the base are white as well. 10. Erosaria (R.) caputserpentis kenyonae SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938 Proc. Malac. Soc. London, 23 (3): 136; diel: @B 1/1, 31 P Localities 40, 90, 59, 73, 7 Page 14 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No, 1 Cotton (1950) : 52, 26, 78 ALLAN (1956): Western Australia Weaver (1960): 53 L W H lip col Largest shell: TES PE PP 1) 14 Smallest shell: 223) M49] A220 ome2 Twenty-eight shells were examined. This common sub- species merges with Erosaria caputserpentis reticulum (GmeEuin, 1791) in Roebuck Bay, becoming increasingly isolated southward from Quobba Point to Cape Natural- iste (see preceding subspecies, E. c. reticulum). This subspecies may easily be identified by its more swollen base; the teeth are white and much larger and heavier; most of the base, the interstices, and the terminals are brown. As a standard for separating these shells from Erosaria caputserpentis reticulum, it may be said that any trace of brown in the interstices would align the shell with E. c. kenyonac. (Erosaria TROSCHEL, 1863) 11. Erosaria (E.) poraria poraria (Linnaeus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 724 Localities 40, 90, 59 SCHILDER & SCHILDER (1938 - 39): Australia. Northwest L W lal Ihis) Goll lime Irae IG IDI “OH Bil 15 Smallest shell: Me eles I}. Five shells were examined. This species is rather uncom- mon and, as far as we have been able to determine, is not plentiful anywhere along the west coast. Kenyon (1879) published the new name Cypraea wilhelmina for a small pallid shell that both IREDALE (1939) and ALLAN (1956) suspect is a dead specimen approaching Erosaria poraria. Bernard C. Cotton (personal communication) says his conclusion agrees with that of IREpALE in which E. wil- helmina is a pale variant of E. poraria. The holotype of the Kenyon species is in the South Australian Museum, No. D 14447. Mrs. Kenyon stated that she had four other specimens very similar to the type. The shells from the North West Cape and Exmouth Gulf seem to be gener- ally smaller than the northern and far western races, although there is an occasional large specimen. The dorsum is a deep, lustrous brownish-yellow flecked with a thick concentration of white spots, some of which appear to be ocellated with a darker brown ring. The margins are thickened, the right one being pitted. The base and margins are a decp, rich, intense lavender color, the teeth and interstices are white. 12. Erosaria (E.) erosa purissima (VREDENBURG, 1919) Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 15: 143 Localities 7, 37 to 11, 40 IREDALE (1914): 56 Heptey (1915): 56 (ex IrEpate, 1914) IREDALE (1935): 40, 71, 29 Weaver (1960): 53 L Ww H lip col Largest shell: 46.9 27.5 20.0 20 15 Smallest shell: 36:8 22:2) lesen Twelve shells were examined. The species is fairly com- mon. Although this species seems to be living in a restric- ted geographical area, it compares very favorably with the eastern Australian shells and is considered conspecific, pending further study. Evosaria erosa phagedaina (MEL- vitt, 1888), of Cocos Island, should also be compared with these, as it also closely resembles the Dampierian form. 13. Erosaria (E.) miliaris diversa (Kenyon, 1902) Journ. Conch. 10: 184 Localities 40, 7, 11 Kenyon (1902): Shark Bay, West Australia L W H lip col Largest shell: 408 25:2) 20422 ts Smallest shell: 33-5 23:2) 1/7iGtOmalS Seven shells were examined. The subspecies is most common at Broome and Cable Beach; the specimens listed above were both from the latter beach. IREDALE (1935) gave the name Evosaria metavona to the Queensland race of E. miliaris. Later (1939), he examined a specimen from Shark Bay and compared it with E. metavona but agreed it was more pinched anteriorly and more elevated than that species. He further mentioned that the Kenyon type was a dead shell and its coloration indistinguishable. It is not clear why IrREDALE questioned the species. Aside from the characteristic features of the shell, Mrs. Kenyon evidently was aware of what species she was working with, for she concluded her discussion with “TI think the disco- very of this variety (Shark Bay, West Australia) proves the complete separation of the two species C’. eburnea and C. miliaris.” Further, it is difficult to understand why ScHILDER & SCHILDER (1938 - 39, 1941) used, for an east Australian race whose range is from northeast Australia to Port Moresby, the name Kenyon proposed for these Dampicrian shells. The Exmouth Gulf shells are of a fairly large size, a yellow-buff dorsal coloring, thickly covered with small white spots of various sizes; both thickened upswept mar- gins are pitted and are white, as are the base, teeth, and Vol. 7; No. 1 interstices. The teeth are sharply pointed on the lip. A grcy mantle line traverses the upper right dorsum. Monetaria TroscHet, 1863 (Ornamentaria SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1936) 14. Monetaria (O.) annulus annulus (Linnaeus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 723 Localities 7, 11 Heprey (1915) (ex Menke, 1843) IREDALE (1935): Western Australia SCHILDER (1941): 7, 12, 79 ALLAN (1956): Dampierian Region L W H lip col Largest shell: ZO) ss) W200) IG) Smallest shell: ALY WG. wOss 13 Til Four shells were examined. It is a common species, known to range from Quobba Point to Cape Leveque, intertidally. (Monetaria TroscuHet, 1863) 15. Monetaria (M.) moneta rhomboides SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1933 Zool. Meded. Leiden, 16: 163 Localities 40, 90, 59, 7, 43 Hepiey (1915) (ex Menke, 1843): West Austra- lia IrEDALE (1914): 56 SCHILDER (1941): 40, 71, 29 ALLAN (1956): Dampierian Region Weaver (1960): 53 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: ae? SO) B28) 3 iil Smallest shell: Isis) Ld QO 5183 Eight shells were examined. This species is fairly com- mon from Quobba Point to Cape Leveque. There is considerable variation in size. The color ranges from a pale yellow-grey-green almost to a deep yellow-orange. A large percentage of specimens shows a fine, bright orange dorsal ring. However, it is not, because of this, to be confused with Monetaria annulus (Linnagus, 1758), as it in no way otherwise approaches the appearance of this latter species. Erronea TroscHE., 1863 (Adusta JoussraumE, 1884) 16. Erronea (A.) subviridis dorsalis SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938 Proc. Malac. Soc. London, 23 (3): 149 Localities 40, 90, 59, 48, 7, 11, 50, 13 Heprey (1915) (ex Brazirr, 1879) : 57, 30 IREDALE (1939): Western Australia ScHiLper (1941): 7, 12, 79, 40, 71, 68, 69, 22 THE VELIGER Page 15 Attan (1956): Western Australia, 7, Northern Australia L WwW H lip col Largest shell: BHO) | Py wily ale) ils Smallest shell: DD N20) OLS 3) Forty-two shells were examined. The species is common at all stations. IrEpALE (1935) compares this Western Australian form to Cypraea viridis Rerve, 1835, which was described without locality. SrEADMAN & COTTON (1946) did not recognize Erronea subviridis dorsalis, pre- ferring to list it as E. subviridis subviridis (RrEve, 1835). Atian (1956), having seen many of the western shells, agrees with the Schilderian name. The finely punctate dorsum with its large central chestnut blotch separates this subspecies from the other two races characterized by interrupted grey dorsal zones. The Lagrange Bay shell was collected on the beach 12 miles south of Cape Bossut. The Abrolhos specimen was taken in a craypot, in from five to six fathoms, at North Island. All the shells exam- ined in this study were collected between there and Cable Beach. This species seems equally adaptable to both intertidal and deep water habitats, down to at least 10 fathoms. 17. Erronea (A.) pyriformis smithi (SowErRBy, 1881) Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1881: 638 Localities 17, 32, 49, 59, 5 TREDALE (1935): West Australia ScHILDER (1941): 7, 12, 79, 68, 69, 22 STEADMAN & Cotton (1946): North West Aus- tralia ALLAN (1956): 50 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: PAM IG.) EIT 7 il Smallest shell: Ne WAKO) © “Ges Nfs" 11) Seven shells were examined. The species is uncommon. The general appearance of these shells — which are noticeably small for the species — is short, wide, and abruptly pyriform; lacking on many of the shells, espe- cially on those from Disaster Bay, is the characteristic brown interrupted dorsal color banding. The brown color- ing of the teeth is usually paler, also. In so far as this short series of shells shows, it would seem that SowERBY’S Erronea pyriformis smithi is reasonably easily separable from the east Australian race, E. pyriformis pyriformis (Gray, 1824) morphologically and geographically. 18. Erronea (A.) walkeri continens (IREDALE, 1935) Austral. Zool., 8 (2): 127 Localities 7, 37, 43 to 11 SCHILDER (1941): 22, 88 STEADMAN & Corton (1946): 69 ALLAN (1956): 69 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Page 16 L W H lip col Largest shell: 205A O24 eel Smallest shell: PO) AZ WOM Ww ily Nine shells were examined. This species is scarce although not rare in Western Australia. At Broome these mollusks were found moving across exposed, bare sand flats more than a half mile from the nearest cover. They seem to be essentially sand-dwelling cowries, not found on rocks. They are apt to occur on a muddy, sandy substrate where a sparse weed growth is present, taking cover in and under pieces of dead shell and old iron. (Erronea sub- viridis dorsalis SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938 is another species found out in the open in the same way.) A pair of E. walkeri continens was observed sharing the same half- valve of a discarded oyster shell. (Erronea TrRoscHEL, 1863) 19. Erronea (E.) ovum ovum (GMELIN, 1791) Syst. Nat., Ed. 13, p. 3412 Locality 4 Scuitper (1941): 7, 12, 79 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: Ae} MSO. N25 {5} 15) Smallest shell: Wee My GG) > 118} 18) Four shells were examined. These specimens are from the B. E. Bardwell (Broome) Collection, and are said to have been collected by pearl luggers about 1922. We know of no recent occurrence of this species in Western Australia, and it therefore must be considered a rare species there. The dorsal coloring in these shells appears to be a much lighter greyish-green than is normally ob- served in the eastern races. WeaAveER (1960) reported collecting “Cypraea ovum” from Long Island at the north end of Exmouth Gulf, but these shells have subsequently been identified as Ovula ovum (Linnagus, 1758) (personal communication). 20. Erronea (E.) errones coxi (Brazier, 1872) Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1872: 617 Localities 40, 90, 59, 7, 11, 68, 17 Heptey (1915) (ex Menxe, 1843), IREDALE (1939), SteapMAN & Corton (1946): Western Australia Scuitper (1941): 40 (E. coxi), 71, 28 Atitan (1956): Dampierian Region, 7, Western Australia Weaver (1960): 53 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: BO ty Wis vas Smallest shell: PASO) ANS s) Mes) aly 1G Eighteen shells were examined. This is a common species in northwestern Australia. It has been the subject of some taxonomic controversy; IREDALE (1939) raised this subspecies to full specific rank, giving it the name Erronea magerrones magerrones and established the Dampierian form as a race, E. magerrones proba. They are doubtfully distinct from E. errones errones (LINNAE- us, 1758). The western form E. e. coxi is a good geo- graphical race. The type locality is Broome. 21. Erronea (E.) cylindrica sowerbyana ScutLpeEr, 1932 Foss. Cat., Cypraeacea: 192 Localities 40, 90, 59, 60, 7, 43, 11, 68, 17 HeEptey (1915): 79 (ex Brazier, 1882) IREDALE (1935), STEADMAN & CoTTon (1946): North West Australia ScHILDER (1941): 7, 12, 79, 40, 71, 28 WEAVER (1960): 53 ALLAN (1956): Western Australia L W H lip col Largest shell: 32'8) 167 SIGs Smallest shell: 25.0 12:9 OS Sales Twenty-seven shells were examined. It is a common form at most localities. The measurements above were taken from Roebuck Bay shells; Exmouth Gulf specimens seem to average smaller. 22. Erronea (E.) caurica blaesa IrEDALE, 1939 ’ Austral. Zool., 9 (3): 322 Localities 40, 90, 59, 7, 11, 73, 17 Heprey (1915)(ex Menxe, 1843): West Aus- tralia TREDALE (1935, 1939): West Australia; (1914): 48 ScHILper (1941): 40, 71, 28 STEADMAN & Cotton (1946) : Northwest Australia A.ian (1956): 7, West Australia L W H lip col Largest shell: 46.0 259 208 20 19 Smallest shell: 36.6 204 163 16 14 Twenty-six shells were examined. This subspecies seems to be more common in that part of its range from Quobba Point to Exmouth Gulf. A collector in Broome, the type locality, reports, “you find the odd one of these alive, far more are dead on the beaches than anywhere else.” The western shells are generally large for the species, and apparently of only moderately common occurrence throughout its known range, Quobba Point to Cape Le- veque, Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 17 (Guttacypraea IrEDALE, 1935) Notocypraea ScHILDER, 1927 23. Notocypraea (G.) pulicaria (REEveE, 1846) Conch. Icon., vol. 3, Cypraea, fig. 84 Localities 18, 10, 45, Southwest Australia Hepiey (1915) (ex Hiparco, 1907): 45 IREDALE (1935): West Australia ScHILDER (1941): 45, 42, 87 STEADMAN & Cotton (1946): Western Austra- lia ALLAN (1956): Western Australia, 52 L Ww H lip col Lace cleo) 9 BLOM IOP OONa ey Smallest shell: IG.2° QB U4 2B Zh Twelve shells were examined. This species is uncommon to rare, and although occasionally collected intertidally, it is more commonly dredged from deeper water. The range seems to extend southward from the area of Swan River in the west to Eucla in South Australia. Palmadusta IrEDALE, 1930 (Palmadusta IrREDALE, 1930) 24. Palmadusta (P.) asellus asellus (LinNaEus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 722 Localities 40,90, 59, 65, 61, 7 Corton (1950): North West Australia (B. FE. Bardwell, Broome) ALLAN (1956): repeats Corton, 1950 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: IBS “ill “BR We - Smallest shell: 17/0) 10.5 89 IG 3 Three shells were examined, one subadult. Two were collected at Broome, the third off Old Onslow Beach. Specimens from the other localities listed are in the Whit- worth Collection or have, from time to time, been ob- served in subfossil form in beachdrift. The three above mentioned shells were all collected by Mr. Bardwell. One was received directly from him, the other two from the collection of R. Sharon, Redondo Beach, California. There seems little doubt the species is rare and obviously needs further investigation. 25. Palmadusta (PR) clandestina clandestina (Linnaeus, 1767) Syst. Nat., Ed. 12, p. 1177 Localities 90, 59, 40,77, 49, 17 Aian (1956): 7 Weaver (1960): 53 L W H lip col Largest shell: ~ BO 137 iO 2 1G Smallest shell: IB OG ae} 15} Twenty-one shells were examined. The species is com- mon and ranges from Quobba Point to Cape Leveque. Some authors place this group with the subspecies Palm- adusta clandestina moniliaris (LAMARcK, 1810); how- ever, it seems to be more closely allied with the nominate subspecies from Ceylon. The Exmouth Gulf shells are often large in size, comparing favorably with the east African P clandestina passerina (MeEtviti, 1888) in this respect. 26. Palmadusta (P.) saulae saulae (Gasxot1n, 1843) Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1843: 23 Locality 7 L W H lip col Shell measurements: — AO: WP tly BP 7 One shell examined; very rare. This specimen was collected alive by Mr. Ted Crake, Broome, and is possibly the first example of this species reported from Western Australia. Because it is apparently a unique specimen with an unusual locality record, it scems to deserve special mention here. It differs some- what in outward appearance from Palmadusta saulae sau- lac (Gaskotn) from the Philippines, and even its most closely related race, P saulae nugata IREDALE, 1935, is markedly different. The Dampierian shell is large and broad, narrowing quickly abapically. At best it seems to relate more favor- ably with the northern (Gasxoin) race (L 26.8: W 14.9; H 12.3; lip 20; col. 17; Cate Coll. 1048; see Cate, 1960). It is bulbously ovate, umbilicate; teeth are short, well defined on the outer lip, intermittently so on the columella but extending across the fossula. The front and rear terminals are noticeably rostrate; the right margin is thick, the left side is uncallused and curves smoothly from dorsum to base; the primary shell color is pearl-grey, with a very large central brown dorsal blotch that covers at least 20 per cent of the upper surface; the remaining area is thickly sprinkled with minute brown dots, the margins are copiously flecked with larger brown spots, and in addition there is a brown spire blotch. For the most part the base is devoid of spots, is of a lighter basic grey color, as are the teeth. The terminal openings, colu- mella, fossula, and interstices are bright orange-yellow. Yhe animal’s foot and mantle are brilliant orange, marked with fawn-colored spots. ‘Vhe animal was collected in mid-December 1962 and was found high up in a very small tide pool filled with about four feet of water during a neap tide. Mr. Crake relates, “There was one rock I could turn in the pool, and it was quite small. Underneath was a beautiful Cypraea fallax and right along side was the C. saulae, both with mantles up.” Page 18 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 27. Palmadusta (P) lutea bizonata IrEDALE, 1935 Austral. Zool., 8 (2): 126 Cypraea lutea GMELIN, 1791 Syst. Nat., Ed. 13, p. 3414 (non C. lutea Gronovius, 1781 of authors[non binominal] ) Zoophyl. Gronoviani, 3: 287, pl. 19, fig. 17 Localities 90, 59, 40, 43, 17,7 Hepiey (1915): 57 (ex Brazier, 1872) IREDALE (1935): North West Australia (57) SCHILDER (1941): 81, 21, 46, 40, 71, 28 L W H lip col Largest shell: We NOL eka IS) 7) Smallest shell: ey Sh I Three shells were examined. The species is uncommon. The report from Broome is that only an occasional shell is ever found, which is true for the other stations as well. 28. Palmadusta (P) ziczac ziczac (Linnaeus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 722 Localities: 90, 59, 66 WeavER (1960): 53 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: LOO SMS S920 Smallest shell: Wee QO) Wik 8 1G Nine shells were examined. The species is uncommon. All shells were collected dead in the beach drift. Though beach-rolled, the shell color and markings were well pre- served. The Vlaming Head shells appear to be narrower, somewhat longer than the shells of the other races, and to have a narrower, straighter ventral aperture. (Melicerona IREDALE, 1930) 29. Palmadusta (M.) gracilis hilda (IREDALE, 1939) Austral. Zool., 9 (3): 312 Localities 21, 40, 7 ScHILDER (1941): 81, 46, 21, 68, 69, 22 STEADMAN & Cotton (1946): 81 Corton (1950): 77 (B. E. Bardwell) ALLAN (1956) : 81, 77 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: 104 eS aaa Smallest shell: UO oe Ons ata. Twenty-three shells were examined. At Broome, only an occasional living specimen is collected; however, many dead shells can be picked up on the beach in the proximity of Lighthouse Point. The species is fairly common and ranges from Shark Bay to Cape Leveque. ScHILDER & SCHILDER (1938-39) taxonomically combined these west- ern shells with the southeast Australian (Botany Bay) Palmadusta gracilis macula (Ancas, 1867) but did not speculate that they might be racially distinct. IREDALE (1939) separated them but elevated P macula to full spe- cific status, considering this Dampierian form new to science. Believing that P macula did not belong in the sub- genus Melicerona IREDALE, 1930, he established a new subgenus, Cupinota, with P macula as its type. After com- paring series of P macula with similar series of P. gracilis gracilis (Gasxotn, 1849) I consider it unnecessary to make this taxonomic change; therefore I have retained the combination Palmadusta (Melicerona) gracilis hilda (IREDALE, 1939), the type locality of which is Shark Bay. 30. Palmadusta (M.) fimbriata fimbriata (GmeEtIn, 1791) Syst. Nat., Ed. 13, p. 3420 Localities 90, 59, 40, 57, 5 Weaver (1960): 53 L W H lip col Largest shell: 114 (66) So 2S wie Smallest shell: 10:8 6.5 | SilelisaalG Three shells were examined. The species is uncommon. The shells studied were collected approximately midway between Vlaming Head and Point Murat. Other speci- mens are known to have been collected deeper in the recesses of Exmouth Gulf. Shells from Nickol Bay and Beagle Bay are in the Whitworth Collection (Geraldton). - 31. Palmadusta (M.) hammondae (TrEDALE, 1939) Austral. Zool., 9 (3): 312; plt. 28, figs. 19 - 22 Localities 75, 7 STEADMAN & Cotton (1946): Clarence River, N.S. W. IREDALE (1939): Yirrkala, Northern Territory; Woolgoola, N. S. W. ALLAN (1956): Type locality, Clarence River Heads, N. S. W. L W H lip col Largest shell: 166 96 8.0 16 16 Smallest shell: 14:0) 757 6:2" SiG ies Five shells were examined, four from Broome, Roebuck Bay and one from Stradbroke Island, Moreton Bay, south-eastern Queensland. This is a relatively new species, closely related to the Palmadusta fimbriata complex of allopatric races, having, among other similar characteris- tics, the pale lavender terminals common to this group. As far as we know at the present time the species is uncommon and apparently occupies an unusually wide range. The type locality is given as Clarence River Heads, Northern New South Wales. Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 19 (Blasicrura TREDALE, 1930) 32. Blasicrura (B.) quadrimaculata thielei SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938 Proc. Malac. Soc. London, 23 (3): 164 Localities 43, 86, 7, 17, 72, 89 ScHILDER (1941) : 7, 12, 79 Corton (1950): 77 (B. E. Bardwell, Broomc) ALLAN (1956): 7 L W H lip col Largest shell: BO 130. M12 Wy Ty Smallest shell: Ie\fs} OS) BS) 113} 1S} Ten shells were examined, eight from Sunday Island, King Sound and two from Gantheaume Point, Roebuck Bay. The northern shells are larger and more greenish. The Gantheaume Point shells are both about equal in size, smaller than the others and with paler greyish dorsal color. The species is not common, apparently not ranging much farther south than Broome; it occurs more frequently from Price’s Point to Troughton Island in the north. 33. Blasicrura (B.) pallidula simulans SCHILDER & ScHILDER, 1940 Arch. Molluskenkunde 72: 42 Localities 90, 59, 37, 7, 73, 73 to 7 ScCHILDER (1941): 46, 81, 21 ALLAN (1956) : Western Australia (— fluctuans IREDALE, 1935) L Ww H lip col Largest shell: AVS We Oeil BD ily Smallest shell: Ise O2 12 iW 7 Eleven shells were examined. Fairly common, though SCHILDER & SCHILDER (1952) recorded these shells as rare. I have compared specimens with the form Blasicrura pallidula rhinoceros (Souversir, 1865) from Gubbins Reef, Cooktown, northern Queensland, and they display a reasonably pronounced morphic variation, having the terminals more produced, longer and more distinct teeth, a more pyriform shape and distinctly interrupted dorsal color bands. The western shells seem also to average larger in size. “Blasicrura interrupta (Gray, 1824)” of authors for this locality probably refers to subadult examples of B. pallidula, as no evidence has yet been found to suggest the presence in this region of B. interrupta. While this species is also found on rocks at low tide, it seems to show some preference for sheltered tide pools higher up inshore. (Derstolida Irrpatz, 1935) 34. Blasicrura (D.) hirundo cameroni IrREDALE, 1939 Austral. Zool., 9 (3): 314; plt. 28, figs. 29 - 31 Localities 90, 59, 40, 7 TREDALE (1939): 81, Yirrkala, Northern Territory SCHILDER (1941): North West Australia STEADMAN & Corton (1946): North Australia Weaver (1960): 53 L Ww H lip col Largest shell: 20.4 14.0 108 21 17 Smallest shell: Wh 7 Oath they de Seventeen shells were examined. The species is common at Vlaming Head and Exmouth Gulf, but a report from Broome (Crake) says the shells are not common there, ‘“Sust the odd shell now and then.” These grey-topped shells may possess a small central blotch. Two white lines cross the blue-grey dorsum transversely, the anterior one looking roughly like the numeral 2 lying on its side, where- as the adapical line is straight. This pattern appears to be constant for the species. There are prominent brown blotches on either side of the front and rear terminals, with finer brown spotting along the margins. Otherwise the terminals, margins, base, teeth, and interstices are white. There is an interesting variation in the columellar denti- tion: on nearly half of the specimens the columellar teeth are very short, becoming obsolete on the front half of the base, while on the others the central teeth are long -- nearly reaching the marginal edge -- and well defined the full length of the base. In each case the teeth are strong on the fossula. In this race of Blasicrura hirundo (LINNAEUS, 1758), the shells are larger and bulbously broader; the dorsal markings also are correspondingly larger and more prominent. Working with these shells from both Exmouth Gulf and Broome, I have observed what appears to be a distinct dimensional separation in the species. The larger shells (20.4, 14.0, 10.8, 21, 20) and the smaller shells (14.8, 9.0, 7.1, 18, 17) are found living together even though they seem to possess rather uniform shell and color characteris- tics. Even so, the dwarf specimens seem to approach more closely C. hirundo neglecta SowerBy, 1837, while the larger ones are unquestionably the C. hirundo cameroni of TREDALE. 35. Blasicrura (D.) ursellus ursellus (Gme ttn, 1791) Syst. Nat., Ed. 13, p. 3411 Locality 7 L W H lip col Largest shell: 10S: 2 GSS Smallest shell: OSH Aor Li Seven shells were examined, all of which were collected at Broome (ex Colls. Bardwell - 1; V. M. Baker - 1; C. N. Cate - 5). All were dead beach specimens though in excellent condition. The occurrence of this species at this locality is rare, and it is not known in our experience from elsewhere in northwest Australia. IREDALE (1939) appears to have confused this species with Blasicrura hirundo (Linnaeus, 1758) Blasicrura ursellus is unquestionably a distinct species that can very easily be separated by a Page 20 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 distinctive lavender-grey dorsal pattern characteristic of and constant in all examples, and by the unusual way the columellar and labral teeth merge in the vicinity of the adapical terminal collar; neither B. hirundo nor B. kieneri have this unusual arrangement of teeth. In Blasi- crura ursellus the shells are usually smaller and more pyriform, never displaying the brown dorsal blotch com- mon to the other species. 36. Blasicrura (D.) stolida stolida (LinnaEus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10: 724 Localities 90, 59 Corton (1950): 7 (leg. R. W. Tymms, list B. E. Bardwell) ALLAN (1956): 7, 77 L W H lip col Largest shell: 23:45 OMS 23e20 Smallest shell: 20) Wa) WA BB IO) Two shells were examined. This is an uncommon species, apparently isolated in West Australia from Vlaming Head to Broome. Curiously, it shares a part of its range with Blasicrura stolida brevidentata (SowrerBy, 1870). On available evidence there does not appear to be any hybrid- ization between the two subpecies. Our knowledge of this form in West Australia is limited to the single locality given, with this field note, “Found two C. stolida stolida, one in fair shape, the other has lost some dorsal colouring, but is otherwise intact. Only know of two other specimens found at North West Cape Light, one by each of the light- keepers’ wives.” 37. Blasicrura (D.) stolida brevidentata (SoweERBy, 1870) Thes. Conch., 4 (30): 11; plt. 30, figs. 325 - 326 Localities 66a, 19, 7, 11, 77 Hepiey (1915): 18 (ex Cox, 1900 == irvinae) ScHILper (1941): 7, 12, 11, 77, 79 Weaver (1960): 53 L W H lip col Largest shell: 248 NSO 1S iss Smallest shell: ADE W283 1068 1G 12 Ten shells were examined. This race is fairly common. The two shells whose measurements are listed above were collected at Broome, Roebuck Bay. Cotton (1950) and ALLAN (1956) recognize Blasicrura stolida stolida (Lin- NAEUS) from northwest Australia, but with IREDALE (1939) seem not to know of this subspecies living there as well. One wonders if in fact they were not referring to the Sowerby subspecies, since the Linnaean one has only recently been found in Western Australia. The type locality of B. s. brevidentata is Broome. I have specimens from Thursday Island, Torres Strait, that apparently link the former with Western Australia. The two races are easy to separate through differences in general color patterns, shape of shell, and character of base teeth. Cribraria JOUSSEAUME, 1884 (Talostolida IrREDALE, 1931) 38. Cribraria (T:) teres teres (GmEtIN, 1791) Syst. Nat., Ed. 13, p. 3405 syn.: Cypraea tabescens Dittwyn, 1817 Localities 90, 59, 40 IREDALE (1935): West Australia (HEDLEY, THIELE) ScCHILDER (1941): North West Australia Weaver (1960): 53 L WwW H Ip col Largest shell: 3315) T1917 Smallest shell: 21.2 12:2 Ose 22s Nineteen shells were examined. Within an apparently restricted range, the species is common. IREDALE (1935) stated that Hep.ey recorded a shell from West Australia under the name of Cribraria teres, but “fortunately” the shell proved to be a dead Erronea caurica. He added that THIELE recorded the species from the same western area. From Vlaming Head to Point Murat in Exmouth Gulf, dead shells are quite numerous on the beaches. As far as can be determined, it does not reach Roebuck Bay to the north nor Shark Bay to the south. (Ovatipsa IREDALE, 1931) 39, Cribraria (Ovatipsa) chinensis whitworthi Cate, subspec. nov. Localities 90, 59, 40, 53 Cotton (1935): N. W. Australia (as Cypraea var- iolaria) ScuiLper (1941): North West Australia (as O. chinensis sydneyensis) ; 12, 7, 79 Weaver (1960) : 53 (as C. chinensis chinensis) L WwW H Ip col Largest shell: 40.7 244 20.2 17 15 Smallest shell: 24.2 14.7 12.0 16 13 Seventeen specimens were examined. The species is evidently reasonably common only at Viaming Head. It is a deep water form, requiring a violent surf action to bring the shells in on the beach. We know of no live collected shells; three have been obtained with the dead animal in the shell and the others are dead beach shells in various states of preservation. The species has been collected only from the very restricted area directly below the lighthouse (five miles west and slightly south of the tip of North West Cape) where it washes up on the beach across a narrow shelf of rock that is seldom uncovered by the tide. This species was recorded by Corton (1950) as Ova- tipsa chinensis variolaria (LAMARCK) in the B. E. Bard- well Collection, from North West Australia. ScHILDER (1941) also recorded it, as Ovatipsa chinensis sydneyensis, from this general area. A definite report can now be made Tue VE.icER, Vol. 7, No. 1 [Cate] Plate 5 Figure 3a Figure 6b Figure@b Figure 3b 2 1 Figures 1 a, 1 b: Arabica histrio westralis IREDALE, 1935 ex C. N. Cate Coll., No. 2165; Hypotype 1 (natural size). Figures 2 a, 2 b: Ovatipsa chinensis whitworthi Cate, subspec. nov. ex C. N. Cate Coll., 2180; Holotype (natural size), Figures 3 a, 3 b: Arabica arabica brunnescens Cate, subspec. nov. ex C. N. Cate Coll., No. 2164; Holotype (natural size). photography: Taxzo Susux: we 7 is + . r = aa - x P| os ee ot ay fi t i " 7 ) ys a an 3 q x & ‘ t f > : bg & ; rae ee a 1 a , Wy 1 \ ie A e 1 i 5 : ‘ ; z eo 4 A fu! os > ~ , ¥ of = =) Ree VER i i z 5 ~ ay - S./ = g 5 u i ; 4 2 i J i F ) j os ; r 7 iy r BS og all | coger 7 an Paki P i = : . ' re aS 88-2. cee i i i -\ = j 7 f a ad i eae i @. ’ - 2 a a care : es Sl | : : ¥ ek lage aot L ! i - + +; \ : \ = 9 . Gi : 4 t 2 Py A ‘ \ = Pa} 1 ” Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 21 for this subspecies as living at the above-listed stations. Description: The shell is generally large, solid, pyriformly elongate, narrowing perceptibly abapically, then abruptly to the anterior terminals; it becomes rounded and blunt adap- ically; base bulbously swollen; left side thickened, round- ed; right margin thickened, calloused, sharply angled, keeled ; aperture reasonably straight, wide, curving gradu- ally left to the rear; front terminal barely produced, not at all adapically, semi-umbilicate above; outer lip broad, labial teeth large, heavy, well defined, long, evenly spaced; columella curving, teeth fine, very short; fossula narrow, shallow, only slightly concave, ribbed with teeth, faint to the rear, heavy anteriorly; terminal ridge well defined, curving slightly to the right; dorsal inductura glossy, light brownish-yellow, thickly patterned with variously sized beige-grey lacunae; thick, broad, beige-colored lateral cal- lus sweeping high on either side, generally covering much of the dorsum; the sides and most of the base very thickly spotted with large, bright lavender spots; a weak, some- times indistinct mantle line traversing the upper right dorsal surface; minimal base area and teeth a rich beige, the interstices brilliant orange. Type locality: The type locality is Vlaming Head (21°48’ S. Lat., 114°07’ E. Long.), North West Cape; the holotype will be deposited in the type collection at the Western Australian Museum, Perth, and will bear the catalog number W. A. M. 33-64. In Cribraria chinensis whitworthi the shell is normally large, approaching the form of the east African C. chin- ensis violacea Rous, 1905. The West Australian shell is more heavily constructed. The long, shallow, narrow, hea- vily ribbed fossula is a consistent differentiating character in C. c. whitworthi. Perhaps the most outstanding feature of this new race is its brilliant lavender color and the size and density of the lateral spotting. This species is named in honor of Mr. A. R. Whitworth of Geraldton, Western Australia, for his various contribu- tions to our knowledge of the Cypraea living in the Dam- pierian Region. Ovatipsa chinensis sydneyensis SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938, and O. c. variolaria (Lamarck, 1810) are geo- graphically remote and of different form. Cypraea sydney- ensis 1S a Narrower, more ovate shell, while that of C. vari- olaria is much larger and of lighter, less solid construction. (Cribraria JoussEaumeE, 1884) 40. Cribraria (C.) cribraria fallax (E. A. Smrru, 1881) Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, 8: 441 syn.: Cypraea exmouthensis MELVILL, 1888 Localities 90, 59, 40, 7, 43, 77, 31, 50 Heptey (1915): West Australia (ex E. A. Smiru, 1881) IREDALE (1935): 40, Western Australia (T. H. Haynes —exmouthensis), West Australia (ex E. A. Smiru, 1881) ScHILDER (1941): North West Australia STEADMAN & Cotton (1946) : 40, West Australia ALLAN (1956): 40, Dampierian to Flindersian Regions Weaver (1960): 53 1G; W H lip col Largest shell: BAAS 22 OMe GHtO N20 Smallest shell: NG. 2) kil lz ie Twenty-one shells were examined. This subspecies is fairly common within the range from Dirk Hartog Island to Gantheaume Point. IREDALE (1935) and STEADMAN & Cotton (1946) were of the opinion that Cribraria fallax and C’. exmouthensis were separate races living together. It seems unlikely that racial distinction can be maintained with the species intermingling as freely as they seem to do. Cribraria exmouthensis was established on the basis of size, color, and lacunae -- characters that are commonly observed in series of the shells. MELviLi’s (1888) remarks seem to add further uncertainty respecting this subspecies when he states “The dorsal covering matter seems to have been twice deposited, causing a very rich effect, with partial eclipse of the round white spots.” Additionally, he suggests the smaller size of the shell (up to one inch) and more sparsely arranged white spots as differentiating char- acters. It might be added that some of the shells have a white dorsum devoid of any spotting. In my opinion, the earlier name C. fallax is the proper one for these shells. Three large specimens, gathered by deep water divers, were brought in by pearling luggers from Lagrange Bay. These shells show the deep coloring mentioned by MEL- VILL, as well as the fewer white spots, but again this is not uncommon in any series of shells, particularly with the larger specimens found in any of these western shell colonies. One dead shell was dredged in from 80 to 85 fathoms off the north end of Dirk Hartog Island (WEa- VER, 1960). This is one of several species of Cypraeidae in Western Australia that seems to thrive in either shallow or deep water. Cypraeinae Bernaya JoussEAUME, 1884 41. Bernaya catei ScuHiLpEr, 1963 The Veliger 5 (4): 127 Locality 92 L W H lip col Ovi AD ARTS S823 Shell measurements: Page 22 A unique specimen was examined. The holotype (Cate Coll. C 563) was found after a storm by a crayfisherman in the spring of 1961. It was on the beach of the western shore of West Wallaby Island and still contained the fresh dead animal. ScHILpER (1963) disqualified it as Cypraea venusta SOWERBY, 1846 (Cate, 1962), and compared it with Bernaya media (Drsuayes, 1835), B. cavata (Ep- warps, 1865), B. baluchistanensis (NoETLING, 1897), and B. brevis (Douvit1é, 1920), all from the Eocene of France and England, Upper Cretaceous of Pakistan and Libya, and Eocene of Nigeria, respectively. (see Zoila venusta venusta SowERBY, 1846 below) Zoila JOUSSEAUME, 1884 42. Zoila venusta venusta (SowERByY, 1846) Proc. Linn. Soc. London, pt. 1: 314 Synonyms: Cypraea thatchent Cox, 1869 C. roseopunctata MELvILL, 1888 C. Brunea Cox, 1889 C. venusta var. brunea [Cox] Hmatco, 1906 C. venusta var. bakeri Gaturr, 1916 C. episema IREDALE, 1939 Localities 45, 18, 33 Sowerby (1846) : locality unknown Cox (1869): 28 MELvILL (1888) : 29 Cox (1889): 18 Hepiry (1915) (ex Cox, 1869): 28 GaturF (1916) : locality unknown [REDALE (1939): 18 ScHILDER (1941): 28 L WwW H lip col SOL) CR) Ce Wee © (4) 25) 408 By 8 Six shells were examined. This species is a deep water form and is uncommon to rare. The point of origin and center of concentration probably is southern Geographe Bay, and the range may or may not be continuous to Sorrento Reef, offshore just north of Perth; beyond this there is a reasonably abundant deep water variant (in from 15 to 70 feet). (see Zoila venusta sorrentensis ScHIL- DER, 1963 - next taxon) Two typically formed Zoila venusta, though smaller in size (67.2 mm and 69.0 mm in length, respectively) and more or less identical with the Geographe Bay shells, were collected in 65 feet of water off Binningup Beach, approx- imately 70 miles south of Perth. There is no morphological cvidence of these shells merging into the more northern Z. sorrentensis SCHILDER. Largest shell: Smallest shell: THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 43. Zoila venusta sorrentensis SCHILDER, 1963 The Veliger 5 (4): 126; zbid. (1): plt. 3, figs. 1 - 3, and text fig. 2 Localities 82, 248 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: 60.9 40.1 32.9 26 11 Smallest shell: 53.0 34.6 278 23 10 Eight shells were examined. This new subspecies has been rather intensively collected in from 10 to 40 feet of water at Sorrento Reef, just north of Perth. It would probably be incorrect to say the shell was of common occurrence; however, many specimens are known to have been collected here with the aid of SCUBA diving equip- ment. It has heretofore been considered a variant of Zoila episema IREDALE, 1939 (see Cate, 1962). ScHILDER subsequently designated it as a race of Z. venusta. A dead beach specimen has been reported from the Abrolhos Islands. This locality record will need verification through additional field work. 44, Zoila episema IREDALE, 1939 Austral. Zool., 9 (3): 300; plt. 27, figs. 3-4 see Zoila venusta venusta (SowERBy, 1846) above 45. Zoila decipiens (E. A. Smiru, 1880) Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1880: 482; plt. 48, fig. 8 Localities 7, 47, 80, 50, 70, 43 Hepiey (1915): 71 (ex E. A. Smiru, 1880) IREDALE (1935): West Australia ScHILDER (1941): 7, 12, 79, 40, 71, 28 STEADMAN & Cotton (1946) : Northwest Australia ALLAN (1956) : North-Western Australia L WwW H lip col Largest shell: 60.1 40.5 360 23 18 Smallest shell: 50'9) 34:0) Soa 2 ial Twenty-three shells were examined. This is a common deep water species, collected mostly by pearl divers. Dead shells are very seldom found washed up on the beaches. A Japanese diver has mentioned finding four black speci- mens among 500 Zoila decipiens he collected during one season of diving. 46. Zoila rosselli Corton, 1948 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austral., 72 (1): 30; plt. 1 Localities 42, 78, 46, 9 ALLAN (1956): 42, 26 L W H lip col Shell measurements: 58.3 38.6 27.9 31 26 One shell examined (Cate Coll. no. 1351) This speci- men is one of Mr. Rossell’s six original paratypes. The Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 23 type lot was collected in 1916 from dredged rubble adja- cent to the North Wharf (Leighton Beach), Fremantle. The holotype is on deposit in the South Australian Muse- um, Adelaide (Cat. no. D 14220). In March 1962, Max Shaw, with the aid of an aqua lung, descended 220 feet to the ocean bottom in the vici- nity of Rottnest Island near Perth to collect what is proba- bly the first live specimen known. It was living on fan coral. This species has also more recently been collected alive in Geraldton Harbor (Max Cramer Coll.). This would indicate a new northern range extension for Zoila rosselli. Barry Wilson (personal communication) reported three live-taken shells collected at 35 fathoms, presumably off Perth; two of these are now in the collection of the Western Australian Museum. 47. Zoila friendii friendii (GrAy, 1831) Zool. Misc., 1: 35 syn.: Cypraea scottu Brovertip, 1831 Localities 55, 45, 24, 10, 87, 42, 20, 44, 78 Hepvey (1915) : 87 (ex Reeve, 1845) TREDALE (1935): 87 SCHILDER (1941): 45, 42, 87 STEADMAN & Corron (1946): 87 (= scottii Bro- DERIP, 1832 [szc]) WEAVER (1960) : 44, 78 L W Higlipacol Largest shell: 86.6 44.2 33.3 26 7 Smallest shell: Gi)40) Ass) Miles) | WS) Seventeen shells were examined. This species is fairly uncommon in collections because of its deep water habitat. The shell is long and narrow, broadening gradually to the rear, where it narrows abruptly to the adapical terminal collar. The greyish-brown dorsum is densely covered with variously sized large, blurred brown spots; sides, margins, base and interstices are dark brown; teeth, fossula, colu- mella and inner terminal walls are white. The terminals are prominently produced, posteriorly sharp-edged; the morphological features of the aperture are weakly devel- oped and incomplete, particularly the columellar teeth and simple fossula. The species is rather widely distributed from Perth south to Albany. Specimens have been collected at Clif- ton’s Main Reef in Geographe Bay at five fathoms on sand and shale bottom, living on soft orange-yellow sponge; at Clifton’s Reef, Outer Knob, in 24 fathoms at edge of reef on a patch of purple limestone; at Ludlow Beach in five fathoms on limestone reef two specimens were taken, one attached to the ceiling, another on the sandy floor under the ledge of a crayfish tunnel; others were collected in Cockburn Bay between Fremantle and Garden Island, in 25 feet of water on yellowish-brown sponge growing on mussel-encrusted pilings to which submarine nets had heen attached during the last war. The water temperature at this station was between 63° and 64° F Eleven shells were collected within an hour. (ex diary, C. S. Weaver) 48. Zoila friendii vercoi ScHILDER, 1930 Zool. Anzeiger, 1930: 74 Locality 2 IREDALE (1935) : West Australia; South Australia SGHILDER (1941): 38, 2 STEADMAN & Cotton (1946): 38 ALLAN (1956): Western Australia L W H lip col SS SSseS 90M 2610 Two shells were examined. The specimen measured (Cate Coll. C 1706) is typical of the subspecies. The morphological difference that separates this race from the nominate Zoila friendu friendi is that the shells, on the average, appear larger and flatter, with greater shell width a significant feature of the shell’s morphic change (63% of the length in this instance). Also, the terminals are stubbier, the coloring is less intense and more diffuse. The holotype (D969) and two paratypes are in the South Aus- tralian Museum. Three specimens are reported to be in the H. Rossell Collection (Corron, 1950). Shell measurements: 49. Zoila marginata (Gasxotn, 1849) Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1848: 91 Localities 63, 48, 92, 76, 51 L Ww H lip col Hypotype 1: a8) ashi Paha Zi is} Hypotype 2: eis) Biles) A owt 243} 2231 Hypotype 3: SALON Sea 25:2) 2 24: Three shells were examined (Cate Coll. C 906, C 2516, and T: Bratcher Coll., 2215). Hypotype 1 has been previ- ously recorded (Cate, 1961). Hypotype 2, a live-collected specimen was found in a craypot set by the motor vessel IRIS in 30 fathoms at Houtman Rocks. It is a mature, fully developed shell, while Hypotype 1, though well formed, is subadult. This latter specimen was used to establish a type locality for the species at Albany, south- west Australia (Cate, 1961). It appears now that the locality data for that shell are questionable. Verified sub- sequent collections of the species clearly show the Hout- man Abrolhos Islands as the true locality; I therefore correct the type locality of Zoila marginata to Pelsart Island, Houtman Abrolhos Group. Until 1961 little seemed to be known about this rare species, but in the last two years a number of specimens have been taken in craypots in various localities such as in 40 fathoms off Snag Island, 100 miles south of Geraldton (leg. Edward Nickels) ; Lancelin Island; 28 fathoms, 7 or 8 miles south of Long Island, southern group, Abrolhos Page 24 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Islands (T. Bratcher Coll. 2215); and Max Cramer of 10, W H lip col Geraldton has had at least five live-collected shells — Largest shell: 76.5 424 391 44 45 so that what once was an obscure species seems to be well substantiated now. Luria JoussEAUME, 1884 (Basilitrona IREDALE, 1930) 50. Luria (B.) isabella rumphiu SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938 Proc. Malac. Soc. London, 23(3 - 4): 177 Localities 90, 59, 40, 73 to 60 Heprey (1915) (ex Menke, 1843), IREDALE (1935), ALLAN (1956): Western Australia SCHILDER (1941): North West Australia Weaver (1960): 53 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: ADs Wad WAR Be 2A Smallest shell: ADO iit 8S Zl le Five shells were examined. The species is not common. Not much is yet known of this group except that the shells seem to be smaller than the average for the typical species. Talparia TroscHeEL, 1863 (Arestorides IREDALE, 1930) 51. Talparia (A.) argus argus (LinNAEus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 719 Localities 90, 65, 73, 59, 40 Scui_peR (1941): 7, 12, 79 L Ww H lip col Oi S27 25.3 89 36 59.2 29.3 23.0 37 36+ [immature] 3 Largest shell: Smallest shell: Three shells were examined. The species is fairly rare. One specimen was washed up on the shore, freshly dead. Two others were collected as semi-worn beach specimens between Vlaming Head and Point Murat, Exmouth Gulf. The broken fragment of a fourth shell was observed at Vlaming Head half buried in the sand but was not collected. If the size of these specimens is any criterion for the west coast of Australia, they are small for the species when compared, for example, with the northeast Austra- lian shells from Thursday Island (L 90.5, W 48.6, H 38.1. lip 47, col 39). (Talparia TroscHeL, 1863) 52. Talparia (T.) talpa talpa (Linnarus, 1758) Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 720 Localities 90, 59, 40, 65 Cotton (1950): Fort George, Western Australia (B. E. Bardwell) Weaver (1960): 53 Smallest shell: 59:5); 83.40) 27:5 eeA Sma Three shells were examined. The species is uncommon. The third shell in this series is a large bulla specimen (L 71.3, W 39.6, H 32.3, lip 44, col44) conveying the impression that the shells in Western Australia are gener- ally large, comparing favorably with the northern races. The living range is not yet fully determined for this species. Mauritia TroscHE., 1863 (Arabica JoUSSEAUME, 1884) 53. Mauritia (A.) eglantina perconfusa TREDALE, 1935 Austral. Zool., 8 (2): 108 ibid. 9: plt. 18, figs. 1 - 2 Localities 7, 77, 11, 40 IREDALE (1935), STEADMAN & Cotton (1946) : West Australia ScHILpER (1941): 40, 71, 28 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: 67.0 40:0 33:7° 39) 32 Smallest shell: 574 34.3 27.2 36 31 Ten shells were examined. The species is fairly common. Some authors have included these Western Australian shells with those of the eastern race Mauritia (Arabica) eglantina coutourieri (VayssiERE, 1905). Though there may be merit in this approach, I consider that the Dampi- erian shells exhibit a peculiar endemism that is common to many West Australian species. For this and other minor morphic reasons, I am retaining the IREDALE name for this race of M. eglantina. VAysstrRE’s A. coutouriert seems reasonably restricted to an already very extensive range from Japan through southeastern Malaysia, and into Java and New Britain. Mauritia (A.) perconfusa on an average appears to be a larger form; the teeth are continuous on either side along a straight, narrow aperture; the margins and base are a darker, smoky, rose-beige color; the mantle line is noticeably broader and more distinct than that seen in the northern races. These larger shells, proportion- ately, have a greater number of labial and columellar teeth. I have been unable to find that IREDALE indicated the type locality and will therefore designate Broome, Roebuck Bay (17°59’S. Lat., 122°14’ E. Long.) as such. 54. Mauritia (Arabica) arabica brunnescens Carter, subspec. nov. Synonyms: Arabica westralis IREDALE, 1935, p. 108 Mauritia (Arabica) westralis, ScHILDER & SCHIL- DER, 1941, p. 85 Vol. 7; No. 1 Localities 7, 77, 11, 90, 59, 40, 73 to 72 Hepey (1915) (ex MeNnxKE, 1843), IREDALE (1935), SrEADMAN & Corton (1946): West- ern Australia ScHIper (1941): 7, 12, 79 ALLAN (1956): Western Australia Weaver (1960): 53 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: CON 4 T2932)6)130 23 Smallest shell: 54.8 35.2 28.7 28 24 Seventeen shells were examined. This subspecies has been found to be common in Roebuck Bay. At present, how- ever, little is known of its range north of Price’s Point, but south to Quobba Point the species seems to be fairly well established. IREDALE (1935), in naming the northwest Australian form of Arabica histrio GmMe.in, 1791, used the designation Arabica westralis for his species, appar- ently in error. SCHILDER & ScHILDER (1938 - 39) appear to have misunderstood IREDALE’s intention, thinking he was referring to the true A. arabica, and subsequently used A. westralis incorrectly for these northwest Australian shells. IREDALE (1939) clarified his use of the name A. westralis, which in turn permitted ScuiLpeR (1941; July 1961) to disregard the unavailable A. arabica westralis. It is my considered opinion, however, that geographic isolation, color, and morphological changes in these shells provide valid reasons for further taxonomic consideration. Among other noticeable racial characters, the shells are uniformly larger and heavier, and in this respect seem more closely to approach the east African M. arabica immanis SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1939. The distinctly brown dorsum is typical, and the base and sides of these Dampierian shells are almost white when compared with the orange to orange-brown seen in the other races. Description: Shells uniform in appearance, large, solid, cylindrically humped, sloping to the front, blunt to the rear, somewhat bulbously inflated, with the terminals only slightly atten- uate, most so in front; margins thickened, excurvate; flattened, flanged abapically; sides steep, concave; base and lip surface narrow, flattened; aperture straight, nar- row, widening and constricted in front, curving gradually left at rear; labial and columellar teeth short, strong, well defined, and barely reaching the base from within; inter- stices deep; fossula large, long, deeply grooved, ribbed with the extended inner lip teeth; terminal ridge straight, defined on either side of the front aperture with parallel brown ridges; color of shell and margins primarily white to light rose-beige, margins irregularly patterned with large, diffuse black spots; terminal collars smudged with grey-black, dorsum covered with chestnut brown orna- mentation consisting of broken parallel lateral lines, some interrupted with lacunae of basic shell color; fossula THE VELIGER Page 25 white; columella white with darker shell color visible through the translucent surface; base and interstices off- white to pinkish-beige; teeth brown. A broad mantle line traverses the length of the upper right dorsum. Type Locality: The type locality is Broome, Roebuck Bay. The holotype will be deposited in the Western Australian Museum, Perth. Its catalog number will be W. A. M. 32-64. 55. Mauritia (A.) histrio westralis (IREDALE, 1935) Austral. Zool., 8 (2): 108 syn.: Arabica westralis IREDALE. Austral. Zool., vol. 8, pt. 2, p. 108 Localities 7, 77, 66, 40, 5, 68 Hepvey (1915): 79 (ex Brazier, 1882) as reticu- lata Martyn, 1782 IREDALE (1935), STEADMAN & Cotton (1946), ALLAN (1956) : “Western Australia” ScHILpER (1941): 7, 12, 79 Weaver (1960): 53 Dimensions of Northwest Australian shells L WwW H lip col HIG RRA TIGRE 5Y7 3026 64.4 43.8 35.0 33 25 WO 488) 8373 0) ey Lemurian shells (ScHILDER Prodrome measurements) : L WwW H lip col SOM33'8 78) AD) Lemurian shells (Cate Coll. Nos. 1660, 2151) L WwW H lip col Largest shell: COS) BOS G0) se 28 Smallest shell: Coy) AO. 22 go) 2B Average (4 shells) : O82 Ye) 20. 82 2B) Cerf Island, Seychelle Islands (Cate Coll. No. 1806) Largest shell: Smallest shell: Average (10 shells) : L WwW H lip col Largest shell: AMO 2209 O32 26 Smallest shell: AO 22-8a 13:6) 32 924: Average (4 shells) : A 6Y/ MS ONES 25 Ten shells were examined. The species is common in Roebuck Bay. Although Arabica histrio is clearly distinct, one is impressed by the resemblance of this species to certain others as to morphology, color, and ornamentation, so much so that one wonders if they are not all allopatric races of a common stock. Arabica histrio, A. depressa Gray, 1824, A. grayana Scuitper, 1930, and A. maculi- fera Scuitper, 1932 adapt themelves well to a concept of racial division of a species. One significant trait is the presence of a broad, brown color banding, noticeable in the above species as a constant background to the surface markings that, among other things, seems to link the Page 26 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 species together. It is not clear why IREDALE (1935) dis- regarded and failed to recognize A. histrio in describing his A. westralis. The omission becomes more conspicuous with his use of A. arabica (LinnaEus, 1758) and A. eglantina (Ductos, 1833) for comparison with his new taxon. The Cypraea histrio of GMELIN ranges in a northern arc from East Africa to India, Andaman Islands, Cocos Kee- ling Island, Southwest Java, and southward into North- western Australia. Authors have suggested that there is no difference between the Lemurian Arabica histrio and com- parable shells from Malaya. This could be so, but in the Seychelle Islands, and in the Dampierian region, there exists a significant difference in the species. The Cerf Island specimens -- a series of four with all the identifying characters of A. histrio -- reveal an interesting story in shell statistics. They are surprisingly small, short, narrow, and the teeth are correspondingly finer. All of the shells are fully adult and well developed. In the East African A. histrio, s. s., there is an equal degree of variation in size, shell shape, and color. One can even detect a color, marking, and morphological gradation into the species A. grayana SCHILDER, 1930. The southeastern end of the cline seems to be reached in the West Australian region. However, of all the specimens I have had for comparison the smallest is larger than those from anywhere else. A bulla specimen measures 66 millimeters. Although the ornamental markings on the shell are much the same, the overall change in the species is reminiscent of the change found in Cypraea tigris schil- deriana Cate, 1961. The shells are much heavier in struc- ture, the marginal callus is rounded, more ponderous, thicker, more heavily flanged, and -- possibly inconsequen- tially -- the characteristic spire blotch appears larger, normally six millimeters in diameter. It therefore would seem these Northwest Australian shells deserve the recognition IrEDALE had in mind for them (see IREDALE, 1939, pl. 28, figs. 3 and 4). Cypraea LINNAEUS, 1758 (Cypraea Linnaeus, 1758) 56. Cypraea (C.) tigris pardalis Suaw, 1785 Vivar. natur. Misc., 6, plt. 193 Localities 7, 77, 73, 90, 40, 17 Hepey (1915) (ex Menke, 1843), IREDALE (1935): West Australia SCHILDER (1941): 7, 12, 79 WEAVER (1960): 53 L W H lip col Che) (OR) Ze Teo Pil 84.7 60.0 46.6 25 24 Four shells were examined. The species is relatively uncommon. More Cypraea tigris pardalis are evidently Largest shell: Smallest shell: found during July and August than at any other time of the year; this seems to hold true at Exmouth Gulf and at North West Cape. Representative specimens from Quobba Point and Cape Leveque are in the Whitworth Collection, Geraldton. An interesting note is that C. tigris pardalis and Arabica histrio (GMELIN, 1791) are often found together. (Lyncina TroscHEL, 1863) 57. Cypraea (L.) lynx vanelli Linnarus, 1758 Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 720 Localities 40, 7, 77, 11, 73, 17 Heptey (1915) (ex Menxe, 1843) : Western Australia IREDALE (1935): West Australia ScHILDER (1941): 7, 12, 79 ALLAN (1956): North-West Australia Weaver (1960): 53 L Ww H lip col Largest shell: 52.3 30.6 26.3 29 20 Smallest shell: 29.2, 171) SO 24 eels Nine shells were examined. The species is common, with the center of distribution apparently at Roebuck Bay. The largest specimens are from Broome, and the smaller shells come from Exmouth Gulf. 58. Cypraea (L.) vitellus vitellus LinnaEus, 1758 Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 721 Localities 81, 17, 40, 7, 77, 11 Heptey (1915) (ex MEenKE, 1843), IREDALE (1935): West Australia ScHILDER (1941): 7, 12, 79 Cotton (1950): 52 (56.0 mm) ALLAN (1956): Dampierian Region Weaver (1960): 53 L W H lip col Largest shell: (OMRON SY Si Ly Smallest shell: 28:9) 20:25 16'Sie22aalio Four specimens from Cable Beach, three from Exmouth Gulf and four from Broome were examined. These shells are not plentiful at Broome, but a few are found from time to time, as is the case also at Cable Beach. From the number of dead shells washed in to the beaches, the species seems to be more plentiful in the North West Cape -- Exmouth Gulf area. 59. Cypraea (L.) reevet Sowersy, 1832 Conch. Illust., fig. 52 (London) Localities 78, 10, 87, 83, 89a Hepzey (1915): 44 (ex Reeve, 1845) IREDALE (1935): West Australia STEADMAN & Corton (1946): Western Australia Scuitper (1941): 45, 42, 87, 72 ALLAN (1956): Southwestern Australia Vol. 7; No. 1 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: AOAC 2S 123 Smallest shell: Aon ils) 1B}98) fa) 21 Eleven shells were examined. This uncommon species lives well beyond the low tide mark in deep water and seems nearly always to exhibit varying degrees of damage and wear. The anterior terminal edges are often broken, the dorsum is seldom found without the effects of wave and sand action, because the shells are usually picked up on the beach after storms. A live collected shell is a rarity. Though predominantly a southern species, it does range into Western Australia. Three live specimens were collec- ted in craypots from 15 fathoms off Turtle Dove Shoal, 37 miles west south west of Dongara. Dead shells have been picked up at Geraldton and adjacent beaches. These northern shells seem to be smaller and more globular than those from Swan River and southward. 60. Cypraea (L.) carneola carneola Linnaeus, 1758 Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 719 Localities 66, 40, 7, 77, 89a Hepiry (1915): 46 (ex Verco, 1912) ScHILDER (1941): 7, 12, 79, 68, 69, 22 WeEaveER (1960): 53 L WwW H lip col Largest shell: Bile ate S328) 7283 Smallest shell: Doth NERO GI ya All Thirteen shells were examined. Despite the relatively large number of specimens collected for this study, the species is fairly uncommon in the Exmouth Gulf area, and even more scarce in Roebuck Bay. Cumulatively, the shells average comparatively smaller than those collected on the eastern Australian coast. This species seems to be more abundant at certain seasons than at others. Explanation of Table 1 The occurrence of the cypraeid species in Western Aus- tralia as reported by various authors is listed in Table 1. The columns, arranged arbitrarily, are designated as follows: Column 1 (C) Carte, 1964 (this report) Column 2 (S) Scuitper, 1963 (personal communication) Column 3 (I) IrEpAte, 1935, 1939 Column 4 (W) Weaver, 1960 Column 5 (A) Attan, 1956 Column 6 (Co) Corton ez al., 1946, 1950 The systematic arrangement used in Table 1 and in the text follows that of ScHILDER & SCHILDER, 1939. THE VELIGER Pustularia SwAINsON bistrinotata bistrinotata cicercula cicercula globulus globulus Staphylaea JoUSSEAUME limacina facifer nucleus nucleus staphylaea staphylaea Erosaria TROSCHEL caputserpentis kenyonae caputserpentis reticulum cernica viridicolor erosa purissima helvola citrinicolor labrolineata labrolineata poraria poraria miliaris diversa wilhelmina Monetaria TRoscHEL annulus annulus moneta rhomboides Erronea TROSCHEL caurica blaesa cylindrica sowerbyana errones proba ovum ovum pyriformis smithi subviridis dorsalis walkeri continens angustata Notocypraea SCHILDER declivis pulicaria Palmadusta IREDALE asellus asellus clandestina clandestina fimbriata fimbriata gracilis hilda hammondae lutea bizonata punctata punctata saulae saulae Z1CZAC ZiczZac Blasicrura TREDALE hirundo cameroni pallidula simulans quadrimaculata thielei stolida stolida stolida brevidentata ++ +++++++4 +44 ++ ++++4++4+ ++++++ + ++ +4+44++4 + +++4++4++4 +++++4+ +4++++4+ + $+4++44++ ++ +++ ++ +44 ++4++ 44+ °° + +++ W A Co ate a ae +|+ ]+ SF AP aL ar ar |) ar ae ap | ap An ap || ar +] + +/+]+ sP | SF +] + ai +) +4 ae +} + ae || Sp ae + | + ap || ae ae =e SF || ae a +/+ Page 28 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Q Ss i WY AN Co Cribraria JOUSSEAUME chinensis chinensis -- chinensis whitworthi ++ cribraria fallax ar teres teres + -|- Bernaya JOUSSEAUME catet + | -b Zoila JOUSSEAUME decipiens a friendu friendu + a ai +++ ++ friendu vercoi marginata thersites thersites + venusta venusta | ++ venusta sorrentensis —++ rosselli + episema a Luria JoUSSEAUME isabella rumphii aL jk} SL) | Talparia TRoscHEL ++ ++ argus argus talpa talpa Mauritia TroscHEL arabica arabica + );+),+)+ arabica brunnescens eglantina couturieri histrio mauritiana regina +++ +++ a ++ ++ +++ Cypraea LINNAEUS carneola carneola lynx vanelli Teevel tigris pardalis vitellus vitellus + [+ + +++++ ++ +4 + |+ LITERATURE CITED ALLAN, Joyce 1956. Cowry shells of world seas. Melbourne. i-x; pp. 1-170: plts. 1-15. BRAZIER, JOHN Georgian House, 1882. Distribution and geographic range of cowries in Austral- asia. (an unpublished reprint from the Sydney Mail, Dec. 2, 1871.) 1883. The habitat of Cypraea citrina. S. Wales, 7: 322 - 323. : Cate, Crawrorp NEILL Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 1960. A new subspecies of Cypraca saulae Gasxorn, 1843. The Veliger 3 (2): 34-37; plt. 5; 1 map; 1 table. (1 Oct. 1960) CatE, CRAwForD NEILL 1961a. Rediscovery of Cypraea marginata Gasxo1n, 1848. The Veliger, 3 (3): 76 - 78; plt. 14; figs. 1-4. (1 Jan. 1961) 1961 b. Description of a new Hawaiian subspecies of Cypraca tigris (LinnaEus, 1758). The Veliger, 3 (4): 107 - 109; plt. 19; figs. 1 - 4. (1 April 1961) 1962. | Comparison of two rare cowrie species (Gastropoda) The Veliger 5 (1): 6- 14; plts. 1-4; 2 text figs. (1 July 1962) Cotton, BERNARD CHARLES 1950. Mollusca from Western Australia. Mus., 9 (3): 333 - 338. GatLirF, JoHN HENRY Rec. So. Austral. 1916. Description of two Australian cowries. Victorian Nat. 32: 147. HEDLEY, CHARLES 1915. Preliminary Index of the Mollusca of Western Australia. Journ. Roy. Soc. Western Austral. Mus., 9 (3) : 333 - 338. TREDALE, Tom 1914. | Report on Mollusca collected at the Monte Bello Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1914: 665 - 675. 1935. Australian cowries, part 1. Autral. Zool. 8(2): 96 to 135; plts. 8 - 9. 1939. Australian cowries, part 2. 297 - 323; plts. 27 - 29. Kenyon, Acnes F Austral. Zool., 9 (3): 1897. Description of two new Cypraea. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 22: 145. 1902. | Undescribed variety of Cypraea. 183 - 184. MENKE, KarL_ THEODOR Journ. Conch., 10: 1843. | Molluscorum Novae Hollandiae specimen. 46 pp. ReEEvE, Lovett Aucustus 1835. “Mr. Reeve exhibited . . previously undescribed Beuroeteds) Minutes of meeting of May 28, 1835. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1835: 68. (2 Sept. 1835) SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED Hannover, 1941. | Verwandtschaft und Verbreitung der Cypraeacea. Arch. Molluskenk. 73 (2-3): 57-120; 2 plts. 1961. The size of Mauritia arabica. The Veliger 4 (1): 15-17. (1 July 1961) 1963. Further remarks on two rare cowrie species. The Veliger, 5(4): 125-128; 3 tables. SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED, & MARIA SCHILDER 1938-1939, | Prodrome of a monograph on living Cypraeidae. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London, 23(3-4): 119 - 231. 1952. Ph. Dautzenberg’s collection of Cypraeidae. Mém. Inst. Roy. Sci. Nat. Belgique (2) 45: 1 - 243; 4 plts. SOWERBY, GEORGE BRETTINGHAM (2nd of name) 1870. Thesaurus conchyliorum; 26-28: Cypraea. (London) 58 pp.; 37 pits. STEADMAN, W. R., « BerNARD C. Corron 1946. A key to the classification of the cowries (Cypraeidae). Records South Austr. Mus. 8: 503 - 530; 6 plts. Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 29 Verco, J. C. 1912. Shells of the Great Australian Bight. South Austral., 36: 206 - 232; plts. 10 - 14, 16. Trans. Roy. Soc. Weaver, Cuirton S. 1960. | Hawaiian scientific expedition finds rare western Austra- lian volutes. Hawaiian Shell News 8 (12): 1 and 3. [new series 10] October 1960. The Mollusca of the Santa Barbara County Area Part I - Pelecypoda and Scaphopoda EUGENE COAN University of California, Santa Barbara Dati (1921) LisTED RANGES of many species of mollusks as terminating, either in their northern or southern extremes, in Santa Barbara County, California. Many of these records were based on the work of Lorenzo G. Yates, whose faunal list of the county (1890b) and other papers (1877 and 1890 a) included many original collecting data. Since the time of Yates and Da tt there has not been a comprehensive list of the species in this area, although Berry (1956), Hewatr (1946), BARNARD & Hartman (1959), and Grau (1959) have published a few records. There is need of a list of species currently collected from this region in order to substantiate the previously published records. During the past two years, in connection with a course at the University of California at Santa Barbara, I have attempted to make as complete a survey of the mollusks of the Santa Barbara County area as I could, revising the existing collection of the University in the process, and adding such material to that collection as might prove useful. The following list is the result of that work. Because of the time involved in the preparation of this table and the difficulty of identifying the Gastropoda, Amphineura, and Cephalopoda at this time, it was decided to restrict this paper to the Pelecypoda and Scaphopoda and to complete the work on the other three groups at a later date. Santa Barbara County is a rectangle of land with a coast line of about 100 miles, not including its three channel islands, San Miguel, Santa Rosa, and Santa Cruz. Anacapa, the southern member of this chain of islands, is in Ventura County. Most authors agree that, with regard to shore and shallow water fauna, Point Conception, in Santa Barbara County, ig a significant dividing point between the faunas of Northern California, Oregon, and Washington, and that of Southern California. For additional information and discussion of this transition two types of account may be found in ScHENCK & KEEN (1936) and Newe t (1948). The transition is not abrupt at any one point, but the bulk of the change takes place between Point Arguello and Point Conception. This tran- sition is ascribed to currents and a temperature gradient. About half of the 100-mile coast line lies north of Point Conception. I collected beach specimens on the north side of Point Conception, finding on one trip over 75 species of mollusks. Many of these specimens confirmed what had been questionable northern or southern range limits. Most of the Santa Barbara coastline is sand beach, with one headland after another jutting into the long expanse of sand. There is one feature of special interest with regard to the sand itself -- the fact that it undergoes a yearly cycle of movement along the coast. About half of the year most of the rocks on the University Campus beach, for instance, are covered by sand. As a result, there is never much life on these rocks. They are too often covered and abraded by the sand to bear even the limpets and chitons typical of somewhat less sandy rocks. When they do become uncovered, green algae are about all that gets a foothold before the rocks are once more buried, though, no doubt, the juvenile stages of other plants and of animals begin to settle during the uncovered period. The extent to which the sand moves varies along the southern Santa Barbara coastline. Another aspect of Santa Barbara beaches is of interest: tar. There are several tar seeps along the coast, the presence of tar and oil being further testified to by the many offshore oil rigs. The tar seeps are especially pro- ductive in the U. C. S. B. -- Coal Oil Point area, the latter being so named for obvious reasons. The tar continually Page 30 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 oozes out of the offshore cracks and rises to the surface in masses. It floats around, and much of it comes to shore where it is deposited along the high tide line. Many of the intertidal rocks in certain areas, such as at Goleta Point, are almost covered with a layer of sticky tar. How- ever, it is surprising, that, even in the most heavily tarred areas, there are always a few hardy mollusks that do not seem to be affected by the tar and the odor of kerosene -- a few limpets, chitons and mussels. Some time ago I held the probably common belief that picking up beach specimens was a “wrong” way to collect mollusks. I have since modified this position, for I have added many species to the Santa Barbara list from mate- rials washed up on the Campus beach, species which may live well off-shore. In this connection, there is one problem in collecting beached material in Santa Barbara County, one true of many southern California areas -- that of the mixing of freshly-dead and fossil material on the beaches. For instance, material from the Late Plio- cene or Early Pleistocene Santa Barbara formation occa- sionally washes out to the beaches, and there are even places where this formation extends almost to the water line. There is, in addition, a Recent marine terrace, along the cliffs in the immediate U.C.S.B. area. It contains a fauna much like that of Puget Sound. If I had not finally made a representative collection of the formation, I might still be puzzling over some beach specimen of Thais lamellosa, Acmaea instabilis, or Calyptraea fastigi- ata. The material is in a remarkable state of preservation, periostracum and bits of ligament remaining on many of the clams. To complicate the situation further, there is Goleta Slough, the remains of what once was a large lagoon. The existence of this lagoon in fairly recent times is evidenced by sub-fossil mollusks along its banks and in Indian kitchen middens in the surrounding area. DALL (1921) and other authors of his period and before, list the Goleta area as the northernmost outpost of many of the southern California lagoon species. Species typical of these two deposits include Aequipecten, two species of Chione, one of Tagelus, and one of Sanguinolaria. None of these forms have been recently found living in the slough, which, as far as I can see, contains only Cerzthi- dea, Assiminea, and Melampus. Material from these two sub-fossil beds, natural and Indian created, may be found washed up on the nearby beaches. There seem to be two types of headlands jutting out into the sand beaches: rubble points like Rincon Point, and large rock points, like Goleta Point (some points are combinations of these two types). The rubble points have their own typical fauna. Special demands are placed on the inhabitants by the abrading sand. Such an area typically has Acmaea fenestrata, Mopalia porifera, M. acuta and M. muscosa. The large rock points support a fauna similar to that in like areas throughout the coast -- Mytilus spp., Septifer, Thais, Lasaea, Nuttallina, and the several species of Acmaea. As well as these two headland types, there are a few rock reefs (such as Carpenteria reef) that are inter- tidal. There are numerous offshore reefs, some exposed above the bottom sediments as far down as forty feet. These reefs are composed of the same rocks that compose both the cliffs along the coast and the large rock points, the Miocene Monterey shale. By far the commonest species washed up on Santa Barbara beaches is the boring myad, Platyodon cancel- latus. The intertidal and subtidal reefs are ideal for its existence, and the enormous number of valves washed up all along the coast testifies to its presence by the millions. Also, the reefs, including the famous one at Carpenteria, abound in rock borers and the associated nestlers. I have found all the common pholads at Carpenteria, as well as washed up on the Campus beach, including Chaceza, Parapholas, the three species of Penitella, Netastoma, and Zirfaea. The nestlers Thracia curta, Diplodonta orbella, Petricola carditoides, P. californiensis, Cumingia, and Hiatella are found in old pholad holes. In general, diving is not as successful as it is in other places in California, mainly because fine offshore sedi- ments and temporary plankton blooms make for poor visibility. The subtidal reefs are scattered and are often sand-covered. The immediate area of the kelp beds is best; most fruitful is a trip to the channel islands, where rocks are exposed as deep as SCUBA equipment allows most divers to go, i. e., 150 feet. Forms typical of the kelp holdfast area of the rock-sand bottom include Jaton, Maxwellia gemma, Mitra idae and Astraea undosa. Zonaria, Megathura, and Haliotis spp. are to be found on the nearby underwater reefs. On the sand bottom near the holdfasts may be found Kelletia, two species of Nassarius, two species of Olivella, and one of Acteon. Many unusual forms turn up in beached kelp holdfasts or in siftings from 30 to 40 feet, such as Lamellaria orbiculata, Volvulella cylindrica, Ac- maea rosacea and Calliostoma splendens. Most of the elements of the typical southern California fauna reach the southern Santa Barbara County area, many of them being scarce, however. In general, Santa Barbara intertidal populations are small, but the variety is surprising. The same seems to be true of the shallow water fauna. I would guess that if one were to collect both in the northern and in the southern portions of this county, carefully and consistently, as well as on the three channel islands, Santa Barbara would prove to have the largest fauna of any of the California counties. Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 31 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS PELECYPODA I wish to thank the persons who have collected the NucuLmaE materials on which this report is based. The original U. Acila castrensis (Hinps, 1843) = {Isl 1D” (8) C. S. B. collection was made about 1951 by Charles Nucula cf. N. cardara DALL, 1916 - several stations (BH) Stasek. I also acknowledge help from Faye B. Howard, Nucula tenuis (Montacu, 1808) = 1115 (B) who provided species lists from Hope Ranch, Point Con- Neacoins ception, Rincon Point, Carpenteria, and Santa Rosa Island. Recent records have been given to me by various students at the University of California, Santa Barbara, including Larry Field, Jim Morin, and Rick Beringer. I am obliged to Jim McLean for his list of species from the Point Conception area. Gratitude is also expressed to Dr. Myra Keen, Gale Sphon, and Dr. Rudolf Stohler, who read portions of this manuscript with the necessary critical eyes. Dr. Leo G. Hertlein identified a difficult specimen. Appreciation also goes to Dr. Demorest Daven- port, Dr. James Rohlf, and Dr. Joseph Connell, who have aided with advice and criticism. The map is the work of Charles Hayward. EXPLANATION or tHe TABLE The species are listed in taxonomic order, following KEEN (1963). The following abbreviations are used for localities in the Santa Barbara County area (see map) : 1 - Point Conception, including about five miles north (Jalama) and south 2 - Gaviota south to Tajiguas 3 - Coal Oil Point 4 - University of California, Santa Barbara, and Goleta area 5 - Hope Ranch 6 - Santa Barbara City and Harbor 7 - Carpenteria 8 - Rincon Point (partly in Ventura County) 9 - San Miguel Island 10 - Santa Rosa Island 11 - Santa Cruz Island 12 - Anacapa Passage, including area just off the west end of Anacapa Island 13 - Anacapa Island (Ventura County) The following abbreviations are used for the names of persons reporting species in published lists or in substantial lists provided to me for this table. BH - Barnarp & Hartman (1959) B - Berry (1956) EC - Eugene Coan FH - Faye Howard G - Grau (1959) H - Hewarr (1946) M - James McLean Nuculana acuta (Conran, 1832) - 11 (H) [reported in quotation marks] Nuculana hamata (CARPENTER, 1864) - 12 (B) Nuculana taphria (Datu, 1896) - 4,6 (EC);5 (FH); 11 (B) Yoldia cooperi Gass, 1865 - 4 (EC) GLYCYMERIDIDAE Glycymeris subobsoleta (CARPENTER, 1864) - 9 (EC); 10 (B) [as G. corteziana} PHILOBRYIDAE Philobrya setosa (CARPENTER, 1864) - 11 (H) PINNIDAE Atrina oldroydii Dat, 1901 - “off Santa Barbara” (EC) MytTILDAE Adula californiensis (PHtttppi, 1847) = 153,40 (E:G))-07, (BE) Adule falcata (Gouxp, 1851) - 1, 3,4 (EC);5 (FH) Amygdalum pallidulum (Datu, 1916) - 12 (B) Hormomya adamsiana (DuNKER, 1857) - 11 (H); 13 (EC) Lithophaga plumula (Hanuey, 1844) 2B & 7, 13 (xh) sil Gude iil (st) Modiolus capax Conran, 1837 - 1, 4, 7, 13 (EC) M. modiolus (LinnaEus, 1758) - 11 (H) M. rectus Conran, 1837 - 4,6 (EC) Mytilus californianus Conran, 1837 ell, 2 Gh oe 3 (IKE) eS (sh) s 1 M. edulis Linnakus, 1758 - 1, 3, 4,6, 7 (EC);5 Septifer bifurcatus (Conrap, 1837) 2 Ih, oh a Gh 7 (WC) e 3, IO, (Meh e Us (sp) OSTREIDAE Ostrea lurida CarPENTER, 1864 - 4,6 (EC);5 (FH) PECTINIDAE Aequipecten circularis aequisulcatus (CARPENTER, 1864) - 4 (EC); “S. B. Ids.” (G) Chlamys hastata (SowERBy, 1842) = “So 1, Hels.” (@))s il (EDs 1D 3) C. pugetensis (OLpRoyp, 1920) - “S. B. Ids.” (G) Cyclopecten catalinensis (WiLtETT, 1931) = ili ) Delectopecten randolphi tillamookensis (ARNOLD, 1906) - “S. B. Ids.” (G) D. vancouverensis (WurrEavEs, 1893) - “S. B. Ids.” (G) pe. Page 32 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Hinnites multirugosus (Gaz, 1928) sil, ®, B, 2 &, 18 (mee & NO (isisl)s Wl Gal) Leptopecten latiauratus (Conrap, 1837) -10 (FH) L. monotimeris (Conran, 1837) - 1,4, 6 (EC); Pecten diegensis Dat, 1898 - 1, 4 (EG); LimDDAE Lima hemphilli HERTLEIN & STRONG, 1946 - 4,6, 7 (EC); 5 (FH); ANOMIDAE 5 (FH); 11 (H) “SB. Ids.” (G); 12 (B) 11 (H)(B) Anomia peruviana vD’OrBicNyY, 1846 = 4 (E@)Eo) (BED) oli (ED) Pododesmus cepio (Gray, 1849) - 1, 2, 3, 4 (EC); 5, 10 (FH) CHAMIDAE Chama pellucida Broverip, 1835 - 4, 6, 7, 8, 13 (EC); 5, 10 (FH); Pseudochama exogyra (Conrab, 1837) - 3, 4, 6, 7, 13 (EC); 5 (FH) 10 (B); 11 (H) P. granti StrRonc, 1934 - 12 (B) CaRDITIDAE Cardita longini Batty, 1945 - 10, 12 (B) C. ventricosa Goutp, 1850 - several stations (BH); 11 (H) Glans carpenteri (Lamy, 1922) - 4) 6, 7, 13 (E@)s 5) (BH) 1 (a) Milneria kelsey: Daur, 1916 - 11 (H) ERYCINIDAE Lasaea cistula Kern, 1938 - 4, 13 (EC) KELLIDAE Kellia laperousii (DESHAYES, 1839) - 1, 4, 6, 7, 13 (EC); 5 (FH); 11 (A) MontTAcuTDAE Mysella sp. - 4 (EC) LuciInIDAE Epilucina californica (Conrapb, 1837) - 3, 4,5,7 (EC) Here excavata (CARPENTER, 1857) - 4 (EC) Lucinisca nuttalli (Conrap, 1837) - 4 (EC) Lucinoma cf. L. aequizonata (STEARNS, 1890) - 4 (EC) “beach” UNGULINDAE Diplodonta orbella (Gou.p, 1852) a 6h, 45 (8h, 0, les (IG) gt, WO (alsl) D. sericata (Reeve, 1850) - 11 (H) [juv. D. orbella? (EC) ]} D, cf. D. subquadrata (CarPENTER, 1856) - 12 (B) [juv. D. orbella? (EC) ] CARDIIDAE Clinocardium nuttalli (Conrab, 1837) - 4, 6 (EC); 5 (H) Laevicardium substriatum (Conran, 1837) - 7 (EC) Nemocardium centifilosum (CARPENTER, 1864) - 10 (EC); 11 (B)(H); 12 (B) Trachycardium quadragenarium (Conrap, 1837) - 4,5,6 (EC); 10 (FH); 11 (B)(H) VENERIDAE Amiantis callosa (Conrap, 1837) - 5 (FH) Chione californiensis (BRopERIP, 1835) - 6 (EC) C. undatella (SowERBy, 1835) - 4, 6 (EC) Compsomyax subdiaphana (CarPENTER, 1864) - 4 (EC); several stations (BH); 11 (B)(H) Notirus lamellifer (Conran, 1837) - 1, 3, 4 (EC); 11 (HB); 10 (FR) Protothaca laciniata (CARPENTER, 1864) -4,6 (EC); 5 (FH) P. staminea (Conran, 1837) - 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8 (EC); 5 (FH) P. tenerrima (CARPENTER, 1856) - 4(EC) Saxidomus nuttalli Conran, 1837 - 1, 4, 6 (EC); 5, 10 (FH) Tapes semidecussata REEVE, 1864 ? Tivela stultorum (Mawe, 1823) - 3,4, (EC);5 (FH); 11 (H) Transennella tantilla (Gouxp, 1853) - I, 3, 4 6 (EC): 5; 10) (BE is (ED) VenEec olan tones (Yates, 1890) - 1, 3, 4(EC) PETRICOLIDAE Petricola californiensis Pitspry « Lowe, 1932 - 3,4,7 (EC) P. carditoides (Conran, 1837) = 1) 3,4, 6) (E@)95) 753) (HED) aria Gen) CooPERELLIDAE Cooperella subdiaphana (Carpenter, 1864) - 11 (H) MactTrRIDAE Spisula cf. S. planulata (Conran, 1837) - 12 (B) Tresus nuttallii (Conran, 1837) - 1, 4,6 (EC) ; 10 (FH) TELLINIDAE Macoma indentata CARPENTER, 1864 - 4 (EC) M. inquinata (Desuayes, 1854) - 1,4 (EC);5 (FH) M. nasuta (Conran, 1837) - 4, 6 (EC); 10 (FH) M. secta (Conran, 1837) - 4,6 (EC) M. yoldiformis CARPENTER, 1864 - 4 (EC) ; several stations (BH); 11 (H) Florimetis biangulata (CARPENTER, 1855) - 4 (EC); 5 (FH) Tellina bodegensis Hinps, 1844 - 1 0 Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 33 T. cf. T. buttoni Dax, 1900 - 4 (EC); 5 (FH) T. carpenteri Daut, 1900 = melt 255 ((B)) DonacDAE Donax gouldii Dati, 1921 - 4 (EC) GaRIDAE Gari californica (Conran, 1849) - 3, 4,6 (EC); 11 (H) Sanguinolaria nuttallii ConraAb, 1837 - 4 (EC) SEMELIDAE Cumingia californica Conran, 1837 = 3, 4, 6; 7, 13 (EC); 5, 10: (FH) Semele decisa (Conran, 1837) - 3, 4 (EC) S. incongrua CarPENTER, 1864 S. rubropicta Dati, 1871 S. rupicola Dax, 1915 = 1, 3,4, 13 (EC); 11 (A) SOLECURTIDAE Tagelus californicus (Conrap, 1837) - 4, 6 (EC) SOLENIDAE Siliqua patula (Drxon, 1789) - 4, 6 (EC Solen rosaceus CARPENTER, 1864 4 (EC S. stcartus GouLp, 1850 - several stations (BH) ; 11 (H) My war Cryptomya californica (Conran, 1837) =A Onn (Ei) iioin (EikA)) Platyodon cancellatus (Conrap, 1837) = Ila, G5 7 (HO) 3 SIO (ash) Sphenia sp. - 4 (EC) HIATELLIDAE Hiatella arctica (Linnaeus, 1767) 1,450) 1, 1S (1G) sO Geshe iil (shys le (03) Panopea generosa Goutp, 1850 - 4 (EC) Saxicavella pacifica Dati, 1916 - several stations (BH) PHOLADIDAE Barnea subtruncata (Sowersy, 1834) - 24 (EC) Chaceia ovoidea (Goutp, 1851) - 4,7 (EC); 1 (FH) Netastoma rostrata (VALENCIENNES, 1846) - 1,4,7 (EC) Parapholas californica (Conran, 1837) oI 34 7 (UX) Penitella conradi VALENCIENNES, 1846 _—-- 4, 13 (EC) P. gabbi (Tryon, 1863) - 4,7 (EC) FP penita (Conran, 1837) - 1,3,4,6,7 (EC);5 (FH) Zirfaea pilsbryi Lowe, 1931 - 4 (EC); 10 (FH) TEREDINIDAE Teredo cf. T. diegensis Bartscu, 1916 - 3 (EC) PANDORIDAE Pandora punctata Conran, 1837 - 4 (EC) LYONSMDAE E'ntodesma inflata (Conrap, 1837) - 10 (EC);11 (H) E. saxicola (Batrp, 1863) - 1, 4, 6, 13 (EC) ; 7, 10 (FH) Lyonsia californica ConrApD, 1837 - 6 (EC); il (al) Mytilimeria nuttallii Conran, 1837 = il; 4, O75 @ (Gis &, 0 (ash)5 tol (Ge h) THRACIDAE Thracia curta Conrap, 1837 - 3, 4, 7 (EC) CUSPIDARDDAE Cardiomya californica (Dau, 1886) - 12 (B) SCAPHOPODA DENTALIDAE Dentalium neohexagonum SHARP & Piispry, 1897 - 4 (EC); 5 (FH) LITERATURE CITED BERRY, SAMUEL STILLMAN 1956. Mollusca dredged by the Orca off the Santa Barbara Islands, California, in 1951. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci., 46 (5): 150 - 157; 9 figs. (May 1956) Barnarb, J. LAuRENS, & OLGA HARTMAN 1959. The sea bottom off Santa Barbara County: biomass and community structure. Pacific Naturalist 6 (6) : 1- 15; 7 figs.; 6 tables. (1 June 1959) Dati, WititiaM HEALEY 1921. | Summary of the marine shell-bearing mollusks of the north-west coast of America from San Diego, California, to the Polar Sea, mostly contained in the collection of the U. S. National Museum. Smithson. Inst., U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 112: pp. 1 - 217; plts. 1 - 22. Grau, GILBERT 1959. Pectinidae of the Eastern Pacific. Allan Hancock Pa- cific Expeditions 23: viii + 308; 57 plts. Univ. South. Calif. Press. (25 September 1959) Hewatt, WILuIs G. 1946. Marine ecological studies on Santa Cruz Island, Cali- fornia. Ecol. Monographs 16 (3): 185-210; 2 figs; 2 tables. Keen, A. Myra 1963. | Marine molluscan genera of western North America: an illustrated key. Stanford Univ. Press; 1 - 126; illust. NEWELL, Irvin M. 1948. | Marine molluscan provinces of western North America: a critique and a new analysis. Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc. 92 (3): 155-199; 7 figs.; 2 tables. (July 1948) ScHEencK, Hupert G., « A. Myra KEEN 1936. | Marine molluscan provinces of western North America. Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc. 76 (6): 921 - 938; 6 figs.; 1 table. YaTES, LORENZO GoRDIN 1877. The mollusca of Santa Rosa Island, California. U. S. Quart. Journ. Conch. (Leads) 1 (10): 182-185. 1890 a. The mollusca of the Channel Islands of California. Ninth Ann. Reprt., State Mineralogist for 1889: 175 - 178. State Min. Bureau. 1890b. The mollusca of Santa Barbara County, California, and new shells from the Santa Barbara Channel. Santa Barbara Soc. Nat. Hist. 2: 36 - 48; 2 plts. (August 1890) >‘. J, Page 34 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Habitats and Breeding Seasons of the Shelf Limpet Crepidula norrisiarum WILLIAMSON NETTIE MacGINITIE AND GEORGE E. MacGINITIE Kerckhoff Marine Laboratory of the California Institute of Technology, Corona Del Mar, California and U.S. Naval Missile Center, Point Mugu, California (Plate 6) DuRING THE COURSE Of some investigations of marine invertebrates in the vicinity of Corona Del Mar, Califor- nia, and off Point Mugu, California, as well as the offshore islands, observations were incidentally made on the habitats and breeding seasons of Crepidula norrisia- rum WiLLiAMSoN, 1905. These observations were made between 1948 and 1963. Some of the information obtained is listed in the table below. The earlier investigations were made from the Kerckhoff Marine Laboratory of the Cali- fornia Institute of Technology, the later from the U.S. Naval Missile Center at Point Mugu, California. In the work at Point Mugu, we are indebted to SCUBA divers Billy Scronce and Martin Conboy (USN), who brought in the specimens from Locations 2 and 3. The records given in the table below indicate that Crepidula norrisiarum breeds throughout the year. Of the individuals examined, none that were 25 mm or less in length were found brooding eggs. Of the thirteen indi- viduals on one Norrisia, the males averaged 14.1 mm in length, the females 25.0 mm. Tiny, solitary individuals are often found on the same host with the large ones that are paired. Are these potential males for the females that will develop from the current males? We believe that several new habitats are given and that ten and thirteen individuals per host are rather unusual. That Crepidula norrisiarum was found on Rardallia, a crab that inhabits smooth, open bottom, shows that the limpet is not necessarily confined to a rocky habitat. In the preparation of this manuscript, we are indebted to Dr. Myra Keen for a helpful suggestion. ~ Habitats and Breeding Seasons of Crepidula norrisiarum WILLIAMSON No. of Sizein No. Brooding No. Cap- Eggs or larvae Month Individuals mm Individuals sules per Capsule (Ave.) Habitat Location Jan. 5 1 20 26 larvae 1 Norrisia 1 Feb. 4 1.7- 28 0 3 Mitrella carinata 2 1 3.8 0 1 Nassarius cooperi 2 13 4.1 - 28.3 3 24 - 35 24 -eggs, larvae 1 Norrisia 2 10 4.0 - 34.0 1 1 Norrisia 2 April 8 ? 3 Randallia bulligera (crab) 1 2 1 (larvae with 1.1 mm shells) 1 Norrisia 1 June 2 1 19 15 - 30 larvae’ 1 Norrisia 1 Oct. 2 21, 28 1 eggs 2 Norrisia 3 Location 1: Off Corona Del Mar, California, from 20 to 50 feet deep. Location 2: 34 mi. south of Mugu Rock, near Point Mugu, California, 30 feet deep. Location 3: Off Anacapa Island, California, 100 yards out from Cat Rock, 55 to 60 feet deep. * With the exception of a very few in the center of a capsule, all the larvae were oriented so that the foot was placed against the wall of the capsule. Tue VE .icER, Vol. 7, No. 1 [MacGinitie « MacGiniTiE] Plate 6 Norrisia norrist (SOwERBY, 1838), 48.2 mm in diameter, 40.5 mm high, with thirteen Crepidula norrisiarum WILLIAMSON, 1905, growing on it. Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 35 New Species of Mollusks from the Coast of Brazil BERNARD TURSCH Centro de Pesquisas de Productos Naturais, Faculdade National de Farmacia, Praia Vermelha, Rio de Janeiro ZC-82, Brazil. AND JEAN PIERRET Rua dos Oitis 42, Rio de Janeiro ZC-20, Brazil (5 Text figures) THIs IS THE FIRST in what is hoped to be a series of papers describing new species of mollusks that are coming to light in recent years, due to good opportunities for col- lecting. Cl. PELECYPODA HETERODONTA SEMELIDAE Semele ScHuMACHER, 1817 Semele aurora TurscH & PieRRET, spec. nov. (Figures 1, 2 and 3) Shell white, marked with numerous radial color stripes that are pink to bright orange, the area near the umbones flecked or blotched with red. Texture porcelaneous but somewhat translucent, the external rays showing through to the highly enameled interior surface. Outline subovate, with rounded anterior end, posterior end shorter with a definite flexure. Right valve slightly more convex than Figure 1: Semele aurora, holotype, Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9736. Exterior, right valve. x 1. Recent, Rio de Janeiro. Figure 2: Semele aurora, holotype, Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9736. Interior, right valve. < 1. Recent, Rio de Janeiro. left. Sculpture, in addition to growth lines, of coarsely corrugated concentric ribs, finer near beaks, more widely spaced near margins, stronger on the posterior end. Hinge with two cardinal and two lateral teeth in either valve, the anterior cardinals higher, slightly bifid. External liga- ment supplemented by a resilium in an internal depression or chondrophore behind the two cardinal teeth and nearly parallel to the posterior part of the hinge line. Pallial sinus moderately large. Dimensions: (in millimeters) Length Height Convexity (both valves) Holotype 48.9 41.8 gall Paratype I 38.6 30.6 1335 Paratype IT 38.9 31.4 13.7 Type locality: Off Rio de Janeiro, in 30 fathoms, sand. Repositories: Holotype, Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. Page 36 no. 9736. Paratype I: Museu Nacional, Rio de Janeiro, no. 3116; Paratype Il: American Museum of Natural History, New York. Discussion: This species seems related to Semele purpur- ascens (GMELIN, 1791) but is readily separated by its coarser concentric ribs and its distinctive color pattern. These differences also apply to S. proficua (PULTENEY, Figure 3: Semele aurora, holotype, Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9736. Diagram of hinge of right valve. x 1. Recent, Rio de Janeiro. 1799). From S. casali DoELLo-JuRADO, 1949, of the Ar- gentine coast, it is distinguished by its larger size, smaller pallial sinus, and greater proportionate height. Cl. GASTROPODA CTENOBRANCHIATA PTENOGLOSSA EPITONIDAE Epitonium Répine, 1798 Epitonium (Epitonium) arnaldoi Turscu & PIERRET spec. nov. (Figure 4) Shell small, thin, white, rather fragile, imperforate, with numerous costae. Surface between costae shiny, showing no microscopic sculpture. Whorls about 10, convex, at- tached to one another by the costae. Aperture subcircular, holostomatous. Nuclear whorls 24, glassy, smooth. Whorls of teleoconch flat-sided, enlarging at an angle of approx- imately 35°. Costae blade-like, somewhat solid, produced at a sharp angle on the shoulder of the body whorl. Holotype with 10 costae on body whorl. Operculum un- known. Dimensions: (in millimeters) Tern Vie Nim of whorls Holotype: 11.0 405) 10.0 Paratype: D2 2.9 6++ (probably 2 missing) THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Type locality: Trawled off Punta de Juatinga, Lat. 23°22’ S., Long. 48°28’ W, in 50 meters depth. Repositories: Holotype, Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9737; paratype, Museu Nacional, Rio de Janeiro, no. 3118. Discussion: Epitonium arnaldoi seems to be closely related to E. angulatum (Say, 1830). It can be distinguished by the flat-sided whorls of the spire, contrasting to the convexity of E. angulatum and also by having more whorls for an equal size; for example, a shell of 16 mm length of E. angulatum has 8 whorls, whereas at 11 mm E. arnaldoi has 10, From E. venosum (Sowersy, 1844) and Figure 4: Epitonium arnaldoi, holotype, Stanford Univ. : Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9737. « 4.4. Recent, Rio de Janeiro. E. foliaceicostum (p’OrBicny, 1842) this new species differs by the number of whorls and the number of costae on the body whorl. This species is named after Dr. Arnaldo Campos dos Santos Coelho, Curator of Mollusca at the Museu Nacio- nal of Rio de Janeiro. Epitonium (Epitonium) mauryi TurscH & PIERRET spec. nov. (Figure 5) Shell moderately large (some adults as large as 25 mm in length), thin, white, imperforate, with numerous costae. Surface between costae shiny, showing no micro- scopic sculpture. Whorls up to 11 in number, convex, appressed or slightly separated and attached by the costae only. Aperture subcircular, holostomatous. Nuclear whorls very small, smooth. Spire elongated, spire angle approx- imately 26°. Costae blade-like, rather high, angled at the whorl shoulder, where they reach the maximum height. Body whorl with 13 to 15 costae. Operculum unknown. Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 37 Dimensions: (in millimeters) Length Width Number of whorls Holotype: 18.4 6.5 10.5 Paratype I: 14.4 5.0 10.0 Paratype IT: 18.6 6.5 10.0 Paratype III: 13.5 51D 8.0 (early whorls missing in all specimens listed above) Type locality: Trawled off Punta de Juatinga, Lat. 23°22’ S., 48°28’ W, in 50 meters. Repositories: Holotype, Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9738; Paratype I, Museu Nacional, Rio de Janeiro, no. Harvard; Paratype II, American Museum of Natural History, New York; Paratype III, Museu Nacional, Rio de Janeiro, no. 3117. Discussion: This species is similar to Epitonium fractum Dat, 1927 but differs in having fewer costae on the body whorl, the costae never form spines or hooks at the shoulder angle, and also the whorls are less convex in outline. The new form is trawled together with E. georgettina (KiENEr, 1839), from which it is easily sepa- rated by its smaller size and lower costae. A badly broken shell measured the maximum size of 25.7 mm in length, 9.1 mm in width. This new species is dedicated to Dr. Maury Pinto de Oliveira, Brazilian malacologist. Figure 5: Epitonium mauryi, holotype, Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9738. 2.7. Recent, Rio de Janeiro. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We wish to express our gratitude to Dr. Myra Keen for encouraging this work, critically reading the manuscript, and kindly helping in many ways. We thank Mr. Perfecto Mary, also of Stanford University, for the line drawings used here. Provisional Classification of the Genus Notocypraea SCHILDER, 1927 (Cypraeidae) FRANZ ALFRED SCHILDER University of Halle, German Democratic Republic THERE WAS ALWAYS a great confusion concerning the classification of the so-called species and varieties which belong to the genus Notocypraea ScHILDER, 1927, re- stricted to the coasts of southern Australia and Tasmania. Even the most modern “reviews” by GrirFirHs (1961, 1962) are not satisfying, as he describes ten “species” in alphabetical order without indicating the essential char- acters which distinguish each from the other, so that identification by the aid of the photographs becomes difficult. NAMES The names established for genera, species, subspecies and “varieties” (nomenclatorially of subspecific rank) may be arranged chronologically as follows (|| designates pre-_ occupied names not valid on account of prior homony- ma): (nameless species, pl. 13, fig. QQ) GuattiErt, 1742 (=angustata GMELIN) Cypraea angustata GMeuin, 1791 Cypraea || maculata Perry, 1811 Page 38 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Cypraea piperita Gray, 1825 Cypraea || castanea ANDERSON, 1836 Cypraea (em.) piperata CaATLOw & REEvE, 1845 Cypraea pulicaria REEVE, 1846 Cypraea comptonii Gray, 1847 Cypraea bicolor Gaskoin, 1849 (not 1848) Cypraea declivis SowERBy, 1870 Cypraea (err.) pipitata BRAZIER, 1882 Cypraea angustata var. subcarnea BEDDOME, 1896 Cypraea angustata var. mayi BeppoME, 1898 Cypraea angustata var. albata BEDpoME, 1898 Cypraea angustata var. || globosa Vayssitre, 1910 Erronea (Stolida) angustata piperita var. reticuli- fera ScuILpeErR, 1924 Cypraea piperita var. leucochroa Suuuioti, 1924 Notocypraea (n. g.) ScHiLpER, 1927; type: piperita Gray Notocypraea bicolor emblema IrEDALE, 1931 Notocypraea piperita dissecta IREDALE, 1931 Thelxinovum (n. g.) IREDALE, 1931; type: mollen IREDALE Thelxinovum molleri IREDALE, 1931 Notocypraea verconis CoTTON & GopFREyY, 1932 Notocypraea declivis occidentalis IREDALE, 1935 Guitacypraea (n. g.) IREDALE, 1935; type: pulicaria REEVE Notocypraea (Notocypraea) emblema syn. (em.) molleri ScHILDER, 1941 Guttacypraea euclia STEADMAN & Cotton, 1946 Guttacypraea pulicaria (var.) candida Corn, 1949 Notocypraea angustata (var.) lentiginosa Coren, 1949 (err.) Thelixinovuum ALLAN, 1956; type molleri IREDALE Cypraea (Notocypraca) wilkinsi GrirrirHs, 1959 Cypraea (Notocypraea) trenberthae TRENBERTH, 1961 Notocypraea casta SCHILDER & SuMMERS, 1963 Note: According to the International Rules of Zoo- logical Nomenclature (1958), Art. 31 the name comp- toni should be emended to comptoni, and according to Art. 32 molleri should be emended to moelleri, as this species was named after Capt. Moller [sic]; however, contrary to Art. 31, I do not recommend emending ver- conis to vercoi, though the latter name would not be preoccupied by Zoila friendii vercoi ScuitpER, 1930. The “emendation” of piperita to piperata is not justified. NOMENCLATURE The taxonomic arrangement of these cowries is rather difficult, especially for the following two reasons: 1. The genus Notocypraea is a relatively young one, so that the differentiation into clearly definable species and widely distributed geographical races has not yet been completed: for N. jonesiana (Tate, 1890) seems to be the only Pliocene Notocypraea (known from Victoria and Adelaide), while its Miocene ancestor subregulars Scuitper, 1935 from the Balcombian of Victoria still belongs to the ancestral genus Notoluponia SCHILDER, 1935. 2. GrirrirHs (1962, p. 212) asserts a curious abnor- mality in the ontogeny of Notocypraea: it seems to be abbreviated by the absence of the veliger stage, so that young cowries hatch directly from the egg capsules. This process would favor the development of “local races” in restricted localities, as “the intermixture of genes caused by the long distances travelled by free-swimming larvae” would be suppressed. ‘Therefore, the views about the taxonomic value of species and “varieties” are very different: so, for instance, Verco (1918) regarded all Notocypraea as varieties of one species only (angustata), while Beppome (1898) had distinguished seven species in Tasmania; IREDALE (1935) admitted eight species in the whole area inhab- ited by Notocypraea, and GrirrirHs (1962) ten species; in my last catalogue (ScuitperR, 1941) I admitted four real species, and four to five in the present paper. Besides there are nomenclatorial difficulties: so, for instance, I cannot agree with GrirriTHs’ views con- cerning the use of the specific name piperita, which he has submitted to the International Commission of Zoo- logical Nomenclature (GrirrirHs, 1962a), and I con- tinue to adhere to my interpretation of piperita as explained in a previous paper (SCHILDER, 1961), because I have examined personally the type shells preserved in the British Museum (Natural History). The names angustata and comptoni have been erroneously interpreted as cowrie species living in other regions, viz. as Luponia fuscodentata (Gray, 1825) and Erronea walkeri (SOWER- By, 1832), and therefore have been unnecessarily re- named verconis and trenberthae by Corton & GoDFREY, (1932) and TrENBERTH (1961) respectively. There are many other misidentifications made chiefly by Australian malacologists, e.g. the deep water bicolor (called euclia later on) has been mistaken for pulicaria by Verco, 1912 and VayssikrRE, 1923; and casta, a light whitish un- spotted comptoni used to be called albata in Australian collections, a name established for a monstrosity of angus- tata suffused with heavy white callus. ANIMALS There are probably constant differences in the color of the animal, but though some of them have been described already a hundred years ago (Ancas, 1865), our present knowledge is very poor and not sufficient for taxonomic arrangement. Vol. 7; No. 1 The radula shows differences which far exceed the limits observed between real species of other cowrie genera. The median tooth shows three types with regard to its basal. teeth: 1 They are rather closely set near the center of the base; GrirrirHs (1962, pl. 4) figured this type in Noto- cypraea pulicaria, N. bicolor (called “piperita”), N. euclia, N. wilkinsi, and N. occidentalis (“species W”), but also in the large median of the holotype of N. em- blema; in N. dissecta and in the young specimen called “species Y” these basal teeth are slightly more separated. 2 They are displaced to the corners of the median where they form oblique denticles in Notocypraea comp- toni, N. casta (according to a personal communication by GrirrirHs), N. declivis (according to VAYSSIERE, 1923) as well as in the “‘species Z” the median of which looks like a monstrosity. 3 They unite with the corners themselves so that they appear less distinct in Notocypraea angustata and N. moelleri. Personal examination of some few radulae showed Notocypraea reticulifera (from Albany) to be like N. bicolor as figured by GrirFirHs, while two N. bicolor (from Tumby Bay in the Spencer Gulf) show short broad basal teeth approaching each other as it is in N. dissecta, but they protrude behind like in N. emblema, and the plate itself is almost as oblong as in GrirFITHS’ “species Y”. Oliviform N. piperita (sensu ScHILDER) from Alba- ny agree with GrirFirHs’ “comptonii” as well as my piperita (Phillip Island) and my trenberthae (Tumby Bay), and as a radula of “comptonu’’ (from Victoria) preserved in the British Museum, but without a shell; an “angustata”’ (from Tasmania) preserved in the British Museum in the same way agrees with the latter and not with angustata of GRIFFITHS. The admedians and laterals are tricuspid anteriorly in Notocypraea reticulifera (Albany), N. euclia (“pulica- ria’ VAYSSIERE, 1923), and N. wilkinsi (GrirFiTHs, 1959). In the five smallest specimens among eight olivi- form N. piperita (Albany) the admedian exhibits four to five denticles on its anterior border, as it is in N. piperita (Phillip Island), N. trenberthae (Tumby Bay), N. compton (Victoria), and N. declivis (Tasmania: VayssIERE, 1923). Occasionally the laterals also may be adorned by more than three denticles in front. These observations point to a great variability in the features of the radula, which has been noted also in other cowrie species {e. g. Bistolida stolida (LiINNAEUus, 1758) : median with or without basal teeth; Staphylaea limacina - (Lamarck, 1810): laterals long and slender or broadly hook-like}. Nevertheless the five species conchologically distinguished below may be characterized by the basal teeth of the median of the radula as follows: THE VELIGER 1 Strong, conspicuous - Obsolete, confluent with the corners Fionn donot aen Notocypraea angustata 2 Rather central .. N. pulicaria, N. bicolor - Near to the corners JN. piperita, N. declivis eee eesee SHELLS The characters of the shell are also rather variable, so that extreme varieties become hardly distinguishable, if one compares each pair of adjacent species of the sequence Notocypraea pulicaria, N. bicolor, N. piperita and N. angustata. The great majority of rather typical specimens, however, is always well recognizable. Moreover, most species are separable into several “subspecies” of various degree (see below), which can be identified according to the following dichotomous key: 1 Fossula concave, projecting in its posterior half; teeth extremely fine; shell cylindrical, dorsum low; pale, with 4 narrow interrupted zones and well defined OUNKODWS COS coccccob0c0dd00000000000000000 Notocypraea pulicaria - Fossula shallow, projecting at most in its anterior half; teeth fine; shell oblong to ovate, dorsum raised, irregularly freckled if spotted at all .......... (2) 2 Anterior edge of the fossula not connected with the interior wall of the dorsum; dorsum not humped, extremities produced, outer lip margined, basally narrow and convex, teeth short, fine, fossula and columellar sulcus often concave ............ (3) - Anterior edge of the fossula connected with the inte- rior wall of the dorsum; dorsum humped, extremi- ties short, outer lip less margined, broad (so that the aperture becomes more central) and flattened, labial teeth produced to ribs, columellar teeth slightly coarser; fossula and columellar sulcus reduced as well as the inner part of the anterior terminal ridge; dorsal zones absent to obsolete, terminal blotches con- FMMUG=bossccoondoansep ended dooms aoe Notocypraea (angustata) (13) 3 Dorsum whitish, mostly freckled or reticulate with fulvous, 4 zones (if present) interrupted into large blotches, posterior zone also distinct, anterior ter- INinlalaspotssobsoOletemmerenryctrysisl le celle Notocypraea bicolor (4) Dorsum mostly fawn (though varying from white to dark purple), often with chestnut spots in its lateral parts, 4 zones narrow but less interrupted, the central pair being accentuated while the terminal zones become obsolete, anterior terminal spots conspicuous Notocypraea piperita (8) 4 Dorsal zones distinct, lateral spots dark ...... (5) - Dorsal zones absent, lateral spots obsolete (pale to ANSE) chonovoccogooouocbUbUobcoGO60Kn6 (7) Page 40 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 5 Shell oblong, light, white with pale fulvous markings, dorsal zones narrow and distant ............ Notocypraea bicolor occidentalis | - Shell subpyriform, solid, pale flesh color with fulvous MMEVITINES 6 docvgcenodo0onoaoodGCNZN0000000 (6) 6 Dorsal zones narrow and distant, shell less solid Notocypraea bicolor reticulifera - Dorsal zones broad (the central pair often confluent), Anal] GNC! Gooboooacogooc0dd go DoDD DD OK0NS Notocypraea bicolor bicolor 7 Shell subpyriform; lives in shallow waters .... Notocypraea bicolor wilkinsi - Shell very oblong; lives in deep waters ...... - Notocypraea bicolor eucla 8 Shell oblong to subcylindrical, base less callous (9) - Shell rather pyriform, attenuated in front .. (10) 9 Fossula rather projecting and concave; anterior ex- themMItyaCONnstrictediaaeaniee eae center Notocypraea piperita dissecta Fossula less developed; anterior extremity dilated Notocypraea piperita piperita 10 Margins spotted, dorsum zonate ........... (11) - Margins unspotted, dorsum inzonate, whitish .. Notocypraea piperita casta 11 Shell rather slender and light, dorsal zones pale (the central pair often confluent), lateral spots fine, base mostlysfulVousyCONVEXa Heer (12) - Shell broad, callous, dorsal zones conspicuous (cent- tral pair mostly disjunct), lateral spots coarser, basemwhitishwahlattened samen ae reerieiet Notocypraea piperita mayi 12 Dorsum dark brown to purplish, base fuliginous Notocypraea piperita trenberthae - Dorsum fawn, base pale orange .............. Notocypraea piperita comptoni 13 Dorsum pale, closely freckled, lateral spots rather fine Notocypraea (angustata) declivis - Dorsum unspotted, lateral spots rather coarse .. . Notocypraea angustata (14) 14 Shell rather light, dorsum pale, mostly with 4 indistinct zones, pase often pale tleshucoloniar remeron Notocypraca angustata moelleri - Shell solid, dorsum chestnut to gray-brown, inzonate, bases white ie icriety ci woatenant etree cer tees Notocypraca angustata angustata ILLUSTRATIONS Typical shells of the species and subspecies characterized above are represented by the following figures in SowEr- By (1870) [S], Beppome (1898) [B], Attan (1956: bad and distorted) [A], and Grirrirus (1961 [G'] and 1962 [G']) : [Al (G'), (G7 Notocypraea pulicaria | 290-291 45-46 occidentali. 57-59 64-66 reticulifera bicolor 288-289 47-50 533 wilkinst 60-63 eucha 34-36 dissecta 28-33 piperita 285-286 : 10-12 trenberthae| 293 13 comptoni | 294-295 : 17 mayt : 19-20 casta 21 declis —{328*-329* 22-24 moelleri 37-39 angustata | 296-297 : 1-7 Besides: N. subcarnea [B| 8-10; N. albata [B] 11; N. N. emblema [A] 4:13-14. QUANTITATIVE CHARACTERS The following table has been calculated by Dr. Maria Schilder; it contains L =length of the shell in mm, BL ==maximum breadth expressed in % of L, and the number of labial (== LT) and columellar (= CT) teeth reduced to shells of L==25 mm (see Proc. Malac. Soc. London 23: 124; 1938). The figures taken from about 900 shells measured by us have been balanced with those given by GrirritHs, 1962. The first figure desig- nates the mean, the two figures added in parentheses express the variation of about 90% of the specimens (i. e. four times the standard deviation), thus excluding the rare extreme shells. One will observe a general increase in L and BL, but a decrease in LT and CT. (see table, page 41) DISTRIBUTION The geographical range of the species and subspecies dis- tinguished above is as follows (only reliable localities of specimens examined by us, or described or figured by _ other writers in a satisfactory way. have been considered) Notocypraea pulicaria Rottnest Island to Flinders Bay occidentalis Cape Naturaliste to Cape Leeuwin reticulifera Flinders Bay to Esperance bicolor Fowlers Bay to Eden; Tasmania wilkinsi Victoria: Flinders to Liptrap euclia West of Eucla (deep water) dissecta Green Cape to Twofold Bay (deep water ) Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 41 L BL LT CT Notocypraea mulicania 17. (15-20) 56 (53-59) 29 (26-31) 27 (24-31) occidentalis 19 (16-23) 9 (56-62) 27 (24-29) 23 (20-25) Per oulitena 20 (17-25) 59 (56-63) 26 (24-28) 22 (19-25) biaalen 99 (18-25) aren 64) 26 (24-28) 22 (19-25) “deine 20 (17-24) 59 (54- a 27 (25-29) 22 (20-25) axonal 20 (17-24) : (51-55) 28 (26-30) 25 (23-27) Hessoaia 90 (17-23) 56 (53-59) 28 (26-31) 23 (21-25) Lice 21 (18-26) 60 (57-64) 25 (22-28) 21 (19-24) ie berthae 24 (20-27) 59 (56-62) 24 (22-27) 21 (19-23) comptoni 93 (19-27) 62 (59-66) 24 (21-27) 21 (19-24) mani 93 (20-27) 65 (61-68) 24 (22-27) 21 (19-24) G08 24 (21-28) 62 (59-65) 24.(22-27) 19 (18-22) Meelis BE (20-27) 66 (63-69) 24 (22-27) 19 (17-22) moelleri 4 (20-27) 2 (58-65) se (23-28) 20 (19-23) angustata 5, (22-30) 7 (64-71) 4 (21-27) 19 (17-22) piperita Cape Leeuwin to Eden TAXONOMY trenberthae Spencer Gulf: ‘Tumby Bay (locally) The Notocypraea characterized in the dichotomous key comptoni Hopetown to Malacoota; ‘Tasmania should be comprised into four or five species: mayi Port Mac Donnell to Malacoota ; 1. Notocypraea pulicaria, which is geographically the Tasmania only species restricted to less cold waters, and morpho- casta Port Mac Donnell (locally ) logically the only well separable species among its allies, declivis Port Mac Donnell to Lorne; Tasmania showing characters least aberrant from other Cyprae- moellert Lakes Entrance to Eden (deep water) ovulinae; nevertheless I do not recommend to separate angustata Port Drummond to Eden; Tasmania it as a monotypical subgenus Guttacypraea; Therefore, Notocypraea pulicaria is almost restricted to the southern west coast of Australia, with the center at Cape Naturaliste. -Its range approximately coincides with that of N. occidentalis which is connected both geo- graphically and morphologically by WN. reticulifera (western south coast) with the typical N. bicolor (eastern south coast and Tasmania) ; N. wilkinsi seems to be at most a local mutant from Victoria, and N. euclia is the deep water representant of N. bicolor in the Great Aus- tralian Bight. - The third species, N. piperita, is not represented on the west coast, but otherwise its range is similar to that of N. bicolor; however, the slender subspecies do not reach Tasmania (the typical N. piper- ita occurs from south-western Australia to Eden, and is replaced by N. dissecta in the deep waters of southern New South Wales), while the pyriform N. comptoni and N. mayt reach Tasmania (the latter evidently does not spread west of Victoria); N. trenberthae and N. casta seem to be local mutants living in restricted areas only. - The fourth species, N. angustata, evidently originated in the Bass Strait: while N. declivis seems to be restricted . to this area, N. angustata occurs sporadically as far as to the Spencer Gulf and Eden, and is replaced by N. moelleri in the deep waters of southern New South Wales. 2. Notocypraea bicolor, which approaches it in some respects and evidently originated farther west along the south coast, than 3. Notocypraea piperita did, which approaches espe- cially in color the most eastern species, 4. Notocypraea angustata (from which N. declivis possibly can be separated as a more primitive species) : this species is restricted to the coldest regions around the Bass Strait and shows the most unusual features (fossula!) so that it should be regarded as the last extreme offspring of the phylogenetic branch called Notocypraea. Therefore, this sequence of species seems to indicate the way of evolution of the genus; it is confirmed by other units named in the key above, which partially seem to be connecting links between the typical repre- sentatives of the four species. The other eleven taxa should be classified as sub- species according to the International Rules of Zoolog- ical Nomenclature, though their significance in evolution is quite unequal: but this essential fact has not been considered by the Rules so that all units must be treated formally as equal. There are only three taxa forming a cline, which are separated geographically so well that they should be ~~ Page 42 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 called geographical (chorological) races: occidentalis, reticulifera, and bicolor (the former is more separated morphologically than the two last named each from the | other). In other pairs excluding each member from the other, viz. piperita - dissecta and angustata - moelleri there are differences in the depth of the inhabited waters; euclia is a deep water “race” of reticulifera inhabiting the adjacent shores. The relation between piperita - comptoni - mayi is Jess evident: as their geo- graphical distribution is greatly overlapping (though differing slightly in border areas) they look like an eco- logical cline. Other “subspecies” (for which the unoffi- cial term “infraspecies’” would be more adequate) seem to represent local mutants which recently arose so that there was no time to spread (“no veliger”!): wilkinsi from bicolor; trenberthae and casta from comptoni. Possibly the status of declivis may be similar, as it agrees with angustata in all essential characters except the freckled dorsum; but it has spread to a large area within that of angustata, and there are few intermediates so so that one could treat declivis also as a fifth species, especially if the differences in the radula should be proved. The other names mentioned above in the chronological list should be regarded as synonyms as they designate individual modifications at most: subcarnea and || glo- bosa refer to angustata pathologically suffused with yel- lowish enamel, and albata likewise with white enamel so that the lateral spots become hidden and the base very callous; leucochroa is a name for the “albinism” of “piperita (SOLANDER) Gray”, therefore it may be a piperita the dorsum of which is white instead of fawn (I have seen such a zonate white shell with spotted mar- gins), or even - if it should be interpreted as pure white - a prior synonym of casta; candida, however, probably is an albinotic pulicaria or based on a beach worn shell of this species; emblema seems to be identical with moelleri in spite of the differences in radula; lentiginosa (not preoccupied!) is an absolute synonym of declivis, as well as || maculata, || castanea and verconis are syno- nyms of angustata. CLASSIFICATION The Notocypraea discussed above can be arranged in the following list which shows the evolutionary trend (s = subspecies and i= infraspecies limited c = chor- ologically (geographically) or e = ecologically; ir = re- stricted mutants; v = individual variants; the — sign indicates important synonyma, || designates preoccupied names, / denotes authors who used the name not in the original meaning). Notocypraea ScuttpEr, 1927 type: piperita Gray = Thelxinovum IrepaLe, 1931, type: moelleri IREDALE = Guttacypraea IrEDALE, 1935, type: pulicaria REEVE pulicaria ReEve, 1846 = candida Corn, 1949 bicolor Gasxoin, 1849 sc occidentalis IREDALE, 1935 sc reticulifera SCHILDER, 1924 ie euclia STEADMAN & Cotton, 1946 = pulicaria /VERcO, 1912, VayssikreE, 1923 sc bicolor Gasxoin, 1849 = piperita /Sowersy, 1832 /GRIFFITHs, 1961, 1962 ir wilkinst GrirFitHs, 1959 piperita Gray, 1825 : se piperita Gray, 1825; Gasxoin, 1849 = comptoni /GrirrirHs, 1961, 1962 ie dissecta IREDALE, 1931 se comptoni (em.) Gray, 1847 ir trenberthae TRENBERTH, 1961 ir casta SCHILDER & SUMMERS, 1963 = compton var./CoTTON & GopFREY, 1932 ?== leucochroa Suuuioti, 1924 se mayi BEppomE, 1898 declivis SowErBy, 1870 (ir of angustata ?) = angustata /Gray, 1828 = lentiginosa Corn, 1949 angustata GMELIN, 1791; Gray, 1825 == || maculata Perry, 1811 = || castanea ANvERSON, 1836 == subcarnea /ScHILDER, 1927 = bicolor /TrepAtE, 1931 = verconis CoTToN & GoprrReEy, 1932 v subcarnea BEDDoME, 1896, 1898 = || globosa Vaysstbre, 1910 v albata BeDpoME, 1898 ie moelleri (em.) IREDALE, 1931 = emblema Irepate, 1931 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The present study is based mainly on several hundred specimens with exact locality data, sent to me chiefly by Dr. C. M. Burgess, Col. R. J. Griffiths, Mr. Ray Sum- mers, and Mr. B. R. Wilson (they had been collected © in part by Mrs. Bowman, Constantine, Crabbe, Lang, Marsh and ‘Trenberth) . I am much obliged to these mala- cologists for allowing me to keep about 600 specimens in Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 43 my collection for permanent study; this number is about six times as large as the sum total of all Notocypraea which I could study in the public and private collections of almost all countries of Europe. Most specimens came from Victoria and West Australia, some interesting shells also from South Australia, whereas my personal know- ledge of specimens from Tasmania and New South Wales is still rather limited. LITERATURE CITED ALLAN, JoycE 1956. Cowry shells of world seas. Georgian House, Mel- bourne. i-x;; pp. 1-170; plts. 1-15. BeppoME, C. E. 1898. Notes on species of Cypraea inhabiting the shores of Tasmania. Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 22: 564 - 576; pit. 31. GrirfitHs, R. JoHN 1961. Notocypraea — The shells. The Cowry 1 (2): 10-14 [= 26 - 30]; plts. 3-4. 1962. A review of the Cypraeidae genus Notocypraea. Mem. Nat. Mus. Victoria, no. 25: 211-231; 4 plts. 1962 a. Cypraea piperita Gray, 1825 (Gastropoda) ; proposed suppression under the plenary powers. Z. N. (S.) 1510. Bull. Zool. Nomencl., 19 (5): 317 - 322. SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED 1961. Nachtrage zum Katalog der Cypraeacea von 1941. Arch. Moll. 90 (4-6): 145 - 153 Sowersy, Greorce BRETTINGHAM (second of name) 1870. Cypraea. In Thes. Conch., 4: 58 pp.; 37 plts. The Egg Capsule and Young of Beringius eyerdam: Smitu (Neptuneidae) I. McT. COWAN University of British Columbia, Canada (Plate 7) Beringius eyerdami Smiru, 1959, though only recently discovered and described, is widely distributed along the coast of British Columbia. I now have specimens from seven localities between Swiftsure Light in the entrance to Juan de Fuca Strait and Hakai Pass near Calvert Island. More specimens have been secured in Hecate Strait than in any other region. Here it occurs at depths of about 50 fathoms on relatively smooth bottoms of sandy mud with some gravel and shell. Associated with it here are Neptunea lirata (GmeE1IN, 1791), N. smirnia (Datt, 1919) and an unnamed species of Neptunea that is presently under study by Allyn Smith of the California Academy of Sciences. On a voyage that lasted from April 8 to 13, 1962, a trawler operating on Goose Island Banks, Hecate Strait, B. C., brought up in its net three specimens of Beringius eyerdami and, along with them, a valve of Pecten cau- - rinus to which were attached three egg capsules of a type new to me. While the mere association of the capsules with the adult B. eyerdami would not in itself serve to identify them, a close study of the young in the capsules has convinced me that they are that species. The capsules are larger than any reported so far in this group of mollusks and differ also in some other features. Each capsule is cemented to the substrate by a double flap-like extension of its outer material arising from its long edge. Each is a thin pouch-like vessel placed so as to overlap the next one (Plate 7, fig. 1). The capsules measured wet were 42.2 mm by 32.6 mm; 41.5 mm by 31 mm and 41 mm by 38 mm. When dry, corresponding measurements are 38 by 25, 38 by 24, and 35 by 28 millimeters. The outer surfaces of the capsules are of an off-white colour, and when wet appear very pale yellow. Each capsule is a complete envelope within an envelope, the two differing in structure but of approximately equal thickness. The inner envelope, however, is much tougher, more difficult to cut than the outer, and when wet, is strongly resistant to tearing. Two of the capsules were intact, and in these the edges were firmly closed all vs. Page 44 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 round, with no visible trace of a suture. The one empty capsule is ruptured along and immediately below the free edge. From this edge projects a tuft of coarse yellow fibres. The outer element of the capsule is about 0.15 mm in thickness, smooth, and, at 50 < magnification, it reveals no structure. Beneath this surface is a corneous layer bearing on its inner surface fine ridges parallel and in the long axis of the capsule. These are irregularly spaced and have the appearance of hairs cemented to the surface. The most distinctive feature of the capsule is that the entire space between the inner and outer envelopes is packed with long slender fibres strongly yellow in colour. These are arranged in the long axis of the structure. Many of them are attached to the inner surface of the outer capsule and appear to be continuous with it and of the same material. The longer threads are about 40 mm in length and most are free at each end. The outer surface of the inner capsule bears many delicate laminae, again in the long axis of the capsule. They differ in height and spacing but average 44 laminae per millimeter. Some are plain, others sinuous. Many of the interenvelope fibres appear to arise as lamellae detached from this inner capsule. The surface lining the brood chamber is smoothly finished and without appar- ent structural detail. - Young: Each of the complete capsules contains 5 young, two of the ten were crushed and could not be measured. The first 5 listed below were Capsule mates as were the last 3. Those 12 mm or more in length bear 3 whorls, the others about 24 whorls (Plate 7, fig. 2). In each the nuclear whorls originate in an apical concretion and increase rapidly in size. For the first half of the first whorl the suture is deeply channeled, beyond that it is normal for the adult of the species. At 23 whorls the deep narrow spiral grooves and intervening wide rounded ridges of the adult sculp- ture are clearly apparent. The nuclear whorls are covered in a delicate cuticle that wrinkles on drying. The structure of the apical concretion of the first nuclear whorl in these young differs importantly from that in capsular or newly emerged young of Neptunea tabulata Bairp, 1863, N. smirnia (Dat, 1919), N. phoe- nicea (Dati, 1919), N. lirata, and N. pribiloffensis (Dati, 1919). In all these the apex is swollen and stud- like and is not bounded internally by a deep sutural groove. In Beringius eyerdami, on the other hand, it is smaller, discrete, and clearly separated from the first whorl by a deep sutural groove. This may prove to be a generic characteristic. Table 1 Dimensions of capsule young of Beringius eyerdami (measurements in millimeters) Width of Aperture _ first second Height length Nuclear Whorl 9.95 4.4 3.5 4.6 12.0 52 3.7 4.5 11.0 4.75 3r00 4.2 V2 4.4 3.7 4.9 94 4.85 3.5 5.0 12.5 5.6 3)S8) 4.6 11.6 4:9 4.1 4.7 10.9 5.4 4.0 ae) A comparison of the shell thickness of the nuclear whorls at this stage with the thickness of the nuclear whorls attached to the adult shell reveals that a great increase in calcification of the nucleus takes place after the young leave the capsule. It also suggests that the whorls on the adult shell that are usually referred to as the nucleus include one or more post nuclear whorls that have lost their distinctive sculpture. In the present specimens two to two and a half whorls constitute the true nucleus, Tue VEuicrErR, Vol. 7, No. 1 [Cowan] Plate 7 gy yma | Figure 1: Two Capsules im situ. Figure 2: Capsule opened to show young and abundant interenvelope “hair”. fy my Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 45 Notes on the Peculiar Egg Laying Habit of an Antarctic Prosobranch (Mollusca : Gastropoda) JOEL W. HEDGPETH Pacific Marine Station, Dillon Beach, California (1 Text figure) MANY MARINE INVERTEBRATES Of colder waters, including those of the deep sea, produce large yolky eggs, and these in turn produce rather large, non-pelagic larval stages. Among the mysteries of deep-sea biology is the means of reproduction of pycnogonids of the genus Colossendeis. There are perhaps thirty species in this genus, among them the largest known pycnogonids. Yet no specimen of the hundreds so far collected has been observed in the reproductive state, and the nature of the eggs of this genus and of the related polymerous forms (Decolopoda, Pentacolossendeis, and Dodecolo- poda) is unknown. For this reason close attention is paid to various objects adhering to these pycnogonids. In examining the extensive collections of pycnogonids from Antarctic waters, several specimens were observed with rows of eggs, slightly more than a millimeter in in diameter, adhering to the legs. These appear to be the eggs of some prosobranch mollusk (Figure 1). These eggs are usually on the ventral surface of the long joints (femur and tibia) of the legs, but in one specimen they were on the ventral surface of the body. These posi- tions are apparently out of reach of the terminal segments of the accessory egg-carrying legs (ovigers), which are used by those pycnogonids to groom themselves. Since the four short terminal segments form a sort of shepherd’s crook that is applied to the dorsal surface of the long legs, it would appear that a narrow area of the ventral surface of the legs may not be reached in cleaning. For this reason it cannot be assumed that the pattern of a single or double row of eggs along the leg is the charac- teristic form of the egg mass of the mollusk. These eggs were observed on three specimens of Colos- sendeis megalonyx Horx, 1881, a common and widely distributed Antarctic species. This is a moderately sized Colossendeis, attaining a span of about six inches. The specimens were from Eltanin stations 410 (61°18’ to 61°19’30” S; 56°08’30” to 56°10'12” W; 120 to 131 fathoms, December 31, 1962), and 437 (62°49'36” to 62°50’30” S; 60°40’ to 60°34’42” W; 146 to 170 fathoms, January 9, 1963). Figure 1: A. Coxa, femur and part of tibia of a specimen of Colossendeis megalonyx, showing arrangement of egg capsules; B- C. Views of embryo removed from capsule. Page 46 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Long legged pycnogonids have been observed to walk about in a somewhat unstable manner, and their high ratio of surface to volume makes it easy for currents to move them about. On at least one occasion deep sea pycnogonids of this genus were observed floating near the bottom during a bathyscaphe dive (T: Monon, 1954, Bathyfolages, p. 167). It would appear that the dispersal of pycnogonids is probably easier than that of shelled gastropods, and it is obvious that in this example at least the pycnogonid is a potential means for dispersion beyond the immediate site of egg deposition of at least one species of Antarctic mollusk. Ten New Species of Typhinae (Gastropoda: Muricidae) A. MYRA KEEN Department of Geology, Stanford University, California AND G. BRUCE CAMPBELL Sea of Cortez Marine Research Center 10009 California Avenue, South Gate, California (Plates 8 to 11; 3 Textfigures) IN THE TWENTY YEARS since a review of the Typhinae was published (Kren, 1944), much new information has accumulated. Authors have described a number of species that modify or add to the distributional picture then drawn up, and the study of fresh specimens and better material has indicated the need of another revision. Because, however, of a prospect for first-hand study of type material in certain European collections, this is being postponed for the time being. To put on record the undescribed forms presently before us seems desirable, in the hope that this stimulus will bring to light other unrecorded information collectors may have that would be useful in our projected review of the entire subfamily. New interpretations of typhine morphology have been expressed by Freminc (1962) and Vexta (1961). We shall reserve a more extended discussion of these for the proposed revisional work. VELLA, for example, would consider that most of the new species described herein have 4.2 “growth-steps” or varices per whorl, for as there is an offset of each varix below the one on the whorl preceding, it usually requires two complete turns for a varix to fall immediately below an earlier one. We continue, however, in the interest of simplicity, to describe such shells as having 4 varices per whorl, aware that the precise number may be any fraction between 4.0 and 4.9. Typhis (Typhina) imperialis KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Plate 8, figures 1 to 4) Shell of moderate size, biconic, spire somewhat elevated; teleoconch of five whorls; protoconch of two whorls; nucleus small, flattened, in a central position, gradually expanding, with rounded whorls; varices four per whorl, a single spine at the shoulder curves dorsally and medially, remaining free from the preceding whorl; outer lip narrow and foliated with four or five crenulations between the shoulder and the anterior canal; varices thin, ‘ convex; shoulders acute, with a suture between the tip of the tube and the succeeding varix; suture distinct, moderately deep; tubes stout, arising about midway between varices, directed dorsally, with a decided ad- apical curve (see Table 1 for tube angles); aperture oval, with produced peristome flaring at margin to form Vol. 7; No. 1 a secondary varix; siphonal fasciole with remnants of earlier canals; umbilical region not deeply grooved or perforate; anterior canal long, widened, closed, with slight bend to right and a noticeable fin-like spur on the labial side. Type Material: Holotype at present is in the Akibumi Teramachi collection, Kyoto, Japan. The paratype is in the Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9727. Exact replicas of the holotype have been prepared in natural color out of acrylic plastic. One is on deposit in the Stan- ford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9728. As others are prepared they will be distributed to the major repositories. Type Locality: Holotype and paratype were trawled off Tosa, Japan in approximately 200 m. Lat. 33° 20’ N; Long. 133° 40’ E. Age: Recent. Dimensions: Height 16.5 mm, maximum diameter 10.2 mm (holotype). Height 16.2 mm, maximum diameter 9.8 mm (paratype). Remarks: This deep-water species has a close affinity to the Australian species Typhis (Typhina) yatesi CRossE & FiscHer, 1865 but is distinguished by a different angle of exit of the tubes, more convex body whorl, with a decidedly contracted base, and narrower anterior canal. Among the Japanese typhine fauna Typhis imperialis spec. nov. belongs in a compact group that includes T. (Iyphina) montforti A. Apams, 1863'; T. ( Typhina) tosaensis AZUMA, 1960 represented by a single specimen, the holotype, that was trawled in excess of 200 m off Tosa, Japan (this species is also the type species for ' Mr. Teramachi estimates there are less than a dozen specimens known; he kindly gave us one beautiful specimen measuring 17.2 mm by 6.5 mm that was trawled in 60 m off Kii, Japan (see Plate 8, figures 5 to 7). THE VELIGER Page 47 Monstrotyphis) ; and T. (Typhina) teramachii spec. nov. trawled off Kii, Japan in more than 100 m and also known from only the holotype. The similarities and differences can be summarized best in the form of a table that includes only the more obvious points. The protoconchs of all five species have the same general form - an eccentric nucleus followed by 1} to 14 smooth, round, gradually expanding whorls. Tube angles on a number of species have been meas- ured and compared and it was found that there is rather wide variation between species belonging to the same group, but within a given species minimal variation in the angle of tube exit was noted. At the present time it is considered that these angles have limited systematic value primarily on a specific level. One example of the value of the angle of tube exit is the subgenus Indotyphis Keen, 1944 in which the last tube is bent ventrally and soldered to the succeeding varix. For the sake of compar- ison, two of the tube angles are tabulated (Table 1) for each of the five species. These are more easily measured from photographs than using the actual shell because one is then working with a flat surface and the shell picture can be enlarged, increasing the accuracy of the measurement. For the “vertical angle” the shell is oriented with the aperture facing left, and the angle is measured between the long axis of the tube near the point of exit and the edge of plane that transects the shell at mid- aperture level (this is at a right angle to the shell’s spiral axis). To determine the “dorsal angle” the shell is viewed from the “top,” that is, the apex; the angle is measured between the long axis of the tube near the point of exit and a line drawn across, parallel with the edge of the aperture. The relationship between the tube and aperture remains constant. Table 1 Species Shell shape Tube angles’ Varices (excl. Varical shoulder Anterior canal Vertical Dorsal shoulder spine) spine Typhis imperialis _ Biconic 24° 84° 4 crenulations Fluted; curved Widened, a fluted spec. nov. dorsally spine present T. montfortiu Narrowly Gis 47° 4 crenulations Almost closed ; Long, narrow, A. Apams, 1863 __biconic vertical smooth T. teramachu Fusiform 3305 ad 8 crenulations Closed; recurved Long, narrow, spec. nov. ventrally smooth T. tosaensis Markedly ca.60° ca.30° 4 recurved spines Long, narrow Long, narrow, a Azuma, 1960 fusiform closed, recurved closed spine present T. yatesi CRosst & Biconic DR 80° 4-5 crenulations Partially closed, Widened, a fluted Fiscuer, 1865 > see text recurved ventrally spine present Page 48 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 It becomes evident for reliability that tubes measured in a series of shells of the same or different species must be at the same relative stage of development. Ideally this means the last tube in adult shells of the same relative size or age and number of whorls. This was the case for the measurements in Table 1. Typhis (Typhina) teramachtti KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Plate 8, figures 9 to 11) Shell of moderate size, elongate; spire markedly elevated ; teleoconch of five whorls; protoconch of 12 whorls, sub- cylindrical, gradually expanding, forming rounded whorls; nucleus eccentric and smooth; varices four per whorl, with a single spine at the shoulder which is trough-shaped, closed and recurved; varices thin, convex, and free from preceding whorl; lip narrow and foliated with eight forward curving crenulations; shoulder high on spire whorls, acute; periphery moderately contracted to form deep suture; carina between tip of tube and succeeding varix small; tubes long, slender, with a slight bend toward base, steeply inclined toward apex and obliquely to the rear, origin about midway between varices but exit closer to preceding varix (see Table 1 for tube angles) ; aperture oval, with a produced peristome that expands at margin, forming a secondary varix; siphonal fasciole with remnants of previous anterior canals; anterior canal very long, narrow, closed throughout, with a slight dorsal curve. Type Material: Holotype at present is in the Akibumi Teramachi collection, Kyoto, Japan. Exact replicas of the holotype have been prepared in white acrylic plastic and one is on deposit in the Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll., no. 9729. As others are prepared they will be distributed among several major institutions. Type Locality: Trawled off Kii, Japan in more than 100 m. Holotype only specimen known. Lat. 33° 48’ N; Long. 134° 53’ E. Age: Recent. Dimensions: Height 20.7 mm, maximum diameter 8.3 mm (holotype). Remarks: Typhis teramachii spec. nov. has all the features of Typhina in a narrowed interpretation based on T- (Typhina) belcheri Broverip, 1833. It differs from that species by being considerably more fusiform, with dif- ferent tube morphology. Overall sculpture is that of T. (Typhina) montfortu A. ApamMs, 1863, a more biconic Recent Japanese species with tubes directed decidedly more apically and radially (see Table 1). A species similar in shape and laxness of coiling is the Recent Japanese form T: ( Typhina) tosaensis Azuma, 1960, but this species has four prominent spines on the outer lip, one of which is at the shoulder, and a long, narrow, curving spur on the anterior canal. It is likely that T)phina originated in the Australian area, the oldest record being Typhis (Typhina) maccoyi TENISON-Woops, 1876° (see Plate 8, figure 8) from the Janjukian (Oligocene), it is not surprising to find a similar loosely-coiled, elongate form in the Australian Tertiary, T. (Typhina) disjunctus Tate, 1888 (see Plate 8, figure 12) from the Balcombian (lower Miocene). We take pleasure in naming this species in honor of Mr. Akibumi Teramachi, a well known Japanese collector who has been responsible for the discovery of many new and rare Japanese shells and has been very generous in sharing material. Typhis (Typhisopsis) clarki KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Plate 9, figures 15, 19 and 23) Shell of medium size, light brown to creamy white, lighter on the parts of the lip varix face above and below the apertural opening; teleoconch whorls five or more; apex not well preserved on any specimens in the type lot * Some authors prefer to retain this species in Typhis s. s. because of the nature of the varical spines, but since it has features of both groups we have chosen to place it in Typhina, recognizing that it may represent a transition stage. Explanation of Plate 8 Figure 1: Typhis (Typhina) imperialis Knzn & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. Ventral view of holotype. < ele Figure 2: Lateral view; Figure 3: Apical view. Figure 4: Paratype SUPTC no. 9727 2.75. Figure 5: Typhis (Typhina) montfortii A. Apams, 1863. (off Kii, Japan, 60 m). Ventral view. < 2.6. Figure 6: Lateral view. Figure 7: Apical view. Figure 8: Typhis ( Typhina) maccoyi Tentson-Woops, 1876. (Manyung Rocks, Victoria, Australia; Oligocene?) Ventral view. < 2.0. Figure 9: Typhis (Typhina) teramachii Keren & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. Ventral view of holotype 2.2. Figure 10: Lateral view. Figure 11: Apical view. Figure 12: Typhis (Typhina) disjuncta Tare, 1888, Ventral view. (Balcombe River, Australia; lower Miocene). X 3. [KEEN &« CamppeELt] Plate 8 Tue VELIcER, Vol. 7, No. 1 G. Bruce CAMPBELL photography: Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 49 but apparently of 14 smooth turns; varices 4 per whorl; spiral sculpture weak but showing as festooning along the outer part of the lip varix; suture irregular, whorls excavated above the periphery to form a concave plat- form behind each remnant of a previous varix; tubes brown, long, slender, each tube soldered to the down- ward-sloping remnant of a previous varix-top or callus pad; anterior canal sealed, ending in a brown tube that is open at its tip. Type Material: Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9724 (holotype), 9725 (paratype) ; California Academy of Sciences; United States National Museum. Type Locality: Venado Island, Panama Bay; intertidally, at a — 3.0 tide. Collected by Walter D. Clark, March 1946. Lat. 8° 55’ N; Long. 79° 32’ W. Age: Recent. Dimensions: Holotype, height 20 mm, diameter 12 mm. Five paratypes ranging in size from height 24 mm, dia- meter 12 mm in the largest to height 16 mm, diameter 8 mm in the smallest, an immature specimen. Additional Material: Two specimens from the Panama Bay area are in the collection of E. W. Ulrich; another is in the collection of John Q. and Rose Burch; one is in the Stanford University collection, a beach shell taken by Dr. James Zetek. A juvenile specimen collected at Mazat- lan, Mexico, by James McLean in 1962 seems referable to this species because of its brown tubes. Remarks: The quadrate profile of this shell has led to the identification of it as Typhis quadratus Hinps, 1843, in collections. Study of available evidence on the type material of 7: quadratus convinces us that this is not a good species, that it must fall as a synonym of T. coronatus Broperip, 1833, representing only a stage of growth. Typhis coronatus is the type of the subgenus Typhisopsis which, like Talityphis, has very wide varices and has the tube forming immediately after the completion of a varix. In Typhisopsis the tube actually lies against the upper part or callus pad of the varix (sce textfigure 1 for illus- tration of this term), and the varix remnant serves as a buttress for the base of the tube. The anterior canal area is wider in Typhisopsis than in Talityphis. Although T. clarki in some respects resembles certain species of Talityphis, it shares with T. coronatus the attachment of the tube to the preceding varix-remnant and the wide anterior canal. The part of the varix above the aperture (the callus pad) slopes downward at a steeper angle than in T- coronatus, and the spines on the varix shoulders are less recurved. The brown coloration of the tubes and the brown anterior tip to the canal are distinctive of T. (T.) clarki; so also is the lack of spiral sculpture. The specific name is chosen in recognition of the work done by Mr. Walter D. Clark of Palatka, Florida, who, during the years of World War II, was stationed in Panama. Because of his collecting zeal and his generosity, a number of collections are the richer. Typhis (Talityphis) precursor KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Plate 9, figures 14, 18, 21 and 22) Shell large, exceptionally sturdy, with massive tubes and ridge-like varices; teleoconch whorls 5, spire relatively high; varices and tubes 4 per whorl; pad above aperture a little narrower than the outer lip portion of the varix; sculpture almost entirely axial, with weak spiral lines showing only on the face of the outer lip varix, which is festooned slightly by about 6 spiral lines; aperture relatively large, its margin free and entire, standing up- ward as an oval rim; anterior canal completely sealed along the apertural face, open at end. Type Material: Univ. Calif. Dept. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 15083 (holotype) ; paratypes, nos. 15084-15088. One hypotype (? or paratype) in the collection of Dr. Axel A. Olsson. Type Locality: Univ. Calif. loc. S-8012, on the South American coast 6 km west of Puerto Colombia, Dept. Atlantico, Colombia. Collected by Max Steineke for Standard Oil Company. (Holotype and 3 paratypes). Late; I OB INS Ikons, 7° OOY W's Other Localities: Univ. Calif. loc. S-8068, 500 m west of Puerto Colombia, Dept. Atlantico, Colombia. Max Steineke, collector. (Two specimens, regarded as para- types because of the proximity of the collecting locality to the locality of the holotype). One specimen from “Near Puerto Colombia,” collected by Dr. A. A. Olsson should probably also be regarded as a paratype rather than a hypotype, as it is evidently from the same outcrop section. Age: Horizon - Las Perdices shales, upper Oligocene. Dimensions (in millimeters) : length width Holotype 47.5 27.8 Paratype I 41 27 Paratype II 40 25 Paratype III 37 23 Paratype IV 42 29 (loc. S-8068) Paratype V 40.5 21 (loc. S-8068) Hypotype 49 32 Discussion: In form, this is nearest to Typhis (Talityphis) pterinus GARDNER, 1936, which has a similarly high spire. However, T: precursor averages more than twice as large, for the type of T. pterinus is only 20 mm in length. Spiral sculpture is fairly strong in T: pterinus, and the Page 50 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 varices are not so ridge-like and massive. The strati- graphic horizon from which the type lot of T: precursor came, Las Perdices shale, is generally accepted as correl- ative with the Aquitanian Stage of Europe; whether this is upper Oligocene or lower Miocene in age is, however, a matter of debate among stratigraphers. Whatever the decision, this new species extends the known range of Talityphis downward in time from the previous occur- rences in the lower to middle Miocene Round Mountain silt (Temblor formation) of California and the middle Miocene Shoal River formation (Alum Bluff group) of Florida. At the time the specimens were first noted as new by one of us (KEEN, in 1943), the available evidence seemed to suggest an even greater age; therefore, des- cription was postponed until Dr. J. Wyatt Durham, who was then working in Colombia, could make a field study of the area. His report (letter dated December 20, 1943) cleared the way for description, but difficulties of publication during the World War II years and a busy schedule since has made further postponement easy. Dr. Durham’s survey showed that the slightly consolidated, fine-grained gray Las Perdices shales outcrop along the coast west of Puerto Colombia for 7 to 8 kilometers, overlain unconformably by beds of unquestioned middle Miocene age (the Turritella altilira horizon). Not far away there is a thick section of lower Miocene deposits between these shales and the Turritella beds, which would seem to imply that not only is the correlation of the Las Perdices with the Aquitanian Stage the more plausible but that the age is more likely upper Oligocene than lower Miocene. At least this is the conclusion we draw from the data supplied by Dr. Durham. We are grateful to him for the detailed analysis he made of the stratigraphy of the area, even though the use of the information has been so long delayed. The occurrence of a massive shell as the initial stock in a line is unusual in the history of most molluscan groups, for the trend normally is from rather unspecial- ized forms toward greater size or more elaboration. Here there is smoothness and solidity, and the direction taken by the Talityphis stock as it radiated northward, east- ward, and northwestward during Miocene time was toward smaller, thinner shells, with a proportionately shorter spire and wider lip varix. The diamond shape of T. precursor persists in T: pterinus but is replaced by a more triangular outline in T: lampada Keen, 1943 from the California Miocene and T: alatus Sowersy, 1850 from the middle Miocene of the West Indies. In all of the species of Talityphis, the anterior canal and pillar area seems to be narrower and more tapering than in the closely related group, T: ( Typhisopsis). The specific name is from the Latin noun praecursor, forerunner. Siphonochelus (Siphonochelus) nipponensis KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Plate 10, figures 25 and 29) Shell small, fusiform; color light tan; protoconch light brown, glassy, two convex whorls with a high keel on latest portion, nucleus central; teleoconch of 44 whorls with an elevated spire; shoulder narrow, sloping, moder- ately channeled between whorls; varices four per whorl, of rounded oblique folds raised slightly above shoulder extending back to engulf preceding tubes; tubes marked- ly flattened in a spiral fashion, directed almost vertically and only slightly dorsally; tubes preceded by broad rounded intervarical folds that in turn are preceded by a sulcus containing apertural scars; varices strongly con- vex, contracting sharply at base; sculpture other than growth lines lacking; aperture oval, with produced lip; anterior canal long, narrow, closed, and bent to the right. Type Material: Holotype at present is in the Akibumi Teramachi collection, Kyoto, Japan. The paratype is in Explanation of Plate 9 Figure 13: Typhis (Talityphis) latipennis Datx, 1919 (off Guaymas, Sonora, Mexico, 50 m; compare with T. precursor). Ventral view. X 1.3. Figure 14: Typhis (Talityphis) precursor KnEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. Ventral view of holotype. UCDPTC no. NOE. SK 27, Figure 15: Typhis ( Typhisopsis) clarki KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. Ventral view, holotype SUPTC 9724. x 2.25 Figure 16: Laevityphis (Laevityphis) schencki KrzEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. Ventral view, holotype. SUPTC no. SIL, S< Neds Figures 17 to 20: Apical views of the same shells as shown in top row. Same magnifications throughout. Figures 21 and 22: Ventral views of hypotype and paratype IV, respectively, of T: precursor. X< 0.8 and 1.0, resp. Figure 23: Ventral view of paratype 9725 of T. clarki, showing the formation of the varical spine. x 2.1. Figure 24: Siphonochelus (Siphonochelus) arcuatus (Hinvs, 1843). (Off Cape Point, South Africa, 695-869 m; So. Afr. Mus. No. A4946) x 2.3. Tue Veticer, Vol. 7, No. 1 [KEEN & CampBELL] Plate 9 i “see photography: G. BRucE CAMPBELL Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 51 the Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type coll. no. 9730. Exact replicas of the holotype have been prepared in natural color out of acrylic plastic. One is on deposit in the Stan- ford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9731. As others are prepared they will be distributed among several major institutions. Type Locality: Trawled off Tosa, Japan in excess of 200 m, both specimens. Lat. 33° 20’ N; Long. 133°40’ E. Age: Recent. Dimensions: Height 10.8 mm, maximum diameter 5.1 mm (holotype). Height 6.9 mm, maximum diameter 3.2 mm (para- type). Remarks: This species most closely resembles the Italian Pliocene form Siphonochelus fistulosus (Broccui, 1814), (see Plate 10, figures 26 and 30), but in S. nipponensis spec. nov. the spirally flattened tubes are not nearly so wide and arched. The protoconch of the latter consists of 14 whorls of which the latest portion is definitely keeled. In contrast, S. fistulosus has a gradually expand- ing conical protoconch made up of four rounded whorls. Siphonochelus nipponensis is the second member of the genus to be added to the Japanese fauna, the first being S. japonicus (A. Apams, 1863)°. It has only been recently (KEEN, 1944) that Siphono- chelus japonicus has been recognized as a separate and distinct species from S. arcuatus (H1nps, 1843; see Plate 9, figure 24). The confusion was initiated by G. B. SowerBy II (1874) when he listed S. japonicus as a synonym for S. arcuatus and added Japan to the Cape of Good Hope locality for the geographic range. Based on dredged material Dr. Habe established the authenticity of S. japonicus and Mr. Teramachi kindly gave us three specimens that had been trawled in 60 m off Sagami, Japan. The shell, glossy brown with spiral dark brown bands at the suture, periphery and base, has a flattened protoconch of one whorl or slightly less. Through the courtesy of Dr. K. H. Barnard we were able to examine and photograph three specimens of S. arcuatus trawled off South Africa. The varices are more sharply edged, the surface texture chalky and the protoconch has a globose nucleus with 14 subsequent whorls. We are indebted to Mr. Teramachi for supplying the only two known specimens of this new Japanese typhine. Siphonochelus (Siphonochelus) erythrostigma KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Plate 10, figures 27, 31 and 35) Shell small, fusiform, solid, color white with a small reddish brown dot at the base of each varix; anterior 8 This species possibly should be assigned to the subgenus Lyrotyphis, as it has five varices per whorl (see Plate 10, figures 28 and 32). canal and prior canal remnants stained reddish brown; protoconch white, glassy, two convex whorls with a keeled paracentral nucleus followed by 43 subsequent whorls; peripheral angle high; shoulder narrow, deeply channelled between whorls; varices four per whorl, each a rounded fold which extends above shoulder to join preceding varix and curves back to envelop preceding tube; tubes flattened, directed almost vertically and in- clined only slightly dorsally, each with a suture on the anterior surface which is carried down on face of suc- ceeding varix; varices strongly convex, contracted at base, with prominent spiral sculpture of six raised cords; intervarical area smooth, lacking secondary varical folds; aperture oval; anterior canal elongate, narrow, closed throughout; operculum of imbricated laminae, horn color, nucleus apical. Type Material: Holotype is on deposit in the Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9732. Type Locality: The holotype was collected in the More- ton Bay area off Brisbane, Queensland, Australia by Mr. Wicks, a prawn fisherman. Lat. 27° 20'S; Long. 15S lOAE: Age: Recent. Dimensions: Height 13.9 mm, maximum diameter 7.0 mm (holotype). Discussion: The genus Siphonochelus is well represented in the Australasian typhine fauna, with three Recent species and two from the Tertiary, the oldest being S. evaricosus (TATE, 1888) from the Lower Miocene (Bal- combian), Australia. The largest concentration of species is in the Tertiary of Europe, with the earliest species S. parisiensis (D’'OrBicNy, 1850) dating back to the Middle Eocene. Recent intensive trawling and collecting around the Moreton Bay area of Queensland, Australia have pro- duced a number of new species of mollusks among which was found the specimen of Siphonochelus erythrostigma spec. nov. Several differences set it apart from the other Recent species of Siphonochelus. The protoconch has a keeled eccentric nucleus and the whorls lack the inter- varical folds or ridges seen so commonly in Siphonochelus and Laevityphis. The most remarkable feature is the six raised spiral cords that sculpture the varices only. This brings to mind a species from the Upper Eocene of Italy, S. hortensis (OpPpENHEIM, 1900), which likewise has six raised spiral cords, but these cords are continuous across the varices and interspaces. We are grateful to Mr. Oswald Rippingale for the referral of this unusual specimen of Typhis. We also acknowledge the courtesy of Mr. Anthony D’Attilio for forwarding the specimen to us and for lending pertinent Typhis material. Page 52 The specific name is from the Greek erythros, red, and stigma (a noun, neuter gender), spot or mark, referring to the distinctive red dots at the bases of the varices. Laevityphis (Laevityphis) ludbrookae Keren & CAMPBELL, nom. nov. for Typhis tripterus TATE (Plate 10, figures 33, 34 and 36) 1888 Typhis tripterus Tate. Roy. Soc. South Australia Trans. and Proc. and Report, 10: 93, pl. 3, fig. 14 (not Typhis tripterus GRATELOUP, 1833). 1944 Pterotyphis (Semityphis) “tripterus’ [Tate]. Keen, A. M. Journ. Paleo., 18 (1): 61, 67. 1961 “?Semityphis sp. = Typhis tripterus TATE.” VELLA, Pau. Palaeontology, 4 (3): 380. Shell of moderate size, biconic, elongate; spire markedly elevated; protoconch of 23 rapidly expanding, convex whorls followed by 34 subsequent whorls in holotype, five in hypotype I; varices averaging 3.6 per whorl in holotype, 3.4 per whorl in hypotype I, each a broadly rounded fold angled sharply at the shoulder and somewhat less at the base; tubes about midway between varices, directed radially, slightly dorsally, and only a few degrees apically; immediately anterior to tubes and within the intervarical space are secondary folds; just preceding these secondary folds are sulci with apertural scars; sutures rather deeply impressed; aperture oval; anterior canal wide, elongate, reinforced by remnants of previous canals, closed throughout, bent to right. Type Material: Holotype and Paratype in the Tate Type collection at the University of Adelaide, Australia. Holo- type on tablet labeled Adelaide University Geology Department No. T 453B; paratype on tablet A. U. G. D. No. T 453A. A topotype on loan from Dr. N. H. Ludbrook, Adelaide, has been studied; two hypotypes are in the Stanford Univ. Paleo Type Coll. no. 9733 and 9734. THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Type Locality: According to Dr. M. EF Glaessner (in litt. 9 March, 1964), Tate failed to record exact local- ities and mounted specimens from different places to- gether. Tate’s locality was recorded as “Adelaide Bore, S. A. clayey green sand.” The specimen on loan from Dr. Ludbrook perhaps pinpoints this locality more accurately. This shell was recovered from the “62 to 63 foot level” of Adelaide Childrens Hospital Bore 5. Lat. 24° 56’S; Long. 139° 24’ E. Other Localities: Hypotype I came from “Bed I. J. R. I.”, Victoria, Australia, collected by F Singleton. Dr. Glaess- ner (zbid.) commented that this locality is unidentifiable. The hypotype II, also collected by Singleton, came from Cape Otway, Victoria, Australia. Table 2 Dimensions Height Maximum Average diameter number of varices per whorl” Holotype 9.0 mm 5.0 mm 3.6 A. U.G.D. No. T 453B Paratype 12.0 mm 6.3 mm 4.2 JX, Wh, (Ee 1D) No. T 453A Topotype 7.0mm 4.2mm 4.3 (incomplete ) Hypotype 15.4mm 11.1 mm 3.4 SUPTC 9733 HypotypeII 11.0mm 6.5 mm 4.3 SUPTC 9734 (anterior canal broken) * The total number of tubes or varices per shell is divided by the number of post-nuclear whorls. Explanation of Plate 10 Figure 25: Siphonochelus (Siphonochelus) nipponensis KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. Ventral view of holotype. x 4. Figure 26: Siphonochelus (Siphonochelus) fistulosus (BRoccHt, 1814). (Astian, Castel Arquato, Italy; Pliocene; ex Prof. Fr. Sacco). Ventral view. X 3.2. Figure 27: Siphonochelus (Siphonochelus) erythrostigma KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. Ventral view of holotype, SUPMCimon9 1325s Figure 28: Siphonochelus (Lyrotyphis) japonicus (A. Apams, 1863). (Off Sagami, Japan; 60 m). Ventral view. x 5. Figures 29 to 32: Apical views of the same shells as shown in top row. Same magnifications throughout. Figure 33: Laevityphis (Laevityphis) ludbrookae KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. Ventral view of hypotype SUPTC inte CE, SX SiO} Figure 34: Apical view of shell shown in Figure 33. Figure 35: Lateral view of shell shown in Figure 27. Figure 36: Dorsal view of shell shown in Figure 33. THE VELIGER, Vol. 7, No. 1 [KEEN & CamppBeELL] Plate 10 photography: G. BRUCE CAMPBELL Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 53 Age: The Adelaide Bore and Cape Otway are both Upper Eocene. Discussion: This species is significant systematically for several important reasons, among which is the fact that it represents the oldest Tertiary typhine from the Austral- asian area; furthermore it belongs to the genus Laevi- typhis, a group which had its origin in Europe and is represented by the earliest species yet described, Laevi- typhis muticus (SowERBy, 1834) from the London Clay of England (lower Eocene). Apparently during the Tethyan Sea period Laevityphis was dispersed widely from Europe, so that it has been found in the Southern United States, Central California, and Peru during the Middle and Upper Eocene and, in the opposite direction, in the Upper Eocene of Australia as L. ludbrookae nom. nov. In New Zealand the genus survived at least until the Upper Pliocene (Waitotaran) and is exemplified by Laevityphis tepungai (FLeminc, 1943). Vetta (1961) chose to create the new genus Neotyphis for FLEMING’s species on the basis of an incipient keel on the protoconch and nodules or vestigial spines on the crest of the varices below the spine at the shoulder. He pointed out that these features demonstrate the affinity of Neotyphis to Typhis 5. 5. Several species of Laevityphis and Siphonochelus dis- play a keeled protoconch; as to the nodules or vestigial spines on the varices, Laevityphis curvirostratus (Con- RAD, 1847) from the Middle Oligocene of Mississippi has two nodules on the periphery of the varices, with corre- sponding sutures on the ventral varical faces. Laevityphis gracilis (Conrapb, 1833) from the Alabama Eocene has in addition to the nodules and sutures three or four dorsally curving trough-shaped spines. The morphology of L. tepungai FLEMING is certainly compatible with that of other members of the genus Laevityphis. It is not surprising to find vestigial features of Typhis s. s. displayed in Laevityphis, for probably Laevityphis either developed from an earlier species of Typhis s. s., such as the undescribed Thanetian (Paleocene) species that Coss- MAN (1903, p. 57) mentioned, or they both had a com- mon yet undiscovered ancestor. It may be worthwhile retaining Neotyphis as a subgenus subordinate to Laevi- typhis to include those species that manifest vestigial features of Tpphis s. s. A puzzling feature shown by the holotype and hypo- type SUPTC 9733 of Laevityphis ludbrookae is the unusual average number of varices per whorl, 3.6 and 3.4, respectively. This is perhaps what inspired Tate to name the species originally “Typhis tripterus,” indicating “three wings.” In these two shells the neanic whorls approach four varices per whorl but as the shell grew larger the pace was not maintained; thus the average was less than four per whorl. The structure and appearance of the other three specimens, including the paratype, is the same as the holotype and hypotype SUPTC 9733 and the neanic whorls begin with the same pattern; in this case the 4.2 varices per whorl average is maintained. Dr. Glaessner recently provided us with photographs of the type lots of Tate’s species of Typhis and among the pictures was a 19 mm shell from the Eocene of Aldinga Bay, South Australia. It appears very similar to Laevi- typhis ludbrookae and has four varices per whorl. Tate apparently had intended this specimen to be the type of a new species which has only his manuscript name. This name -- which need not be mentioned -- means “four leaves.” One might speculate that, after publishing “7)- phis tripterus,’ Tate decided to give a specimen with four varices per whorl a new specific name, which was never published. At the present time we consider that these specimens represent one variable species found in the Upper Eocene of Australia. It will take considerably more material to decide that the recognition of two distinct species is warranted. The holotype and hypotype SUPTC 9733 of Laevity- phis ludbrookae both show some signs of previous injury, which may account for the less than four varices per whorl average. We take pleasure in dedicating to Dr. Nell H. Ludbrook of Adelaide, Australia this renamed species, in token of her contributions to Australian paleontology. Laevityphis (Laevityphis) schencki KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Plate 9, figures 16 and 20) Shell of moderate size, solid, biconic; protoconch partially missing and early spire whorls somewhat worn; shoulder sloping; periphery acute and contracted; body whorl markedly convex contracting sharply at base; varices four per whorl, narrow oblique folds crossing shoulder and joining previous whorl; top of each varix mounted by a long narrow radially directed spine located low on shoul- der, bent anteriorly; tubes slightly closer to succeeding varix, joined to it by a buttress, angled slightly forward or ventrally, inclined moderately toward apex; aperture oval; anterior canal broad, reinforced by earlier canals, elongate, closed, inclined obliquely to the left. Type Material: Holotype, Stanford Univ. Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9723. Type Locality: Las Perdices Shale, Puerto Colombia, Dept. Atlantico, Colombia, collected by Dr. Hubert G. Schenck, ca. 1933. Lat. 11° 03’N; Long. 75° 00’ W. Age: Upper Oligocene (possibly Lower Miocene), cor- relative with the Aquitanian Stage of Europe. Page 54 Dimensions: Height 19.0 mm, maximum diameter 15.2 mm (holotype). Remarks: Laevityphis (Laevityphis) schencki spec. nov. has the closest affinity to L. (L.) sawkinsi (MANSFIELD, 1925) from the Lower-Middle Miocene of Trinidad. It differs from the Trinidad species by having a sloping shoulder and the radial, anteriorly inclined varical spines located lower on the periphery than the tubes. It perhaps represents the Oligocene precursor to the Miocene L. sawkinst (MANSFIELD). The holotype has been in the Schenck collection at Stanford University labelled as Typhis siphonifera Dat, 1915, but it shows a number of points of difference from that species. The intervarical spines do not point toward the apex as they do in T siphonifera, and the shoulders of the whorls are wider and more sloping; also, the spire is lower. The same differences may be noted for dis- tinguishing the new species from T! costaricensis OLSSON, 1922, figured by ANDERSon from Colombia in 1929 as T. siphonifera (Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., ser. 4, vol. 17, p. 138, pl. 9, fig. 8). The holotype and only known specimen of Laevityphis schencki came, apparently, from the same beds as the half-dozen specimens of the Talityphis that is herein described as new. Recently T)phis costaricensis has been figured from Colombia (Barrios M., 1960), but apparently from a higher horizon. From the available evidence it would seem that both T: siphonifera and T: costaricensis are from beds slightly younger than the Las Perdices shale. Both are, like T. sawkinsi MANSFIELD, good candidates for reassignment to the genus Laevity- phis, subgenus Laevityphis, s. s. It is significant that the tubes in Laevityphis schencki are inclined forward or ventrally, and although they are not welded to the succeeding varix, this trend does suggest THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 that one of the earlier species of Laevityphis provided the ancestral stock for the East Indian group, Indotyphis Keen, 1944. We take pleasure in naming this species for the late Dr. Hubert G. Schenck, who collected the holotype and who provided much encouragement and guidance in the original review of Typhinae and on the stratigraphic problems posed by the Las Perdices shale. Pierotyphis (Tripterotyphis) fayae KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Plate 11, figures 39, 40, 43 and 44; Text figures 1 and 2) Small, ivory-white, irregularly blotched with brown, especially at periphery of whorls, the color stronger in interspaces of spiral ribs, giving the appearance of fine color-banding; whorls 7 to 8, varices 3 per whorl, the upper end of each varix left open as a tube; outer face of varix with about 22 spiral ribs; sculpture of shell of numerous raised spiral ribs, their interspaces ren- dered scaly by axial lamellae; aperture oval, outer lip with a sinuous margin, reflected against the ends of 10 spiral ribs, smooth within or with a few low lirae; anterior canal sealed except at end; pillar with remnants of 3 previous canals. Type Material: Santa Barbara Museum of Natural His- tory, no. 15999 (holotype); paratypes, Santa Barbara Museum of Natural History; Stanford University Paleo. Type Coll. no. 9726; other paratypes to be distributed. Type Locality: Barra de Navidad, Jalisco, Mexico. Col- lected by Faye Howard and Gale Sphon (Churea Expedition), January 7 to 11, 1962. 100 specimens. Lat. 19° 17’N; Long. 104° 48’ W. Other Localities: Tenacatita, Jalisco, Mexico (Churea Expedition), February 5 to 8, 1963 (17 specimens) ; Explanation of Plate 11 Figure 37: Pterynotus (Nothotyphis) norfolkensis FLeminc, 1962. Ventral view of paratype GSNZ no. TM 3146. x Doh Figure 38: Pterotyphis (Pterotyphis) fimbriatus (A. Apams, 1854). (Tenacatita, Jalisco, Mexico). Ventral view. « ZED Figure 39: Pterotyphis (Tripterotyphis) fayae KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Cape San Lucas, Mexico). Ventral view of hypotype. XK 2allds Figure 40: Paratype SUPTC no. 9726 of P fayae (apertural rim broken). Ventral view. x 1.7. Figure 41: Dorsal view of shell shown in Figure 37. Figure 42: Apico-lateral view of shell shown in Figure 38 (note displacement of tube, increasing with growth). Figure 43: Lateral view of hypotype of P fayae (Pleistocene, Oaxaca, Mexico). Approximately < 3.0. Figure 44: Dorsal view of holotype of P fayae, SBMNH no. 15999. x 1.7. Figure 45: Distichotyphis vemae Kren & CAMPBELL, gen. nov. et spec. nov. Ventral view of holotype, AMNH no. 110459. (Off Panama-Costa Rica coast, 1892 m). x 5.5. Figures 46 and 47: Lateral and dorsal views respectively of the same shell as shown in Figure 45. [KEEN & CamMpBELL] Plate 11 Tue VELIcER, Vol. 7, No. 1 photography: G. BRUCE CAMPBELL Vol. 7; No. 1 Bahia de Audencia, Colima, Mexico (Churea Expedi- tion), January 1 to 2, 1962, 1 specimen; Rancho El Tule, near Cape San Lucas, Mexico, collected by Faye Howard, February 1964 (41 specimens); Pleistocene, Oaxaca, Mexico, collected by Robert Palmer, ca. 1925; 1 speci- men, at Stanford University. Age: Recent; also Pleistocene. Dimensions: Holotype, height, 19.9 mm, maximum dia- meter, 11 mm, length of aperture, 4.6 mm. Paratype I, height 20.5 mm, diameter, 11.5 mm; paratype II, height, 22 mm, diameter, 12 mm. Remarks: It is an unusual circumstance to be able to describe a new species with more than 150 specimens available, and one wonders that the form has for so long been overlooked. The habitat is evidently somewhat off-shore, because all specimens seen (except possibly one juvenile) were crab shells. There are two American species of Tripterotyphis with which this may be compared. From Pterotyphis (Tn- pterotyphis) lowe: (Pitspry, 1932) of the West Central American coast, this is easily separable on the basis of the fine sculpture and the narrower outline. It is no closer to the Caribbean species long known as Typhis cancellatus (SowerBy, 1841), and the latter is larger (length about 27 mm), with tubes that are turned out- ward at the ends. As Sowersy’s specific name is a primary homonym, a replacement will be required unless study of the type of Typhis triangularis Apams, 1855 confirms it as a candidate. A New Zealand species recently made the type of a new subgenus bears a strong morphological resem- Text figure 1: Immature specimen of Pterotyphis (Tripterotyphis) fayae showing the first phase of varix growth, the outer rim of the varix not yet formed. THE VELIGER Page 55 blance to all three of the American species. This has been called Pterynotus (Nothotyphis) norfolkensis FLEM- NG, 1962 (Plate 11, figures 37 and 41), the varical tube being interpreted as closure of a guttered spine. Another similar form occurs in the Oligocene-Miocene of Europe, Typhis tripterus Gratetoup, 1833. [Parenthetically it may be remarked that under the new International Code of Zoological Nomenclature, this is not a homonym of Murex tripterus Born, 1778 and need not be replaced by the later name Typhis wenzelidesi (HORNES, 1856) ]. Whether or not Nothotyphis is to be considered a synonym of Tripterotyphis apparently must be deter- mined by a study of the manner of formation of the varices. In Tripterotyphis this can now be worked out in Text figure 2: Diagrammatic sketch of varix formation in those Typhinae that have a wide lip; numbered arrows indicate the areas of growth and the order in which they are consolidated. detail, thanks to a growth series among the abundant specimens at hand. Varix formation takes place in the same way it does in other of the typhine groups with a wide lip varix, such as Pterotyphis, Talityphis, and Typhisopsis. The sequence is as follows: The varix develops first as a flat sheet, its outer edge strengthened by a narrow rim that remains differently sculptured from the rest of the completed structure and is marked off by an incised line like a suture; at the intersection of this flat sheet with the body whorl at its posterior end there is at first a notch, which in Pterotyphis becomes the site of the tube (see text figure 1). Closure begins in three areas -- from the upper part of the varix sheet downward toward the aperture, as shown in the dia- gram, text figure 2, forming the callus pad; second, and perhaps simultaneously, from the columellar margin of the canal outward, and, lastly, from the outer rim — Page 56 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 inward, usually in a series of festoons. In Tripterotyphis the varix face in the third stage develops a sort of plat- form, the apertural cavity back of it being triangular and only gradually filling in from the outer margin so that the apertural wall becomes even with the lip edge. The tube that is the hallmark of the Typhinae develops during the process of closure and becomes a part of the varix, whereas in the Typhinellus - Talityphis - Typhis- opsis line the tube does not form until after the varix is completed, and then it may lie either against the pad (as in Typhisopsis) or be slightly removed from it. In Pterotyphis, as shown above, the tube develops in advance of the varix. Tripterotyphis seems, therefore, to be mor- phologically closely related to other Typhinae rather than to the muricine group Pterynotus Swainson, 1833. Along with the new species of Tripterotyphis, two other similar species of Typhinae came to light, both consti- ‘tuting new records. At the type locality -- Barra de Navidad, Jalisco -- two specimens of the long-lost Pterotyphis fimbriatus (A. Avams, 1854) (see Plate 11, figures 38 and 42) were taken. This species had been made the type of a subgenus — Tigonotyphis Jous- SEAUME, 1882. The specimens confirm what the illus- tration seemed to us to show, that this group is in no way distinguishable from Pterotyphis, s. s.; thus, it falls as a synonym. Also, the specimens prove conclusively that the species was correctly attributed to the Panamic marine fauna. Among the specimens of P (Triptero- typhis) fayae from Cape San Lucas there were 4 of P (T:) lowe: (Prrspry), a slight extension of the known range of that species. These specimens, a growth series, demonstrated the distinctness of the two forms at every stage. We are pleased to dedicate this unusual new find to an industrious collector who has added much in recent years to our knowledge of Panamic province mollusks — Faye Howard. Among the deep-water material dredged by Lamont Geological Laboratory’s oceanographic vessel, the Vema, off the west coast of South and Central America was a single specimen of a bizarre mollusk that seems to be a member of Typhinae. A new genus is necessary, how- ever, for its reception. Distichotyphis Krzen & CAMPBELL, gen. nov. ‘Type species, D. vemae KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. Varices two per whorl, tubes broad at base and evenly tapering, diverging at nearly a right angle from axis of shell or pointing slightly anteriorly; anterior canal long, closed, recurved. Distichotyphis vemae KEEN & CAMPBELL, spec. nov. (Plate 11, figures 45 to 47; Text figure 3) Shell small, white, almost transparent, with several whorls (only 4 in holotype, the apex being broken off and sealed from within, showing an oval scar over what would have been a tube) ; varices in two parallel ranks, formed of the conical tubes and marked by the remnants of the outer lips of former apertures; apertural face of each tube showing a fine suture line medially, corre- sponding to a low ridge on the back of the tube, which forms the periphery of the whorl; anterior canal tubular, closed except at its end, arched backward in a broad curve; aperture oval, relatively large, bordered by a continuous, slightly thickened and free-standing margin; pillar imperforate but showing traces of two earlier posi- tions of the anterior canal; operculum not visible in aperture. Type Material: Holotype - American Museum of Natural History, Department of living Invertebrates, catalogue no: 110459. Type locality: Vema station V-15-60, Lat. 06° 21’ N, Long. 85° 17’ W, off the Panama-Costa Rica coast, in 1016 fathoms (uncorrected) == 1892 meters depth; Nov. 30, 1958. Age: Recent. Dimensions: Height (apical whorls missing), 8 mm; diameter, 8 mm; height of aperture, 1.75 mm. Remarks: So striking is the resemblance of this form to a Jurassic genus, Spinigera Orpicny, 1850 (see text figure 3), that we had visions of another long-extinct group being brought to light, in parallel fashion to Neopilina, which first was taken in the same general region. However, closer study ruled out this pleasant prospect. Photographs of fossil specimens of Spinigera show that the extensions Fig. 723. S. longispina, Text figure 3: Spinigera longispina DesHavEs, 1850 (After CHENu, 1859) ; Jurassic, France. X 1. Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 5/7 are spines, not tubes; that the aperture is not set off by a raised margin; the anterior canal is straight, not recurved, is open for its entire length; finally, that the shells are much larger (to 40 mm in length). Similarity of form may be seen not only in the double ranks of extensions but also in the spiral ridge at the periphery of each whorl. The unique holotype was apparently taken alive, as the soft parts may be seen in the central cavity of the second and third whorls and in part of the last. The operculum, if present, is retracted beyond visibility. The shell is too small and delicate to risk probing for it. The final tube is open, the others apparently walled off at their junction with the central cavity, for the tubes show up as white, the axial portion of the shell as waxy yellow because of the sgft parts within. The generic name is from the Greek dis, two, and stichos, row, combined with typhis, which originally signified smoke but by extension was evidently intended to imply chimney (referring to the open tubes) by Montrort, the author who first proposed a generic name in Typhinae. Our thanks go to the American Museum of Natural History, Department of Living Invertebrates, for the privi- lege of describing the decpest-water member of the Typhinae yet to be recorded. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS In addition to the persons already mentioned in the descriptions, we are indebted to a number of collectors ~ and museum curators for their aid in the loan of material for our study. These include especially Dr. K. H. Barnard of the South African Museum; Mr. and Mrs. John Q. Burch, Los Angeles; Mr. and Mrs. Crawford N. Cate, Los Angeles; Mr. Thomas Darragh, University of Mel- bourne, Australia; Dr. C. A. Fleming, New Zealand Geo- logical Survey; Mr. George Kanakoff, Los Angeles County Museum; Dr. Donald EF McMichael, Australian Museum, Sydney; Dr. Hope MacPherson, National Mu- seum of Victoria, Melbourne; Dr. Katherine v. W. Palmer, Paleontological Research Institution, Ithaca, N. Y; and Dr. Donald R. Shasky, Redlands, California. To all of these and to all the others who have helped in the prepa- ration of this report, our thanks. LITERATURE CITED Barrios M., Marcoru 1960. Algunos moluscos del Terciario medio de Colombia. Boletin Geologica, Servicio Geol. Nacional, Bogota, 6 (1 - 3) : 213 - 306; 12 plts. CossMANN, MavrIcE 1903. Essais de paléoconchologie comparée. Paris: 13 livr. 1895 - 1925. (Typhinae, livr. 5: 56-63; plts. 2-3) FLEMING, C. A. 1962. The genus Pterynotus Swainson (Gastropoda, Family Muricidae) in New Zealand and Norfolk Island. Trans. Roy. Soc. New Zealand, Zool. 2 (14): 109-119; 22 figs. Keen, A. Myra 1944. Catalogue and revision of the gastropod subfamily Typhinae. Journ. Paieontology 18 (1): 50-72; 20 figs. SowerBy, GEORGE BRETTINGHAM (second of name) 1874. Description of twelve new species of shells. Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1873: 718 - 722; plt. 59. (April 1874) VELLA, PAUL 1961. Australasian Typhinae (Gastropoda) with notes on the subfamily. Palaeontology, 4 (3): 362 - 391; plts. 46 - 47. Page 58 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 NOTES & NEWS Tue CALirorniA MALAcoZzooLocIcAL Society, Inc. is a non-profit educational corporation (Articles of In- corporation No. 463389 were filed January 6, 1964 in the office of the Secretary of State). The Society publishes a scientific quarterly, the VELIGER. Donations to the Society are used to pay a part of the production costs and thus to keep the subscription rate at a minimum. Donors may designate the Fund to which their contribution is to be credited: Operating Fund (available for current production) ; Savings Fund (available only for specified purposes, such as publication of especially long and signi- ficant papers); Endowment Fund (the income from which is available. The principal is irrevocably dedicated to scientific and educational purposes). Unassigned dona- tions will be used according to greatest need. Contributions to the C. M.S., Inc. are deductible by donors as provided in section 170 of the Internal Revenue Code (for Federal income tax purposes). Bequests, lega- cies, gifts, devices are deductible for Federal estate and gift tax purposes under section 2055, 2106, and 2522 of the Code. The ‘Treasurer of the C. M. S., Inc. will issue suitable receipts which may be used by Donors to substan- tiate their respective tax deductions. The Veliger is mailed free to all members of THE CALIFORNIA MALAcOZOOLOGICAL Society, Inc. Membership open to all individuals; no institutional memberships. Dues for the fiscal year 1964/65 (beginning July 1): $5.- plus a postage fee of $-.40 for members living in the Americas outside of the U.S. A., and $-.60 for members living in other foreign countries. Please, send for membership application forms to the Manager or the Editor. Backnumbers of THE VELIGER and other publications Volumes 1 and 2 are out of print Volume 3: $3.75 Volume 4: $5.- Volume 5: $5.- Volume 6: $7.- Subscription to Volume 7: $7.50 domestic; $7.90 in the Americas; $8.10 all other foreign countries. Supplement to volume 3: $ 3.- plus $ -.25 postage (plus $ -.12 sales tax for California residents only) [Opisthobranch Mollusks of California by Prof. Ernst Marcus] Please, note: Back numbers sold in complete volumes only with a handling charge of $ -.25 on each order; sub- scriptions for the current volume accepted until March 15 of each year and on a per volume basis only. Send orders with remittance to: Mrs. Jean M. Cate, Manager, 12719 San Vicente Boule- vard, Los Angeles, Calif. 90049. Please, make checks payable to C. M. S., Inc. Shipments of material ordered are generally made within two weeks after receipt of remittance. Backnumbers of the current volume will be mailed to new subscribers, as well as to those who renew late, on the first working day of the month following receipt of the remittance. The same policy applies to new members. BOOKS, PERIODICALS, PAMPHLETS Late Cenozoic Pelecypods from Northern Venezuela by Norman E. Wetszorp. Bulletins of American Pale- ontology (Paleontological Research Institution, Ithaca, New York, Volume XLV, Number 204, pp. 1 to 564, plts. 1 to 59, 8 text figs.; 18 February, 1964. This volume (a companion to the one dealing with the gastropods in the same faunal assemblage) deals with 172 species of pelecypods of which 29 are Recent, 22 both Recent and fossil, and 121 known only as fossils. One Recent species and 63 fossil forms are described as new. The fossils were collected from strata assigned Pliocene and Pleistocene ages. Each species is described, illustrated and accompanied by extensive synonymy. In addition, comparative notes, bibliography and index, all combine to make this volume indispensable for anyone interested in late Cenozoic pele- cypods of northern Venezuela or adjacent regions, including the eastern Pacific. LGH Fossils in America by Jay Etuis Rawson. Harper and Row: New York. Pp. xii + 402, 27 text figs, 8 plts. $ 8.95. The subtitle states the purpose — to indicate the nature, origin, identification and classification of fossils, and to give a range guide to collecting sites. The work is divided into three parts. The first consists of six chapters on general information useful to the would-be collector of fossils. Sample illustrations are given for both plants and animals that occur in the fossil record. Part two is a list, culled from the literature, of recorded collecting locali- ties in each of the 50 United States; these are arranged alphabetically by county. In Part Three there is a glossary Vol. 7; No. 1 THE VELIGER Page 59 and a list of libraries and museums, as well as an annotated bibliography. MK Proceedings of the Malacological Society of London vol. 36, part 1, April 1964. P Dinamant: Feeding in Dentalium conspicuum. K. H. Barnarp: Two new genera of Erynacea (Bivalvia) from South Africa. MK Venus: Japanese Journal of Malacology vol. 22, no. 4, March, 1964 Toxuset Kuropa: On an Apficalia (Gymnoglossate Gastropoda) from the China Sea. Katura Oyama: On the confused usage of the genus Ranella and the allies. Takasut Oxutant: Thecosomatous Pteropoda collected during the second cruise of the Japanese Expedition of Deep Sea. Iwao Taxt: On the chiton fauna of Japan (1). The status of Ischnochiton comptus and I. boninensis. Masao Azuma: Notes on the radula of Perotrochus afri- canus (Tomuin, 1918). Konan Y. Arakawa: A study on the radulae of Japan- ese Muricidae (2). Masao Naxkazima: On the differentiation of the crenated folds in the mid-gut-gland of Eulamellibranchia (IV). Iwao Takxt: Classification of the Class Polyplacophora, with a list of Japanese chitons. [N. B.: Only the titles for which there are abstracts in English are cited above.] MK Paleontological Implications of Shell Mineralogy in Two Pelecypod Species by James R. Dorr. Journ. Geology, vol. 71, pp. 1 to 11, figs. 1 to 8; January, 1963. The shell mineralogy (calcite and aragonite) of Mytilus species living along the Pacific Coast of the United States is variously related to temperatures and salinities of the water in which the animals live. Specimens of M. cali- fornianus, longer than 15 mm, exhibit aragonite percent- ages which increase with both water temperatures and with shell thickness. The species lives only within a narrow range of water salinities. The shell mineralogy of M. edulis edulis and M. edulis diegensis does not change so significantly through the range of water salinities and temperatures sampled. Mytilus edulis from Woods Hole, Massachusetts, varies more widely in shell mineralogy than do West Coast examples, possibly reflecting the wider temperature range to which the former are subjected. ECA Selected Shells of the World Illustrated in Colour - (I) by Toxio SurKaMa, Geological Institute, Yokohama National University, and Masuoxt Horrkosui, Ocean Research Institute, Tokyo University. 126 pp., 102 color plates, 211 text figures; 10 December, 1963. M. Fukuda, publ., Tokyo. Price $ 25.-, incl. postage. Perhaps the finest we have seen to date among the many superb examples of color reproduction produced in Japan, this work presents an excellent cross-section of rare and common marine gastropod species from all parts of the world — the first of several recent Japanese shell books to deal with species not exclusively Japanese. Among the more popular family-groups of gastropods covered in this book are colored illustrations of approx- imately 100 species each of cowries, cones, muricids and volutes, respectively; there are about 60 species of Mit- ridae and about 20 of Terebridae, along with numerous other groups. While the text is entirely in Japanese, the book is nevertheless a useful tool for conchologists everywhere, as it provides a comprehensive index in English as well as furnishes complete scientific shell names and their authors in text and in plate explanations. There are numerous fine black and white photographic text figures in addition to the 102 color plates, with the respective magnifications indicated in all instances. The species seem to be accurately identified, and typical localities (but not ranges) are given. The taxonomic arrangement is up to date, and there is a systematic outline of gastropod family-groups, in English, which could well be used as a guide in arranging any hetero- geneous collection of gastropods. The few misspellings that occur seem of relatively little importance when considered alongside the truly spectacular color photo- graphs. This is a book to delight the non-collector as well as the serious conchologist. It is hoped that an English translation of the text will be included in future editions. Publication of Part II of this work, covering Opistho- branchia, Pulmonata, Scaphopoda, Pelecypoda, Cephalo- poda and Amphineura, is expected in early 1964. JMC Page 60 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 1 Statement of Ownership, Management, etc. of the “Veliger,’ published quarterly, on the first day of July, October, January, and April, at Berkeley, California, as required by the Act of August 24, 1912. Publisher: California Malacozoological Society, Inc.; Editor: Rudolf Stohler. Owner: California Mala- cozoological Society, Inc., a non-profit, educational corporation. Bondholders, mortgagees, and security holders: none. (signed) R. Stohler, Editor. THE VELIGER is open to original papers pertaining to any problem concerned with mollusks. This is meant to make facilities available for publication of original articles from a wide field of endeavor. Papers dealing with anatomical, cytological, distributional, ecological, histological, morphological, phys- iological, taxonomic, etc., aspects of marine, freshwater or terrestrial mollusks from any region, will be considered. Even topics only indi- rectly concerned with mollusks may be acceptable. In the unlikely event that space considerations make limitations necessary, papers dealing with mollusks from the Pacific region will be given priority. However, in this case the term “Pacific region” is to be most liberally interpreted. It is the editorial policy to preserve the individualistic writing style of the author; therefore any editorial changes in a manuscript will be sub- mitted to the author for his approval, before going to press. Short articles containing descriptions of new species or lesser taxa will be given preferential treatment in the speed of publication provided that arrangements have been made by the author for depositing the holotype with a recognized public Museum. Museum numbers of the type specimens must be included in the manuscript. Type localities must be defined as accurately as possible, with geographical longitudes and latitudes added. Short original papers, not exceeding 500 words, will be published in the column “NOTES & NEWS”; in this column will also appear notices of meetings of the American Malacological Union, as well as news items which are deemed of interest to our subscribers in general. Articles on “METHODS & TECHNIQUES” will be considered for publication in another column, provided that the information is complete and tech- niques and methods are capable of duplication by anyone carefully fol- lowing the description given. Such articles should be mainly original and deal with collecting, preparing, maintaining, studying, photo- graphing, etc., of mollusks or other invertebrates. A third column, en- titled “INFORMATION DESK,” will contain articles dealing with any problem pertaining to collecting, identifying, etc., in short, problems encountered by our readers. In contrast to other contributions, articles in this column do not necessarily contain new and original materials. Questions to the editor, which can be answered in this column, are in- vited. The column “BOOKS, PERIODICALS, PAMPHLETS?” will attempt to bring reviews of new publications to the attention of our readers. Also, new timely articles may be listed by title only, if this is deemed expedient. Manuscripts should be typed in final form on a high grade white paper, 81.” by 11’, double spaced and accompanied by a carbon copy. EDITORIAL BOARD Dr. Donatp P. Assort, Professor of Biology Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University Dr. J. Wyatr Duruam, Professor of Paleontology University of California, Berkeley Dr. E. W. Facer, Associate Professor of Biology Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California, La Jolla (San Diego) Dr. Caper Hann, Professor of Zoology and Director, Bodega Marine Laboratory University of California, Berkeley Dr. G Datias Hanna, Curator, Department of Geology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Joet W. Hepcpetu, Professor of Zoology Director of the Pacific Marine Station Dillon Beach Dr. LEo G. HERTLEIN, Curator, Department of Geology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Myra KEEN, Associate Professor of Paleontology and Curator of Conchology Stanford University Dr. JoHn McGowan, Assistant Professor of Oceanography Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California, La Jolla (San ‘Diego) Dr. FRANK Prre.ka, Professor of Zoology and Chairman Department of Zoology University of California, Berkeley Mr. Attyn G. Situ, Associate Curator, Department of Invertebrate Zoology, California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Raupu I. Smirn, Professor of Zoology University of California, Berkeley Dr. Donatp Witson, Assistant Professor of Zoology University of California, Berkeley EDITOR-IN-CHIEF Dr. Rupotr STouer, Associate Research Zoologist University of California, Berkeley ASSOCIATE EDITOR Mrs. JEAN M. Cate, Los Angeles, California aren ab H F yotl j BGY,05 Whe 3 A Quarterly published by CALIFORNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY, INC. Berkeley, California VOLUME 7 Ocroser 1, 1964 NuMBER 2 CONTENTS The Conidae of Fiji (Mollusca: Gastropoda) (Plates 12 to 18; 3 Text figures) WALTER OLIVER CERNOHORSKY . 61 Discussion of the Mytilus californianus Community on Newly Constructed Rock Jetties in Southern California (3 Text figures) DONALD BI PINELSIT@lsrsmer Murs NCA ss, edie jeer, he) Ss al OE A New Species of Primovula from the Philippines (Mollusca: Gastropoda) (Plate 19) Crawrorp N. Cate 102 The Cowries Established by Corn in 1949 Franz ALFRED SCHILDER 103 A New Species of the Lamellibranch Genus Aligena from Western Canada (Plate 20) I. McT. Cowan 108 New Information on the Distribution of Marine Mollusca on the Coast of British Columbia I. McT: Cowan 110 New and Otherwise Interesting Species of Mollusks from Guaymas, Sonora, Mexico (Plates 21 and 22; 1 Text figure; 1 Map) DONALD IR SHASKY& Gy DRUCEICAMPBELE, |. 4.05 56 3. se ee TG Musculus pygmaeus spec. nov., a Minute Mytilid of the High Intertidal Zone at Monterey Bay, California (Mollusca: Pelecypoda) (Plate 23; 1 Text figure) Peter W. GLynn . 12! { Continued on Inside Front Cover | Distributed free to Members of the California Malacozoological Society, Inc. Subscriptions (by Volume only) payable in advance to Calif. Malacozoological Soc.,Inc. Volume 7: $7.50 Domestic; $7.90 in the Americas; $8.10 all other Foreign Countries. $2.50 for single copies of current volume only. Postage extra. Send subscriptions to: Mrs. JEAN M. Cate, Manager, 12719 San Vicente Boulevard, Los Angeles, California 99049. Address all other correspondence to: Dr. R. STOHLER, Editor, Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley, California 94720. Second-Class Postage paid at Berkeley, California. Price of single copy, this issue: $ 3.50. - CONTENTS — Continued New Species of Recent and Fossil West American Aspidobranch Gastropods (Plate 24;°1 Text figure) - James H. McLean 120 Mating Behavior in Littorina planaxis Puiipp1 (Gastropoda: Prosobranchiata) (7 Text figures) Danie. G. Gizson, III 134 Macroscopic Algal Foods of Littorina planaxis Puiirrr and Littorina scutulata Gouxp (Gastropoda: Prosobranchiata) | ArTHUR Lyon DaHL 139 Function of the Cephalic Tentacles in Littorina planaxis PHtiri (Gastropoda: Prosobranchiata) (10 Text figures) Ronatp L. PETERS 143 Microscopic Algal Food of Littorina planaxis Pumippi and Littorina scutulata Goutp (Gastropoda: Prosobranchiata) MicHAEL S. Foster 149 NOTES & NEWS : 152 BOOKS, PERIODICALS & PAMPHLETS . 153 Note: The various taxa above species are indicated by the use of different type styles as ‘shown by the following examples: ORDER, Suborder, DIVISION, Subdivision, SECTION, SUPERFAMILY, FamILy, Subfamily, Genus, (Subgenus). New Taxa Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 61 The Conidae of Fiji (Mollusca: Gastropoda) BY WALTER OLIVER CERNOHORSKY Vatukoula, Fiji Islands (Plates 12 to 18; 3 Text figures; 1 Map) THIS FAUNAL STUDY comprises the existing knowledge of the genus Conus from Fiji waters. The majority of specimens have been reef-collected, while others were ob- tained through dredging to a depth of 16 fathoms; sub- sequent dredging in deeper water may very well bring to light additional species. Only shells collected by the author and collectors residing in Fiji were used in the compilation of statistical data and specific records. The majority of Conus species recorded from Fiji have an Indo-West Pacific distribution; three species reach as far as the West Coast of America. Notes on the geography of the Fiji Islands and other pertinent data have been given in a previous publication (CerNouHorsky, 1964). HABITAT ano VARIATION During the daytime animals of Conus remain buried in sand or hidden under coral boulders and crevices of the coral reef. They are mainly nocturnal, and certain species, such as Conus eburneus Hwass in BRUGUIERE may be found at night exposed on reef-flats and among weed, in large colonies. The various Conus species have their preferred habitat, living either in stretches of sand, or are completely or partially buried in sandy substrate under coral boulders, or even inhabit crevices of coral reefs. It has been noticed that juvenile animals prefer the slightly deeper off-shore waters to the intertidal reef area where most of the adult specimens are found. The colour and arrangement of design on the body whorl of Conus is one of the most variable features; certain species, such as Conus magus LINNAEUS and C. lachrymosus REEVE are more variable in this respect than others. The height of the spire is another variable feature; the spire itself will range from concave to convex in certain specimens. In large series of populations aberrant shells appear less obvious as there are many intermediate specimens connecting the normal form with the extreme variant. Only through study of large series of shells of a given species can one appreciate the actual range of variation within that species. Juvenile shells, when only one sixth of their ultimate adult size, already display a nearly completed colour pattern; they will, however, have the waxen appearance and strong spiral ridges and granules characteristic of juveniles. The thin lip in Conus cannot be interpreted as a sign of immaturity, as thin-lipped specimens may be sexually mature and have been observed in the act of oviposition. Tue ANIMAL Part of the foot is responsible for the deposition of colour and pattern on to the shell, while the sole of the foot is used for locomotion. The siphon takes in water and keeps the animal supplied with oxygen; the tentacles are tac- tile feelers and on them are situated the eyes. The proboscis assists in feeding and is responsible for the delivery of the radula tooth to the victim. The radula of Conus consists of two teeth per row; the teeth taper anteriorly and are barbed at the end. Posteri- orly they are attached by a ligament to the radula. The tooth is either hollow or grooved along the surface, forming a narrow canal. One tooth is detached from the somewhat L-shaped radula sac, enters the pharynx and is securely gripped by the proboscis. At the moment of attack, poison is secreted from the venom bulb and passes through a tubular duct into the esophagus and to the tooth, which is then thrust into the victim. The tooth remains firmly anchored in the victim’s flesh, and the action is repeated, if necessary. Conus feed in nature on annelids and on other gastropod mollusks and have been observed to kill and consume one of their own kind. Koun, SaunDERS & WIENER (1960) reported the crude venom of Conus to be yellow, viscous and granular in appearance, with protein and carbohydrate present. The composition of Conus venom is very complex; it is, however, highly neurotoxic and death is due to respiratory failure, preceded by heavy salivation, chest constriction and convulsions. The study of ENDEAN on venomous cones (1962, p. 5) revealed that piscivorous members of the genus Conus, THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 Page 62 NE APICAL LE oy : <- MAX. WIDTH HEIGHT §- OF SHELL \ Text figure 1: View of Conus shell, showing measurement recorded. such as C. geographus, C. tulipa, C. striatus and C. catus, possess venom which is toxic to all vertebrates, while the venom of molluscivorous species has no effect on verte- brates. Some vermivorous species possess venom capable of inflicting some local tissue damage in vertebrates. Conus bites can prove fatal to human beings; KoHn (1963) recorded 37 Conus stings, 10 of which were fatal. During 1963 two more fatalities were reported by Aus- tralian newspapers as having occurred in New Guinea and New Caledonia. Collectors are advised to handle Conus at the shoulder, which is well away from the pro- boscis. Should, however, a bite be inflicted it should be treated the same way as a snake bite. The few egg cases of Conus observed in Fiji were usually laid in a cluster or in parallel rows and firmly anchored to the substrate; the height of egg capsules varied from 6 mm to 26 mm; capsules were of a generally oval shape, coloured, and with either a smooth or a ridged surface. In one instance, 14 Conus leopardus were observed congregated in a circle around some egg clusters, with their bases pointing toward the centre of the circle. It is assumed that egg laying is a family affair, as it seems highly improbable that all 14 individuals were females. CLASSIFICATION The identification of the shells conforms to the present day knowledge and interpretation of the various species of Conus. The nomenclature of the genus, however, is at present in a transitional stage of confusion due, no doubt, to the excess of synonyms, homonyms, colour forms and plain ecological variants. A great number of type speci- mens have become lost or destroyed, while those that are extant are not easily accessible. Many original descriptions are too short and ambiguous for positive identification and often lack accompanying figures; those which are illustrated show figures which are of a dream-like quality, and are often exaggerated. Certain species, such as C. achatinus GMELIN and C. monachus LinNAEUS, have through the ages been interpreted by different writers in various ways. To add to the confusion, many early writers named a specimen, not a species; the lack of reference material was largely responsible for it. Workers may there- fore be tempted to re-describe as new all dubious species, either to bring order into nomenclature or just to escape uncertainty of correct interpretation. It is to be preferred, however, to try to match nameless species to the most appropriate descriptions and illustrations already in existence, instead of creating possible further synonyms. In a number of instances this may not be an easy matter, and results will vary according to the personal concept of, or interpretation of type-figures and descriptions by the various workers concerned. Unless the whole group of Conus is thoroughly revised by tracing every single species back to its original author, his description, illus- tration and type-specimen, and unless pertinent synonymy is compiled, the correct interpretation of certain species of Conus will remain open to dispute. Various attempts have been made to split the genus Conus into further genera and subgenera. MONTFORT RADULA TOOTH PROBOSCIS PHARYNX pov? fe VENOM DUCT “RADULA SAC VENOM BULB Text figure 2: Generalized view of the venom apparatus and part of the anatomy of Conus. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 63 (1810), Swarnson (1840), and Mércu (1853), all established new genera, and IrEpatr (1930), and Corton (1945) added others. Corton (I. c.) distinguished no less than 14 groups comprising 30 genera, and in a recent paper (Corton, 1958) split the genus Conus into 3 subfamilies and 25 genera. Morrison (fide Doncr, 1953) arranged Linnarus’ 32 species of Conus in one genus, 13 subgenera and 8 sections on the basis of sculp- tural differences. The dividing of Conus into genera and subgenera has usually been based on single characters such as sculpture, colour, height of spire and general shape of shell; these characters are, however, more appropriately used in dis- tinguishing species, not genera. Dr. Kohn (in litteris) , when referring to the use of single characters, points out that in a “generic” arrangement based on sculptural char- acters the arrangement of species differs markedly from one based on the use, for example, of radula characters. Confusion exists even among the subdividers of Conus in regard to the correct “generic” interpretation of the various morphological characters. The well-known species, Conus striatus Linnaeus, has been placed in the genera Conus, Cucullus, Leptoconus, Tuliparia, Chelyconus, Phasmoconus, Dendroconus and Pionoconus by various writers. It is obvious that single shell characters are poor criteria indeed for generic arrangement, if they can be interpreted by a few authors in so many ways. A generic division of Conus will always appear artificial if based on morphological characters alone; due consideration should be given in such an arrangement to fossil records, radular characters and the living animal. CLeNcH (1942), KoHn HEIGHT <— WIDTH ————>| 1 | | | \ | | | | ] | | | SS Se ee Text figure 3: Generalized view of egg capsule of Conus (approximately x 4.0) (1959) and Hanna (1963) do not support a further subdivision of Conus for similar reasons. Dr. A. Kohn was kind enough to communicate to me his opinion on the value of radula teeth for use in com- parative studies of species. He is of the opinion that certain groups of Conus species with similar shells (e. g. textile group) have also similar radular teeth; in such a case the latter are of little value in solving taxonomic prob- lems. Certain other species groups with similar shells can be readily separated on the basis of radular teeth: Conus lividus from C. flavidus, C. flavidus from C. frigidus, C. betulinus from C. suratensis, and C. ochroleucus from C. radiatus. METHODS anp OBSERVATIONS Large series of most Conus species were available for statistical measurements with the exception of very rare species; in the latter case the range listed does not repre- sent a true indication of the actual limits of variation. To show the range of variation within a species the minima and maxima of height and width, height of spire and apical angle have been recorded. The abbreviations used have the following meanings: H ==-Height of shell from apex to base in millimeters W =maximum width of shell expressed in per cent of height HS =height of spire from the junction of the aperture to the apex AA ==apical angle, formed between the shoulder, apex and the opposite shoulder The approximate average height of a species is: minimum height plus maximum height divided by 2. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I wish to express my appreciation and gratitude to Dr. A. Kohn for the helpful suggestions and information he supplied to me. I am indebted to Dr. Wright Barker for his patient compilation of reference material and photo- graphs of type-figures of various Conus species, and to Dr. D. McMichael from the Australian Museum for pertinent references. My thanks are due to Dr. R. Stohler for his encouragement and tireless assistance, and Mr. A. Jennings for information supplied on the ecology and animals of various species and the loan of study material. I would like to thank Messrs. I. Morse, J. Farkas, G. Broesel and Mr. and Mrs. W. J. Erich for the loan of their Fijian study material, and the British Muse- um (Natural History) for permission to reproduce the colour photograph of Reeve’s holotype of Conus emaci- atus, which was taken and kindly made available by Dr. Kohn. THE VELIGE 17° “e > oe | o 0 oF et Q@ Neauitr ia O¢ | Wera VITI arte — es ee : 2 Ywaural? on GILBERT x NEw Bane 8 8 PHOENIX: s SEO @ ae a Ss, 4 be i SSN yy ELLICEIS | &N. ae TOKELAU: | | ie) ‘*sLta courls Le | ey se SAHA | i pede 3 00. || | ye 7 : | NEW : HEBRIDES Ig Pad ree | 20° « OO ook il e INGA | 1 NEWS “0 poyaiTy I® MORES | : CALEDOMIAS2 © 50 \QUEENSLANO'® | d PMA TC NS Ree SG: AUSTRALIA Boenene | iM Norfolk 1. | NEW SOUTH “ah WALES OC E AWN | sydney ‘ | | ZEALAN A 2 wre Co eae 78 Ni \Makags! Ons ; OVALAU Yo ae i} i} | | | | | _ (Orevun, ° ‘ ° Sere ee Ono KADAVU koe Ae | Scale of Miles 0246810 20 30 40 _— os —____ a) + Lengitude East 179° Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 65 INDEX TO SPECIES (* denotes synonym or homonym) * acutanculus . 66 | * cinamomeus . 78 |* gloria-maris * neglectus . 14 * acutangulatus 66 |* cinctus (Link) 75 (R6p1nc) . 88 | * nigrescens 79 acutangulus 66 |* cinctus (Swainson) 70 |* gloria-maris * nubilus ) * adansoni * cingulum . 83 (PERRY) . 88 nussatella 5 tay (SOWERBY) 79 circumactus . 10 |* granulosa . 67 |* nussatellata . 82 * admuiralis . 66 | * classiarius . 69 |* granulosus . 88 | * oblitus 5 tsi] * aequipunctata 67 | * coelebs . 87 | * gruneri 18 obscurus . 82 * albeolus . 87 |* coelinae . 90 |* halitropus . 82 omaria 6 bY * aldrovandi * condoriana . 71 |* hammatus . 70 |* orleanus 5 te (DauTzENBERG) . 77 | * conspersus . 85 |* hebraeus . 72 | * ornatus 75 * amabilis . 83 | * consul . 19 |* henoquet . 81 |* panniculus . 88 ammiralis . 66 | Conus species . 90 | * hevassi . 88 |* pardus OS * annularis . 88 | * corona-ducalis . 76 | * hwassi . 88 |* parvus sO9 * antillarum . 83. | * coronalis el imperialis . 16 |* pavimentum . 87 * archiepiscopus . 88 coronatus > fl insculptus . 76 |* peaser . 14 * arenarius . 67 | * crassus . 72 | * insignis . 14 pertusus BOS arenatus . 67 cylindraceus . 71 | * intermedius iS planorbis 1 (338) * arenosus . 67 |* decurtata . 79 | * interruptus . 88 | * plebejus Parks) aristophanes . 67 |* dessellatus . 87 lachrymosus . 77 |* polyzonias . 83 * armatus Gi dilectus . 71 |* lacinulatus . 78 |* ponderosus aulicus . 68 | * discrepans 70 | * laganum . 69 (SOWERBY ) Bute) * auratus . 68 distans : P leopardus a ebrimula: . 68 aureus (Hwass) 68 |* dux (ROpING) . 75 |* lineatus . 86 |* proarchithalassus . . 79 * aureus (R6pING) . 68 ebraeus ah litoglyphus 78 | * proximus 2 Ol * auriger . 88 eburneus 6 litteratus 78 | * pseudomarmoreus 79 balteatus . 68 | * edaphus » BY lividus 78 |* pulchellus bandanus . 69 | * elongata . . 73 |* locumtenens (SowERBY ) . 88 * blainvillei . 69 |* elongatus (REEVE) . 81 (R6pINnc ) . 75 |* pulchellus * borbonicus . 88 emaciatus . 72 | * loroisi . 14 (Swatnson ) 0 * borneensis episcopus . 73 |* maculatus . 19 |* pulcher (ApaMs) .. 81 (SowErRBy ) . 719 |* epistomioides . 79 |* magnificus . 82 |* pulchrelineatus . 86 * brevis . 78 |* epistomium 79 magus paca) pulicarius Beh) * broderipi . 85 | * equestris . 79 |* mappa (Crosse) 75 |* punctulatus = 68) bullatus 609) ie abula 5 tae) marmoreus . 19 |* purpureus 5 0 te) * buxeus 74 |* felinus . 85 | * martinianus . 84 |* quadratus (PERRY) . 72 * byssinus . 78 |* festivus . 83. | * mighelsi . 81 | * queketti 5 18 * caesius 79 figulinus . 14 miles . . 80 quercinus . 83 * canonicus flavidus 74 | * millepunctatus radiatus 5 (ons (R6ptNc ) . 89 | * flavocinctus . 90 (Lamarck ) . 17 |* radula . 88 capitaneus . 69 |* floridulus 4 GY) miliaris . 80 | * raphanus 79 * carinatus . 719 |* floridus . 86 | * minimus (Born) aril Tales meet ee . 84 * carota 5 (eh) frigidus 74 | * mitraeformis . 80 | * regius (ROpING) 76 * carpentert 78 | * fuscoolivaceus 5 0 mitratus . . 80 | * rete-aureum . 88 catus . 10 |* fusiformis SoH moluccensis . 81 retifer 84 * ceciliae . 69 | * fustigatus . 83 | * monachos 78 | * rivularius HY * cereolus . 75 |* gemmulatus . 66 | * monile . 75 |* rollandi 79 * ceylanensis . 86 generalts 75 moreleti . 81 |* rosea ee ba chaldaeus . 10 |* geographicus 15 musicus . 81 | * roseus (SowERBy) 68 * chemnitzi . 69 | geographus . 75 mustelinus . 81 | * rubiginosus . 82 * chytreus . 74 | glans 75 |\* nanus . 86 | * rubrapapillosa 70 Page 66 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 sanguinolentus . . 84 | striatus . . . . . 86 |* terebellum 52. 87 |\venmiculatus nO KAMINS 5 . o BH |PomMlatms . . . . UGISG 1 so os 5 o oil exilim) neo * scriptus SC OGmleEstDeapiraneds 2 2 US tessulatus) 5. 87 || *wicaris) oe ! OGMIG? so « ¢ 0 dY GGUS 9 5 5 o BI LCLEICE hae SO yinctus: 2 Oo * solidus * sulcata “thomas! 5) 4.) 2 7 | utolascensias arnt (SowERBY) . . 84 (Soo?) go ae || toremadns 2. . » o i gy er i > 0) JOC +» 5 o of) |> Siloam .. . « & tulipa . » . . . 88 ||“ omidis) eee US) 1811. Conus quadratus Perry, Conchology, pl. 24, fig. 5 {non Cucullus quadratus Ropinc, 1798] Shell: Shell conical and solid. Body whorl white or cream, ornamented with blackish-brown, trapezoidal blotches, arranged longitudinally to form 3 to 4 transverse, inter- rupted bands; base spirally ridged, often granulose. Shoul- der angulate, coronate, spire moderately elevated, subcor- onate, symmetrically flecked with blackish-brown and white; whorls finely striate. Aperture narrow, interior violet-brown, with a light median band. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent yellow. Type locality: India. H: 16 to 45 mm; W: 57 to 62%; HS: 15 to 21%; BNE 00? tro W25)- Habitat: In crevices of coral benches close to shore. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific to Clipperton and Galapagos Islands. Discussion: The species is frequently misspelled Conus hebraeus in literature. 19. Conus eburneus Hwass in BrucutkrRE, 1792 (Plate 12, Figure 3) 1792. Conus eburneus Hwass in Brucurére, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 640 1858. Conus crassus SowERBy, Thes. Conch., 3: 25, figs. 254, 255 (Hab: Fiji Islds.) Shell: Shell conical and solid. Body whorl white, orna- mented with transverse rows of blackish-brown bars and rectangular blotches; two to four yellow or orange, narrow transverse bands encircle the body whorl, but are occa- sionally absent. Base spirally striate. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire elevated or almost flat, concave, white flecked with blackish-brown; whorls bear two spiral striae. Aperture narrow, fairly straight, interior white. Periostracum smooth, orange-brown and opaque in adults, yellowish-orange and translucent in juvenile spe- cimens. Type locality: East Indies. H: 12 to 62 mm; W: 62 to 67%; HS: 5 to 14%; AA: 110° to 160° Habitat: Among weed, on sand substrate, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: The species is extremely variable in respect to the height of the spire, density and arrangement of the blackish-brown bars and blotches, and the number of yellow transverse bands. Conus crassus SOWERBY appears to be an individual aberrant, sporadically oc- curring in large populations of C’. eburneus in Fiji. 20. Conus emaciatus REEVE, 1849 (Plate 13, Figures 17, 17a) 1849. Conus emaciatus ReEve, Conch. Icon., Suppl., pl. 5, spec. 248 Shell: Shell slightly elongate. Body whorl orange or orange-yellow, with two pale yellow transverse bands at shoulder and mid-area; body whorl encircled by »widely Explanation of Plate 14 Figure 27: Conus arenatus Hwass. Fiji (x 0.85) Figure 28: Conus pulicarius Hwass. Fiji (x 0.7) Figure 29: Conus planorbis Born. Fiji (x 0.75) Figure 29a: Conus planorbis Born, yellow, granulose variant. Fiji (x 1.0) Figure 30: Conus capitaneus LINNAEUS. Fiji (x 0.75) Figure 31: Conus mustelinus Hwass. Fiji (x 0.65) Figure 32: Conus vitulinus Hwass. Fiji (x 0.85) Figure 33: Conus circumactus IREDALE. Fiji (x 1.0) Figure 34: Conus striatellus Linx. Fiji (x 1.0) Figure 35: Conus varius Linnaeus. Fiji (x 0.65) Tue VE .icER, Vol. 7, No. 2 [W. O. CernoHorsky] Plate 14 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 29a Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Photo. W. Cernohorsky ed i AAR eth a alieg Sar SRR OE atic cei Vol.*7; No: 2 THE VELIGER Page 73 spaced spiral striae, which become obsolete at the shoul- der. The left side of the shell is slightly concave towards the anterior end, and the base and anterior portion of aperture are stained with purple. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire depressed, often flat and eroded, yellow in colour, becoming creamy-white towards the apex; whorls finely striate. Aperture narrow, waisted centrally, slightly broadening anteriorly; interior pinkish-white, with an orange marginal edge. Periostracum dark brown, smooth and thick. Juvenile specimens are dark orange or orange-brown, have well defined and granulose spiral striae, and the interior of the aperture is violet. Type locality: Philippine Islands. H: 24 to 56 mm; W: 50 to 61%; HS: 5 to 12%; AA: 120° to 170° Habitat: In crevices of coral boulders, on reef substrate, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Tomun (1937), Corton (1945) and Dopce (1953) considered this species synonymous with Conus virgo LinNAEUS. 1758. Tomuin (Il. c.) stated that ReeEveE’s holotype, preserved in the British Museum, was a C. virgo; a colour photograph of REEVE’s type specimen, kindly made available to me by Dr. Kohn, shows REEVE’s type to be a typical C. emaciatus. Specimens of both species with preserved animals, collected by the author in Fiji, were forwarded to Dr. Kohn for study of the soft parts. Dr. Kohn (personal communication) found the radular teeth of C. emaciatus to resemble those of C. flavidus Lamarck more closely than those of C’. virgo or C. frigidus REEVE. The more important morphological characteristics of both species are given in the table below. 21. Conus episcopus Hwass in BrucutrrE, 1792 (Plate 13, Figure 20) 1792. Conus episcopus Hwass in Brucurékre, Encycl. Méth. Vers., 1: 748, var. B 1937. Conus episcopus var. elongata DAUTZENBERG, Mém. Mus. Roy. Hist. Nat. Belg., 2 (18), pl. 3, fig. 7 Shell: Shell elongate and narrow. Body whorl dark brown, ornamented with large white irregularly trigonal blot- ches, often arranged to form 3 ill-defined transverse and longitudinal bands; the brown areas are flecked with small white spots. The body whorl is finely transversely striate from base to shoulder. Shoulder rounded and sloping, smooth, spire straight to slightly concave, but short in relation to shell length, apex obtusely rounded; whorls smooth. Aperture narrow, interior white. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent yellowish- brown. Type locality: Grandes Indes. H: 40 to 70 mm; W: 40 to 46%; HS: 10 to 16%; AA: 80° to 110° Habitat: Under coral on sand substrate, or buried in sand. Rare. Conus virgo Conus emaciatus Length: 38 to 150 mm 24 to 56 mm Width: 50% to 59% 50% to 61% Body whorl creamy-white, spiral striae orange, widely spaced spiral in adults: distinct at base, but obso- striae from base to just be- lete elsewhere, striae cease low shoulder, striae continue abruptly at aperture inside the aperture, body whorl with two light bands Spire: slightly elevated, concave low, often flat and eroded, first whorl channeled near whorls finely striate, maxi- shoulder, maximum width mum width at shoulder just below the shoulder Juvenile yellow to orange, spiral striae dark orange-brown, with specimens: on body whorl close-set, ob- pronounced spiral granulose solete inside of aperture ridges from base to shoulder Lip of straight, occasionally slightly distinctly waisted aperture: waisted Habitat: in sand in crevices and under coral Page 74 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 Distribution: West and South Viti Levu. - Indo-West Pacific. 22. Conus figulinus LinnaEus, 1758 (Plate 12, Figure 14) Conus figulinus LinNAEus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 715, no. 267 Cucullus buxeus R6pinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 42 Conus lorotsii KIENER, Spéc. Gén. Icon. Coq. Viv., 2:91 pl. 65, figs 1 Conus figulinus var. chytreus Tryon, Man. Conch., Bil, jal 2a, inks, 1 Conus figulinus var. violascens BARROS & CUNHA, Mem. Estud. Mus. Zool. Univ. Coimbra, ser. 1, OL Jil, jo. B7 1937. Conus figulinus var. insignis DAUTZENBERG, Mém. Mus. Roy. Hist. Nat. Belg., 2 (18), pl. 1, fig. 6 [non C. insignis SOWERBY, 1833] 1758. 1798. 1845. 1883. 1933. Shell: Shell large, solid, pyriform. Body whorl light brown to dark tan in colour, ornamented with dark brown, continuous, close-set spiral lines; base spirally striate, striae becoming obsolete towards the shoulder. Shoulder rounded, smooth, spire depressed, convex; early whorls acuminate. Aperture straight, moderately narrow, interior white. Type locality: None. H: 42 to 97 mm; W: 56 to 65%; HS: 10 to 15%; NE MNO” to 130” Habitat: Among weed, on sand substrate, in shallow and deeper water. Rare. Distribution: West, South and East Viti Levu. - Indo- West Pacific. 23. Conus flavidus Lamarck, 1810 (Plate 16, Figure 48) 1810. Conus flavidus LAaMarcK, Ann. Mus, Hist. Nat., Paris, 15: 265 1860. Conus neglectus Peasr, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, pt. 28, p. 398 [non C. neglectus A. Apams, 1853] 1877. Lithoconus peasei Brazigr, Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, 1: 288 [nom. nov. pro Conus neglectus PEASE, 1860] Shell: Shell of medium size, thick. Body whorl orange- brown to reddish-brown, with two white or bluish-white transverse bands at the shoulder and center; base spirally ridged, ridges often granulose, becoming obsolete past the central band towards the shoulder. Base stained with dark violet. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire low to moderately elevated, white or bluish-white, slightly canaliculate, but often eroded; whorls obsoletely striate. Aperture narrow, lip thin, interior dark violet with a pale median band, marginal edge orange. Periostracum dark grey, smooth and thick in adults, transversely ridged and thinner in juvenile specimens. Egg capsules are small and oval, ridged, pale pink in colour; capsules measured approximately 8.5mm in height and 6.5 mm in maximum width; they were depos- ited on the substrate in parallel rows. Type locality: None. H: 28 to 61 mm; W: 54 to 63%; HS: 6 to 13%; AA: 115° to 150° Habitat: Under dead coral, on reef substrate and in crevices of shelving coral reef benches, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. 24. Conus frigidus REEVE, 1848 (Plate 16, Figure 47) 1848. Conus frigidus Rerve, Conch. Icon., Suppl., pl. 3, spec. 284 Shell: Shell solid, thick. Body whorl fawn to yellowish- brown, with two pale fawn transverse bands at shoulder and center; base spirally striate, striae distinctly ridged and granulose at base, becoming less pronounced towards the shoulder. Base stained with violet. Shoulder slightly rounded, smooth, spire moderately elevated, straight, fawn in colour, often eroded; apex pale violet, whorls with 3 to 4 distinct spiral threads. Aperture narrow, lip thick, interior violet, with a pale median band, and occasionally a pale oval area on the lower half. Periostracum dark greyish-brown, smooth, thick. Type locality: None. H: 30 to 50 mm; W: 57 to 64%; HS: 7 to 15%; AA: 110° to 130° Explanation of Plate 15 Figure 36: Figure 37: Figure 38: Figure 39: Figure 40: Figure 41: Figure 42: Conus scabriusculus Dittwyn. Fiji (x 0.8) Conus geographus Linnaeus. Fiji (x 0.45) Conus tulipa Linnaeus. Fiji (x 0.7) Conus spectrum Linnagus. Fiji (x 1.0) Conus obscurus Sowersy. Fiji (x 1.25) Conus magus LINNAEUS. Fiji (x 0.8) Conus catus Hwass. Fiji (x 0.9) Figure 43: Conus achatinus Gme.in. Darwin, North Australia (x 0.7) Figure 44: Conus cf. C. vinctus ApaMs. Fiji (x 1.25) Figure 44a: Conus cf. C. vinctus Apams. Sulu Sea, Philippine Islands (x 1.0) Figure 45: Conus species. Fiji (x 0.75) Figure 45a: Conus species, Batangas Bay, Luzon, Philippine Islands (x 0.7) Tue VE icER, Vol. 7, No. 2 [W. O. CernoHorsky] Plate 15 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 44a Figure 45 Figure 45a Photo. W. Cernohorsky D we i ir re be : i ei b Ale aa) J en’ Pe Gyles 7 : i ‘ ; = i 1 3 , ih oes = ; i a ' ; 7 " : pa a 1, f y Pe - : a ee 5 3 | | | = y . a i i ce Nia ; f i Mi 1 ’ ; 4 i i } t iad 7 1 eh : , ye on 4 Bedi i f ; ha " vie i . ‘ ‘es © i i : eee 2k ‘viahltiion) j ‘t Uy) ca) mae ha Die : & : : ete i Hv a SA A pee ta! : vee ‘ Pay ey Nae i ; ; ; ’ y i ' ie Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 75 Habitat: Under dead coral, on reef substrate, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: West and South Viti Levu. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Conus flavidus Lamarcx, which is closely related to C’.. frigidus, usually lacks the spiral ridges on the upper part of the body whorl, and the transverse bands are white or bluish-white, not pale yellowish-fawn as in C. frigidus; the latter has a slightly rounded shoulder, dis- tinctly striate whorls and a pale violet apex, features which distinguish it from C. flavidus. Dr. Kohn (personal com- munication) found the radula of C. frigidus to be separ- able from that of C. flavidus. 25. Conus generalis LINNAEUS, 1767 (Plate 12, Figure 8) 1758. Conus capitaneus var. generalis LinNArus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 713, no. 254 1767. Conus generalis LINNAEUS, Syst. Nat., ed. 12, p. 1166, no. 293 1792.[?|Conus monile Hwass in Brucutére, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 646 1798. Cucullus cereolus R6p1nc, Mus. Bolten., p. 44 1798. Cucullus dux Ropinc, Mus. Bolten.. p. 44 [non Conus dux Hwass in Brucutkre, 1792] 1798. Cucullus ornatus R6pinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 44 1798. Cucullus locumtenens Rovinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 45 [non Conus locumtenens BLUMENBACH, 1791] 1807. Conus cinctus Linx, Beschr. Nat. Samml. Univ. Rostock, Abt. 3, p. 102 [non C. cinctus Bose, 1801] 1863. Conus spirogloxus DesHaAyYES, Conch. Ile Reunion, p. 135, pl. 13; figs. 13, 14 Shell: Shell narrow, elongate. Body whorl reddish-brown to dark brown, ornamented with irregular, somewhat squarish white blotches, often fused together to form 3 white transverse bands at shoulder, center and base; extremely fine and close-set spiral striae extend from base to shoulder, base faintly stained with violet-brown. Shoul- der sharply angulate, smooth, spire depressed, extremely concave, early whorls acuminate, slightly canaliculate. Aperture narrow, slightly waisted centrally, interior whitish, anteriorly stained dark violet-brown. Periostracum dark grey, thick and smooth. Type locality: India orientali. H: 45 to 75 mm; W: 41 to 52%; HS: 7 to 12%; AA: 120° to 130° Habitat:_In patches of sand, under coral on sand sub- strate, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: The white transverse bands will vary in width, and occasionally only one or two transverse zones are visible. 26. Conus geographus LinnagEus, 1758 (Plate 15, Figure 37) 1758. Conus geographus LinnaEus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 718, no. 283 1798. Cucullus geographicus Ropinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 39 1833. Conus rosea SoweErRsBy, Conch. Illust., pt. 32. fig. 33 1843. Conus intermedius Retve, Conch. Icon., 1: pl. 23, spec. 129 [non Conus intermedius LAmMarcK. 1810] 1858. Conus mappa Crosse, Rev. Mag. Zool., (2), 10: 200 & 205 [non Conus mappa SoLANDER, 1786] Shell: Shell large, thin. Body whorl pale brown to dark brown, ornamented with white or bluish-white, irregular trigonal or rhomboidal small blotches; these are arranged in such a manner as to form 2 to 4 transverse zones on the body whorl. Shoulder angulate, distinctly coronate, spire low, concave, whitish, flecked and axially lined with brown; apex pointed. Aperture very wide, flaring basally, lip thin, interior bluish-white. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent yellowish-orange. Type locality: In Indiis. H: 44 to 127 mm; W: 45 to 52 %; HS: 7 to 11%; ING MIO™ wo 125) Habitat: Under coral on sand substrate, in deeper water; rarely collected in shallow water. Rare. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: The species is piscivorous in nature; it is extremely toxic and usually lethal to human beings. Nine cases of stinging have been recorded, and five of these resulted in death (Konn, 1963). 27. Conus glans Hwass in BrucuikéRe, 1792 (Plate 17, Figure 60) 1792. Conus glans Hwass in Brucuteére, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 735 1937. Conus glans var. tenuigranulata DAUTZENBERG, Mém. Mus. Roy. Hist. Nat. Belg., 2 (18), pl. 1, fig. 11 Shell: Shell small. Body whorl dark purplish-brown, with a central bluish-white transverse band, and occasionally another faint light band below the shoulder; shell dis- tinctly concave near the base, ornamented with coarse. interrupted revolving ridges from base to shoulder. Shoul- der rounded, smooth, spire elevated, slightly convex, pale purple, apex nipple-like; whorls with three pronounced spiral striae. Aperture bulbous, narrow near shoulder, but widening basally; interior of aperture purple. Periostracum smooth, transversely minutely ridged. dark greyish-brown, thin and opaque. Type locality: Africa. H: 17 to 32 mm; W: 46 to 54%; HS: 18 to 21%; AA: 80° to 100° Page 76 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 Habitat: Under coral on reef substrate, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. 28. Conus imperialis LinNaEus, 1758 (Plate 12, Figure 11) 1758. Conus imperialis LinNaEUus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 7M2, HO, ZO 1798. Cucullus corona-ducalis Roptnc, Mus. Bolten., p. 38 1798. Cucullus regius R6pinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 38 [non Conus regius GMELIN, 1791] 1810. Conus viridulus Lamarck, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, 15: 31 1906. Conus queketti SmiruH, Ann. Natal Govt. Mus., 1: 22, pl. 7, fig. 1 1933. Conus imperialis nigrescens BARROS & CUNHA, Mem. Estud. Mus. Zool. Univ. Coimbra, ser. 1, no. 71, p. 17 [non C. nigrescens SowERBY, 1859] 1933. Conus imperialis flavescens Barros & CuNHA, Mem. Estud. Mus. Zool. Univ. Coimbra, ser. 1, no. 71, p. 18 [non C. flavescens SowERBY, 1834] Shell: Shell large, solid, slightly elongate. Body whorl white or cream, ornamented with two broad, orange- brown transverse bands, the band below the shoulder being the broader; dark brown, interrupted lines com- posed of dashes and dots, encircle the body whorl. Shoul- der angulate, distinctly coronate, spire low, often flat, apex rounded or eroded. Aperture narrow, lip thin, waisted centrally; interior white or bluish-white, basally stained with pale violet. Periostracum smooth, orange, moderately thin. Type locality: None. H: 22 to 106 mm; W: 50 to 60%; HS: 1 to 9%; AA: 145° to 180~ Habitat: Under coral buried in sand, in sandy pockets of coral reefs, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: This species feeds on polychaete annelids in nature (KouN, 1963). 2 29. Conus insculptus Krener, 1845 \| ~~ (Plate 16, Figures 55, 55) 1845. Conus insculptus KizNer, Spéc. Gén. Icon. Coq. Witty fo: BOS fol GO) ite, 2 Shell: Shell small, fusiform, with a distinctly attenuated base. Body whorl fawn to pale brown, ornamented with two or three transverse bands, consisting of brown squarish blotches; shell sculptured with fairly close-set spiral grooves from base to shoulder, grooves being punctured and traversed by axial cancellations. Shoulder angled, smooth, spire very high, concave to straight, maculated with brown blotches; whorls are terraced, spirally finely striate, striae interrupted by close-set, fine axially curved lines. Aperture very narrow, lip thin and recurved, interior of aperture pink. Type locality: La mer de Chine. H: 16 to 34 mm; W: 36 to 43%; HS: 20 to 30%; AA: 55° to 75° Habitat: Dredged from 15 fathoms, on sand and coral rubble bottom. Rare. Distribution: Mamanuca group, West of Viti Levu. - Philippines. Discussion: Fiji specimens compare favorably with Kir- NER’s description and illustration, except for one or two points. KiENeER describes the transverse grooves as “punc- tured,” but fails to mention the close-set axial ridges inside the grooves, which characterize this species and which he uses describing Conus aculeiformis Reeve, 1844. He further mentions 8 whorls on the spire for this species, whereas Fiji specimens have 10 to 11 whorls. He also describes his C’. insculptus as rusty-brown in colour throughout, a fact which applies to Philippine specimens of this species, but not to those from Fiji. REEVE (1849) illustrates and describes K1ENER’s C’. insculptus as a shell with fine small coronations at the shoulder. Conus insculptus, however, is a non-coronate species. Philippine specimens of Conus insculptus match Kr1r- NER’s illustration and description very closely. Apart from the different colour pattern, Fiji specimens agree with those from the Philippines in form, sculpture and size, and hardly justify a specific separation. Explanation of Plate 16 Figure 46: Conus sugillatus Rerve. Fiji (x 1.0) Figure 47: Conus frigidus REEvE. Fiji (x 1.0) Figure 48: Conus flavidus Lamarck. Fiji (x 0.85) Figure 49: Conus balteatus Sowersy. Fiji (x 1.35) Figure 50: Conus lividus Hwass. Fiji (x 0.85) Figure 51: Conus sanguinolentus Quoy & GAIMARD. Fiji (x 1.0) i Figure 5la: Conus sanguinolentus Quoy & GAIMARD. Mauritius (x 1.0) Figure 51b: Conus sanguinolentus Quoy & GAIMARD. Formosa Bay, Kenya (x 1.0) photo, Dr. W.R. Barker. Figure 52: Conus moreleti Crosse. Fiji (x 1.0) Tue VE IcER, Vol. 7, No. 2 [W. O, Cernouorsky] Plate 16 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 51 Figure 51 a Figure 51 b Figure 52 Photo. WW. Cernohorsky Tyas att Tn Nk Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 77 30. Conus lachrymosus REEVE, 1849 (Plate 18, Figures 64, 66, 66 a, 66 b, 66c, 66d) 1849. Conus lachrymosus RrEve, Conch. Icon., Suppl., pl. 6, spec. 258 1849. Conus rivularius Reeve, Conch. Icon., Suppl., pl. 6, spec. 261 Shell: Shell small, moderately thin. Body whorl white, occasionally cream, ornamented with irregular yellow, orange or reddish-brown blotches and flammules; the design may be continuous from shoulder to base, or inter- rupted at the shoulder and center, to form two ill-defined, white transverse zones. Some specimens bear close-set transverse lines of dots of the same colour as the pattern, while other specimens lack this feature; the body whorl is transversely striate, striae often granulose at the base, becoming either obsolete or continuous towards the shoul- der. Widely spaced reddish-brown spots are positioned on top of the spiral ridges at the base. Shoulder angulate, occasionally slightly rounded, obsoletely nodulose, rarely smooth, spire depressed, concave, or straight to slightly convex, white in colour with orange or brown macula- tions; apex raised and papillate, if not eroded. Whorls bear 3 to 4 spiral striae, and intervening spaces are axially cancellate. Aperture moderately narrow, lip thin, interior of aperture white or faintly pink. Juvenile shells are white and waxen in appearance, with continuous longitudinal flammules from shoulder to base, and faint transverse rows of orange spots; the shoulder is distinctly angulate and spire extremely con- cave, the early whorls sub-coronate. Periostracum thin, pinkish-orange to reddish-orange, moderately translucent, sometimes opaque, and _ trans- versely ridged and tufted. Egg cases are very pale pink, oval in shape, well separated from each other; they measure approximately 6.5 mm in height, 4.8 mm in width and 1.6 mm in thick- ness. Type locality: None. (“Moluccas” for Conus rivularius) Few W2Sto 25mm W248 to 5/% 2 HS 12) to 18%; AVES QOS {x0 lS Habitat: Under coral, on sand and weed substrate, in shallow water. Moderately common in the Mama- nuca group, West Viti Levu, but rare elsewhere. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. Discussion: Tom1in (1937) synonymized Conus lachrym- osus and C. rivularius with C. boeticus Reeve, 1844. REEVE’s type figure of C. boeticus shows a shell with a distinctly rounded and sub-coronate shoulder, and a very high, straight to slightly convex spire, and lacking the high, obtuse, nipple-like apex of Fiji specimens; REEVE’s type figure measures about 37.5 mm, whereas the largest specimen collected in Fiji is only 24.8 mm in height. REEVE’s type specimens, mounted on a tablet in the Brit- ish Museum, are accompanied by note: “This is the true adansonii of Lamarck” (fide Tomuin, 1937). From the large series of shells available for study, it became apparent that the species is extremely variable; the majority of shells, however, falls within the pattern of Conus lachrymosus and C. rivularius, and not one shell was found to resemble REEveE’s C’. boeticus. Two other species, often associated with Conus boeticus, are C. piperatus Reeve, 1844 (non Dituwyn, 1817). later renamed C. dillwyni by REEVE in his Emendations (1848, p. 2), and C. ruppelli Reve, 1848. These two are somewhat similar in appearance; however in C. dill- wyni the interior of the aperture is brown, besides differing in pattern and other features, and C. ruppelli has distinct white coronations with brown interstices. I would hesitate to associate these two species with C. lachrymosus. Conus cerinus REEVE, 1848 (Suppl. pl. 3, figs. 283 a, 283 b), and C. eximius Reeve, 1849 (Suppl. pl. 6, fig. 256) also resemble C. lachrymosus; further study and comparison of REEVE’s type specimens could prove them to be identical. 31. Conus leopardus (R6p1nc, 1798) (Plate 12, Figure 1) 1798. Cucullus leopardus R6p1nc, Mus. Bolten., p. 41 1822. Conus millepunctatus Lamarck, Hist. Nat. Anim. s. Vert., 7: 461 (non Cucullus millepunctatus Ro6pine, 1798) 1937. Conus millepunctatus var. aldrovandi DauTzEN- BERG, Mém. Mus. Roy. Hist. Nat. Belg., 2 (18): 171 (non C. aldrovandi Risso, 1826) Shell: Shell large and heavy. Body whorl cream to ivory, ornamented with transverse rows of blackish-brown, lon- gitudinally oblong spots; base white, truncate and folded. Shoulder rounded, smooth, spire low, blunt, white and flecked with blackish-brown blotches; small specimens have sub-canaliculate whorls. Aperture narrow, interior white. Periostracum greenish-brown, smooth and very thick. Egg capsules are large, oval, ridged and white in colour; capsules measured approximately 26 mm in height, 19 mm in maximum width and 6 mm in thickness; they were deposited on the substrate in rows. Type locality: None. (“Ocean Asiatique,” Lamarck, 1822). Hey t0ntooOkmmrseWi 565 to) 6796-3 HS) 3 to 9%. AA: 130° to 160° Habitat: In patches of sand, often exposed, in shallow water. Common. Page 78 MRE NW ELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: The species differs from Conus litteratus in being larger, with a slightly different shape and arrange- ment of the blackish-brown blotches, truncated white base, more rounded shoulder, and lacking the transverse yellow bands and larger squarish blotches at the shoulder. 32. Conus litoglyphus Hwass in BRuGcutrRE, 1792 (Plate 17, Figure 61) 1792. Conus litoglyphus Hwass in Brucuikre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 692 1798. Cucullus cinamomeus Répine, Mus. Bolten., p. 43 1798. Cucullus cimamomeus Ropinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 43 1798. Cucullus orleanus Ropinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 44 1807. Conus subcapitaneus Linx, Beschr. Nat. Samm. Univ. Rostock, Abt. 3, p. 103 1845. Conus lacinulatus Kienrr, Spéc. Gén. Icon. Coq. Winy,, 22 SZ, jal, OB, ite, 2 1865. Conus carpenteri Crosse, Journ. Conchyl., Paris, 13: 302, pl. 9, fig. 1 Shell: Shell elongate and conical. Body whorl yellowish- brown to chestnut brown, with two white transverse bands at shoulder and center; the central band is either continuous or interrupted, while the shoulder band is composed of irregular white blotches. Base bears 3 to 5 coarse spiral ridges which are sometimes granulose and stained with dark brown. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire depressed, concave to straight, flecked with brown and white; whorls channeled and axially cancellate. Aper- ture straight and narrow, stained dark brown near the base, interior white. Periostracum light brown, transversely ridged and trans- lucent. Type locality: Mers des grandes Indes. H: 30 to 42 mm; W: 48 to 56%; HS: 8 to 13%; EVENS IUD (io) 14K) Habitat: Under coral, on sand or reef substrate in deeper water, rarely in shallow water. Rare. Distribution: West and South Viti Levu. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Corron’s illustration of Conus daucus Hwass in Brucutére (1945, pl. 1, fig. 9) appears to represent C. litoglyphus Hwass in Brucutkre. 33. Conus litteratus LINNAEUS, 1758 (Plate 12, Figure 2) 1758. Conus litteratus LINNAEUS, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. TZ, 0, PSP 1798. Cucullus byssinus Roptnc, Mus. Bolten., p. 41 1798. Cucullus pardus Ropinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 41 1840. Conus brevis J. ve C. Sowersy, Tr. Geol. Soc. London, (2) 5 (2): 329, pl. 26, fig. 33 1844. Conus gruneri REEvE, Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 43, spec. 231 Shell: Shell large, solid. Body whorl cream to ivory, orna- mented with transverse rows of blackish-brown, usually rhomboidal spots; occasionally 1 to 3 narrow transverse yellow bands encircle the body whorl. Base pointed, stained with violet-brown. Shoulder distinctly angulate, smooth, with larger squarish, blackish-brown blotches which extend onto the body whorl; spire low, almost flat. Aperture narrow, white within. Type locality: O. asiatico. H: 60 to 94 mm; W: 52 to 58%; HS: 5 to 9%; AA: 140° to 165° Habitat: In patches of sand, in deeper water, rarely col- lected in shallow water. Moderately rare. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: The species differs from Conus leopardus R6p1nc in being gencrally smaller, having an almost flat spire, angular shoulder, and pointed base stained with violet-brown, and occasionally yellow transverse bands. 34. Conus lividus Hwass in Brucutkre, 1792 (Plate 16, Figure 50) 1792. Conus lividus Hwass in Brucurkre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 630 1798. Cucullus monachos Rovine, Mus. Bolten., p. 39 1807. Conus plebejus Linx, Beschr. Nat. Samml. Univ. Rostock, Abt. 3, p. 106 Shell: Shell solid, conical. Body whorl olive-brown, with two white or bluish-white transverse bands at shoulder and center; body whorl striate, striae granulose basally, obsolete towards the shoulder, base stained with purple. Shoulder angulate, coronate, spire white, slightly elevated, often eroded; whorls obsoletely striate. Aperture narrow, Explanation of Plate 17 Figure 53: Conus moluccensis Kiser. Fiji (x 1.25) Figure 54: Conus acutangulus Lamarck. Fiji (x 1.4) Figure 55: Conus insculptus Kener. Fiji (x 1.5) Figure 55a: Conus insculptus Krenrr. Maqueda Bay, Samar, Philippine Islands (x 1.6) Figure 56: Conus pertusus Hwass. Fiji (x 1.7) Figure 57: Conus nussatella Linnagus. Fiji (x 0.85) Figure 58: Conus cylindraceus BRoDERIP & SOWERBY. Fiji (x 1.8) Figure 59: Conus mitratus Hwass. Fiji (x 1.6) Figure 60: Conus glans Hwass. Fiji (x 1.5) Figure 61: Conus litoglyphus Hwass. Fiji (x 1.0) Figure 62: Conus dilectus Goutp. Fiji (x 2.8) Tue VE icER, Vol. 7, No. 2 [W. O. CernoHorsky] Plate 17 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Vb nemepil 7s — 5 s » eel . s -” St BAN \ photo. W. Cernohorsky Vol. 7; No. 2 interior purple, with a light band near shoulder and one in the center. Periostracum brown, smooth and thick. All parts of the animal are black, finely spotted with red. Type locality: Antilles [error], Isle de France (Mau- ritius), Indes orientales. ieee tOnOOnmm): Wis 53) too9%a. HS:¢8) to 19%; AA: 105° to 140° Habitat: Under coral, on reef and sand substrate, and in crevices of coral reef platforms, often exposed at low tide. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: In nature the species feeds on polychaete annelids and enteropneusts (KoHN, 1963). 35. Conus magus LinnAeEus, 1758 (Plate 15, Figure 41) 1758. Conus magus LINNAEUS, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 716, no. 276 1792. Conus raphanus Hwass in Brucut&re, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 722 1798. Cucullus caesitus R6pinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 48 1822. Conus carinatus Swatnson, Zool. Illust., 2, pl. 112 1844. Conus epistomium Reeve, Conch. Icon. 1: pl. 42, spec. 227 1844. Conus ustulatus Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1: pi. 44, spec. 239 1845. Conus striolatus KiENER, Spéc. Gén. Cog. Viv., 2: 266, pl. 105, fig. 1 1857.[2] Conus adansoni SowerRBy, Thes. Conch. 3: 38, pl. 199, figs. 286, 287, 288, 289 (non Conus adan- sonu Lamarck, 1810) 1860. Conus rollandi BERNARDI, Journ. Conchyl., Paris, 8: 332, pl. 12, fig. 4 1864.[?] Conus consul Botvin, Journ. Conchyl., Paris, 12: 33, pl. i, figs. 5, 6 1865.[?]| Conus signifer Crosse, Journ. Conchyl., Paris, 13: 308, pl. 10, fig. 6 1866. Conus tasmaniae SowErRBy, Thes. Conch., 3: 328, pl. 27, fig. 636 1866. Conus borneensis SowEeRBy, Thes. Conch., 3: 329, pl. 28, fig. 648 (non Conus borneensis ADAMS & ReEveE, 1848) 1875.[?] Conus epistomioides WEINKAUFF, Syst. Conch. Cail, (2), Ibis, 288), jo SE, jal D7, 11S, Dy © 1910. Conus magus var. decurtata DAUTZENBERG, Journ. Conchyl., Paris, 58: 26 Shell: Shell elongate. Body whorl white to cream, orna- mented with large, irregular green to olive-brown or blackish-brown blotches, usually arranged longitudinally; numerous black and white revolving lines are superim- posed on the pattern, which is at times interrupted to THE VELIGER Page 79 form a white central band. The base has a few strong, oblique ridges. Shoulder slightly angulate, at times slightly rounded, smooth, spire depressed or slightly elevated, con- cave to straight, flecked with dark brown and white; whorls bear three distinct spiral striae. Aperture narrow, widening basally, interior white. Periostracum light brown, smooth and moderately translucent to opaque in adults, fawn to pale brown, minutely ridged and tufted in juvenile specimens. Juvenile specimens are pale fawn, with a minimum of brown blotches. Type locality: None. (“Indian Ocean,” Hwass in Bru- GUIERE, 1792). H: 16 to 60 mm; W: 46 to 53%; HS: 14 to 18%; INNS Shy ies) 110)" Habitat: Under coral, on sand substrate, in shallow water; juveniles are found buried in sandy patches. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Dr. Kohn (personal communication) found the radular teeth of Fijian specimens of Conus magus to be proportionately longer in relation to shell length (1:10), than those from the Philippines and Eniwetok (GSE tomlito))e This is an extremely variable species, which will vary in colour and pattern from region to region; even within the Fiji Islands various colour forms are found. An exten- sive synonymy for this species can be found in Daut- ZENBERG, 1937. 36. Conus marmoreus LinnAEus, 1758 (Plate 12, Figure 9) 1758. Conus marmoreus LINNAEUS, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 712, no. 250 1798. Cucullus equestris Ropinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 38 (non C. equestris ROpiNG, 1798, p. 46) 1798. Cucullus proarchithalassus R6p1nc, Mus. Bolten., p. 38 1798. Cucullus torquatus Ropinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 38 (non C. torquatus Ropine, 1798, p. 45) 1811. Conus maculatus Perry, Conchology, pl. 24, fig. 4 1859. Conus nigrescens SOWERBY, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don, pt. 27: 429, pl. 49, fig. 2 1875. Conus pseudomarmoreus Crosse, Journ. Conchyl., Paris, 23: 223, pl. 9, fig. 4 Shell: Shell conical, solid, heavy. Body whorl blackish, ornamented with ivory-white, trigonal blotches of varying sizes from base to shoulder. Shoulder angulate, coronate, spire depressed, alternately flecked with black and white; whorls canaliculate, smooth. Aperture narrow, slightly wider basally, interior pinkish-white. Periostracum smooth, thin, translucent orange. Page 80 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 Juvenile specimens have pronounced transverse ridges on the body whorl. Type locality: Asia. H: 30 to 102 mm; W: 53 to 59%; HS: 4 to 13%; AA: 125° to 150° Habitat: Under coral, on sand substrate and among weed, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Semi-albino and albino specimens of Conus marmoreus have been recorded from Bourail, New Cale- donia. The frequent occurrence of albinotic specimens in this particular population points to genedrift as a possible cause. Albinotic or melanistic specimens of C’. marmoreus have not been recorded from Fiji waters. The species has been observed to be molluscivorous in nature, and in all probability has a venomous sting harm- ful to vertebrates. 37. Conus miles Linnaeus, 1758 (Plate 12, Figure 7) 1758. Conus miles LINNAEUS, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 713, no. 255 Shell: Shell solid, broad. Body whorl white, ornamented with orange to orange-brown, longitudinal wavy lines, and one narrow dark brown transverse band below the shoul- der and another, broader band at the base; base bears widely spaced spiral ridges. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire moderately elevated, concave or straight, white and axially lined with orange brown lines; whorls obsoletely striate. Aperture narrow, lip thin, interior violet, with a light band at shoulder and another above the base. Periostracum greenish-brown, thick, ridged, tufted. Type locality: India. H: 26 to 76 mm; W: 56 to 67%; HS: 11 to 16%; AVE MO) * {co 23) Habitat: Under coral, on reef substrate, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: West, South and East Viti Levu. - Indo- West Pacific. Discussion: Egg capsules are small, ridged and white in colour; capsules measured approximately 9.5 mm in height and 6.0 mm in maximum width; they were laid on the substrate in parallel rows. Koun (1959) recorded Hawaiian specimens of Conus miles as obsoletely coronate at the shoulder; this is not the case in Fiji specimens. 38. Conus miliaris Hwass in Brucutére, 1792 (Plate 18, Figure 72) 1792. Conus miliaris Hwass in Brucutkre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 629 Shell: Shell small, solid. Body whorl rose-pink, ornament- ed with two interrupted transverse bands, composed of irregular white blotches; numerous interrupted orange- brown lines revolve around the body whorl. Transverse granulose ridges extend from the base halfway towards the shoulder. Shoulder angulate, coronations white and distinct, interspaces with short orange-brown streaks; spire low or slightly elevated, white and coronate. Whorls bear two distinct spiral ridges. Aperture narrow, slightly widening basally, interior orange-brown, with a white median band. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent orange. Type locality: China. H: 15 to 36 mm; W: 61 to 70%; HS: 7 to 15%: AA: 120° to 145° Habitat: Under coral, on sand substrate and sand pockets of coral reefs in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: West, South and East Viti Levu. - Indo- West Pacific. 39. Conus mitratus Hwass in BruculkrRe, 1792 (Plate 17, Figure 59) 1792. Conus mitratus Hwass in Brucutrre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 738 1870. Conus mitraeformis SowersBy, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 256 Shell: Shell small, elongate-cylindrical. Body whorl cream, ornamented with orange-brown rectangular blotches ar- ranged to form three interrupted transverse bands at the base, center and shoulder; distinct small granules are placed transversely on the body whorl, and extend from Explanation of Plate 18 Figure 63: Type figure of Conus eximius RreEve, 1849 Figure 64: Type figure of Conus lachrymosus REEvE, 1849 Figure 65: Type figure of Conus rivularius Rerve, 1849 (figures 63, 64 and 65 x 1.4) Figure 66: Conus lachrymosus REEVE. Fiji (x 1.85) Figure 66a: Conus lachrymosus Reeve, almost white, sparscly ornamented specimen. Fiji (x 1.7) Figure 66b: Conus lachrymosus REEVE. Fiji (x 1.85) Figure 66c: Conus lachrymosus REEVE. juvenile. Fiji (x 2) Figure 66d: enlarged view of Conus lachrymosus REEVE, showing degree of nodulosity of shoulder and spire (approximately x 3.0) 5 Figure 67: Conus aristophanes SoweErBy. Fiji (x 1.35) Figure 68: Conus coronatus GMELIN. Fiji (x 1.0) Figure 69: Conus ebraeus Linnaeus. Fiji (x 0.9) Figure 70: Conus chaldaecus (R6pinc). Fiji (x 1.0) Figure 71: Conus sponsalis Hwass. Fiji (x 1.1) Figure 72: Conus miliaris Hwass. Fiji (x 1.0) Figure 73: Conus musicus Hwass. Fiji (x 1.3) Figure 74: Conus rattus Hwass. Fiji (x 0.7) Tue VEuicER, Vol. 7, No. 2 [W. O. CernoHorsky] Plate 18 Figure 65 Figure 66 a Figure 72 Phoro. W. Cernohorsky Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 81 base to shoulder. Shoulder indistinct, spire extremely high, convex, flecked with orange-brown; whorls striate. Aper- ture very narrow, slightly widening basally, interior white. Type locality: Indian Ocean. H: 18 to 33 mm; W: 36 to 43%; HS: 21 to 29%; AA: 60° to 80° Habitat: Under coral, on sand and reef substrate, in deeper water; rarely collected in shallow water. Rare. Distribution: West and South Viti Levu. - Indo-West Pacific. 40. Conus moluccensis Kitister, 1838 (Plate 17, Figure 53) 1838. Conus moluccensis Kitster, Syst. Conch. Cab., (2), Lief. 8, p. 121, pl. 23, figs. 4, 5 1843. Conus stainfortht Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1: pl. 1, spec. 1 1854. Conus pulcher A. Apams, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 117 (non Conus pulcher SoLanprER, 1786) 1859. Conus proximus SoweERBy, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don, p. 429, pl. 49, fig. 1 Shell: Shell small, thin. Body whorl whitish to pale fawn, ornamented with dark brown longitudinal streaks and blotches, usually interrupted centrally to form a light transverse zone; numerous fine brown interrupted trans- verse lines encircle the body whorl. Base distinctly ridged, ridges becoming flat and broad towards the shoulder; base distinctly concave and folded. Shoulder angulate, coro- nate, interspaces stained with brown, spire depressed, coronate and concave; apex elevated and mammillate, whorls striate. Aperture narrow at shoulder, widening basally, interior whitish. Periostracum light brown, smooth, thin, translucent. Type locality: Moluccas. Hi 18) to 36 mm; W: 45 to 51%; HS: 112 to 17%; Avs SO" tig lO? Habitat: Buried in sand patches, shallow and deeper water. Rare. Distribution: West Viti Levu and Mamanuca group. - New Caledonia, Moluccas. 41. Conus moreleti Crosse, 1858 (Plate 16, Figure 52) 1843. Conus elongatus Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 27, fig. 157 (non Conus elongatus Borson, 1820) 1849. Conus oblitus Reeve, Conch. Icon., Emend., pl. 1 (non Conus oblitus MicHEtottTt, 1847) 1858. Conus moreleti Crosse, Rev. Mag. Zool., ser. 2, 10: 122 (nom. nov. pro Conus elongatus REEVE, 1843) Shell: Shell elongate. Body whorl orange-brown to olive- brown, ornamented with faint, lighter coloured narrow transverse bands at the shoulder and center; base stained with purplish-brown, spiral striae granulose. Shoulder angulate, coronate, spire very low, convex and coronate; whorls striate. Aperture narrow, parallel to body whorl, interior purple with an orange marginal edge. Periostracum thin, translucent orange-brown, minutely tufted. Type locality: None. H: 17 to 43 mm; W: 47 to 53%; HS: 4 to 12%; AA: 115° to 150° Habitat: Under coral, on reef substrate, in deeper water. Rare. Distribution: North and West Viti Levu. - Indo-West Pacific. 42. Conus musicus Hwass in Brucutkre, 1792 (Plate 18, Figure 73) 1792. Conus musicus Hwass in Brucuirre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 629 1849.[?] Conus mighelst KiENER, Spéc. Gén. Icon. Coq. Wien 28 BO2, fol WOE), Trex, 1 Shell: Shell small. Body whorl white or bluish-white, ornamented with blackish-brown transverse dashes and dots, and granulose ridges, which become obsolete towards the shoulder; base stained with purple. Shoulder angulate, coronate, interspaces stained with black, spire low or slightly elevated, nodulose, flecked with black. Aperture narrow, interior purplish-brown. Periostracum light brown, smooth, thin, translucent. Type locality: China. H: 10 to 29 mm; W: 60 to 66%; HS: 12 to 16%; AAG OS tol305 Habitat: In crevices of coral reefs, usually at reef’s edge, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: West and South Viti Levu. - Indo-West Pacific. 43. Conus mustelinus Hwass in BruculzrE, 1792 (Plate 14, Figure 31) 1792. Conus mustelinus Hwass in Brucutére, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 654 1860.[?] Conus henoquei BERNARDI, Journ. Conchyl., 8: 380, pl. 13, fig. 4 Shell: This species differs from Conus capitaneus Lin- NAEUS by being more elongate and slender, especially at the shoulder; the white central band is placed obliquely on the body whorl and is bordered by two rows of blackish round spots, not perpendicular blotches as in C. capi- taneus. Periostracum dark brown, coarse, moderately thick. Type locality: Indian Ocean. Page 82 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 H: 20 to 82 mm; W: 54 to 59%; HS: 8 to 15%; AA: 110° to 140° Habitat: In crevices and under coral, on sand or reef substrate, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Dopcr (1953) regards the species as synon- ymous with Conus capitaneus LinNAEUS. Both species are clearly separable on conchological features alone; statis- tical measurements taken from large series of both spe- cies indicate that as far as the width is concerned, C. mustelinus does not even attain the lowest width index as recorded for the narrowest specimen of C’. capitaneus. Kohn (personal communication) found the radular teeth of Fiji specimens of C. mustelinus to be similar to those of C’. capitaneus, but nevertheless separable. 44. Conus nussatella LINNAEUS, 1758 (Plate 17, Figure 57) 1758. Conus nussatella Linnagus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 716, no. 273 1782. Conus mussatellana LinNAEUS, SCHROTER, Mus. Gottwald, p. 23, pl. 13, figs. 96a, 96b, 96c, pl. 43, fig. 52a 1834. Conus nussatella var. tenuis SowERBy, Conch. IIL, pt. 54, fig. 62 1877. Hermes nussatellata (LINNAEUS), BRAzIER, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W, 1: 291 Shell: Shell elongate, cylindrical. Body whorl white or cream, longitudinally blotched and streaked with reddish- brown, and transversely dotted with orange-brown spots; last whorl spirally striate, striae closely set, distinctly granulose. Shoulder indistinct, spire elevated, convex, dotted with orange-brown. Aperture narrow, slightly widening basally, interior white. Periostracum yellowish-brown, smooth, thin, trans- lucent. Type locality: Nussatello Insulam Asiae. H: 30 to 65 mm; W: 32 to 38%; HS: 13 to 16%; AACe/ ol tonlO0y Habitat: Under coral, on reef substrate, in shallow and deeper water. Rare. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. 45. Conus obscurus SowErRBy, 1833 (Plate 15, Figure 40) 1833. Conus obscurus SowerBy, Conch. Illust., pt. 29, p. 2, fig. 26 1943. Conus halitropus BartscH & Reuoper, Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash., 56: 88 Shell: Shell small, fragile. Body whorl pale violet, orna- mented with irregular brown blotches and faint transverse lines of brown and white dots; base transversely striate. Shoulder rounded, smooth, spire low to moderately ele- vated, apex high; whorls striate, cancellate. Aperture wide, flaring basally, interior violet. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent yellow. Type locality: Arabia. H: 15 to 41 mm; W: 39 to 49%; \HS29%tomle7a. AA: 85° to 105° Habitat: Under coral, on reef substrate, in deeper water. Rare. Distribution: West and South Viti Levu. - Pacific (Indian Ocean?). Discussion: Koun (1963) reported the species to be piscivorous in nature; he recorded five cases of Conus obscurus stings, which did not prove fatal to the victims. 46. Conus omaria Hwass in BruGutzrE, 1792 (Plate 13, Figure 19) 1792. Conus omaria Hwass in Brucurzre, Encyclop. Méth. Vers, 1: 743 1792. Conus rubiginosus Hwass in Brucutkre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 746 1843.[?] Conus magnificus ReEve, Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 6, spec. 32 Shell: Sheli elongate-ovate. Body whorl dark reddish- brown, ornamented with trigonal, irregular white blot- ches, usually arranged to form two transverse and two longitudinal bands; striae pronounced at the base, becom- ing obsolete towards the shoulder. Shoulder slightly angulate, shoulder whorl channelled, spire depressed to slightly elevated, concave, marked with white trigonal blotches; whorls striate. Aperture wide, nearly perpen- dicular, flaring basally, interior rosy-white. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent orange. Juvenile specimens, only 20 mm in height, already display the full markings of the adults. Type locality: Ocean Asiatique, Madagascar, Manille. H: 18 to 75 mm; W: 43 to 48%; HS: 9 to 11%; NAGE OORstonl2 om Habitat: Buried in sand under coral boulders, in shallow and deeper water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Egg capsules are oval, ridged, greyish-brown in colour; capsules measured approximately 16 mm in height and 7 mm in maximum width; they were deposited on the substrate in a cluster. This species is capable of inflicting a venomous bite that may prove fatal to humans. Some writers synonymized Conus omaria with C. pen- naceus Born, 1778. Apart from the colour pattern, C. pennaceus is somewhat pyriform, more rounded and broader at the shoulder. Two specimens of C. pennaceus recorded by Konn (1959) from Hawaii and the Maldive Islands had a width index of 55% and 58% respectively; both these specimens exceed the broadest C. omaria re- corded from Fiji. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 83 47. Conus pertusus Hwass in Brucutére, 1792 (Plate 17, Figure 56) 1792. Conus pertusus Hwass in Brucuttre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 686 1798.[?] Cucullus antillarum Roévinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 47 1810. Conus amabilis Lamarck, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, 15: 425 1817. Conus festivus Dittwyn, Descr. Cat. Rec. Shells, 1: 413 Shell: Shell small, fragile. Body whorl orange-red, orna- mented with two interrupted transverse bands, composed of whitish blotches at the shoulder and center; distant punctured spiral lines encircle the shell, but are often obsolete. Shoulder rounded, at times slightly angulate, smooth, spire low, concave, alternately flecked with orange-red and white, apex pointed ; whorls striate. Aper- ture narrow, interior pink. Type locality: Grandes Indes. H: 15 to 31 mm; W: 50 to 57%; HS: 10 to 18%; AA: 100° to 125° Habitat: Under coral heads, usually in deeper water. Very rare. Distribution: West and South Viti Levu. - Pacific. 48. Conus planorbis Born, 1780 (Plate 14, Figures 29, 29 a) 1780. Conus planorbis Born, Test. Mus. Caes. Vindob., p. 164, pl. 7, figs. 13, 14 1791. Conus polyzonias GMELIN, Syst. Nat., ed 13, p. 3392 1792. Conus vulpinus Hwass in Brucutkre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 648 Shell: Shell conical, moderately solid. Body whorl yellow to fulvous, ornamented with two broad brown transverse bands that may be sharply defined, indistinct and merging, or lacking altogether; continuous or interrupted brown lines encircle the body whorl and are occasionally absent. Base distinctly striate, striae granulose, usually obsolete towards the shoulder; base stained with purplish-brown or dark brown. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire low to moderately elevated, concave to straight, maculated with dark brown; whorls slightly channelled, with 4 to 5 spiral striae per whorl. Aperture narrow, widening basally, interior white. Periostracum brown, moderately thick, transversely ridged and tufted. Type locality: None. H: 16 to 60 mm; W: 54 to 59%; HS: 7 to IB% 2 AA: 110° to 145° Habitat: In sand patches, or under coral on sand sub- strate, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: A very variable species, especially in the colour patern, granulosity of spiral striae and height of spire. A specimen collected by A. Jennings (personal communication) in Fiji was of a plain yellow colour, and granulose from base to shoulder. 49. Conus pulicarius Hwass in BrucutérE, 1792 (Plate 14, Figure 28) 1792. Conus pulicarius Hwass in Brucuiére, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 622 1792. Conus fustigatus Hwass in Brucutkre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 623 1798. Cucullus punctulatus Ropinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 40 1845. Conus vautiert KENER, Spéc. Gén. Icon. Coq. Viv., 2: 350, pl. 100, fig. 3 Shell: Shell solid, slightly ventricose. Body whorl white, ornamented with round blackish spots, often arranged in transverse bands or densely grouped together; base transversely ridged. Shoulder angulate, coronate, corona- tions occasionally obsolete, spire low, whitish, faintly spot- ted with black; apex pointed, whorls striate. Aperture narrow, slightly widening basally, interior white, often with a faint rose or pale brown tinge. Periostracum thick, smooth, orange-brown. Juvenile specimens 12 mm in height are translucent in appearance and bear the completed pattern and coro- nations of the adult; the periostracum is very thin and translucent fawn. Type locality: Pacific Ocean. EON ton Olimm) awe 55) to G67 HS) Oatomlo 7. AA: 110° to 145° Habitat: Buried in sand patches, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: A specimen collected by the author in Fiji is smooth at the shoulder and spire, and only faint nodules are visible on the early whorls. This species feeds on polychaete annelids and echiuroids in nature (Konn, 1963). 50. Conus quercinus SOLANDER in LicHTFoot, 1786 (Plate 13, Figure 15) 1786. Conus quercinus SOLANDER in LicHTFooT, Cat. Portland Mus., p. 67, no. 1501 1791. Conus cingulum Gme.in, Syst. Nat., ed. 13, p. 3378 1858. Conus ponderosus SowEerBy, Thes. Conch., Index, 3: 54 (non C. ponderosus Broccut, 1814; non C. ponderosus GRATELOUP, 1835) Shell: Shell solid, broad. Body whorl yellow, ornamented with closely set transverse brown lines, which may occa- sionally be absent; base folded, spirally striate, striae Page 84 becoming obsolete towards the shoulder. Shoulder slightly rounded, smooth, spire depressed, concave; apex high, whorls striate. Aperture wide, parallel to body whorl, interior white; basal end of aperture and fold tinged pinkish green. Periostracum thick, smooth, dark greenish-brown. Juvenile specimens are somewhat slender in shape, glossy, with pronounced brown revolving lines. Type locality: None. H: 28 to 104 mm; W: 58 to 68%; HS: 5 to 10%; AAG 25% tonl50% Habitat: Buried in sand, among weed, occasionally on sand substrate under coral boulders. Common in the South, rare in North Viti Levu. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: This species feeds on enteropneusts and poly- chaete annelids (Koun, 1963). 51. Conus radiatus Gmewin, 1791 (Plate 12, Figure 6) 1791. Conus radiatus Gme.in, Syst. Nat., ed. 13, p. 3386 1844. Conus martinianus ReEve, Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 40, spec. 217 Shell: Shell elongate, fairly light. Body whorl brown to blackish-brown, ornamented with deep, axially cancellate, transverse grooves, separated by flat interspaces, and ex- tending about halfway towards the shoulder; under mag- nification transverse punctate striae are discernible on the remainder of the body whorl. Shoulder slightly angulate, smooth, spire depressed, concave, pale brown with a few darker streaks; apex raised, dark brown, whorls chan- nelled, with 3 to 4 striae per whorl. Aperture narrow, widening basally, interior white or pale orange; lip thin, base with a distinct white fold. Periostracum dark brown, thin and smooth. Type locality: None (mentioned from Luzon, Philippines, by REEVE). H: 40 to 70 mm; W: 44 to 49%; HS: 8 to 12%; AAC IO Sto i30 Habitat: In muddy sand, usually in deeper water. Rare. Distribution: West and South Viti Levu. - Pacific. 52. Conus rattus Hwass in Brucutkre, 1792 (Plate 18, Figure 74) 1792. Conus rattus Hwass in Brucutére, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 700 1792. Conus taitensis Hwass in Brucutire, Encycl. Meéth. Vers, 1: 713 1843. Conus taheitensis Hwass, Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 15, spec. 78 1857. Conus viridis SowerBy, Thes. Conch., 3: 20, pl. 5, fig. 102 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 Shell: Shell small, conical. Body whorl brown to dark violet-brown, ornamented with two bluish-white trans- verse bands at the shoulder and center; these transverse bands are composed of whitish blotches and the central band is often obscured by the dark brown base colour of the body whorl. The area below the transverse bands is spotted with small white dots; base spirally striate, less so towards the shoulder. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire low to slightly elevated, flecked with brown and white, whorls striate. Aperture narrow, lip thin, interior purple. Periostracum yellowish-brown, slightly opaque, trans- versely finely ridged. Type locality: Mers d’Amerique [error]. H: 13 to 52 mm; W: 55 to 66%; HS: 8 to 15%; AA: 110° to 140° Habitat: Under coral boulders, on sand substrate, and in crevices of coral reefs, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Egg capsules are small and oval, ridged, and grey in colour; they were deposited on the substrate in rows. 53. Conus retifer MENKE, 1829 (Plate 13, Figure 25) 1829. Conus retifer MENKE, Verz. Anz. Conch.-Samml. Malsburg, p. 68 1834. Conus textile var. sulcata SowErRBy, Conch. Illust., pt. 56/57, p. 3, fig. 76 (non C. sulcatus Hwass in BrucuiErE, 1792) 1834. Conus solidus SowErBy, Conch. Illust., (large list), p. 57 (non C. solidus Gmettn, 1791) Shell: Shell pyriform, solid. Body whorl dark reddish- brown, ornamented with irregularly sized trigonal spots, usually arranged to form two transverse bands on body whorl; area between the white markings bears dark orange and brown longitudinal lines; body whorl trans- versely striate. Shoulder well rounded, smooth, spire high, flecked with white and brown; whorls striate. Aper- ture wide, interior white. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent yellow. Type locality: None. H: 34 to 57 mm; W: 52 to 61%; HS: 19 to 26%; AA: 90° to 110° Habitat: Under coral, on sand substrate, in deeper water. Very rare. Distribution: South-West and South Viti Levu. < Pacific. 54. Conus sanguinolentus Quoy « Gammarp, 1834 (Plate 16, Figures 51, 51 a, 51 b) 1834. Conus sanguinolentus Quoy & Gatmarp, Voyage Astrolabe, Zool. 3: 99, pl. 53, fig. 18 Shell: Shell conical, fairly solid. Body whorl uniformly Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 85 olive-brown to dark brown, lower half of body whorl spirally striate, often granulose. base stained with purple; the majority of shells examined lacked the narrow cent- ral transverse band which characterizes Conus lividus; only a few specimens bore an extremely pale brown central band. Shoulder angulate, coronations distinct and ele- vated, whitish in colour, with interspaces stained with yellowish-brown; spire depressed, coronations white, with remaining area brownish-yellow. Whorls spirally striate. Aperture narrow, interior purplish, lacking the distinct bluish-white median band. Periostracum brown, smooth, moderately thick. The animal is a vivid red, finely spotted with dark red. Type locality: New Guinea. H: 20 to 52 mm; W: 55 to 64%; HS: 5 to 13%; AAO? to 155 Habitat: Under coral boulders, on sand and reef sub- strate, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: This species has almost always been associated with Conus lividus Hwass in BruGuIERE; it differs from the latter species in the absence of the whitish trans- verse bands, the pronounced, differently sculptured coro- nations, the peculiarly coloured spire and interspaces, and the uniformly purple coloured aperture. Quoy & Garmarp (1834) noted that their species closely resembles Conus lividus Hwass in BRuUGUIERE, especially LAMARCK’s variation “c,” but differed from that species in having a blood-red animal finely speckled with red dots. Fiji specimens of Conus sanguinolentus can be easily separated from those of C. lividus, which has an almost blackish animal; the same difference in the colour of live animals has been observed in Kenya by Rawlings (W. R. Barker, personal communication). In addition to the specimens of Conus sanguinolentus collected in Fiji, other reliable records are from Cook Islands (coll. Coppell), the Philippine Islands (coll. W. R. Barker), Mauritius (coll. Rouillard), and Kenya (coll. Rawlings). 55. Conus scabriusculus Dittwyn, 1817 (Plate 15, Figure 36) 1817. Conus scabriusculus Dittwyn, Descr. Cat. Rec. Shells, 1: 406 1833. Conus fabula Sowersy, Conch. Illust., pt. 24, figs. S, OF Shell: Shell solid, conically-ovate. Body whorl white to pale violet, ornamented with irregular dark brown blot- ches, often fused together to form larger dark brown patches; closely set elevated granules encircle the body whorl from base to shoulder; tip of base stained with violet. Shoulder rounded, smooth, spire high, plain bluish- white, occasionally flecked with dark brown; spire convex, apex raised, whorls finely striate. Aperture narrow, slightly widening basally, interior of aperture violet with a white marginal edge. Periostracum yellowish-brown, moderately translucent, ridged and finely tufted. Type locality: Coast of Guinea. Hi 20) ton58) mis Wo 3nto) 9870) ELS): AA: 85° to 110° Habitat: In and under coral, on sand substrate, in shallow water. Rare. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Pacific. Discussion: The size and density of the brown blotches are rather variable; occasional specimens are uniformly dark brown and the white blotches are visible in the form of an interrupted central band, and on the spire. 14 to 21%; 56. Conus spectrum Linnarus, 1758 (Plate 15, Figure 39) 1758. Conus spectrum LINNAEUS, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 717, no. 280 1798. Cucullus carota R6pinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 47 1807.[?] Conus felinus Linx, Beschr. Nat. Samml. Univ. Rostock, Abt. 3, p. 104 1844. Conus broderipu Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 46, spec. 254 1844.[?] Conus conspersus REEvE, Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 47, spec. 261 1849. Conus stillatus Rrrve, Conch. Icon., Suppl., pl. 5, spec. 247 Shell: Shell thin, ventricose. Body whorl white to ivory, ornamented with yellow to yellow-brown irregular blot- ches, often arranged in longitudinal zones; body whorl transversely striate, striae pronounced at the base, becom- ing finer and more closely set towards the shoulder. Shoul- der angulate, smooth, spire depressed, concave, white with yellowish-brown maculations; apex acute, each whorl bears two distinct spiral striae. Aperture wide, lip thin, ventricose, interior of aperture white. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent yellow. Type locality: Asia. Hees oRtoneoemme Wresentoro4 7)" SEIS: (6) to) 12%): AA: 110° to 130° Habitat: Under coral, on sand substrate, in deeper water. Very rare. Distribution: North and South Viti Levu. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Linnaeus’ specific name “spectru” of the 10th edition of his “Systema Naturae” had been emended to “spectrum” in the ““Museum Ulricae” (1764, p. 562). Page 86 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 57. Conus sponsalis Hwass in Brucutére, 1792 (Plate 18, Figure 71) 1792. Conus sponsalis Hwass in Brucutékre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 635 1792. Conus ceylanensis Hwass in Brucutkre, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 636 1833. Conus nanus SoweERBy, Conch. Illust., pt. 24, p. 1, fig. 6 Shell: Shell small, pyriform. Body whorl bluish-white, somewhat whiter near the shoulder, ornamented with either reddish-brown to dark brown wavy longitudinal flammules, or transverse rows of brown dashes, and occa- sionally with brown longitudinal streaks; individual spe- cimens are plain bluish-white, lacking the markings on the body whorl. Body whorl obsoletely striate, striae pronounced near the base; base stained with dark purp- lish-brown. Shoulder angulate to slightly rounded, coro- nate, coronations often obsolete in large adults; spire low, concave to straight, often eroded. Aperture narrow, sides parallel, interior purple, interrupted by two light bands. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent fawn. Juvenile specimens are prominently coronate on shoul- der and spire; the transverse spiral striae on the body whorl are distinctly granulose and extend further towards the shoulder than in large adults. Type locality: fle St. George. H: 10 to 26 mm; W: 62 to 70%; HS: 8 to 15%; AA: 105° to 140° Habitat: In crevices of dead and live coral, usually near the reef’s edge, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: West, South and East Viti Levu. - Indo- West Pacific. Discussion: This species is extremely variable. Conus ceylanensis and C’. nanus appear to be individual variants only, as they are represented in almost every population of C. sponsalis in Fiji. This species feeds on polychaete annelids in nature (Koun, 1963). 58. Conus striatellus Linx, 1807 (Plate 14, Figure 34) 1792. Conus lineatus Hwass in Brucutére, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 645 (non C. lineatus SoLANDER, 1766) 1807. Conus striatellus Linx, Beschr. Nat. Samml. Univ. Rostock, Abt. 3, p. 103 1921. Conus pulchrelineatus Hopwoop, Journ. Conch., 16: 151 ( nom. nov. pro C. lineatus Hwass, 1792) Shell: Shell conical. Body whorl reddish-brown, ornamen- ted with irregular white blotches, forming two interrupted transverse bands at the shoulder and center; the white blotches at the shoulder are usually larger and more widely spaced. The body whorl is encircled by closely set, fine dark brown lines, extending from base to shoulder; base faintly pinkish-brown, transversely striate, striae granulose, becoming obsolete towards the shoulder. Shoul- der angulate, smooth, spire elevated, concave to straight, white and maculated with axially curved brown streaks; whorls faintly canaliculate, each whorl with 4 spiral striae. Aperture narrow at shoulder, widening basally, interior white or bluish-white. Type locality: None (“Indian Ocean,” Hwass in Bru- GUIERE, 1792). H: 30 to 50 mm; W: 50 to 56%; HS: 9 to 13%; AA: 105° to 125° Habitat: Under dead coral, on sand substrate, in shallow water. Very rare. Distribution:: West Viti Levu. - Indo-West Pacific. 59. Conus striatus Linnarus, 1758 (Plate 12, Figure 12) 1758. Conus striatus LInNaEus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 716, no. 277 1858. Conus floridus Sowrrsy, Thes. Conch., 3: 47, fron- tispiece, fig. 558 Shell: This species displays a considerable variation of colour pattern; on some specimens the purplish-brown blotches cover the greater part of the body whorl, while other specimens are almost creamy-white with only a few isolated blotches. Fiji specimens have a high, canali- culate spire in contrast to the almost flat, concave spire of Hawaiian specimens. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent fawn. Egg capsules are large, oval, smooth, white in colour; capsules measured approximately 25 to 26 mm in height, 16 mm in maximum width, and 0.8 mm in thickness. Capsules were deposited on the substrate in parallel rows. Type locality: Hitoe (Amboina). H: 25 to 102 mm; W: 44 to 50%;HS: 10 to 14%; INNS NO) tre 1248)" Habitat: Under coral boulders, on sand substrate in shallow water. Juvenile specimens often dredged in sand patches. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: This species is reported to be piscivorous (R. ENDEAN, 1962), but has been observed in Fiji preying on other Conus species. Conus striatus is believed capable of inflicting a venomous sting, although no fatalities have been reported. The pale shells of Conus striatus, which have a min- imum of brown ornamentation on the body whorl, appear Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 87 to be ecological variants, as their occurrence is restricted to certain Fijian localities (Manava Island, North Viti Levu, Cuvu Beach, South-west Viti Levu). 60. Conus sugillatus Reeve, 1844 (Plate 16, Figure 46) 1844. Conus sugillatus Rerve, Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 45, spec. 247 1848. Conus floridulus A. ApaMs & ReEve, Zool. Voy. Samarang, Moll., pt. 1, p. 18, pl. 5, figs. 9a, 9b. Shell: Shell solid, conical. Body whorl brown to violet- brown, ornamented with two white transverse bands at shoulder and center, and transverse, almost continuous, fine brown lines encircle the body whorl; the brown area below the light central band is a darker shade of brown than the one above it. Base spirally ridged, stained with violet. Shoulder angulate, obsoletely nodulose, spire low, concave, purplish, irregularly stained with closely set curved brown streaks; whorls spirally striate, striae inter- sected by compressed curved axial striae. Aperture narrow, slightly widening anteriorly, interior purple, becoming darker towards the base; purple interior interrupted by two light bands near shoulder and center. Periostracum light brown, smooth, thin, translucent. Juvenile specimens have a broader white central band, narrower brown zones, more distinct brown transverse lines and small areas of violet-grey on the body whorl; the spire is depressed and concave, apex acute. Type locality: None. H: 19 to 44 mm; W: 55 to 60%; HS: 9 to 17%; AVES IO? (1) Habitat: Under dead coral, on sand and reef substrate, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: In large specimens the spire is usually eroded, and spiral striae are obsolete; the curved axial striae are well visible on the shoulder whorl. The brown transverse lines are mostly confined to the brown zones and rarely invade the white bands. 61. Conus terebra Born, 1778 (Plate 12, Figures 13, 13 a) 1778. Conus terebra Born, Test. Mus. Caes. Vindob., p. 162 1791. Conus terebellum Gmeun, Syst. Nat., ed. 13, 1: 3390 1798.[?] Conus albeolus R6pinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 47 1807. Conus fusiformis G. Fiscuer, Mus. Demidoff, 3: 144 1843. Conus coelebs Hinps, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 11: 256 1881. Conus thomasi SowERBy, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 635, pl. 56, fig.4 Shell: Shell narrow, elongate. Body whorl white, cream or very pale yellow, ornamented with two broad, pale yellow transverse bands, one below the shoulder, the other above the base; occasional live-collected specimens lack the yellow transverse bands. The body whorl bears closely set spiral ridges which extend from the base to the shoul- der; intervening grooves finely striate; base stained pale violet or violet-brown. Shoulder rounded, smooth, spire moderately elevated, white or pale violet, apex rounded. Aperture narrow, straight, interior white. Periostracum very thick, smooth, brown. Juvenile shells are lavender in colour, ornamented with two yellow-green transverse bands; base stained with dark violet, interior of aperture violet, interrupted by a white median band. Type locality: None. As the species is more frequent in Fiji than elsewhere in its range of distribution, and as a juvenile specimen of Conus terebra has been recorded under the name C. coelebs Htnps, 1843, from the“Feejee Islands,” the Fiji Islands are hereby designated as type locality. H: 29 to 98 mm; W: 43 to 49%; HS: 10 to 18%; ININS BO)" (io) IO? Habitat: Under dead coral, on sand and reef substrate, in shallow water. Moderately frequent. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Dopce (1953) and Hane (1961) referred this species to Conus clavus LinnaEus, 1758. Linnaeus’ orig- inal description in the “Systema Naturae” (1758, p. 716), is far too brief for positive identification and lacks a locality indication as well as a citation to figures. The subdescription added by LinnaEus in the 12th edition (1767, p. 1170) describes a different shell, not his C. clavus, and may possibly have been meant for C. auri- comus Hwass in Brucutkre, 1792. Cotton (1945, 1958) cited Hermes terebellum (Lin- NAEUS, 1758) and placed Conus terebra Born in synon- ymy. Conus terebellum LinNAEUs of the 10th edition was emended to Bulla terebellum in the 12th edition. Modern authors treat this species as a member of the genus Terebcllum Ropine, 1798, in the family Strombidae Wenz, 1940. 62. Conus tessulatus Born, 1778 (Plate 13, Figure 26) 1778. Conus tessulatus Born, Ind. Rer. Nat. Mus. Caes. Vindob., pt. 1, p. 131 1798. Cucullus pavimentum Réptne, Mus. Bolten., p. 41 1842. Conus dessellatus LAaMARCK, REICHENBACH, Na- Page 88 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 turgesch. Land-Siissw.-See Conch., p. 51, pl. 17, figs. 376, 377 1910. Conus edaphus Dax, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 38: 223 Shell: Shell moderately small, solid. Body whorl white, ornamented with transverse rows of bright orange rect- angular bars usually arranged to form two bands on the body whorl; base spirally ridged, stained with violet. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire depressed, concave, apex acute; whorls striate, with a distinct elevated ridge separating the whorls. Aperture slightly narrow, interior white to faint pink, stained with violet anteriorly. Periostracum orange, thin, smooth. Type locality: None. H: 22 to 44 mm; W:.52 to 60%; HS: 9 to 16%; AA: 110° to 135° Habitat: Buried in patches of sand, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-Pacific. Discussion: The name of this species is often erroneously spelled as Conus tesselatus in literature. 63. Conus textile LiInNAEuS, 1758 (Plate 13, Figure 23) 1758. Conus textile LinNaAEus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 717, no. 278 1786. Conus undulatus SoLANDER, Cat. Port. Mus., p. 180, no. 3866 1792. Conus archiepiscopus Hwass in Brucutkre, Enc. Méth. Vers, 1: 747 1798. Cucullus auriger ROvinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 49 1798. Cucullus gloria-maris Révinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 49 (non Conus gloria-maris CuEemnitz, 1777, non Conus gloria-maris Hwass in BrucutkrE, 1792) 1810. Conus panniculus Lamarck, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat., Paris, 15: 435 1811. Conus gloria-maris Perry, Conchology, pl. 25, no. 1 (non C. gloria-maris CHemNitz, 1777, non C. glo- ria-maris Hwass in BruGutzrE, 1792) 1811. Conus rete-aureum Prrry, Conchology, pl. 25, no. 5 1858. Conus scriptus Sowersy, Thes. Conch., 3: 41, pl. 23, fig. 563 Shell: Shell moderately large, thin. Body whorl orna- mented with numerous white, trigonal spots of varying sizes, and two to three reddish-orange interrupted trans- verse bands, the two lower broad transverse bands are marked with blackish-brown, wavy longitudinal lines; body whorl transversely striate. Shoulder rounded, smooth, spire elevated, smooth, concave, maculated with white and reddish-orange, lined with blackish-brown; whorls spirally striate. Aperture wide, flaring basally, lip thin, interior white to pinkish white. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent yellow. Type locality: Bandam, Asiae (Moluccas). H: 27 to 96 mm; W: 45 to 54 %; HS: 14 to 22%; AA: 90° to 105° Habitat: Under dead coral, on sand substrate or buried in sand, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: This species is molluscivorous, and has been observed feeding on Cypraea and Conus in Fiji. According to ENDEAN (1962) the venom of molluscivorous Conus species is supposed to have no effect on vertebrates. Other workers (KOHN, SAUNDERS & WIENER, 1960) showed that the venom is highly toxic and often fatal to human beings. KoHn (1963) recorded two deaths and one near fatality from the sting of this species. Conus textile received a great number of varietal names; they have been omitted from the synonymy. 64. Conus tulipa Linnagus, 1758 (Plate 15, Figure 38) 1758. Conus tulipa LinnaEus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 717, no. 282 1798. Cucullus purpureus Rovinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 47 1868. Chelyconus borbonicus H. Apams, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 288, pl. 28, fig. 1 Shell: Shell thin, slightly inflated. Body whorl violet. ornamented with irregular brown blotches, arranged to form two transverse bands; numerous spiral lines con- sisting of brown and white dashes and dots encircle the body whorl. Base striate, columella concave. Shoulder slightly rounded, smooth, spire low, violet flecked with brown, concave; early whorls finely nodulose, later whorls slightly canaliculate, spirally striate, striae intersected by compressed curved axial striae. Aperture wide, slightly ventricose, flaring basally; interior violet. Periostracum thin, smooth, translucent yellow. Type locality: None. H: 40 to 75 mm; W: 44 to 49%; HS: 7 to 12%; AAs 95 mnto) 115): Habitat: Under coral, on sand substrate, in deeper water. Rare. Distribution: West, South and East Viti Levu. - Indo- West Pacific. Discussion: This species feeds on fishes in nature and is capable of causing fatal injury to human beings; five bites have been recorded, of which three were near fatalities (Koun, 1963). q 65. Conus varius LiInNaEus, 1758 (Plate 14, Figure 35) 1758. Conus varius LinNAEUuS, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 715, no. 270 1798. Cucullus annularis R6prnc, Mus. Bolten., p. 40 1798. Cucullus granulosus Rovinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 40 Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 89 1798. Cucullus radula Rovinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 40 1828. Conus interruptus Woop, Ind. Test., Suppl., p. 8, ole Oy Vie, 7 1834. Conus pulchellus Sowersy, Conch. Illust., pt. 54, fig. 61 (non Cucullus pulchellus Rovine, 1798, non Conus pulchellus Swatnson, 1822) 1853. Conus hewassii A. Apams, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don, p. 118 1874. Conus hwassi WEINKAUFF, Syst. Conch. Cab., (2), Mief 221 ps 202 Shell: Shell solid, conical. Body whorl white to cream, ornamented with irregular dark brown blotches, and closely set transverse rows of minute pale brown spots and larger dark brown dots; distinct spiral ridges encircle the body whorl, appearing on the anterior half as elevated granules. Shoulder angulate, coronate, spire elevated, coronate, cream in colour; whorls finely striate. Aperture narrow, slightly widening basally, interior whitish to pale yellow. Periostracum yellowish-brown, smooth, but appearing ridged on occasions, thin, translucent. Egg capsules are small, oval, ridged, pale brown in colour; capsules measured approximately 8.5 mm in height and 6.5 mm in maximum width; they were depos- ited on the substrate in parallel rows. Type locality: None. H: 28 to 61 mm; W: 46 to 5/%; HS: 16 to 24%; EVN (335) 9 to) Oy Habitat: Under dead coral, on reef substrate, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. 66. Conus vexillum GMELIN, 1791 (Plate 12, Figure 5) 1791. Conus vexillum GmELIn, Syst. Nat., ed. 13, p. 3397 1798. Cucullus canonicus R6vtinc, Mus. Bolten., p. 43 (non Conus canonicus Hwass in BruculkreE, 1792) 1845. Conus sulphuratus KiENER, Spéc. Gén. Icon. Coq. Viv., 2: 130, pl. 66, fig. 3, & pl. 78, fig. 4 Shell: Shell large, conical. Body whorl white to cream, ornamented with two broad brown transverse bands and longitudinal, undulating dark brown lines; base weakly striate and stained with dark brown. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire moderately elevated, straight, white flecked with brown; whorls striate. Aperture wide, interior white, lip often waisted centrally. Periostracum olive-brown, thick, ridged. Type locality: None. H: 47 to 92 mm; W: 55 to 63 %; HS: 12 to 19%; INE IOD> (© 1DS% Habitat: Under dead coral, on sand substrate, and among weed in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: West, South and East Viti Levu. - Indo- West Pacific. Discussion: Juvenile specimens of this species superficially resemble Conus capitaneus LINNAEUS. 67. Conus cf. C. vinctus A. Apams, 1854 (Plate 15, Figures 44, 44 a) 1854. Conus vinctus A. ApaMs, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1853, p. 118 Shell: Shell short, stout. Body whorl white to bluish-white, ornamented with irregular olive-brown to dark brown longitudinal wavy blotches that are interrupted centrally to form a white transverse band; numerous closely set interrupted dark brown lines encircle the shell. Body whorl spirally striate, striae becoming granulose ridges basally. Shoulder imperceptibly angulate, rounded on occasions, smooth, spire elevated, convex, white flecked with brown; apex papillate and rose-coloured, whorls bear 4 to 5 spiral striae. Aperture somewhat flaring, lip ventricose, interior whitish; marginal edge of lip stained with a few dark grey blotches. Periostracum orange-brown to olive-brown, minutely ridged, moderately thick. Type locality: Australia. H: 24 to 41 mm; W: 54 to 59%; HS: 10 to 16%; AA: 100° to 120° Habitat: Under dead coral, on reef and sand substrate, in shallow water. Uncommon. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Malaysia, Philippine Islands. Discussion: This Conus species is referred to C. vinctus Apams with uncertainty as ApAms never illustrated his new species; his description, however, fits the species recorded from Fiji fairly well. SowErBy (1857) regarded C. vinctus as a minor variety of C. achatinus CHEMNITZ (= Gmetin). Tomun (1937) stated that there are two types of the species in the British Museum, each measuring 40 mm x 21 mm, which he considered to be C. monachus Linnaeus. ADAMs did not omit to mention the transverse lines of light and dark dots on the body whorl, a feature that is absent in C. monachus. The papillate rose-coloured apex, bow-shaped aperture, smaller size and different colour pattern separate the species from C. achatinus GMELIN. Specimens from the Philippine Islands show little vari- ation from those from Fiji. They resemble the species Conus ranunculus Hwass in BruculzRe, 1792, a name adopted by CLencu (1942) for the West Atlantic species Conus testudinarius Hwass in BrucutzrRE, 1792. Hwass’ type locality of “American Ocean” for C. ranunculus should be viewed with suspicion as many Indo-West Pacific species were often confused by the early authors with Page 90 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 somewhat similar-looking West Atlantic species and were given locality indications accordingly. Reeve (1843, pl. 35, fig. 191 b) and DauTzENBERG (1937, fig. 9) illustrated a shell which is a fair likeness of the species under discussion, under the name Conus achatinus Hwass var. ranunculus Hwass. DAUTZENBERG considered Hwass’ and LaMarcx’s locality indications for C. ranunculus to be erroneous; in this he was joined by Tomutn (1937), who placed C. ranunculus in the synon- ymy of C. achatinus Hwass in BRUGUIERE (= GMELIN). It is interesting to note that GmeELtn’s locality indication for C. achatinus was also “American Ocean,” although the species does not occur in that region. Future research into this complex species-group may well prove C. ranun- culus to be an Indo-West Pacific species, identical with the species illustrated. Specimens of the species discussed here have often been labelled Conus nigropunctatus SowERBy, 1857 in collec- tions. SOwERBY’s description and type figure are too poor for an unequivocal identification. Dr. Kohn (personal communication) viewed the possible types of C. nigro- punctatus in the British Museum and they appeared to be variants of Conus achatinus GMELIN. Conus cf. vinctus is rather common in the Philippine Islands (P. Clover, personal communication). 68. Conus virgo LINNAEUS, 1758 (Plate 13, Figure 16) 1758. Conus virgo Linnaeus, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 713, no. 253 1807. Conus flavocinctus Linx, Beschr. Nat. Samml. Univ. Rostock, Abtl. 3, p. 103 1858. Conus coelinae Crosst, Rev. Mag. Zool., (2), 10: 117, pl. 2, fig. 1 Shell: Shell large, thick. Body whorl yellow, cream or white, transversely striate at base, striae becoming finer and obsolete towards the shoulder; base stained’ with purple. Shoulder angulate, slightly rounded in very large specimens, smooth, spire slightly elevated, concave to con- vex, occasionally slightly sub-canaliculate; whorls finely striate. Aperture narrow, only slightly widening basally, interior white with a large purple patch near the base. Periostracum greenish-brown, smooth, thick. Juvenile specimens are orange in colour, delicate in texture with a clean, finely sculptured spire that is more distinctly canaliculate than in large adults. Type locality: Africano oceano. lal2 He) 1 U0) ioveng \NV3 BO) to Bs Ilse 7 to IB%s; N20 et ont 3 ohm Habitat: In patches of sand, under dead coral on sand substrate, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. Discussion: Demonp (1957) reported the species from Hawaii, where it does not occur. Conus spiceri BARTSCH & REHDER (1943), which appears to be endemic to Ha- waii, is somewhat similar to C’. virgo, but always lacks the dark purple stain at the base. 69. Conus vitulinus Hwass in Brucuikre, 1792 (Plate 14, Figure 32) 1792. Conus vitulinus Hwass in Brucutere, Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 648 1829. Conus vulpinus SCHUBERT & WAGNER, Syst. Conch. Cab., 12: 56, pl. 222, fig. 3073 (non C. vulpinus Hwass in Brucutére, 1792) Shell: Shell solid, conical. Body whorl reddish-brown, ornamented with two white transverse bands at shoulder and center; reddish-brown streaks often intrude into the white transverse bands. Body whorl spirally striate, striae distinctly ridged and granulose basally, becoming obsolete towards the shoulder; base stained with dark brown. Shoulder angulate, smooth, spire depressed, alter- nately flecked with white and brown, concave to convex; whorls spirally striate, slightly canaliculate in some speci- mens. Aperture narrow, interior white. Periostracum thick, brown, ridged, tufted. Type locality: Indian Ocean. H: 20 to 65 mm; W: 54 to 60%; HS: 4 to 11%; AA: 125° to 150° Habitat: Under dead coral, on reef substrate, in shallow water. Common. Distribution: Throughout Fiji. - Indo-West Pacific. 70. Conus species (Plate 15, Figures 45, 45 a) Shell: Shell solid, broad. Body whorl bluish-grey, orna- mented with small subtrigonal and elongated nebulous white blotches, becoming larger and merging, to form a narrow whitish central band; edge of shoulder encircled with a row of small subtrigonal blotches. Interrupted blackish-brown transverse lines encircle the body whorl, which is spirally striate; striae appear as widely spaced distinct ridges near the base, becoming fine and closely set towards the shoulder. Columella with a slight fold anteri- orly, base white. Shoulder slightly angulate, subcanalicu- late, smooth, spire elevated, straight to convex, bluish grey, axially maculated with white; apex pointed, each whorl with 2 distinct spiral threads. Aperture wide, slightly flaring basally, interior white or pale bluish-white, with the marginal edge of the lip occasionally lined and spotted with blackish-brown. H: 40 to 62 mm; W: 52 to 59%; HS: 10 to 15%; AA: 105° to 115% Habitat: Under dead coral, on sand and reef substrate, in shallow and deeper water. Rare. Distribution: South Viti Levu. - Philippines. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 91 Discussion: It is impossible to reach a satisfactory con- clusion as to the true taxonomic status of this species without thorough study and reference to type specimens, if at all extant. The species is obviously related to the complex group of forms comprising Conus monachus Linnaeus, 1758, C. achatinus Gmerin, 1791, and C. ranunculus Hwass in Brucuiere, 1792. The species Conus monachus LINNAEUS was recently studied by Kon (1963 b) and unequivocally established as a valid species; the author selected the REGENFUSS figure, which was one of LinNAEus’ references, as being representative of the lectotype (zbid, pl. 3, fig. 26), and also reproduced a specimen of C. monachus from the “Museum Ulricae” collection (pl. 3, fig. 27). These two figures leave no doubt that C. monachus is a shell lacking the closely sect transverse lines composed of dots and dashes on the body whorl; the presence of such ornamentation rules out the species from Fiji. Conus nebulosus Gmeuin, 1791, which was at first thought to apply to the Fiji specimens, was found to be an absolute synonym of C’. monachus LINNAEUS. GME- LIN’s references for his C. nebulosus were BUONANNI (1684, fig. 126), and RecenFruss (1758, pl. 12, fig. 68) ; both these citations were referred to by Linnaeus for his C. monachus. GMELIN, however, separated C. monachus from his C. nebulosus; for variety “$B” of C. monachus he refers to Cuemnitz (1788, pl. 142, figs. 1319, 1320). These figures were regarded by Dopcr (1953) as possibly representing either C. catus Hwass in Brucutére, 1792, or the “Minime” of pre-Linnean authors. Hwass (1792), the author of C. catus, refers to figure 1320 for his C. achatinus. REEVE (1843) cited the same figure and asso- ciated it with C. monachus franciscanus of CHEMNITZ; for unknown reasons REEVE made it a variant “8” of C. cinereus Hwass in Brucuikre, 1792. Tomun (1937) considered Conus achatinus to be a synonym of C. monachus. GMELIN (1791, p. 3386) de- scribed C. achatinus as an elongated shell with a short spire and reddish apex, details which do not agree with Fiji specimens of Conus species. GMELIN’s C. achatinus appears to be a composite species, consisting of C. acha- tinus and C. magus LinNAEusS. GMELIN’s reference for his variation “8” of C. achatinus was CHEmMnirz (1788, pl. 142, fig. 1317), which was the “C. achatinus maxi- mus” of CHEMNITZ and of authors, from the East Indian Seas. The remaining GmeELin references represent either C. magus, or may be interpreted either way. One other of GMELIN’s citations was to Martinr’s “Achaat” (1773, pl. 52, figs. 579, 580), of which figure 579 could possibly represent C’. achatinus of authors, but figure 580 is one of the many forms of C. magus. Dittwyn (1817), Premrer (1840), and Dautzen- BERG (1937) refer these Martini figures to C. magus LINNAEUS. Hwass (1792, p. 671) does not refer to GMELIN nor to any of Gmerin’s citations for his C. achatinus. Despite the fact that one of Hwass’ references (CHEMNITZ, 1788, pl. 142, fig. 1320) had been interpreted in many ways, his C. achatinus is at any rate more clearly defined than GMELIN’s. Dittwyn (1817) lists Conus achatinus CHEMNITZ, with C. achatinus Hwass in BrucuikreE, and C’.. minimus Gmeuin, 1791 (non LinnagEus, 1758) in synonymy; he further remarks that GMELIN’s C. achatinus is C. magus LINNAEUS. DauTzENBERG (1937) places GMELIN’s varieties of Conus achatinus with C. achatinus Hwass in BRUGUIERE in the synonymy of Conus achatinus CHEMNITZ and he refers Conus achatinus GMELIN to Conus magus Lin- NAEUS, thus following Dittwyn. The species Conus ra- nunculus Hwass in Brucuikre, 1792, was regarded as a variety of Conus achatinus, both by Reeve (1844) and DauTzENBERG (1937); the latter pointed out that the American locality cited by Hwass and LaMarck is in error. CLENcH (1942) accepts the American locality as correct and restricts C. ranunculus to the Lesser Antilles, the North coast of South America and West Africa. If we were to accept GMELIN’s locality of “Oceano Americano” for his C. achatinus as correct, then his shell can be neither C. achatinus Hwass in BRUGUIERE, nor C. magus LINNAEUS. As stated previously, Tomiin (1937) associated Conus achatinus Hwass in Brucui&zRE with C. monachus Lin- NAEUS. ReEEvE (1844), however, stresses the absence of the transverse lines and dots in C. monachus, a feature present in C’.. achatinus; the recently established lectotype of C. monachus confirms REEVE’s correct interpretation of the species. Mermop (1947) in his work on the Hwass - LAMArcK - DE LEsseErt collection preserved in Geneva, interprets Conus achatinus as the rather globular, greenish-bluish shell with numerous fine punctate or dotted transverse lines of dark and light dots, a shell currently accepted as that species. Specimens of C. achatinus used for compar- ison show that this species, when compared with Conus species from Fiji, is lighter in weight, more narrow in shape (50% of height), with a proportionately higher spire (17% of height) and an apical angle of 95°. The transverse lines on the body whorl alternate in white and brown dots and lines, whereas in Conus species the lines are entirely blackish-brown and only occasionally inter- rupted by a nebulous white dot from the main design. The most important morphological feature of C. acha- tinus are the 4 to 5 fine spiral striae on ea~* whorl of the Page 92 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 spire. “Conus species”, however, bears two distinct spiral threads on each whorl; a comparison of Fiji and Philippine Island specimens showed no variation in this respect. Co- nus achatinus lacks the distinct narrow whitish central band and the “hem-like” band at the shoulder of “Conus species.” In view of the conflicting evidence I hesitate to assign this to any of the species mentioned in the foregoing dis- cussion. UNCONFIRMED RECORDS OF Conus FROM THE FIJI ISLANDS Conus aplustre Rerve, 1843 - Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 30, spec. 170. Reported by Cotron (1945). Conus auricomus Hwass in Brucutére, 1792 - Encycl. Meth. Vers, 1: 742. Reported by Corron (1945) under the name Hermes clavus (LINNAEUS). Conus coccineus GMELIN, 1791 - Syst. Nat, Gl, 18, jp, 3390. Reported by Corton ( IISA) ) Conus gubernator Hwass in Brucutére, 1792 - Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 727. Reported by Corton, (1945). Conus lienardi BERNARDI & Crosse, 1861 - Journ. Con- chyl. Paris, 9: 49, pl. 1, fig. 2. Reported by Cot- TON, (1945). Conus monachus Linnagus, 1758 - Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 714, no. 262. Reported by Corton (1945). Conus ochroleucus GMELIN, 1791 - Syst: Natsecml gasp: 3391. Reported by Corron (94S). Conus parius Reeve, 1844 - Conch. Icon., 1, pl. 43, spec. 235. Reported by Corron (1945). Conus sulcatus Hwass in Brucurire, 1792 - Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 618. Reported in Girrorp (151), by HerTiein « Hanna, Conus sumatrensis Hwass in Brucuttre, 1792 - Encycl. Méth. Vers, 1: 655. | Reported in Girrorp (ISB), by HertLein & HANNA. Discussion: The occurrence of Conus auricomus Hwass in Brucutkre in Fiji is highly probable as the species appears to have a continuous distribution from Hawaii to the Philippine Islands and Malaysia. The species must be extremely rare in Fiji as no authentic specimens have been collected so far. Conus ochroleucus GMELIN does not occur in Fiji: how- ever, a very similar species, C. radiatus GMELIN does live there. Conus sulcatus and C. sumatrensis were identified by Hertein & Hanna from collections of shell-middens of ancient Fijian village sites. Such shells are usually in very poor condition, usually lacking colour and pattern, and a positive identification is often impossible. Small specimens of C. vexillum Gme.tn closely resemble C. sumatrensis. The two species recorded by Girrorp and identified by HERTLEIN & Hanna do not occur in Fiji waters. FOSSIL RECORDS oF Conus FROM THE FIJI ISLANDS Conus affinis Martin, 1879, Lapp, 1934, Bernice Bish. Mus. Bull., 119: 231, pl. 41, fig. 3 The species was reported by Lapp from the Miocene deposits of Viti Levu. Martin’s Conus affinis is a homo- nym of C. affinis GmMeELtIn, 1791, and was renamed C. sannio Fintay, 1926. It appears that the Fijian fossil record does not belong to the genus Conus. Conus pulicarius Hwass, 1792, Lapp, 1934, Bernice Bish. Mus. Bull., 119: 231, pl. 41, fig. 4 Lapp’s specimen from the Miocene (Pliocene?) of Viti Levu, tentatively identified as Conus pulicarius Hwass certainly is not that species. The illustrated specimen compares favorably with the recent species C. aristo- phanes SOWERBY. Conus species B. Lapp, 1934, Bernice Bish. Mus. Bull., Nis BIZ, joll, Gell, saver, & Lapp compared the species from the Miocene (Plio- cene?) of Viti Levu with Australian examples of Conus anemone LAMARCK, 1810. The illustration shows a shell with an extremely high spire, composed of 5 whorls, and a mammillated apex; the juncture of the aperture is well below the shoulder. The fossil species has no affinity with the recent species C. anemone, and in shape, spire and seulpture only slightly resembles C. compressus SowERBY, 1866, or C. tannaensis (Corton, 1945). It is in all probability a distinct species. APPENDIX Through the kindness of Mr. P. W. Clover of San Antonio, Philippine Islands, I received several Conus shells for comparison with Fiji specimens. The material forwarded for examination contained one specimen of Conus dilectus Goutp; the shell was collected by Mr. Clover at Batangas, Philippine Islands, and meas- ured 15.2 mm by 7.7 mm. The specimen agreed very well with the Fiji specimen illustrated, except that the trans- verse striae on the body whorl were more prominent and extended farther towards the shoulder. This new geo- graphical record extends the distributional range of the species. A series of Conus specimens collected in the Philippine Islands by Mr. Clover were undoubtedly identical with specimens of Conus lachrymosus REEVE from Fiji. The Philippine shells showed the same high degree of varia- Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 93 bility as those recorded from Fiji. The largest specimen measured 34.6mm by 18.1 mm, and agreed fairly well with the description and type figure of Conus boeticus Reeve (1844, pl. 42, spec. 226). REEveE’s diagnosis of C. boeticus does not appear to be typical of the species and REEVE may have been guilty of describing a variant of a specimen, instead of a species. Whatever the case may be, the shells from the Philippine Islands strongly suggest that C. boeticus, C’. lachrymosus and C. rivularius REEVE are connected through various intermediate specimens and are conspecific. Mr. Clover (personal communication) confirmed that the periostracum of the Philippine Island shells is identical with the periostracum of Fiji specimens of Conus lachrymosus. Animal and egg-case descriptions of the species from the Philippine Islands and a compar- ison with the species listed as C’. lachrymosus REEVE from Fiji may prove the latter species to be only an infraspecific form of C. boeticus REEVE. CONCLUSION A total of 70 species of Conus have been recorded from recent collections; an additional 10 species have been recorded in literature, but in view of the uncertainty of positive locality indication and identification, they are treated as unconfirmed reports. Statistical measurements show that the width of the shell in relation to its height does not exceed 12% in the various populations of Conus examined from Fiji; it is interesting to note that shells of the genus Cypraea display a similar variation in form. Although individuals of two closely related species are sometimes separated with difficulty, measurements of large series of shells will often bring to light constant differences in a certain measurable dimension (the width of Conus mustelinus as compared with C. capitaneus). Pathological specimens of Conus, e. g. shells with a double shoulder or a dropped shoulder, may often fall outside of the accepted limits of variation. LITERATURE CITED ApaMs, ARTHUR 1854. Descriptions of new species in the genus Conus; from the collection of Hugh Cuming, Esq. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 21: 116-119 (14 Nov. 1854) BuoNnaNnnl, FILIPPO 1684. Recreatio mentio et oculi in observatione animalium testaceorum curiosis naturae inspectoribus. Rome, pts. | - 3, 139 plates. CERNOHORSKY, WALTER OLIVER 1964. The Cypraeidae of Fiji (Mollusca:Gastropoda). 177 - 201; plts. 21-26; 1 Text fig.; 1 map (1 April 1964) The Veliger 6 (4) : CHEMNITZ, JOHANN HiERONYMUS 1788. Neues systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet (continuation of FH. W. Martini). Nirnberg, 10 (1): plts. 138 - 143 CLENCH, WILLIAM JAMES 1942. The genus Conus in the western Atlantic. John- sonia 1 (6): 1-40; 15 plts. Corton, BERNARD CHARLES 1945, A catalogue of the cone shells (Conidae) in the South Australian Museum. Rec. South Austral. Mus. 8 (2): 229 to 280; 5 plts.; 1 text fig. 1958. Australian Recent and Tertiary species of the molluscan family Conidae. Roy. Soc. South Austral., Malac.Sect., Adelaide, 1 plt. (not paginated) DauTzENBERG, PHILIPPE 1937. Résultats scientifiques du voyage aux Indes Orientales Néerlandaises; Gastéropodes marins; Conidae. Mém. Brux. Mus. Roy. d’Hist. Nat., 2 (18): 1-284; plts. 1-3 Demonp, Joan 1957. Micronesian reef-associated gastropods. Pacif. Sci., 11 (3): 275-341; plts. 1-4; text figs. 1-42; 1 table Dittwyn, Lewis WEsToN 1817. A descriptive catalogue of recent shells, arranged according to the Linnaean method, with particular attention to the synonymy. London, 1: 1 - 580; 2: 581 - 1092; index Dopce, HENRY 1953. A historical review of the mollusks of Linnaeus. Pt. 2, the class Cephalopoda and the genera Conus and Cypraea (Gastropoda). Bull. Amcr. Mus. Nat. Hist.103 (1): 1- 134 ENDEAN, R. 1962. A survey of venomous cones. Austral. Newsletter, Malac. Soc. Austral., 11 (43): 1-11 GirForp, E. W. 1951. Archaeological excavations in Viti Levu. Anthrop. Rec., 13 (3): 189 - 288; figs.; maps. GMELIN, J. F. 1791. Caroli Linnaei systema naturae per regna tria naturae. Editio decima tertia. _ Leipzig, vol. 6. Hasse, TADASHIGE 1961. Coloured illustrations of the shells of Japan. II: 1 to 183; 66 colored plates. HANLEyY, SYLVANUS CHARLES 1855. Ipsa Linnaei Conchylia; the shells of Linnaeus, deter- mined from his manuscripts and collections. London, 556 pp.; 6 plts. Hanna, G Dattas 1963. | West American molluscs of the genus Conus; II. Calif. Acad. Sci. Occ. Papers 35:1 - 103; plts 1 - 11 Hwass, Curistian HEE (in BRuGurzRE) 1792. Encyclopédie méthodique. Histoire naturelle des Vers. Panckoucke, Paris, 1 (2): 345-757 (28 Jan. 1963) Page 94 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 TREDALE, Tom 1930. Queensland molluscan notes, No. 2. Mem. Qld. Mus., 10(1): 73-88; plt. 9 Kiener, L. C. 1845-1850. Spécies général et iconographie des coquilles vivantes; famille des Enroulées, genre Cone. Rousseau, Paris, 2: 1 to 379; plts. 1-111 Kira, TETSUAKI 1959. Coloured illustrations of the shells of Japan. Hoikusha, Osaka, 1: 1 - 239; 71 plts. Koun, ALan J. Rev. ed., 1959. The Hawaiian species of Conus (Mollusca: Gastro- poda). Pacific Sci., 13: 368 - 401; 2 plts.; 4 text figs. 1961. | Studies on spawning behaviour, egg masses, and larval development in the gasteropod genus Conus. II. Observations in the Indian Ocean during the Yale Seychelles expedition. Bull. Bingham Ocean. coll., Peabody Mus. Nat. Hist., Yale Univ., 17 (4) : 3-51; 10 tables; 26 text figs. 1963. | Venomous marine snails of the genus Conus; in: Ven- omous and poisonous animals and noxious plants of the Pa- cific area. Pergamon Press, Oxfr., 83-96; 4 text figs.; 3 tab. 1963 a. Conus clavus Linnazus, 1758; Conus minimus Lin- NAEUS, 1758: Conus rusticus Linnazus, 1758; and Conus senator LinNaEus, 1758 (Mollusca, Gastropoda) ; proposed suppression under the plenary powers, Z. N. (S) 1558. Bull. zool. Nomencl., 20 (4): 309 - 312 1963 b. Type specimens and identity of the described species of Conus. 1. The species decribed by Linnaéus, 1758 - 1767. Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. London, 44 (302): 740-768: 4 plts. Koun, Aran J.. Pau, R. SaunpERS & S. WIENER 1960. Preliminary studies on the venom of the marine snail Conus. Ann. New York Acad. Sci., 90 (3): 706-725; 7 text figs.; 10 tables Koun, Aan J., & Ciirron S. WEAVER 1962. Additional records and notes on Conus (Mollusca: Gastropoda) in Hawaii. Pacific Sci., 16 (4): 349-358; 5 text figs. Lapp, S. Harry 1934. Geology of Viti Levu, Fiji. Bull. 119: 1 - 263; plts. 1-44 LINNAEuS, CAROLUS 1758. Systema naturae per regna tria naturae. Edit. Brit. Mus. facsimile reprod. 1764. Museum s:ae r:ae m:tis Ludovicae Ulricae Reginae Svecorum. L. Salvii, Holmiae, pt. 2: 1 - 722 Bernice P. Bishop Mus. Tenth 1767. Systema Naturae per Regna Tria Naturae. Ed. 12, Holmiae, 1, pt. 2 Martini, FriepricH HeEInricH WILHELM 1773. | Neues systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet. Niirn- berg, 2 (1), plts. 52 - 64 Mermop, Gaston 1947. Catalogue des types et des exemplaires de Cones figu- rés ou décrites par Hwass, Bruguiére, Lamarck, de Lessert, Kiener et Chenu, se trouvant au Musée de Genéve. Rev. Suisse Zool. 54: 155 - 217 Montrort, DENYS DE 1810. | Conchyliologie systématique et classification métho- dique des coquilles. Paris, 2 vols. Morcu, Orro AnprEAs Lowson 1852-1853. Catalogus conchyliorum quae reliquit D. Alphonso d’Aguirra et Gadea, Comes de Yoldi. Hafniae, fasc. 1: 1 - 170 PFEIFFER, Louis 1840. Kritisches Register zu Martini und Chemnitz, Systema- tisches Conchylien-Cabinet. Kassel; pp. 1 - 112 Quoy, JEAN RENE ConsTANT, & JoSEPH PAUL GAIMARD 1834. Voyage de la Corvette l’Astrolabe exécuté par ordre du Roi, pendant les années 1826-1829. sous le commandement de M. J. Dumont d’Urville; Mollusques. Zoologie, Paris, 3:: 95 plates Reeve, Lovett Aucustus 1843-1844. Conchologia Iconica; a complete repertory of species. Monograph of the genus Conus. London, 1; plts. 1 - 47 1848 - [1849]. Conchologia iconica; or illustrations of the shells of molluscous animals. London, Monograph of the genus Conus, suppl.: 1-7; plts. 1 - 9. REcENFUSS, Franz M. 1758. Auserlesne Schnecken, Muscheln und andre Schaal- thiere. Copenhagen, Andreas Hartwig Godiche. pp. 1 - 14, 1-22, 1 - 87; plts. 1-12 Rumpuius, Grorck EvERHARD 1705. | D’Amboinsche Rariteitkamer. Amsterdam, plts. 1 - 60 SoweERBy, GrEorcE BRETTINGHAM 1857-1858. Thesaurus Conchylorum; Monograph of the genus Conus. London, 3 (18): 1-56: plts. 1-24 (187-210) Swainson, WILLIAM 1840. A treatise on malacology, or the natural classification of shells and shellfish. London, pp. 1 - 419; text figs. Tomun, JoHN Reap LE BrockTon 1937. Catalogue of Recent and fossil cones. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London, 22: 205 - 330; addenda, p. 333. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 95 Discussion of the Mytilus californianus Community on Newly Constructed Rock Jetties in Southern California (Mollusca: Bivalvia) BY DONALD J. REISH Department of Biology, California State College at Long Beach Long Beach, California 90804 (This study was supported by research grant NSF G-8914 from the National Science Foundation. ) (3 Text figures) INTRODUCTION THE CALIFORNIA SEA-MUSSEL, Mytilus californianus Conrap, 1837, is distributed from the Aleutian Islands, Alaska, to Isla Socorro, Mexico (110° 55’ W. Longitude and 18° 45’ N. Latitude). It is particularly abundant on rocks in the intertidal zone of the more exposed coasts (Soot-RyEn, 1955). The re-establishment of a M. cali- fornianus community was studied by Hewatr (1935) at Monterey, California. He scraped an area free of all macroscopic life and studied the settlement of organisms on this denuded rock during the ensuing 2.5 years. Evi- dence for true succession was found; some of the earliest inhabitants were essential for the settlement of some of the later organisms. The study of succession by scraping a rock and following the settlement of organisms has been pur- sued by others, for example, BokKENHAM & STEPHENSON (1938) and Hosuiar (1960). The construction of new boat harbors in southern California has provided opportunities to study settlement of organisms on new structures never before exposed to sea water. Rock jetties are built on both sides of the entrance (Figures 1 and 2) in order to minimize the wave action within the marina and to prevent offshore sedi- ments from being deposited within the boat harbor. The settlement of organisms, especially Mytilus californianus, on these jetties was studied at Ventura County (Port Hueneme) and Playa del Rey (Los Angeles) Marinas (Figures 1 and 2). This paper reports the results of these observations. MATERIALS anp METHODS The rock jetties at Ventura County and Playa del Rey Marinas were constructed in a similar manner. Two trenches were excavated in the sandy beach to a required depth and then filled with large rocks. Afterwards the jetty was extended beyond the coast line. The sand between the two jetties was not removed for about a year; in other words, only that portion of the jetty which extended beyond the coastline was exposed initially to sea water. Collections were first made in June and July 1960, at Ventura and Playa del Rey Marinas, respec- tively, or about 3 to 4 months after the rocks were first exposed to sea water. Collections were made approxi- mately bimonthly until the end of the study in June 1962. As the dredging of the land between the jetties proceeded, the rocks were first exposed to sea water at a different time of the year. Therefore, it was possible to determine what effect, if any, the time of year has on the coloniza- tion of organisms on the rocks. Collections were made from the mid-tide horizon where the Mytilus californianus community reached its maximum development. Successive collections were either made from the same rock or an adjoining one. An area associated organisms. Specimens were preserved in the field. The animals were sorted, identified, weighed and measured in the laboratory. Three collecting sites were selected on the south jetty of Ventura County Marina (Figure 1): Site 1 was first exposed approximately March 1, 1960, the first collection Page 96 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 VENTURA COUNTY MARINA Scale a 1O@ Orta MS? 14: Scale ———____———, 2000ft. | Figure 1: Map of Ventura County Marina, California, showing station locations. Figure 2: Map of Playa del Rey Marina, California, showing collecting site. Distribution of Mytalus californianus is indicated by solid line and of M. edulis by dotted line. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 97 made on June 17, 1960, and Sites 2 and 3 were first exposed approximately September 1 to 15, 1960, the first collections made on December 14, 1960. Only one site was used at Playa del Rey; it was first exposed approximately April 1, 1960, and the first collection made on July 1, 1960. Observations were made periodically inland to the collecting site especially for signs of Mytilus californianus. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author wishes to thank Mr. Ira M. Cornwall and Dr. E. Yale Dawson for assistance in the identification of some of the barnacles and algae, respectively. The author thanks Miss Emilie Bender, Mrs. Bettye Byrne, Miss Ruth Zakem, and Mr. Harold Pope, for sorting the organisms collected in this study. VENTURA COUNTY MARINA The green alga, Ulva dactylifera SETCHELL & GARDNER, 1920, was the earliest macroscopic organism to settle on the rock jetties at both marinas. Luxuriant growths were observed throughout the mid-tide horizon within two months after the rocks were first exposed to sea water in spring 1960. The algae began to diminish shortly there- after. Ulva dactylifera completely disappeared from Site 1 at both Ventura County and Playa del Rey Marinas after seven months exposure. Settling of Mytilus californianus was rapid on the newly constructed jetties (Figure 3, Table 1). A peak of 1540 specimens for the 400 cm* area was reached by the end of summer 1960. The number of mussels decreased during the winter of 1960-61; a second peak of 1535 specimens was reached during August 1961. Thereafter the number of specimens continued to decrease until the entire popu- lation of M. californianus had been completely eliminated by August 1962, at Ventura. No mussels have been seen at Site 1 in Ventura County Marina since the summer of 1962, although a population is located nearby at the end of the jetty (see discussion). The curve for the weight of the population of Mytilus californianus follows the trend of number of specimens during 1960. A plateau in the biomass occurred during the winter 1960-61 rather than a decrease as observed in the number of specimens; therefore, the weight per individual increased during this time. The weight of the population showed a second rise during the spring and summer of 1961 with a maximum weight of 1453 grams measured in August 1961. The weight of the population, but not per specimen, remained relatively constant during the next year. ~ Growth of the population of Mytilus californianus, as determined by the shell length of the largest specimens in each collection, proceeded at a regular rate of 6 mm per month for the first year ending February 24, 1961. (Actually, this figure of 6 mm per month is a conservative one since the year was figured from March 1, 1960, the approximate date that Site 1 was first exposed to sea water. It is highly unlikely that M. californianus settled on the rocks the first day. The exact date the mussels first settled on the jetty is, of course, unknown; therefore, the conservative estimate was used.) No specimens were col- lected greater than 70 mm in length. Sites 2 and 3 (Figure 1) at Ventura County Marina were originally exposed to water September 1 to 15, 1960. Growth of Ulva dactylifera dominated the entire mid- tidal zone from December 14, 1960 to April 2, 1961. Mytilus californianus were first seen at Site 2 on April 12, 1961. A total of 904 specimens, weighing 288 grams, and measuring up to 18 mm in length, was collected from a 400 cm’ area on April 12, 1961. This was the largest population of mussels seen at this site. Small clumps of mussels were observed for the next six months, but none were seen after October 6, 1961. The population had not been re-established by July 1963. A few specimens of M. californianus were observed on the side of rocks at Site 3 on June 6, October 6, and December 19, 1961, but none since. A few small specimens of M. edulis Lin- NAEUS, 1758, were taken here on June 26, 1962, but none after this date. PLAYA DEL REY MARINA The growth and development of the Mytilus californianus community at Playa del Rey Marina was similar to what was observed at Ventura County Marina. As stated above, Ulva dactylifera preceded the establishment of the mus- sel. One striking difference in the mussel community in the two marinas was noted; the population of M. cali- fornianus has persisted to date at the jetties at Playa del Rey. An overlapping population of M. californianus and M. edulis was observed on each side of the rock jetties at Playa del Rey. The distribution of these two species of mussels is diagrammed in Figure 2. ASSOCIATED SPECIES The principal species of plants and animals associated with the population of Mytilus californianus are listed in Table 1. Seasonal differences are noted with respect to the number of species and specimens. The larger and more diverse populations were encountered during the summer and smaller, less diverse populations were ob- served during the winter months. The majority of the known species collected show a seasonal peak in occur- rence. For example, the polychaetes Nereis grubei (Kin- BERG, 1866), Lumbrineris zonata (JoHNson, 1901), and Boccardia proboscidea Hartman, 1940, were collected Page 98 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 Table 1 List of species and number of specimens collected from the Mytilus californianus community on the rock jetty at Ventura County Marina 6/17 8/4 9/30 12/14 2/14 4/12 6/6 8/3 10/6 12/19 6/26 Species 1960 1960 1960 1960 1961 1961 1961 1961 1961 1961 1962 Phylum Chlorophyta *Ulva dactylifera + + + + *Phylum Coelenterata sea anemones, unidentified 1 5 2 6 7 8 *Phylum Platyhelminthes unidentified 2 6 1 9 7 1 14 16 14 146 *Phylum Nemertea unidentified 1 4 1 2 3 24 16 10 SESS Phylum Annelida; Class Polychaeta Paleonotus bellis 2 24 *Phyllodocid 3 14 1 1 4 *Syllinae 1 3 51 18 6 10 Legs 305 *Nereis grubet 1 1 1 1 *Nerets latascens 7 Glycera sp. 1 2 3 *TLumbrineris zonata 1 4 1 1 Dorvillea articulata 3 1 *Naineris dendritica 20 3 6 10 22 *Boccardia proboscidea 12 407 20 5 1 *Cirriformia luxuriosa 5 1 9 10 *Polyophthalmus pictus 2 90 4 1 6 74 62 *Capitella capitata 1 30 2 Phragmatopoma californica 6 4 1 *Chone sp. 7 5 2 Phylum Sipunculoidea . Phascolosoma agassizii 3 1 3 AS 20 26 4 Phylum Arthropoda; Class Crustacea Pachygrapsus crassipes 1 1 1 4 2 *Balanus crenatus 4 10 ZI) 42 64 440 *Chthamalus dalli 70 46 2811 21 *Mitella polymerus 4 9 3 2 1 41 Phylum Mollusca; Class Pelecypoda *Fiatella arctica 1 9 10 1 1 7 19 5 30 *Mytilus californianus PAA 625154. 0929934 1219 O00R S153 Sieh G eo Omer *Protothaca staminea 1 4 10 22, *Clams, juvenile 3 1 Class Gastropoda *Acmaea digitalis 5 5 *Acmaea limatula 55 41 15 23 *Acmaea sp., juvenile 35 42 12 18 2 30 7 *Tittorina planaxis 1 2 1 Littorina scutulata 2 2 as Tegula sp. 8 5 5 *Snails, juvenile 19 19 5 8 fi Additional species 0 1 3 1 0 0 1 0 1 4 6 Additional specimens 0 1 4s 1 0 0 1 0 1 5 5-++ Total number of species 6 16 24 9 13 9 18 29 19 iI) 28 Total number of specimens a) (2S) BAD ES SB} IB} O29 OGL «14s Bo7 SHO) Total number of specimens excluding Mytilus californianus 4 84 684 58 59 oe I) Slo 27 Soil az * Indicates species also present in the Mytilus californianus community on the jetty at Playa del Rey Marina. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 99 only during the months of June through October. The two acorn barnacles, Balanus crenatus BRuUGUIERE, 1789, and Chthamalus dalli Pitspry, 1916, were not taken in large numbers until 14 months after the first mussels were collected. Limpets were present the first summer, but the specimens were too small to make specific identifications. Acmaea limatula CARPENTER, 1864, was the most fre- quently encountered limpet in 1961. Some species were incidental inhabitants of the mussel community and present more abundantly elsewhere. The polychaete Phragmatopoma californica (FEwxkes, 1889) builds sandy tubes which formed a conspicuous commu- nity in the low intertidal zone at Ventura County Marina. All specimens of the crab Pachygrapsus crassipes RAN- DALL, 1839, were small; the adults were very abundant between the rocks in the intertidal zone. All specimens of the clam Protothaca staminea (Conrapb, 1837) were small; this species was more commonly encountered in the benthos. Additional species were collected, in most cases only one or two specimens and not listed in Table 1, from the Mytilus californianus community at Ventura County; Settlement and Growth Rate in a Population of Mytilus californianus oO; Oo oO; Oo Mm] mo w 2| 5 SIE oO Pee. S&S Tas OS is i 2 OQ © s 2 Time: June I960 ( %) to June 1962 ( %) Figure 3: Graph showing settlement and growth rate of a population of Mytilus californianus in Ventura County Marina, California. Page 100 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 these include an unidentified sponge, the polychaetes Ha- losydna johnsoni (Darsoux, 1899), Eteone pacifica Hart- MAN, 1936, Nereis vexillosa Gruse, 1851, Ctenodrilus serratus (ScHmwpt, 1857), Pherusa capulata (Moore, 1909), Armandia bioculata Hartman, 1938, an uniden- tified oligochaete, the amphipods Caprella californica Stimpson, 1857, Corophium acherusicum (Costa, 1857), the pelecypod Sceptifer bifurcatus (Conrap, 1837), a chiton, Mopalia sp., and the ectoproct Bugula neritina (Linnaeus, 1758). Of the total number of macroscopic organisms collected from the Mytilus californianus community at the two marinas, 31, or 62%, were species in common; these species are indicated by an asterisk (*) in Table 1. Five species, the alga Enteromorpha minima NarceEu, 1849, unidentified specimens of isopods, amphipods, and pycno- gonids, and one young specimen of the starfish Pisaster ochraceus (BRANDT, 1835), were taken at Playa del Rey but not at Ventura County Marina. DISCUSSION The data obtained by Hewatr (1935) and these reported herein cannot be compared directly. The method of study differed. Hewatt removed a square yard (—8281 cm’) of Mytilus californianus and associated organisms from an established community; observations were reported of the larger animals that settled in this scraped area for the ensuing year. He then revisited the area 1.5 years later and reported on the extent of the M. californianus and Mitella polymerus settlement. In the study on the new marina jetties collections were made shortly after the rocks were initially exposed to sea water, and the collections were always from a different but nearby position. HEwattT summarized his data by stating that succession in the Mytilus californianus community seemed to pro- gress as: (1) formation of an algae film, (2) appearance of algae feeders, (3) mussels and barnacles attach during their respective spawning seasons, (4) as the attached forms grow, the algae feeders are crowded to higher zones. The data reported herein differ from those of Hewatt. Algae were the first macroscopic inhabitants as Hewatt observed. Mytilus californianus settled within three months after initial exposure and continued to dominate the entire community until the entire associ- ation disappeared two years later. Limpets did not appear until after the appearance of M. californianus and the specimens collected were small until a year later. The elimination of Ulva dactylifera was largely completed prior to the appearance of algae feeders such as gastro- pods. The acorn barnacles, Balanus crenatus and Chtha- malus dalli, did not appear in large numbers until the second summer; the majority of these specimens attached to the shells of the mussels rather than to the rocks. The importance of the time of year rather than true succession for the pattern of development of the Mytilus californianus community is similar to the observations on the establishment of the W/. edulis community in protected waters (ReisH, 1964a). Mytilus californianus settled during the spring months shortly after the rocks were first exposed to sea water at both Ventura and Playa del Rey Marinas. The California mussel did not settle on rocks initially exposed to sea water in late summer until the following spring. The growth rate of 6 mm per month is slightly less than the 7 mm per month observed by Cok & Fox (1942) for the same species at La Jolla, California. They found the principal growth in shell length to occur during the months when the water was colder with little or no growth occurring when the water temperature exceeded 20° C. Growth, as measured by the maximum size attained by a member of the population, occurred from the prob- able initial settlement in March to June and again during the following winter months. The seasonal variation in the number of associated species is similar to that observed in the Mytilus edulis community on the floats in Alamitos Bay (ReisH, 1964b). While water temperatures were not taken at Ventura County Marina, the seasonal difference in the population of associated organisms is presumed related to this factor. “No explanation is advanced to account for the elimi- nation of the Mytilus californianus community from Site 1 at Ventura County Marina. The habitat of this mussel is described as being very common especially along the more exposed coasts of the intertidal zone (Soot-RyEN, 1955), although it is known to form beds in subtidal waters (Berry, 1954). Mytilus californianus is present at the end of the jetty and all along the outer side. No specimens of M. californianus have been observed on the north jetty; however, a sandy beach extends almost to the end on the ocean side of the jetty, probably elim- inating any suitable environment for the mussel. Typically, Mytilus californianus is known from the rocky shores and M. edulis from the bay environment. Specimens of both species may occur together; for example, Fircu (1953) reported both species attached to off-shore pilings of southern California. The rock jetties at the entrance of Playa del Rey Marina have overlapping populations (Figure 2). Two notable differences between the population of M. californianus at the two marinas were the smaller sized specimens (a maximum of 53 to 70 mm.) and the larger number of specimens (a maximum Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 101 of 2261 to 1535) at Playa del Rey Marina. However, the total weight of the population of M. californianus was greater at Ventura County Marina. The rock jetties at Alamitos Bay and Newport Bay have a population of M. californianus at the end of the jetty and a population of M. edulis at the base of the jetty with an intermediate region in which neither mussel occurs. SUMMARY 1. In a study of the growth and development of the Mytilus californianus community on rock jetties, newly constructed in Ventura County and Playa del Rey Ma- rinas, data collected periodically over a two-year period indicated that Ulva dactylifera was the earliest macro- scopic inhabitant regardless of what time of year the area was initially exposed to sea water. Mytilus californi- anus settled on the rocks during the spring months. 2. The larger, more diverse populations were encountered during the summer months and smaller, less diverse popu- lations observed during the winter months. 3. The population of Mytilus californianus disappeared at Ventura County Marina after two years, but not at Playa del Rey Marina. No explanation is advanced at this time for this difference. LITERATURE CITED BERRY, SAMUEL STILLMAN 1954. On the supposed stenobathic habitat of the California sea mussel. Calif. Fish and Game 40: 69 - 73 BoxenuaM, N. A. H., « T. StepHENSON 1938. The colonization of denuded surface in the intertidal region of the Cape peninsula. Ann. Natal Mus: 9: 47 - 81 Cor, WeEsLEY R., & Denis L. Fox 1942. Biology of the California sea mussel (Mytilus califor- nianus). I. Influence of temperature, food supply, sex and age on the rate of growth. Journ. Exper. Zool. 90: 1 - 30 Fircu, Joun E. 1953. | Common marine bivalves of California. Calif. Dept. Fish and Game, Fish Bull. 90: 102 pp. Hewatt, WILus G. 1935. Ecological succession in the Mytilus californianus habitat as observed in Monterey Bay, California. Ecology 16: 244 to 251 Hosuiat, TAKAO 1960. Synecological study on intertidal communities. IIT. An analysis of interrelation among sedentary organisms on the artificially denuded rock surface. Bull. Mar. Biol. Sta. Asamushi, Tokoku Univ. 10: 49 - 56 RetsH, Donatp J. 1964 a. Studies on the Mytilus edulis community in Alamitos Bay, California. I. Development and destruction of the community. The Veliger 6 (3): 124-131 (1 Jan. 1964) California: II. Composition and variation of the associated 1964 b. Studies on the Mytilus edulis community in Alamitos Bay, organisms. ‘The Veliger 6 (4) : 202 - 207 (1 April 1964) Soot-RyYEN, TRON 1955. A report of the family Mytilidae (Pelecypoda). Allan Hancock Pacific Exped., 20, 1 - 175 Page 102 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 A New Species of Primovula from the Philippines (Mollusca: Gastropoda) BY CRAWFORD N. CATE 12719 San Vicente Boulevard, Los Angeles, California (Plate 19) CaricaRA Bay, SAMAR ISLAND in the Philippines is an area exceptionally rich in molluscan species of all kinds; notable among the less common C'ypraea from this bay are Cypraea pulchella Swainson, 1823, C. saulae GasKoIn, 1843, and C. pyriformis Gray, 1824, to mention only a few. During April 1962, commercial prawn and fish trawlers were working the ocean bottom in Carigara Bay in from 20 to 30 fathoms on a muddy substrate. Among the many hauls made on that particular trip, the fisher- men brought up the above-mentioned cypraeid species and an unfamiliar example of the Ovulidae, which was sent to me for identification by Mr. Donald Dan of Manila. After a thorough review of the material and mono- graphs available to me (KiENeErR, 1843; Sowersy, 1848; Reeve, 1865; WetnKaurr, 1881; Scuimper, 1932; ALLAN, 1956), and miscellaneous papers dealing with this group, I concluded that this species might be new to science. In order not to overlook any new species that might have been published subsequent to those works I had reviewed, I sent photographs of the new form to Dr. F. A. Schilder, who courteously compared them with specimens in his collection, ultimately verifying my sug- gestion that the shell in question was heretofore unknown. I wish to express here my appreciation for his kind con- sideration of the problem. Primovula (Diminovula) dondani C. N. Carts, spec. nov. Shell medium-sized, elongately ovate; aperture curving, narrow adapically, broadening but abruptly constricted in front; terminal ridge a continuation of the inflated base, straight, sharp, converging with inner fossular ridge; both front and rear terminals produced, adapically more so and narrower; first funiculum prominent, V-shaped, superimposed on base at abaxial margin of posterior colu- mella; first posterior outlet separates the smaller second funiculum; terminal canals narrow, semi-enclosed; cen- tral transverse dorsal surface somewhat flattened, bor- dered on either side by a vague angular line; irregularly curved margin strongly developed, tubular, crossed by unevenly spaced, variously lengthened serrated teeth the entire length; terminal ridge straight, sharply ridged by eight weak serrated teeth; entire shell surface finely ridged with numerous transverse lines, crisscrossed laterally front to back with equally numerous very fine growth ridges; the body whorl is grey-white, darker on the base; the margins, teeth, terminals, terminal ridge, fossular ridge, and funiculum are white; interior of terminal canals very pale pink. Primovula dondani is morphologically distinct from other known forms of Ovulidae; however, in several ways it seems related to shells of the subgenus Prosimnia ScCHILDER, 1927. The ribs crossing the outer lip form- ing serrations are reminiscent of Prosimnia coarctata (Apams & Reeve, 1848), and of Primovula mariae ScuILper, 1941, but the lack of a transverse carina on the dorsum precludes its possible affinity with either of these specics. It should be further pointed out that there is some similarity to P. mariae because of the denticles on the front terminal ridge. Since the first funiculum ex- hibits no dental ribbing, morphological evidence seems to ally this new species with Primovula rhodia (A. Apams, 1854). Another comparable species appears to be Primovula bullata (ApaAMs & REEvE, 1848). Compar- ing further, one can see reflected structural exaggerations of both subgenera Prosimnia and Primovula. The measurements of the holotype, a unique specimen, are as follows: length, 23.0 mm, width, 11.6 mm, height, 10.0 mm. i The type locality is Carigara Bay, Samar, Philippines (11°20’ N. Lat., 124°40’ E. Long.). The holotype will be deposited in the Philippine National Museum and will bear the catalog number N. M. CO. 07287. I have named this shell in honor of Donald Dan of Manila, who was the first to point out that this form might be new. LITERATURE CITED ALLAN, JoYcE 1956. bourne. Cowry shells of world seas. i-x; pp. 1-170; plts. 1-15 Georgian House, Mel- Tue VEuicER, Vol. 7, No. 2 [C. N. Cate] Plate 19 Figure | Figure 2 Figure 3 Figures 1 and 2: Dorsal and Ventral Aspects of Primovula (Diminovula) dondani C. N. Cate, spec. nov. (x 24) Figure 3: Enlarged View Showing Detail of Posterior End of Shell (x 7) a: first funiculum d: second posterior outlet b: first posterior outlet c: second funiculum photo. Takeo Susuki Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 103 Keener, L. C. SoweErBy, GEORGE BRETTINGHAM 1843. Spécies général et iconographie des coquilles vivantes. 1848. Thesaurus Conchyliorum, or monographs of genera of Genre Ovule; pp. 1 - 16; plts. 1-6 shells. London. Ovulum. 2: 467 - 484; plts. 99-101 ReEEvE, LoveLL AucustTus WEINKAUFF, H. C. 1865. | Conchologia Iconica; monograph of the genus Ovulum; 1881. Die Gattungen Cypraea und Ovula. Conchylien-Ca- pits. 1-14 SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED 1932. The living species of Amphiperatinae. Soc. London, 20: 46 - 64; plts. 3-5 Proc. Malac. 7 binet (2nd. ed.), Martini « CHEMNITZ. 230; pits. 1-53A Nirnberg, pp. 1 to The Cowries Established by Corn in 1949 (Mollusca: Gastropoda) BY FRANZ ALFRED SCHILDER University of Halle, German Democratic Republic Giorcio Sitvio Coren (1949) has described many “new varieties’ and two “new species” of cowries; his paper has been quoted in the Zoological Record (86:74-76), but the periodical in which it has been published is hardly available in public libraries so that even ALLAN (1956: 114) must admit that CorNn’s publication is unavailable to her. After several vain attempts to get a copy of the paper, I asked Mr. S. P. Dance, British Museum, for a photocopy for which I am much obliged to him. It proved that both in the Zoological Record and in the list given by ALLAN (1956: 114-115) some new names have been omitted or incorrectly spelled. With only one exception (Erosaria erosa pulchella Coen, 1949) the many new names established by Corn are of no scientific value, as they refer to individual varieties or even monstrosities, the exact habitat of which is often unknown or even incorrect; several varieties evi- dently belong to other species than Coren thought. Never- theless these names have been established in a valid tri- nominal way, so that they must be considered in all future synonymic lists. Many names, however, would become in- valid by secondary homonymy if one would lump all cow- ries to one monster genus C’ypraea as recently several malacologists are doing, whereas CoEN followed the “split- ters’ and adopted many natural genera. Therefore I think it useful to publish an excerpt of CoEn’s descriptions for the great number of malacologists who cannot obtain the original publication written in Italian. Moreover, I have added my own interpretations of the varieties established by CoEN, which have been al- ways put in [square brackets] so that they can be well dis- tinguished from CoEn’s indications. My remarks also in- clude the results of personal examination of type specimens (preserved in CoEn’s collection) during my visits to Venice in 1931 and 1933; most type specimens, however, seem to have been acquired by him in later years. I have been told by CoEn’s widow that his collection has been located at Tel Aviv (Israel). CoEN’s descriptions are very short, and in the follow- ing review they have been still more restricted to the essen- tial characters distinguishing the “new varieties” from usual specimens. CoEN indicated the length and the maximum breadth of the holotype in mm, but in this review I have expressed the breadth in per cent of the length, separated from the length (in mm) by the sign /. I should like to call the attention of readers of the orig- inal publication to the curious fact, that CoEN evidently used the terms “right” and “left” in an unusual way so that the outer lip which is the right margin of the creep- ing mollusk is called “left” if the shell is regarded from the dorsal aspect, e.g. p. 14: Erosaria erosa pulchella, p. 15: E. caputdraconis punc- tatissima (the dorsal line is always placed above the right margin!), p. 17: Erronea errones fusca (“on the lip and the right side’’) ; but it is correctly called “right” by basa view (e.g. Erronea caurica caledonica). Page 104 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 CoENn indicated type localities of all new varieties; many indications, however, are practically worthless, as they refer to world wide regions only; he often added “s.l.” (senza localita—without [exactllocality). Other locali- ties marked by Coen with the sign ! (which has also been adopted in the present review) are said to be “exact and sure’. CoEN’s arrangement of genera and species has been adopted in this paper. The following cowries have been named and described by Corn (1949): (CoEN, page 13) Cypraea (Vulgusella) tigris fuscoapicata: 81/75 and 68/71, extremities dorsally dark brown, dorsal spots con- fluent longitudinally [not fully grown abnormity]; Aus- tralia s.l. [habitat uncertain]. Cypraea (Lyncina) lynx nigroguttata: 33/68, subcy- lindrical, margins thickened, lateral spots tuberculate [extremely callous abnormity]; Indian Ocean [no habitat]. Cypraea (Lyncina) lynx javana: 32/66, margins heavily callous [widely spread common variety]; South coast of Java! Cypraea (Lyncina) vitellus gibbosa [name _preoc- cupied]: 43/72, gibbous and callous [frequent variety]; Guam! Cypraea (Lyncina) carneola pretiosa [name preoc- cupied]: 22.5/64, small, glossy, otherwise typical [the smallest known C. carneola LinNAEus, 1758, is 17.2 mm long]: Benadir! [in formerly Italian Somaliland]. Cypraea (Lyncina) carneola aurea [name _preoc- cupied]: 39/59, pale yellow without dorsal zones, teeth whitish, like in loebbeckeana We1NKauFF, 1881 [of which aurea becomes a synonym]; Australia [doubtful]. Mauntia (Arabica) arabica dilatata: 55/76, anterior extremity dilated, inner lip swollen, thus recalling macu- lifera ScHILDER, 1932, but without basal blotch [callous variety]; China Sea! [Corn presented me a paratype (coll. ScuitpER 4984) from “China” which word was written on the shell itself: 53/74 with 30:26 teeth, mar- gins much expanded, base flattened, dorsum lineate longitudinally without distinct lacunae. ] (Corn 1949 p. 14) Mauritia (Arabica) arabica gibba: 52/67, humped as [Trona] stercoraria LinNAEus, base swollen; China Sea! [The holotype very probably came from the same population as dilatata Corn; it is an inflated callous ar- abica (Linnagus 1758).] Mauritia (Arabica) eglantina aurea: 46/57, yellow like gold, dorsal markings hardly visible, the spire blotch ex- cepted [more probably suffused by yellow enamel than a pellucid variety; besides such shells can be obtained artificially by exposing usual shells to dry heat of 100° Centigrade for one day]; Indian Ocean s.l. [no habitat]. Mauritia (Arabica) eglantina rufa: 66/59, throughout reddish brown, dorsally adorned with usual markings, base white [evidently an abnormity suffused with chestnut]; Indian Ocean s.l. [no habitat]. Mauritia (Arabica) histrio duploreticulata: 85/65, the two uppermost layers of the dorsal reticulate enamel do not cover each other exactly so that the whitish lacunae become crossed by brown lines [frequent abnormity with the uppermost dorsal layer displaced]; Indian Ocean s.l. [no habitat]. Luria lurida onycina: 23/57 from Palermo!, and 27/63 from Tunis! (both ex coll. MoNTEROSATO): small, oliva- ceous, inzonate though glossy [frequent variety]. Luria lurida incrassata: 34/71, gibbous, callous, in- zonate [variety frequent in surf localities]; Tyrrhenian Sea [inaccurate indication]. Luria lurida badia: 36/58 and 21/62, brown, inzonate [frequent variety]; Sicily! [The smaller paratype has been presented to the writer (coll. ScHILDER 4988), it is 20.6/ 62 with 12:14 teeth, greyish brown, inzonate though being collected alive; four other shells in coll. CozEN vary from 21 to 23.5 mm; the smallest known Mediterranean lurida (LinnaEus, 1758) is 14.3 mm long (coll. ScHILDER 1214).] Luria lurida liburnica CoEN, 1937: not described, only with reference to Coen 1937, p. 150 [though it has been established first by Corn 1933 p. 162 from Dalmatia]: 45/62, thin, zonate [the holotype in coll. CoEN is a large pale lurida}. [The monstrosity Luria lurida obstructa Coen 1933 and 1937 has not been mentionel by its author in 1949.] Luria (Basilitrona) isabella cylindroides: 25/46, cylin- drical, dorsum with black striz, extremities orange [it seems to be the narrowest specimen known, though Ha- waiian controversa (Gray, 1824) sometimes shows a mini- mum index 47]; Fiji! (ex coll. DAuTZENBERG) [possibly erroneous, as Fijian isabella (LinNAEus, 1758) usually are much broader]. Monetaria moneta annulifera [name preoccupied]: 25/80, broad, lateral and six basal tubercles well devel- oped, orange dorsal ring distinct; Indian Ocean s.]. [no habitat. The holotype in coll. Cogn is 24.4/80, broad with lateral tubercles oblique as in ecotype “M” of ScHILDER 1937, p. 1122, dorsal ring vividly yellow, aperture straight, but bent behind, base with five right and two left prom- inent tubercles; a paratype from the same unknown local- ity (coll. Corn) is 20.5/72 with similar dorsal ring and lateral and basal tubercles, but with wider aperture; both shells seem to belong still to ecotype “R’’.] Erosaria erosa marginata: 38/66, margins enormously thickened, outer lip crossed by the labial teeth, dorsal line replaced by a slight sulcus [extreme variety occurring in surf localities]; Red Sea! [wrong, as erosa (LINNAEUS, 1758) does not live in the Red Sea]. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 105 Erosaria erosa pulchella: 18/58 with 13:12 teeth only [which is about the average closeness of teeth in erosa (Linnaeus, 1758) ], pale, left [right] lateral blotch ab- sent, base white. Australia! [This name could be adopted for the local race of New South Wales characterized by the absence of the labial lateral blotch (see ScHILDER 1963).] Erosaria diaphana n.sp.: allied to erosa [LINNAEUS], 15.5/65, cylindrical, light, right margin pitted, hardly thickened, 11 produced labial and 12 short columellar teeth, pellucid, white, without any markings [evidently an albinism of erosa if not a bleached beach specimen]; Aus- tralia s.l. ! (CoEN, p. 15) Erosaria lamarcki inocellata [name preoccupied]: dor- sal spots pure white; Benadir! [formerly Italian Somali- land]. [Unfortunately Corn did not indicate the dimen- sions of the holotype, as the markings are comparable to the dwarf race from Port Reitz, Kenya (ScHILper, ScuL- DER & BENTON 1962).] Erosaria ocellata fasciomaculata: 28/64, dorsum with a transversal zone and white points, bordered with two large square brown blotches above the margins. Red Sea! [Ac- cording to the description and the habitat (ocellata (Lin- NAEUS, 1758) does not live in the Red Sea) the holotype must be a typical Erosaria nebrites (MELVILL, 1888) ; the chestnut basal strize of nebrites (which was evidently un- known to CoENn) misled Coen to think the shell to be- long to ocellata.| Erosaria acicularis nitidiuscula: 30/73, light, dorsum unspotted but slightly freckled with very pale yellow, dorsal line impressed [the markings of acicularis (GMELIN, 1791) are rather variable]; Antilles. [The holotype in coll. CoEN is an acicularis of 30.1 mm, evidently suffused with whitish enamel. ] Erosaria helvola immaculata: 21/76, dorsum white, brown spots obsolete, lateral bands conspicuous [frequent variety in which the predominant white specks coalesce]; [formerly Italian] Somaliland! Erosaria spurca peculiaris: 33/55, elongate, dorsum whitish with minute brown spots [frequent variety]; Libya! and Sicily! Erosaria spurca inflata: 32/66, globose, spire acumina- te, inner lip acutely protruding beyond the outer lip posteriorly; [a monstrosity] as Corn himself has pre- sumed; Taormina! [in Sicily]. Erosaria (Ravitrona) caputserpentis albosignata: 30/77, with the dorsal spots partially confluent to large white blotches united with the dorsal line [abnormal aber- ration|; India [practically no habitat]. Erosaria (Ravitrona) caputdraconis punctatissima: 26/69, dorsal area reddish brown with fine white points, contrasting with the dark margins, but separated by the pale dorsal line above the left [= right] margin [insig- nificant aberration]; Easter Island ! Staphylaea staphylaea fortis: 21/67, solid, dorsal tuber- cles coarse, color rather typical [frequent variety]; Poly- nesia s.l. [no habitat]. Staphylaea staphylaea nitida: 15/60, dorsum smooth, but central line impressed, milky white, extremities orange, teeth yellowish [probably not fully grown and bleached] ; Australia s.l. [possibly correct]. Staphylaea staphylaea consobrina lactea: 19/63, white, extremities and teeth orange [such shells mostly are bleached]; Batavia! [ = Djakarta]. Staphylaea staphylaea consobrina grisea: 18/61, granu- late, grey, extremities dark brown, base white [probably subjunior]; Polynesia [no habitat]. [The quadrinominal classification of the two last named Staphylaea contrary to all other strictly trinominal desig- nations is surprising: I suppose that CoEN intended to sep- arate specifically consobrina (GarrReETT, 1879), from sta- phylaea (Linnaeus, 1758) and forgot to erase the latter name used in the two paragraphs before. | Staphylaca limacina ebur: 25/56, smooth, glossy, ivory white, unspotted; Hawaii! [Such pale shells have been found in Hawaii in subfossil state, but they belong to Staphylaca semiplota polita (Roperts, 1868), whereas St. limacina (Lamarck, 1810) does not live in Hawaii; therefore ebur should be removed to semiplota (MIcHELs, 1845) .] Staphylaea limacina nitens: 24/58, smooth, ivory white with white dots, extremities and teeth orange; Oceania s.l. [no habitat; such pale shells occur both in limacina and semiplota, but I suspect nitens to belong to the latter and to come also from Hawaii, as limacina is restricted to the south-western and western borders of “Oceania” only]. (CoEN, p. 16) Nuclearia nucleus cerea [name preoccupied]: 24/67, wax-colored without red lines anywhere [pellucid or bleached]; Madagascar ! [The name cerea has been used by PaETeL 1887 for an undescribed variety (nomen nu- dum), of nucleus (LinnaEus, 1758) but adopted by Sut- tioTr 1924 for the albinistic nucleus.] Pustularia cicercula purissima: 20/62, glossy, tubercu- late, pure white; Mauritius ! (ex coll. MoNTEROSATO ex coll. GereT). [Such subpellucid cicercula liénardi (Jous- SEAUME, 1874) occur in Mauritius. ] Luponia fuscodentata alba: 32/66, slightly worn, pure white [such bleached shells will be found sometimes Page 106 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 among beach specimens] ; Cape of Good Hope ! [probably from the South coast east of the Cape itself]. Notocypraca angustata lentiginosa: 22.1/70, solid, margined, flesh colored, minutely freckled with brown [as angustata (GMELIN, 1791) is always unspotted, this description exactly fits Notocypraea. declvis (SOWERBY, 1870) of which lentiginosa becomes a synonym]; Tas- mania! Guttacypraca pulicaria candida: 15.5/39 [such extreme slenderness is very improbable so that I suspect an error in measuring], hyaline, white, unspotted [albinistic or bleached]; West Australia. Zonaria pyrum elongata: 31/58, more elongate than typical pyrum [(GmeE.in, 1791), but within the usual range of variation as I know shells down to the index of breadth 53]; Naples ! Zonaria pyrum cruenta: [no dimensions indicated] base blood red [well known extreme color variety]; Naples ! [The holotype in coll. CoEn is 35.8 mm long, very dark, with distinct dorsal zones. ] Zonaria pyrum confusa: [no dimensions indicated] dor- sum confusely spotted, zones invisible, base fulvous [a frequent variety]; Tyrrhenian Sea and Dalmatia! Zonaria pyrum hepatica: 39/59, base liver-brown [a frequent variety]; Naples! Zonaria pyrum piperitoides: 28/64, pale, zones inter- rupted as in the variety undata Pauary so that the shell recalls Notocypraea piperita var. 1 of Hwatco [1907; the latter is Notocypraea bicolor (Gasxorn, 1849) ; CoENn’s shell represents a frequent abnormity, probably not fully grown] Naples! Zonaria pyrum compressa: 33/61, outer lip compressed in its central part [pathological monstrosity]; Tyrrhenian Sea [inaccurate indication]. Zonaria pyrum nivosa: 37/59, small [the mean of Z. pyrum (GMELIN, 1791) is 35 mm], dorsum with two white bands and two irregular white blotches on the rear, base yellowish [abnormity]; Linosa! [holotype] and Lam- pedusa ! [paratype in coll. Coun: 31.9 mm, saturate, with three dark zones and round light lacunz on the dorsum: a frequent variety]. Zonaria pyrum aurantia: 35/63, dorsum with three white bands, base vividly orange [common variety]; Med- iterranean Sea [no habitat]. Zonaria pyrum minima (MontTerosato MS.) ; 24/54, the smallest known specimen, otherwise typical; Viareg- gio! (ex coll. Montgrosato). [The holotype in coll. CoeEN is 23.8 mm long, rather saturate, with the dark cen- tral zone indistinctly divided into two parts. MoNTEROSA- To 1897 has published a var. minor of 26 mm; I have seen a Z. pyrum of 22.5 mm only from Tunis in coll. Daut- ZENBERG |. (CoEN, p. 17) Zonaria pyrum physoides: reference to CoEN 1937 only [though established already in Corn 1933 (see above sub Luria lurida liburnica); in this paper it is described as 42/62, recalling Schilderia achatidea (SowERBY 1837), var. 2 of Hwatco 1907 in color, but differing in dentition; Dalmatia. The holotype in coll. Corn is a rather young, pale Z. pyrum (GmeEtin, 1791) with pale fulvous base; specimens from Dalmatia usually are larger than from elsewhere]. Erronea errones fusca: 24/60, not fully grown, outer lip shortened in front, dorsum leaden-colored, trizonate, base whitish [a young shell, deformed pathologically]; Cape St. Jacques in Cochinchina! Erronea caurica immaculata: 55/53, oblong, rather pale, dorsal blotch absent [common variety]; Benadir! (formerly Italian Somaliland. The holotype in coll. Coun is a subpellucid variety of caurica (LinnagEus, 1758).] Erronea caurica multidentata: 46/55, with 26 labial and 24 columellar teeth, otherwise similar to the preced- ing [the closeness of teeth is about at the border of the known range of variation]; Red Sea ! Erronea caurica nitens: 36/53, oblong, vitreous, dorsal zones and specks rosy, lateral spots reddish, base pale flesh color [typical pellucid variety]; Mauritius! [The holotype in coll. Coen belongs to the pellucid variety rather fre- quently collected in Mauritius. | Erronea caurica caledonica: 25/60, right margin thick- ened and spotted, the brown lateral blotches are absent [a curious remark by Coen as erosa-like blotches never occur in caurica}, dorsum trizonate and freckled with ful- vous, base white [a typical caurica(LinnaEus, 1758) ]; New Caledonia ! Erronea pseudarabicula n.sp.: allied to caurica, 23/61, with 15 teeth on each lip [closeness approaching the mean of caurica}, shape as in caurica, but color as in Pseudo- zonaria arabicula (LAMARcK, 1810): dorsum bluish, with chestnut specks coalescent in three transversal zones, right lateral spots confluent to a longitudinal band [as in var. nigrocincta SCHILDER, 1924], base flesh color; [formerly Italian] Somaliland! [There is no reason to separate this slight aberration of caurica (LinNAEuS, 1758) as a new species. | Blasicrura cylindrica emaculata: 31/48, typical, but without the usual dorsal blotch [which may disappear gradually as in other Erronea|; Australia [possibly correct]. Palmadusta asellus fusca: 18/56, dorsum fulvous [in- stead of white] between the dark zones, but margins white [an aberration occurring sporadically]; Red Sea ! [locality doubtful, as the only indications by IssEt 1869 and SmirH 1903 seem not to be reliable}. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 107 Palmadusta diluculum magnifica: 28/63, dorsum cov- ered with fine transversal lines except in the central zone where they are replaced by a row of arrow-shaped white spots [the long description refers to a shell in which the two dark central zones are reduced so that the zigzag lines become predominant]; Zanzibar ! Palmadusta diluculum epunctata: 21/62, dorsum with three rows of yellowish red blotches, the intermediate bands are plain white, lateral and terminal black spots absent [the frequent pellucid variety of diluculum (REEVE, 1845) ; the unspotted margins point to the Lemurian race virginalis SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938]; Philippines [er- roneous, as diluculum is restricted to the western Indian Ocean; the incorrect habitat Philippines indicated by Reeve (1845) has been copied by many collectors and dealers]. Palmadusta (Purpuradusta) fimbriata nitida: 17.5/63, dorsum white, plain or with minute brown specks [CoEN evidently had in mind gracilis (GasKorn, 1849) which has been incorrectly called fimbriata (GmeEtin, 1791) by writers prior to 1938; a paratype from the Persian Gulf presented to me by Coen (coll. ScuHitpER 4987) is a P. gracilis: 17/62, with 17:16 teeth, ovate, rather callous, suffused with a thin layer of white enamel, so that the pink tips and brownish lateral dots become very pale; other specimens in coll. CoEN (including the holotype) were still more suffused with white]; Persian Gulf! Siphocypraea mus suta: 35/71, dorsal area with grey zigzag lines [characterizing young specimens], accom- panied at the left [=right] margin by one longitudinal series of blackish spots from anterior extremity to the spire blotch, recalling roughly a stitched suture [latin swere = stitch; I possess a similar individual aberration]; Antilles! (ex coll. Cumtnec). (CoEN, p. 18) Primovula carnea gibbosa: [no dimensions indicated], dorsum asymmetrically gibbous on the left side [patholog- ical monstrosity]; Trapani! and Dalmatia! [see below]. Primovula carnea dorsolirata: 12.5/56, pinkish, dorsum with 10 to 12 white longitudinal ribs [another monstrosity], Capri Island! Primovula carnea major: 19.5/59, thin, white, ap- proaching Primovula adriatica (SowERBy, 1828). An- cona! and Lesina! [Probably a synonym of adrtatica, as carnea (PorreT, 1789) does not seem to have been re- ported from the Adriatic Sea before Coren 1949; CoEN did not indicate the differences of major from adriatica.| Simnia (Neosimnia) spelta brevis: 13.1/57, shorter and more convex, pale flesh color [insignificant aberra- tion]; Palermo! (ex coll. MonTERosATO). Simnia (Neosimnia) spelta illyrica [mame preoccu- pied]: 11.5/52, elongate, with the rear produced, wax- colored, Dalmatia! [It is a synonym of Simnia (Neosim- nia) illyrica ScupER, 1927 from the Adriatic Sea: a curious case of independent identical naming of the same variety by two authors. | Jenneria pustulata bimaculata: 18/72, with a dark brown blotch at each end of the dorsal sulcus [these blotches are well visible in most fresh specimens, but they become often rather pale and indistinct]; Panama! Jenneria pustulata pumilio: 11/64, extremities whitish dorsally, otherwise typical [the museum of Hamburg, destroyed during World War II, possessed several speci- mens of 11 mm, the smallest measuring 10.3 mm; they came from Diego]; Panama! Trivia dalmatica CoEN 1937: reference only [The shell described by Corn 1937 p. 150 evidently is a Trivia mul- tilirata (SowrerBy, 1870), measuring 11.4/79; in 1933 CoEN possessed several specimens from the Adriatic Sea, varying from 7.8 to 14.7 mm; a paratype presented to me (coll. ScHmLDER 3361) is 9.8/78 with 25:21 teeth and 68 ribs around the shell]. LITERATURE CITED ALLAN, JOYCE 1956. | Cowry shells of world seas. Melbourne. i-x; pp. 1-170: plts. 1- 15. Georgian House, Corn, Giorcio SILvIo 1933. Sylloge molluscorum adraticorum. Mem. R. Comit. Talassogr. Italiano. 192: 46 - 47, 162; plt. 3 1937. | Nuovo saggio sylloge molluscorum adriaticorum. Mem. R. Comit. Talassogr. Italiano, 240: 46 to 47, 150 to 151, 162 1949. Nota su alcune forme nuove di ‘“‘Cypraeacea.” Hist. Nat. Roma 3 (1): 13 to 18 SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED, & MARIA SCHILDER 1937. Revision of the genus Monetaria (Cypraeidae). Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1936 (4): 1113 - 1135; plts. 1-2 1963. Studies in variation of cowries: The marginal blotches of Erosaria erosa (LINNAEUS) . Hawaiian Shell News, n. s., 43: 4-5 SCHILDER, F. A., MARIA SCHILDER, & RONALD STEWART BENTON 1962. Studies on Erosaria lamarckii Gray (Gastropoda). The Veliger 5 (1): 30-32 (1 July 1962) ZooLoGicaAL REcorRD, LONDON 1952. volume 86 (for 1949): 74-76 Page 108 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 A New Species of the Lamellibranch Genus Aligena from Western Canada BY I. McT. COWAN University of British Columbia, Canada (Plate 20) THE WEST AMERICAN REPRESENTATIVES of the Leptonid genus Aligena were reviewed by Burcu (Nautilus 55: 48-51) in 1941. At that time he described Aligena redon- doensis. This was the fourth described West American species and the only one known to occur north of Baja California. It is reported from the regions off La Jolla, off Santa Rosa Island and from the submarine canyon off Redondo Beach, Calif. On May 18, 1963, I and others were dredging in the northern parts of the Strait of Georgia, Johnston Strait and adjacent waters. At Cowan Station 724, 49° 15’ north and 124° 15’ west in 190 fathoms we took a number of specimens of a Leptonid new to me. I am indebted to Dr. Myra Keen of Stanford University for assistance with the identification, for suggestions as to the systematic af- finities and for critical reading of this manuscript. The specimens secured represent an undescribed species that approaches the genus Aligena more closely than it does other described genera. It differs significantly from all other members of the genus in the consistent possession of a prominent lateral tooth. In as much as inclusion of the new species in Aligena will necessitate some revision in the generic diagnosis, the question arises as to whether the creation of a new genus would not best describe the situation. In a less variable family this would probably be the action of choice. In the present instance, however, it has been decided to leave final decision on this to a future reviser of the family. However, a new subgenus under Aligena is required to express the apparent relationships among the 6 species. I propose the name Odontogena with the type species Aligena (Odontogena) borealis Cowan. Diagnosis: Differs from Aligena (Aligena) primarily in having a well developed posterior lateral tooth on each valve. The detailed description, type locality and other de- tails are given below in the species description. The new species was collected in a Naturalist dredge with ' inch nylon liner in the net. The substrate con- sisted of very soft, fine-textured muddy silt. Its faunal associates were Yoldia martyria, Cardiomya planetica, and Pandora filosa. The new species must be very local in its distribution as several hundred dredge hauls in the Strait of Georgia have failed to reveal it. Six hauls were made in the general vicinity of the type locality yet the species was taken only in the one place. Aligena (Odontogena) borealis Cowan sp. nov. Type locality: The northern part of Georgia Strait, Brit- ish Columbia, Canada, at 49° 15’ North latitude and 124° 15’ West longitude. Depth 190 fathoms at Cowan Station 724. Type specimens: The holotype has been deposited in the Stanford University Paleontology Type Collection as No. 9739 along with paratypes 9740-9741; paratype 4762 D is in the United States National Museum; 4762 E in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University; 4762 F in the National Museum of Canada; 4762 G in the British Museum of Natural History; 4762 H in the Cali- fornia Academy of Sciences. The remaining 7 specimens of the paratype series of 4762 are in the Cowan collection. Description: The details given describe the entire series, not merely the holotype. A small almost circular shell with a mean length of 2.50 mm, mean height of 2.31 mm, and mean ratio of height to length of 0.92. Moderately in- flated, ratio length to thickness 0.58. Almost symmetrical, beaks central, prominent and bent forward to leave a well developed depression in front of and beneath the beaks. This is not, however, differentiated as a lunule. Anterior margin curving in an even arc into the ventral margin. Dorso-posterior margin curved but inclining downwards at an angle of about 45 degrees from the plane of the anterior dorsal outline. Posterior margin with a small central prominence. Shell pale yellowish, possibly as a stain from the heavy and complete coating of mud that adhered to every specimen. This flaked off easily when dry. Sculpture of incremental lines only (Figure 1). Hinge internal, behind Tue Veuicer, Vol. 7, No. 2 [I. McT. Cowan] Plate 20 Figure 1: View of entire shell from left aspect. Figure 2: Upper - dentition of left valve. Lower - dentition of right valve. Vol. 7; No. 2 Measurements of type series of Aligena borealis length height thickness ratiol/h IIe 2.64 mm 2.53 mm .96 (45 2.64 723i 87 3. 7eesa¥8) 2.20 87 A 2.64 2.20 83 9), 2.64 72.3) 87 6. 2.64 2.42 sil le 2.53 2.31 Sl *8, 2.64 22 1.43 a9 8) 2.53 2.42 1.54 .96 10. 273i 2.20 132 .96 1 2.64 2.42 1.54 91 1s Dae 225i 1.54 195 13: Del 2.42 1.43 .94 14. 2.42 DAD 1.54 1.00 113}, Dea? 2.20 ay? Ohl 16. 2.20 2.20 1.00 We 2.42 2.20 ‘B)il 18. 2.42 2.20 132 91 IS), 2.22 2.20 1.42 1.00 20. 2.42 2.20 1:54 Ql Mean: 2.50 D2)! 1.45 92 * 8-20 measured with mud adhering. Deduct 0.1 mm for cleaned dimensions. umbos. Left valve with a long narrow chondrophore which may be recessed well beneath the hinge margin. Beneath and in front of the umbo is a heavy plate upon the ventral margin of which arises a thick tooth either as a ridge or a prominent cone (Figure 2). There is a deep sulcus between the tooth and the dorsal margin. A similar plate half way THE VELIGER Page 109 down the length of the postero-dorsal margin bears a deep sulcus and a prominent posterior lateral tooth. The teeth of the right valve consist of strong ridges that fit into the corresponding cardinal and posterior lateral sulci of the opposing valve. There is considerable variation in form of the teeth on the right valve. A frequent variant is with each tooth divided by a groove into two parts. Comparison: Aligena borealis differs from A. redondoen- sis in its yellowish rather than white colour; in being al- most perfectly symmetrical rather than with anterior end longer; in having the height-length index nearer to unity; in having the anterior extremity more rounded, umbones more prominent; cardinal tooth plate and tooth much heavier; and in the presence of the large posterior lateral tooth on both valves. To bring the key to the genus Aligena up to date it is necessary only to insert an initial couplet separating the new species on the basis of its dentition as follows: — 1 Shell with prominent posterior lateral tooth on each valve Krys A. borealis —Shell without posterior lateral teeth . . . . 2 2 Shell with median radial constriction A. cokeri —Shell without median radial constriction . . . 3 3 Anterior part of shell sloping abruptly down cars A. cerritensis —Anterior part of shell not sloping abruptly down . 4 4 Posterior portion of shell sloping gently down, left valve with cardinal tooth —Posterior portion of shell sloping abruptly down, left valve edentulous A. redondoensis The new species extends the known range of the genus some 1,500 miles north of its previously known limit. A. nucea Page 110 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 New Information on the Distribution of Marine Mollusca on the Coast of British Columbia I. McT. COWAN Department of Zoology, University of British Columbia Vancouver, Canada THROUGH THE LAST EIGHT or ten years intensive inves- tigation of the marine mollusca of the coast of British Columbia has led to the modification of the known range of many species. The investigations have not been evenly distributed. Regions collected in most detail have been the north coast of Graham Island and adjacent waters by Peter Henson of Masset, B.C., and the Strait of Georgia, Johnston Strait, Queen Charlotte Strait and the south west coast of Vancouver Island by the present author. Several other collectors have worked primarily in the Strait of Georgia, and Dr. D. B. Quayle and his associates have explored more widely. The majority of their collec- tions, however, have not yet been worked up. Rae Baxter of Cordova, Alaska, made a canoe traverse of the coast collecting in the intertidal in which certain local range extensions were obtained. I am indebted to all of these for permission to include their findings. I wish especially to acknowledge the gen- erosity, assistance and companionship of Peter Henson whose enthusiasm has led to greatly increased knowledge of the mollusc fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands area. He has given me permission to record certain major exten- sions of range represented by specimens in his collection but missing from mine. James McLean, of the Depart- ment of Biology, Stanford University and Dr. R. M. Rosenblatt of Scripps Institute accompanied me on some expeditions. Several malacologists have given advice and assistance on critical determinations. For this I am par- ticularly grateful to Dr. Myra Keen, Dr. Geo. Hertlein, Dr. A. H. Rehder, Mr. Allyn Smith, Mr. James McLean and Mr. Spencer Thorpe. My own collecting has involved some 200 stations on the B.C. coast of which 40 were intertidal, 115 in the subtidal down to 50 fathoms, 30 between 50 fathoms and 95 fathoms and 17 from 100 to 200 fathoms. A very limited amount of Scuba diving has been involved in the immediate subtidal area but for the most part dredges of several types have been used. The purpose of this paper is to record major range extensions that arise from the collecting so far under- taken. Certain groups are not included, because critical comparison with type material has not yet been made. Notably these include the Turrid genera Oenopota and Mangelia and the Pyramidellid genera Turbonilla and Odostomia. These will be reported upon later. It is pertinent to note that 7 of the extensions of range reported here are southward and 29 northward. Ten of the latter now exhibit an apparent discontinuity of several hundred miles. Further collecting along the coasts of Washington and Oregon is needed before it can be con- cluded that any of these species are divided into northern and southern centers of occurrence separated by an un- inhabited area. Lamellibranchia Nuculana austini (Otproyp, 1935) Previously known from the west coast of Vancouver Island, now extended north to Masset Inlet, Graham Island, Q. C. I. Nuculana pernula (Mi.uer, 1779) Several unusually large Nuculana from Chatham Sound, Q.C.I. at 30-60 fathoms are closest to this species though differing slightly from specimens originating in Arctic Canada. Not pre- viously reported in the Pacific south of the Arctic Basin. Yoldia martyria Dati, 1897. Although the published distribution of this species is from Kasa-an Bay, Alaska, to the Gulf of California. I have been unable to find spec- imens from the area north of the Olympic Peninsula, Washington, except for one in the U.S. N. M. This one, from Kasa-an Bay, is in poor condition and not identifiable with certainty. The species is common in 100+ fathoms on soft mud bottoms off the northern end of Texada Island, B. C., and I have a single specimen from Barkley Sound, Vancouver Island. Adula californiensis (PHtipp1, 1847). The northernmost record is from Vancouver Island, B.C. (La Rocque). Henson has found a colony near Yakan Point on the north Vol. 7; No. 2 coast of Graham Island, Q. C. I., from which I have taken specimens. Musculus taylori (Dati, 1897) Previously known only from Victoria, B.C. I have taken specimens from Hot- spring Island, Q. C. I., where it was nestling in coralline algae. Astarte willetti Dati, 1917. Reported only from the type locality, Forrester Island, Alaska. I have taken specimens at three localities south to Goose Island Banks in Hecate Strait and Barkley Sound, Vancouver Island. Lasaea cistula Kren, 1938. Has been reported from En- senada, Mexico, to Punta Arena, California. I have spec- imens from Cape Sutil and from Roller Bay, Hope Island, both at the northern tip of Vancouver Island. I am grate- ful to Dr. Myra Keen for verifying the identification of these specimens. Tellina bodegensis Hinps, 1844. A specimen from La Pas Bay, west coast of Graham Island, Q. C. I., (Henson coll.) extends the range northward from Esperanza Inlet, Vancouver Island, the previously known limit. Protothaca tenerrima (CarpENTER, 1856). The locality records are extended northward to Esperanza Inlet, west coast of Vancouver Island. It was previously known from a northern limit at Victoria and Puget Sound. Xylophaga washingtona BartscH, 1921. Abundant in wood detritus to 60=+ fathoms at least as far north as Esperanza Inlet, Vancouver Island. Penitella conradi (VALENCIENNES, 1846). Not previously recorded north of the San Francisco area, California. A group of 40+ Haliotis kamtschatkana collected at Espe- ranza Inlet by D. B. Quayle and me bore this species in the heavier parts of the shell. Twenty-two specimens of varied sizes were taken. Examinations of several hundred shells of this abalone from Tofino Inlet, Barkley Sound, Victo- ria, Strait of Georgia, Port Hardy and the Queen Char- lotte Islands has not turned up a single infected individual. The region from Esperanza Inlet north to Cape Cook, Vancouver Island, has yielded specimens of two species of algae and another mollusc (Bornia) not known elsewhere on the coast north of central California. It is tempting to suggest that this region occasionally experiences invasion of an offshore water mass originating on the California coast and that this bears with it the larvae of marine organisms and spores of algae from the area of origin. There is evidence, however, that this species is established in the Esperanza region as several age classes are rep- resented. Bornia cf. B. retifera Dati, 1899. Abundant in the en- trance of a small lagoon in Esperanza Inlet in association THE VELIGER Page 111 with an enteropneust. Not previously known north of cen- tral California. Gastropoda Lepeta caeca (Mier, 1776). This species was recorded by MacGinitie (1959) south in the Bering Sea to the Aleutian Islands. The known range can now be extended south to Vancouver Island on the basis of 4 specimens dredged off Cape James, Hope Island, in 20-50 fathoms, and another taken off Halkett Point, Gambier Island, B.C. Calliostoma variegatum CARPENTER, 1864. I have taken specimens north to Queen Charlotte Strait at depths be- tween 20 and 90 fathoms. It was previously known north to Puget Sound. Calliostoma platinum Dax, 1889. This species has been previously recorded from the Farallon Islands to San Diego, California. On August 10, 1961, Henson took a living specimen (height 25.5 mm) in a dredge operating between 99 and 101 fathoms off Wiah Point, Queen Char- lotte Islands. Since then a second specimen has been obtained. Homalopoma engbergi (WitteTT, 1929). The only local- ity of record is Olga, Washington. I have specimens from Skidegate, Q.C.I., and from Port Dick, Alaska. The latter were collected by Rae Baxter. Homalopoma lacunatum (CarPENTER, 1864). This spec- ies was described from Neah Bay, Washington, as a species of Gibbula. The present assignment follows the suggestion of James McLean. It has been taken by me at Skidegate, ONGaIs BSC! Opalia chacei Stronc, 1937. Specimens from Queen Charlotte Strait extend the known range north from the previous northern limit at central Oregon. The status of this species as distinct from O. wroblewskii remains to be determined. Specimens apparently referable to both these are found together in the waters off northern and central British Columbia. Epitonium greenlandicum (Perry, 1811). Known south to Wrangell, Alaska, specimens have been taken by Hen- son and myself off the north end of Graham Island, O.C.I. Epitonium catalinae Dat1, 1908. This species was taken by Willett at Forrester Island, Alaska, but there have been no other records of occurrence north of California. I took one specimen on La Perouse Bank off Barkley Sound, V. I., at a depth of 38-40 fathoms. Epitonium acrostephanus Daut, 1908. The same dredge haul that produced the E. catalinae contained a living adult specimen of E. acrostephanus. OLDRoyp (1924) re- cords the species from the California coast only but Page 112 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 Burcu (1944) gives Puget Sound as a locality without a reference. Crepidula adunca SoweErRBy, 1825. Previously reported north as far as southern Vancouver Island (Departure Bay). I have specimens from Hotspring Island, Q. C. I., B. C., and Henson has beach specimens from the north coast of Graham Island, Q. C. I. It was very common on Calliostoma ligatum dredged in 7 fathoms on Nahwitti Bar, at the northern extremity of Vancouver Island. Wuirteaves (1880) records specimens from an unknown locality in the Queen Charlotte Islands but the record has been questionable. Hipponix antiquatus LinnaEus, 1767. Specimens taken on Graham Island, QO. C. I., first by Henson and later by myself extend the range northward from Vancouver Island. This is probably the same species recorded by WruTEAVES (1880) as H. cranioides CARPENTER from an unknown locality in the Queen Charlotte Islands. Lacuna variegata CARPENTER, 1864. Previously known north from California to Neah Bay, Washington, now known from Port Alexander, Nigei Island, B. C., and from Dall Island (U.S.N.M.) and Drier Bay, (McLean) Alaska. Trichotropis bicarinata SowERBy, 1825. This boreal spe- cies has been taken previously south to Icy Cape, Alaska. The Henson collection contains a specimen taken at 57 fathoms off Cape Edensaw, Queen Charlotte Islands. Trichotropis borealis BRopERIP & SoweERBy, 1829. The southern limit of the known range can now be extended south to Nitnat Lake on the West Coast of Vancouver Island on the basis of a specimen in my collection. Henson has taken a living specimen in a crab pot 4-5 miles off Tow Hill, Q. C.1., B. C: Bittium challisae Bartscu, 1917. This is the common Bittiwm in water 7 to 60 fathoms from Georgia Strait north to the northern end of the Queen Charlotte Islands. Previously known only from Puget Sound. The use of this name is subject to revision when the complicated synon- ymy of the genus is reviewed. Ocenebra atropurpurea CARPENTER, 1919. Described from Puget Sound. Specimens were taken by J. McLean and mysclf at Roller Bay on Hope Island. This places the species in the waters of Queen Charlotte Strait. Ocenebra sclera (Datu, 1919). This species has been taken at several localities north to the north coast of Graham Island, Q.C.I. Previously known north to the Puget Sound area. Amphissa versicolor Dax, 1871. This species is known to occupy a range from the Oregon coast to Cerros Island, Lower California, except for Dawson’s (1880) report from Queen Charlotte Islands. I have taken specimens from several localities around Vancouver Island and at Wiah Point, Graham Island, Q.C.I., thus confirming the earlier record. Nassarius fossatus (GouLp, 1849). The presently known northern limit is Vancouver Island. Henson and I have both taken specimens near Yakan Point, and at Wiah Point, Graham Island, Q.C.I. Neptunea ithia (Dati, 1891). This species has been known only from the coast of California south of Mon- terey Bay. I have three specimens from La Perouse Bank off the mouth of Barkley Sound, Vancouver Island, B. C. They were taken at depths of 40-60 fathoms. Fusinus harfordu (STEARNS, 1871). This species was de- scribed and known only from Mendocino County, Cali- fornia. In 1963 a party of us, including R. Rosenblatt of Scripps Institute, J. McLean of Stanford, G. I. McT. Cowan and myself obtained living specimens by Scuba diving, and dead specimens by dredging at Bull Harbour on Hope Island, B.C. In addition McLean took spec- imens on a boulder beach in the Phyllospadix community at Boulder Bay, Hope Island. “Ophiodermella” grippi (Dati, 1919). A single spec- imen identified as this species was dredged in 15 fathoms in Toquart Bay, Barkley Sound, Vancouver Island, B. C., and two others from the Strait of Georgia in depths of 23 and 120 fathoms. The northernmost previous occurrence is in the San Diego area of southern California. Ophiodermella fancherae (Dati, 1903). A small species of Ophiodermella presently referred to this species has been taken at various points along the British Columbia coast north as far as Wiah Point, Graham Island, Q.C.I. It was first taken by Henson in 1960 and by myself in 1961. Cylichna nucleola (REEvE, 1855). This has been known as a circumboreal species not occurring south of the Bering Strait. I dredged 2 specimens that appear to represent this species off Sarita, in Barkley Sound, Vancouver Island, B.C. Diaphana cf. D. brunnea Daur, 1919. This species has been known only from Kodiak Island, Alaska. I have specimens from Tofino Inlet, on the west coast of Van- couver Island and from Plumper Sound in Georgia Strait. Polyplacophora Chaetopleura gemma Datu, 1879. Two specimens of this species from Pachena Bay, Vancouver Island, B. C., and three more from Hope Island on Queen Charlotte Strait, B. C., extend the known range northward from the Mon- terey area of California. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 113 Mopalia phormix Berry, 1919. This species has been known from subtidal waters of the Monterey area of Cali- fornia. I have taken a single specimen in 50 fathoms off Hood Point, Bowen Island, B.C., and 3 from Sidney Channel, Georgia Strait, B.C., at 40-- fathoms. Hanleya hanleyi (BEAN, 1844). The genus Hanleya has been known from the Pacific on the basis of a specimen from Plover Bay, Siberia (TH1e1e, 1909) and another from Monterey, California, that served as the type of Hanleya spicata Berry. The dredging of some 40 spec- imens in the waters of Queen Charlotte Sound, B. C., off Cape James, Hope Island, is therefore, of considerable interest. It was taken in 20-50 fathoms on a gravel bottom. Ischnochiton cf. I. golischt Berry, 1919. A single specimen dredged on mud bottom in 119 fathoms on October 2, 1963, in Georgia Strait 2 miles off Edith Point, Mayne Island, provides the only specimen record north of Mon- terey Bay. I am grateful to Spencer Thorpe for his iden- tification of this specimen. LITERATURE CITED BurcH, JOHN QuINcYy 1942 - 1946. Mollusks Distributional list of the west American marine (from) Proc. Conch. Club of S. Calif., nos. 33 - 63 O.proyp, IpaA SHEPARD 1927. The marine shells of the west coast of North America. Stanford Univ. Publ. Geol. Sci. 2 (2) : 304 pp., 42 plts. MacGinitigE, NETTIE 1959. | Marine molluscs of Point Barrow, Alaska. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 109: 59 - 208; 27 pits. THIELE, JOHANNES 1909. Revision des Systems der Chitonen. 56, Teil I: 1-58; 6 plts. WHITEAVES, JOSEPH FREDERICK Zoologica, Heft 1880. | On some marine invertebrata from the Queen Charlotte Islands (in) G. M. Dawson. Report on the Queen Charlotte Islands. Report of Progress, Geol. Surv. of Canada 1878 - 79, 1880: 190 B to 205B Page 114 THE VELIGER New and Otherwise Interesting Species of Mollusks from Guaymas, Sonora, Mexico BY DONALD R. SHASKY AND G. BRUCE CAMPBELL Contribution from the SEA OF CORTEZ MARINE RESEARCH CENTER 10009 California Avenue, South Gate, California 90281 and North Shore, Bacochibampo Bay,Guaymas, Sonora, Mexico (Plates 21 and 22; 1 Text figure; 1 Map) Vol. 7; No. 2 WITH MILES OF ROCKY COASTLINE, generally free from the heavy wave action and surge of the Pacific Coast, Guaymas is an ideal locality for the skindiving collector. Annually, for the past three years, each of us has averaged three or four diving trips to this port; however our diving and collecting commenced there in 1956. During the winter months the water temperature at Guaymas dips below 18° C and comparatively few rock dwelling species are found offshore. As the water begins to warm in the spring, dense growths of algae rapidly appear. These algae attach to the rocks in such quantity that the bottom is virtually obliterated from view. Strands of one species extend eight to ten meters above their holdfasts. In late May and early June the water rapidly warms, killing the algae, so that by the latter part of June large quantities of seaweed have washed ashore, leaving the bottom easy to explore. From mid July to early October the surface temperature hovers around 30° C. During this period many species are spawning, making collection and selection of specimens much easier. The following list of shells represents species that we have taken at Guaymas both by “free diving” and with the use of SCUBA.’ This is by no means complete, but represents those species that have not previously been reported from this locality or were recorded from dead material only. Unless otherwise specified, the collecting locality is just northwest of a small cove known locally as Bahia Saladita and designated as “(1) Cove” on the map showing the Guaymas collecting localities. Another col- ae Self-Contained Underwater Breathing Apparatus lecting area which apparently lacks a name is the small rocky reef just north of the entrance of Bacochibampo Bay, identified by the number (2). The other two local- ities mentioned are north of San Carlos Bay, “(3) Cove” and Ensenada Lalo. LIST OF SPECIES Cymatioa electilis (BERRY, 1963). Pl. 21; figs. 7, 8; text fig. 1. Recently described from Manzanillo, Colima, Mexi- co. Specimens were found buried in muddy sand under rocks 10 m below the surface. (DRS) In the past few months this species has been the center of considerable discussion. It was originally described by Berry (1963) as Crenimargo electilis gen. nov. et spec. nov. Since its publication it has been suggested that the genus would have to stand as a nomen nudum as no type species was designated in the original description. As Dr. Myra Keen pointed out (personal communication; 7 May 1964) the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature provides four ways by which a type can be fixed in the original publication [Article 68] to be applied in the order of precedence. First is original designation, second is use of typicus, third is monotypy, fourth is tautonymy. The Code recognizes monotypy as a valid means of fixation and Dr. Berry fulfilled the requirements under monotypy, for there is a single nominal species, and there is also an adequate “indication” for the genus in the form of a differential diagnosis. The question of validity of Crenimargo became un- important when it was learned that the name was preoc- cupied necessitating a new name. Dr. Berry has recently Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 115 (29 July 1964) provided us with the new generic name and fixed the type species as follows: Genus Cymatioa Berry, 1964; nom. nov. for Creni- margo Berry, 1963, [Leaflets in Malacology, 1 (23) : 140], nomen praéoc. Type species: C. electilis Berry, 1963. Vanikoro aperta (CarRPENTER, 1864). Pl. 21; figs. 9-11. Living in colonies under rocks in depths of 2 to 10 m. The largest specimen measures 10.6 x 11.4 mm. Dr. Myra Keen (personal communication, 7 May 1964) requested us to point out that the illustration she used for V. aperta [KEEN, 1958; p. 311, fig. 230] had been incorrectly labelled and that at the time she had no way of verifying the identification. Since the figure of the holo- type USNM No. 15897 in PaLmer [1963, pl. 66, fig. 1] is poor, two additional views of the distinctive early sculp- ture are shown here. Ensenada San Isla Chapetona Ensenada + Lalo GUAYMAS LOCALITIES Nautical Miles ————————— EE 0 1 2 Francisco Text figure 1: Cymatioa electilis (Berry, 1963); internal hinge area of left valve showing ligament and cardinal teeth (x 8) Cheilea corrugata (Broverip, 1834). This, like the preceding species, lives in colonies. Taken under rocks 8 to 10 m below the surface. (DRS) Polinices caprae (Put.ippi, 1852). One dead specimen from a sandy bottom near rocky rub- ble at 10 m. (DRS) . Estero ae R <. Soldado wr a, ie Ae A entie y uw . la D +p ig “3 fo) (3) Si = uw © netted 2 4 4 Ww m o 2 2 z m ° Z vv (7) is Isla ds Candelero (1) Cove 7¥, : a 5, (4) pBanleyy:. Saladita fi: : Page 116 Bursa caelata (Broperip, 1833). Fairly common at Panama and occasionally taken at Mazatlan; one living specimen at a depth of 12 m. (DRS) Pterynotus pinniger (BropvEriP, 1833). One of us (SHAsxky, 1960) has previously reported taking live specimens of this beautiful species at Guaymas (while trawling over a mud bottom). The specimens reported here were exposed on the sides of rocks at 10 m. We con- sider P. pinniger to be synonymous with P. inezana Dur- HAM, 1950. (See EMErson, 1960, for a further discussion of this complex). (DRS, GBC) Ocenebra carmen (Lowe, 1935). Plate 21; fig. 6. Unreported since the original description, although a few specimens were trawled in the Loreto Channel off Car- men Island, Gulf of California on the Ariel Expedition (GBC). Several specimens taken from under rocks at a depth of 8 to 10 m. (DRS, GBC) Phyllocoma scalariformis Broperip, 1833. Two living specimens collected from under partially buried rocks at a depth of 10 m. (DRS, GBC) Typhis (Typhisopsis) coronatus Broperip, 1833. Pl. 21; ies, 2 9. This species is rarely taken by the shore collector or diver, but it is rather common offshore. When a locality is dredged where it is known to occur, as many as ten spec- imens may be brought up in one haul of the dredge. For discussion of this species and synonymy see KEEN & CAMP- BELL, 1964. One dead specimen (21.8x 12.8 mm) was obtained from the 15 m depth. (GBC) Typhis (Typhisopsis) grandis A. Apams, 1855. Pl. 21; fowl Two large dead specimens of this species (38.8 x 23.0 mm & 25.4x 18.2 mm) were found at the edge of the sandy area at approximately 15 m. The systematic position of this species will be clarified in another study currently in progress; therefore, it will not be discussed here except to say that T. grandis A. ApaMs is not a synonym for T. coronatus Broperip based on the type material in the British Museum (Natural History). Another specimen was collected in 3 m from the cove between Hotel Playa de Cortez and Punta Colorada. (DRS, GBC) Pterotyphis (Tripterotyphis) lowei (Prrspry, 1931). PI. ZAMS inte, 45, ), THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 One small specimen taken under a rock at a depth of 2m in cove (3). This is the first living specimen recorded from the Gulf of California. (DRS) Anachis incerta (STEARNS, 1892). This varicolored species is quite common at Guaymas under rocks in depths of 2 to 12 m. (DRS, GBC) Bailya anomala (Hinps, 1844). One living specimen from under a rock resting on a gravel bottom. This extends the range about 1750 miles northwestward. (DRS) Cantharus bilirata (REEVE, 1846). Recently reported (SHasxky, 1961) in the Gulf of Califor- nia from two dead specimens, we have found numerous specimens of this interesting species under rocks in 8 to 18 m. (DRS, GBC) Mitra (Scabricula) lignaria REEvE, 1844. Pl. 22; fig. 12. Although unreported in recent years, we have found one dead and two living specimens. Under rocks buried in mud at a depth of 10 m. Largest specimen measures 56 mm in height. (DRS, GBC) Mitra (Strigatella) crenata Broverip, 1836. Pl. 22; fig. 15. We have found numerous specimens of a small miter, none measuring over 10 mm, that seem to belong to this species. Under rocks at depths of 2 to 15 m. (DRS, GBC) Conus (Conus) tiaratus Sowersy, 1833. Pl. 22; fig. 17. Three specimens (two of which were living) of this species have been collected from the surface of large rocks at a depth of 5 m. This, we believe, represents the first ac- count of this species from the Gulf of California. (GBC) Conus (Chelyconus) orton Broverip, 1833. Pl. 22; figs. 18, 22. Previously unreported from inside the Gulf of California. Two fresh dead specimens taken from the sandy floor around rocky reefs at 10 to 12 m. In the past some authors have considered C. orion a synonym of C. vittatus BrucuikrE, 1792 (Pl. 22, figs. 19, 23). For comparison, both species are illustrated with close-ups of the periostra- cum; it will be noted that the periostracum of C. orion has spiral tufting which is absent in C. vittatus. (DRS, GBC) Conus (Cylindrus) dalli StEaRNsS, 1873. No living specimens have been reported from inside the Gulf of California, although OLproyp (1918), EMERSON (1962) and Hanna (1963) have mentioned beach mate- Explanation of Plate 21 Figure 1: Typhis (Typhisopsis) grandis A. Apams, 1855 (x 1.33) Broverip, 1833. (x 2.2) Figure 2. Typhis (Typhisopsis) coronatus Figure 3. Typhis (Typhisopsis) coronatus Broperip (juvenile). (x 3.5) Figure 4. Pterotyphis (Tripterotyphis) lowei (Puspry, 1931) (x 7.3) Figure 5. Pterotyphis (Tripterotyphis) lower (Pussry, 1931) (x 7.3) dorsal view. Figure 6. Ocenebra carmen (Lowe, 1935) (x 7.7) Figure 7. Cymatioa electilis (BERRY, 1963), exterior of left valve (x 2.5) valve. (x 2.5) Figure 10. same as no. 9 ventral view. (x 3) Figure 8. same as no 7: interior of left Figure 9. Vanikoro aperta (CARPENTER, 1864) neanic whorls, lateral view. {x 10) Figure 11. same as no. 9 apical view. (x 11) Tue VEticER, Vol. 7, No. 2 [D. R. SHaskxy « G. B. Campse tt] Plate 21 Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Photo. B. Campbell or Figure 3: Record of field study of pair formation and persistence over one moist-rock activity period, showing that pairs form over a, wide. range of dark and daylight hours, and persist for greatly varying lengths of time. One individual may pair more than once during a single activity period. PAIRED l3jasd So Figure 4: Two field studies of pairing percentage made over two 25-hour tide cycles one week apart, showing shifting of time of maximum and minimum pairing with tide-level time shift. See text for further explanation. ———W— Tide level; % paired. —-~—*—« = % paired while snails are dry, drawn into shells, attached by mucus. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 137 Figure 5 a Figure 5 b Figure 5 c Figure 5a: Pair, seen from below, with male extending penis down and back prior to insertion. Female with foot partially attached to glass plate, i lustrating obstruction of view by subsequent spreading and flattening of foot. (x 2.5) Figure 5b: Male begins insertion of leading edge of fully extended penis into mantle cavity of female; the tip will trail in after. FRETTER « GraHam (1962) state that the mammaliform glands on the leading edge of the penis may produce secretions which aid in holding the penis in place during copulation. Figure 5c: Penis inserted as in sperm transfer. Female is waving foot about in an attempt to contact substrate in order to right herself. Figure 6 a Figure 6 4 mm co Figure 6: Scattergram of size of females plotted against size of males with whom they were paired. Two different populations and several pairs selected for their disproportion are represented. Each symbol between the diverging slope lines represents a pair in which the smaller member is at least % the size of the larger e = population no. 1; 61 pairs. x = population no. 2; 72 pairs. o = the most disproportionate pairs found out of 84 pairs selected for this quality. Figure 6a: Method of measurement for Figures 6 and 7, across operculum and columella, from center of aperture lip to widest part of whorl opposite. Page 138 female on her back. Under these conditions the snails soon extended themselves, and the male usually attempted to insert the penis. The only drawback to this method of observation is occasional disruption of copulation as the female swings her foot around, trying to find a substrate in order to right herself. An attempt was made to avoid this problem by allowing the female to contact a glass plate with her foot while upside down; however, contact with the plate was followed by a spreading and flattening of the foot, which obscured the view of the penis and the female’s mantle cavity. When the female is righted, the position of the male shell during pairing completely obstructs the view of the penis. Since it is impossible to tell by male shell orientation whether or not the pair is copulating, field studies of dura- tion or frequency of copulation are practically impossible. Disruption of 100 active (extended) pairs in the field re- vealed only 17 in which the male’s penis was extended, so paired snails cannot always be regarded as copulating. FREQUENCY )» © £ 8B ® THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 SIZE RATIOS IN MALE-FEMALE PAIRS A question arises as to what size males will be found paired with what size females in the field, and whether any selection for size of mate occurs. Figure 6 is a scatter- gram of all the pairs of two different Littorina planaxis populations taken from two different areas, in which the size of each female is plotted against the size of the male she was paired with. The method of measurement used for both Figures 6 and 7 is shown in Figure 6a. All symbols between the diverging slope lines in Figure 6 represent pairs in which the smaller member is at least 24 the size of the larger. This suggests itself to be the practical limit in size disproportion in pairs found in the field. An overall survey of populations in which only the most dispropor- tionate pairs were selected yielded only 4 out of 84 pairs taken that failed to fall within the suggested limits. A few of these limit-defining pairs are also recorded on the scattergram. i) (2 ( {4 {Bh 16 SIZE IN mm Figure 7: Size frequency by sex in populations 1 and 2 (see Figure 6). All individuals in each mm category are plotted as one pomt, as there are 14 males between 11.5mm and 12.0mm. ; = population 1; (93) females OS 0 = population 2; (96) females; ———— = population 1; (126) males -sreerees — population 2; (120) males Wolm/= Now2 THE VELIGER Page 139 A breakdown of size frequency by sex of the two scatter- gram populations is presented in Figure 7. Here is sug- gested one reason why more disproportionate pairs are not found: very large males and females are not found in the same populations with very small individuals. There- fore, in addition to the mechanical problems of copula- tion between Littorina planaxis individuals with grossly disproportionate genitalia, there are undoubtedly many ecological pressures involved which keep large and small snails apart in nature, such as size as a factor in withstand- ing wave shock, desiccation, etc. However, laboratory ex- periments in which large males were kept isolated with small females, and conversely, for two weeks yielded only one pair, barely exceeding the 3 limit, while evenly sized snails under the same environmental conditions paired readily and often. SEX RATIO As Figure 7 indicates, there are generally more males than females in the population. A survey of 100 unpaired in- dividuals yielded a ratio of two males to each female: however, when the population as a whole and the large number of snails that are pairing at any one time are considered, the balance between the sexes is seen to be such that there is probably little or no significance in the greater number of males present. LITERATURE CITED FRETTER, VERA, & ALASTAIR GRAHAM 1962. British prosobranch molluscs, their functional anatomy and ecology. London, Ray Soc. xvi + 755 pp.; 316 figs. Peters, RONALD 1964. | Function of the cephalic tentacles in Littorina planaxis (Gastropoda: Prosobranchiata) . The Veliger 7 (2): 143 - 148 (1 October 1964) Ricketts, Epwarp F, & Jack CaLvin 1952. Between Pacific tides. x- xiii; 3 - 502; 46 plts. Stanford Univ. Press, Stanford, Calif. Macroscopic Algal Foods of Littorina planaxis Purirrt and Littorina scutulata GouLp (Gastropoda : Prosobranchiata ) ARTHUR LYON DAHL Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University, Pacific Grove, California THE UPPER LITTORAL PERIWINKLES of the central Cali- fornia coast are often found in association with a number of the higher intertidal macroscopic algae. The studies and observations upon which this paper is based were made on the Monterey Peninsula, on the central Califor- nia coast, especially at Mussel Point in the vicinity of the Hopkins Marine Station, and at Pescadero Point. The coastline in these areas consists principally of granite boulders and outcroppings interspersed with sandy beaches, heavily overgrown with larger algae through most of the littoral zone. Observations were made during May, 1964, and therefore do not reflect any seasonal fluc- tuations that might take place. Despite the fact that both Littorina planaxis Putviprt, 1847 and L. scutulata Gou.p, 1849 are a conspicuous part of the upper littoral fauna over much of the Pacific coast of North America, almost nothing has been published about them up to now, and while the eastern United States and European periwinkles are generally better known, information on food and feeding patterns is very scarce. NortH (1954) analyzed size distribution, erosive activities, and gross metabolic efficiency of both L. plan- axis and L. scutulata. CasSTENHOLZ (1961) used L. scutu- lata as well as Acmaea spp. in his studies of grazing effects on diatom populations. From his observations, he assumed “that the primary food of these gastropods is diatom material” (p. 793), with blue-green algae the principal food in the “supra-littoral” fringe. RickETTs & CaLvin (1952) state that L. planaxis feeds on detritus and microscopic plants scraped from almost bare rock, and that “certain of the rockweeds (Pelvetia or Fucus) serve the young periwinkles as a sort of nursery, for it is on their fronds and stems that the young will nearly always be found” (p. 20), an observation for which no evidence has Page 140 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 been seen during this study. Concerning other species, NEWELL (1958) noted that L. littorea ate surface deposits of diatoms and small algae, and also browsed on Ulva and Enteromorpha. The answers to three questions were sought in this study. Can these snails eat macroscopic algae? Which algae, if any, are normally part of their diet? How important are these algae in their diets? A number of approaches were used in the attempt to answer these questions. Numerous field observations were made to determine to what algae the snails had access and if they were ever in contact. Principal proof of feeding was based on examinations of the stomach contents of dissected snails, from which in- gested tissue fragments could be compared with scrapings from the algae on which the snail was found, or on which it was believed to have fed. In a few cases, feces were also examined for recognizable algal fragments. Several types of laboratory experiments were attempted to sup- plement field observations. Sometimes it was sufficient to place a winkle together with a dampened piece of alga in a dish. Better results were obtained in an aquarium the contents of which were kept wet, but not submerged, by a fine sea water spray. An aquarium was also rigged to duplicate tidal fluctuations, but conditions were not similar enough to those in the field to get normal responses for any length of time. Nortu (1954) noted that food passed completely through the digestive tract in from 21% to 6 hours. Thus the stomach contents of any snail kept for six hours with a single type of alga, or starved for six hours and then placed with an alga, could come only from that alga. This seemed to hold true in all cases ob- served, and provided a simple and reliable check for other types of observations. A number of difficulties were encountered in the at- tempt to induce feeding in the laboratory. Littorina plan- axis has a strong tendency to crawl to the highest part of the dish or aquarium, especially if placed in water. In- dividuals of both species would frequently cease activity if left undisturbed for more than 6 to 12 hours. Natural conditions, especially with respect to tidal and diurnal fluctuations, proved almost impossible to duplicate, yet it would have been even more difficult to keep track of in- dividual snails in the field or to eliminate unwanted food sources there, especially the ubiquitous “GATGOR” (Green Algae That Grow On Rocks, a term applied to the microscopic flora; work on this aspect of littorine feeding has been done by Foster (see below, this issue). Experimental animals had to be run singly in experiments where starvation was a factor because of the tendency of periwinkles to feed on each others’ shells. Additional complications resulted from epiphytic algae growing on the test specimens, and from the rapid decay of certain types of algae, especially Iridophycus’ flaccidum and Lam- inaria Andersoni, under conditions available in the lab- oratory. A number of criteria were set up by which feeding on any particular alga could be substantiated with a satisfac- tory degree of certainty. At least two of these three stand- ards had to be met before a snail could be considered to have “fed” on the alga in question: (a) the snail was observed on the alga, preferably actively moving and with the radula active; (b) whole pieces or fragments of tissue were found in the stomach or feces exactly matching in cell size, shape, structure, color, type of chloroplasts etc., scrapings or known forms of the alga in question (usually determined by direct comparison) ; (c) the animal was starved (kept with no signs of feeding or no food) for at least six hours prior to feeding or dissection, and had stomach contents not dissimilar to fragments of the test alga. Most of the observations of feeding on any one partic- ular alga are based on only a small number of individuals because of the time involved in making a positive deter- mination of feeding, and, in some cases, because such feeding itself may occur only rarely. Some algae are found over only a small part of the range of Littorina planaxis or L. scutulata, or snails may feed on them only under particularly favorable conditions. It was assumed, however, that positive proof of feeding on an alga, even if based on only one individual, would indicate a species capability of eating or ingesting the alga, if not a pre- ference for it, and that once such a capability was dem- onstrated, snails observed on such an alga were probably feeding on it. Littorina planaxis is generally found in the upper re- gions of the intertidal zone, on “bare” rocks normally moistened only by splash. The height of this region varies considerably with the amount of exposure to surf. Lit- torina scutulata occurs somewhat lower, and in more pro- tected areas, ranging from about +2 feet up to about +6 feet in some areas. It is frequently found in moderate to heavy growths of algae, and very small individuals oc- cur in large numbers in some horizontal Balanus beds. The ranges of the two species of Littorina overlap con- siderably in some areas. Both species are known to depend on microscopic algae (diatoms, greens, and some blue-greens) as a priricipal food source (CasTENHOLZ, 1961; Foster, this issue), es- pecially where macroscopic algae are scarce or absent, as they are over much of the range of Littorina planaxis. However, there are areas in which a considerable macro- * Currently placed in Iridaea. Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 141 scopic algal flora is available, and it is with these areas that this study is primarily concerned. A number of com- mon algae occur in the vicinity of littorine populations, especially Cladophora trichotoma (C. A. AcArDH) Kirzinc, Endocladia muricata (Postets & RUPRECHT) J. G. Acarou, Fucus furcatus C. A. Acarpu, Gigartina Agardhu SetTcHELL & GARDNER, Gigartina cristata (SeTcHELL) SETCHELL & GarpNneR, Iridophycus flacci- dum SETCHELL & GaRvNER, Pelvetia fastigiata (J. G. AcaroH) DeTont, Porphyra perforata J. G. Acarpu, Rhodoglossum affine (Harvey) Kyun, and Ulva spp. Cladophora is generally found in cracks, crevices, and tide- pools, on horizontal surfaces, sometimes together with Ulva; Endocladia, Rhodoglossum, and the gigartinas are frequently associated together in crevices and on rock sur- faces, as well as in scattered individual clusters; Pelvetia, Fucus, and Iridophycus are commonest on sloping surfaces at slightly lower levels; Porphyra often covers the tops of boulders and outcroppings. One area, in which many of the field observations re- ported in this study were made, includes all of the above specics except Fucus and in addition has large popula- tions of both Littorina planaxis and L. scutulata. It is on a granite shelf west of Pescadero Point, at a height of about +4 feet, and was divided for survey purposes into two sections, each of approximately 2 square meters in area. The first is largely horizontal, with a number of crevices up to 10 cm deep and a small tidepool. Clado- phora is the dominant alga, with some Endocladia and Rhodoglossum also present; the algae are largely confined to the crevices and the tidepool, the elevated rock areas being bare. The second consists of the vertical west face of the shelf and some of the contiguous horizontal top, about 2 meters from the first area and at the same level. It is almost entirely covered with algae, with Endocladia, Rhodoglossum, Pelvetia, and Gigartina cristata the most common species, the others present in lesser quantities. One survey showed that the two areas contained 147 Littorina planaxis and 329 L. scutulata. Surveys were gen- erally made in the morning while the snails were still active from their previous night’s wetting, yet had had enough time to feed adequately on the algae. 2 The feeding behavior of Littorina planaxis and L. scutulata seems to be a combination of random activity and preferential movement. In the laboratory, snails are frequently observed scraping their radulae along a clean glass surface and have been known to consume consider- able quantities of paraffin and powdered carbon. In the field, the stomach contents of snails have revealed large quantities of sand and rock particles, detritus, any number of algal types, and occasional small animals, often still alive and active. There seems, therefore, to be little or ? Nomenclature of algae follows G. M. Smiru, 1944. no selectivity in what is ingested from any given surface. However, field studies to be discussed later suggest that each species has, at least under some conditions, definite preferences for certain types of substrates or algae. The radula of these snails seems capable of tearing off quite large pieces of substrate material, and particles of considerable size have been found in their stomachs. Some of the smaller algae such as the filamentous Cladophora and the small monostromatous Prasiola meridionalis SETCHELL & GARDNER are frequently found almost entire in the stomach of Littorina planaxis. The structure of the radula and other mouth parts seems to be similar for both species, and, superficially at least, matches that of L. lttorea as described by FReTTER & GRAHAM (1962, pp. 26-27). What the winkles digest of what they take in is still un- certain. Undigested cells and tissue fragments are fre- quently found in the feces, supporting Nortu (1954) in his conclusion that their digestive efficiency is low, with organic matter assimilation about 7 percent of consump- tion. Cell wall material seems especially conspicuous, at least in the stomach, and was often useful in identifying the algae on which the snail had fed. Littorina planaxis does not frequently come into con- tact with macroscopic algae; most of its range is well above the limits of such algal growth. There are areas, however, where it is found with all of the algae listed previously. In such areas, it shows a decided preference for a rock substrate. (For the purposes of this study the term “rock substrate” includes both microscopic and encrusting algal forms; “algal substrate” refers to macro- scopic algae with other than an encrusting thallus; the substrate is the surface to which the snail is attached, and on which, presumably, it is feeding). One survey of the area near Pescadero Point showed only 2% of the L. planaxis on algal substrates; for another check under more favorable conditions (overcast sky), about 10% were observed on Cladophora. One individual had a considerable quantity of Cladophora in its stomach and a filament hanging out of its mouth, so feeding was almost certainly taking place in these cases. Littorina planaxis has also been collected on the thalli of what is either a high form of Rhodoglossum affine (the name used in this paper), or a juvenile form of Gigartina cristata. The stomachs of these snails contained a few fragments of tissue closely resembling scrapings from the alga but in such small quantities as to be an insignificant part of its diet. Snails collected from patches of Prastola meridionalis on rocks covered with bird guano at Mussel Point proved to have large quantities of this alga, often whole thalli, in their stomachs and feces, in addition to quantities of a microscopic chlamydomonad. These are the only instances in the present study in which L. planaxis has been found to eat macroscopic algae under natural conditions. A Page 142 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 number of laboratory experiments suggest reasons for this behavior. In one experiment, thalli of Endocladia, Rhodoglossum, and Porphyra were finely chopped with a razor blade and spread on the wet bottoms of petri dishes; dishes with whole thalli, and a dish with a growth of “GATGOR” served as controls. A single freshly- collected L. planaxis was placed in each dish for 5 hours and then dissected. The snails consumed large quantities of the chopped pieces whole and also the “GATGOR,” while the stomachs of the control winkles were empty, even when they were attached to the algae. In an algal preference test run in an aquarium kept damp by spray, the few L. planaxis that did not crawl to the top of the tank fed either on rock samples or on soft, decaying pieces of Iridophycus flaccidum. There are several possible reasons why Littorina plan- axis does not normally eat much macroscopic algae: (a) it is unable to “bite off” pieces of any but the softest or most finely divided algae; (b) it, for some reason, will not crawl on the “unstable” substrates provided by algae: (c) most macroscopic algae are somehow chemically dis- agreeable to it. Alternative (c) can be safely discarded, since L. planaxis showed no aversion to chopped algae. There is at present no evidence for or against reasons (a) and (b), although a brief examination of the mouth and radula showed no obvious differences from those of L. scutulata, which feeds much more on macroscopic algae. In contrast with Littorina planaxis, L. scutulata both encounters more macroscopic algae and eats more of it. For instance, in the survey near Pescadero Point cited above, 47% of the L. scutulata in both areas were on algal substrates. There were marked preferences for certain species of algae. Of the 153 snails on algae, 72 were on Cladophora, 46 on Pelvetia, 20 on Rhodoglossum, and no more than 5 on any of the other species. Nor is this en- tirely a reflection of the relative abundance of the algae; Endocladia, the most common, had only 3 L. scutulata on it, and some of the others had fewer than their relative areas would suggest. Also, observations under more favor- able conditions than those reflected in the above survey suggest that all these figures, especially for Pelvetia, are at times considerably higher. In other areas, L. scutulata is also found on Fucus and Porphyra. In addition, tidepool populations of L. scutulata have been observed scavenging on decaying algae such as Gigartina corymbifera and Prionitus lanceolata that had been left in the pools by very high tides. The stomachs of snails collected from these algae were stuffed with partially decomposed algal material. Laboratory studies confirmed that Littorina scutulata will readily eat a variety of macroscopic algae. In addi- tion to the Cladophora and Peivetia mentioned above in which feeding was definitely observed, snails readily at- tacked Ulva, leaving only tattered shreds. In the prefer- ence tank L. scutulata was observed on all algae in the tank (Pelvetia, Cladophora, Gigartina cristata, Endo- cladia, Rhodoglossum, Porphyra, Ulva, Iridophycus, La- minaria), and al! individuals dissected had macroscopic algal fragments in their stomachs (these were identified in the case of Porphyra, Laminaria, and Ulva). The situation therefore seems to be similar to that noted by CastENHOLz (1961) for the effects of Littorina scutu- lata on diatom populations; the snails are able to pre- vent sparse populations from increasing but do not have much effect on well established colonies. The com- pletely bare areas between algal growths in which peri- winkles are so frequently found (CasTENHOLZ, I. c.) are probably kept bare by continual grazing, and the oc- casional presence of very young thalli in littorine stomachs supports this. In the study area at Pescadero Point, the Pelvetia is worn and indented, and in some places only the stubby remains of thalli can be found in the bottom of cracks, too tightly packed for the snails to reach. Even the Endocladia is undercut and trimmed back for about 1 cm above the rock surface in some areas bordering on bare rock. Whether these effects are due to the feeding activity of Littorina is not possible to say without lengthy observations and measurements, but considering the quan- tities of cell material found in stomachs, the depredations observed in the laboratory, and the number of snails in- volved, the effects of feeding are by no means insignificant. However, well established algal growths seem to hold their own successfully, at least for short periods. Two areas in the field, one with Porphyra, the other with Cladophora and Ulva, were caged with fiberglass netting and 4 inch mesh galvanized screen into two compartments, one with 25 L. scutulata, the other empty as a control (a third compartment with 25 L. planaxis was added for the Ulva, Cladophora test). After two weeks, no effects were ob- served that could be directly attributed to the snails, al- though measurements were not very accurate. The effects on different algae probably vary considerably, judging from the varying quantities of algal material in the stom- achs of snails feeding on different plants. Porphyra and Rhodoglossum, for example, were generally found in much smaller quantities than the softer Pelvetia and de- caying algae, or the more easily ingested Cladophora. While more work needs to be done on feeding prefer- ences and the mechanisms affecting them, feeding effects, and seasonal and geographical variations in feeding habits, some conclusions can be drawn concerning the macroscopic algal foods of periwinkles. Littorina planaxts Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 143 generally eats only microscopic foods and those macro- scopic algae small enough to be consumed entire or nearly so. The reasons for this are not clear, but may be related to the structure of the mouth or the preference for certain types of substrates. Littorina scutulata is frequently found eating macroscopic algae, especially Cladophora, Pelvetia, and other more easily ingested forms. The effects of this feeding are probably important in limiting the spread of new plants, and the effects on established thalli, while probably considerable in some instances, appear to vary greatly with the species of algae. LITERATURE CITED CasTENHOLz, RicHarp W. 1961. lations. The effect of grazing on marine littoral diatom popu- Ecology 42: 783 - 794 Foster, Micwaet S. 1964. Microscopic algal food of Littorina planaxis Puiipri and Littorina scutulata Goutp (Mollusca: Prosobranchiata) . The Veliger 7 (2): 149 - 152 (1 October 1964) Fretrer, VERA, & ALASTAIR GRAHAM 1962. and ecology. NEWELL, G. E. 1958. conditions and its relation to position on the shore. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U.K., 37: 229 - 239 NortH, WHEELER J. 1954. Size distribution, erosive activities and gross metabolic efficiency of the marine intertidal snails, Littorina planaxis and L. scutulata. Biol. Bull. 106: 185 - 187 Ricketts, Epwarp F. & Jack CALVIN 1962. Between Pacific tides. 3rd. ed., 2nd. rev. by Jorn W. Hepopetu. xiii 516 pp.; 135 text figs.; 46 plts.; Stanford Univ. Press, Stanford, California. British prosobranch molluscs, their functional anatomy London, Ray Soc. xvi + 755 pp.; 316 figs. The behavior of Littorina littorea (L.) under natural Journ. Smiru, Gitpert M. 1944. Univ. Press, 622 pps. Marine algae of the Monterey Peninsula. Stanford Stanford, Calif. Function of the Cephalic Tentacles in Littorina planaxis PHILipPl (Gastropoda : Prosobranchiata ) BY RONALD S. PETERS Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University Pacific Grove, California (10 Text figures) In FretTer & GraHam (1962, p. 14), the following de- scription is given for part of the sensory apparatus in the snail Littorina littorea: “Toward its posterior end the head carries a pair of laterally placed tentacles... . At the base of each is a cushion-like bulge. . . . This is the eye Stalk, and the dark spot on it is the eye. The tentacle, which is tactile and olfactory, is thus the seat of three major senses.” The snail Littorina planaxis (Putiprt, 1847), common along the California coast, has tentacles very similar to those described for L. littorea. Studies have revealed that the eye definitely is a light receptor and causes the animal to respond predictably to various light stimuli (Dieter Eckert, personal communication). How- ever, the portion of the tentacle distal to the eye has not undergone extensive investigation, and tactile and olfac- tory capabilities of this part of the organ are undeter- mined. In April and May, 1964, studies were carried out at the Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University, Pacific Grove, California, to determine the behavior and function of that part of the tentacle extending beyond the eye in L. planaxis. The two cephalic tentacles are situated at the sides and slightly back of the large blunt snout. The organs are con- tractile, and when contracted they fit snugly at the sides of the mouth. Upon extension, they appear as delicate finger-like structures which exhibit movement patterns Page 144 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 that vary depending on the substrate or environmental condition the animal has encountered. They are inner- vated from the cerebral ganglion. The tentacles are used by the animal as a main guide to its movements in the rocky areas which it so abundantly inhabits. The snail moves primarily during the lower tem- peratures at night and in the film of moisture provided by high tide and surf, with the tentacles generally re- maining on the stony substrate and slowly moving from side to side. As the moisture decreases, or as obstacles are encountered, the organs begin an up and down pattern of movement, with the snail touching the substrate and im- mediately lifting the tentacle usually no more than one to one and a half millimeters. When the snail reaches an obstacle in its path, it undertakes a tactile survey of the impediment by extending the organs to their full tapering length and moving them about. When the animals are submerged, tentacular movement is usually restricted to a continuous motion from side to side, in contact with the substrate. In any circumstance, movements of the two tentacles may either be highly coordinated, as in horizon- tal swaying motions, or one tentacle may move completely independently of the other. In order to determine more precisely the functions of the cephalic tentacles, I extirpated the organs in a group of Littorina planaxis and compared their responses with those in a group of normal snails under various conditions. It was necessary to anesthetize the animals prior to re- moving the tentacles. An aqueous solution of magnesium chloride isotonic with seawater proved to be superior to 1% propylene phenoxetol (OWEN & STEEDMAN, 1958), 1% chloral hydrate (Stvix, 1953), and 10 parts/million Sevin (Carriker & BLAKE, 1959) for the purposes of this investigation. Having adequately relaxed the animals, I could easily pull the head a good distance from the shell and snip off the entire tentacle distal to the eye with a pair of iridectomy scissors. The snails were then placed in normal seawater for recovery. In all instances, the oper- ated snails exhibited activity similar to that of the normal snails. The wound appeared healed after two or three days, and operated animals placed in the field resumed normal activity and would occasionally be noted traveling three to five feet during a very moist night. The following experiments and observations were carried out to compare the responses of normal snails with those of snails in which the tentacles had been removed. GENERAL MOVEMENT AND RIGHTING In the laboratory, the Littorina planaxis without cephalic tentacles did not exhibit striking locomotive inabilities. Glass dishes were used for all of the tests, and in prac- tically every instance the animals that had been operated on travelled across the smooth surface at approximately the same speeds as the normal ones. When encountering obstacles, however, a definite difference in reaction was noted. A normal snail, with its tentacles exploring the substrate immediate in its path, would reach an object, touch it with the tentacles, and stop before bumping into it with the shell. On the other hand, a tentacleless snail would encounter the obstacle, bump into it with the shell, and continue for a time as if trying to push the object over. If the impediment happened to be another snail, the animals without tentacles could climb onto the shell, although observably slower than a normal animal. To see if a lack of the tentacles produced an impairment to the ability for righting, I placed about 180 snails with tentacles and a like number without tentacles on their backs in glass bowls containing fresh seawater. They were PERCENT RIGHTED O 5 Ke) 15 20 25 TIME- MINUTES Figure 1: Rate of righting in Littorina planaxis. A-normal snails (n = 180); B - snails with tentacles removed (n= 180). then timed from entry into the water until righted, at one minute intervals. The results, shown in Figure 1, indicate that of the animals which did complete the maneuver, the normal Littorina planaxis were slightly quicker. Further corroborating evidence that the snails are tactically de- pendent upon the organ for righting is that a fewer num- ber of tentacleless animals than normal ones completed righting after trying. RESPONSE TO WATERBORNE EXTRACTS OF Acanthina spirata When the predaceous inter-tidal snail Acanthina spirata is introduced into a dish containing normal Littorina plan- axis, a definite evacuation from the area of the larger snail will be detected within minutes. This response to the predator is induced through the effects of a waterborne chemical stimulus that issues from the A. spirata, probably produced in association with its mucus (Kenneth Tittle, Vol. 7; No. 2 THE VELIGER Page 145 personal communication). To determine if the point of reception for this stimulus is the cephalic tentacle or if removal of the organ in any way affects the response, animals with and without tentacles were tested in the following manner. From approximately the same area in the field, 100 Littorina planaxis were collected and the total population was anesthetized in isotonic magnesium chloride. After about an hour, the tentacles were removed from one half of the animals. After the operations, all of the snails were placed in fresh seawater for recovery. Three to four hours later the Littorina appeared totally recuperated and were then subjected to the tests. Two finger bowls were placed side by side, each containing 100 ml of seawater. In one bowl, five normal animals were placed and five animals lacking tentacles in the other one. Both groups were timed to determine the tendency to leave normal sea- water. After 20 minutes, the snails were placed back into the center of the bowl, and 20 ml of seawater were added from a jar which had contained 30 Acanthina spirata in 180 ml for two days. Evacuation from the bowls was again timed and an accelerated departure from the water in both bowls was observed. To determine whether or not the animals were merely leaving the extract containing water because of having been replaced into water after Dw) Ol £ (e) (e) (e) NUMBER OUT OF WATER fo) O 5 10 15 20 29 TIME - MINUTES Figure 2: Response to waterborne extracts of Acanthina spirata. A-normal animals in untainted seawater; B - extirpated animals in untainted seawater; C - normal snails, response to Acanthina spirata; D- extirpated snails, response to Acanthina spirata. In each test n= 50 an initial departure, several tests were run with snails placed directly into the A. spirata water. Differences in response in the two instances were negligible. Identical runs were performed for the entire test population, using fresh seawater and A. spirata extract from the same jar each time. Results of all trials are summarized in Figure 2, and show that the escape responses in normal Littorina plan- axis and in the animals lacking tentacles were almost identical. It is therefore evident that the cephalic tentacles are not critically important as chemo-receptors in the detection of Acanthina spirata at a distance under water. RESPONSE TO WATERBORNE EXTRACTS OF FEMALE Littorina planaxis If water that has contained a group of female Littorina planaxis is added to water containing normal males of the same species, within a short period definite clustering and increased activity can be noted (Karin Rohe, personal NUMBER CLUSTERED TIME — MINUTES Figure 3: Response to waterborne extracts of female Littorina planaxis; A-normal males in untainted sea- water; B- extirpated males in untainted seawater; C - normal males, response to female extract; D - extirpated males, response to female extract. In each test, n — 50. communication). To determine if the cephalic tentacles were pertinent in detecting this waterborne molluscan aphrodisiac, tests similar to the Acanthina spirata experi- ment were set up, using the same general procedure as described. In one bowl containing normal seawater were placed five normal males; in a second bowl, also contain- ing seawater, five males lacking tentacles were placed. At one minute intervals clustering tendencies were timed by recording the number of snails in contact with other animals, either side by side or one on top of another. Following this, 20 ml of seawater, taken from a jar con- taining approximately 200 ml of water in which 25 female snails had been kept for four hours, was added to each bowl. Again the number of clustered animals versus time Page 146 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 was noted. Tests were run on 50 normal and 50 operated individuals. Results of all tests are summarized in Figure 3. All snails, both experimentals and controls, showed some initial tendency to pair and thus form clusters. However, this tendency is short lived except in the normal males exposed to female extract. Perhaps the reason the response is not sustained in extirpated males is that once the animal has climbed onto the back of another snail, he lacks the probing equipment necessary to determine the sex of his partner or to assume the correct position. The results again suggest that the tentacles do not play a role in chemo-reception, though they appear necessary for de- finite sex recognition on contact. RESPONSE TO MUCUS TRAILS It has been observed (Allan Miyamoto, personal com- munication) that Littorina planaxis tend to follow mucus trails across the rocks. A series of experiments were de- veloped to determine the role of the tentacles in such behavior. Because the tentacles tactically precede the animal, it appears that these organs would be apt for de- tection of trails. By cutting off the foot of a Littorina planaxis and dab- bing the structure on a glass plate, an artificial mucus path can be applied as depicted by the dotted lines in Figure 4a. Two normal male L. planaxis and two males lacking Figure 4: Response to mucus trails. a - pattern of mucus applied on all test plates. b- example of movement re- corded for two normal Littorina planaxis; c- example of movement recorded for two Littorina planaxis lacking tentacles. DISTANCE ON MUCUS/ oral DISTANCE NUMBER OF SNAILS Figure 5: Relative tendency of male Littorina planaxis to follow mucus trails from male and female Littevina planaxis; A-normal male, response to female mucus; B - extirpated male, response to female mucus; C - nor- mal male, response to male mucus; D - extirpated male, response to male mucus. In all tests, n = 19. 100 80 DISTANCE ON MUCUS/ ora DISTANCE O 5 10 15 NUMBER OF SNAILS Figure 6: Relative tendency of female Littorina planaxis to follow mucus trails from male and female Littorina flanaxis; A-normal female, response to male mucus (n=8); B- extirpated female, response to male mucus (n—8); C-normal female, response to female mucus (n=6); D-extirpated female, response to female mucus (n= 6). THE VELIGER Page 147 S/rOTAL DISTANCE 4 ® @ ro) ro) fo) ie) (e) DISTANCE ON MUCUS fe) O 10 20 30 40 50 NUMBER OF SNAILS Figure 7: Tendency to follow mucus trails; composite results from Figures 5 and 6; A - normal Littorina plan- axis, response to Littorina planaxis mucus; B - extirpated Littorina planaxis, response to Littorina planaxis mucus. tentacles were placed respectively in the centers of two plates 6 by 6 inches square, each plate bearing mucus trails from female feet. The plates were then taken into a dark room and sprayed lightly and equally with sea- water. After 15 minutes, the snails were removed and the glass plates were immersed in a dilute suspension of India ink in seawater to mark the paths of the animals during their movements in the dark, a technique designed by Dieter Eckert (personal communication, 1964). Experi- wlOO 5) Z b 5 80 4 © 60 oN =) 3 40 = 2 fo) w 20 S) 2 rss “H O : = O 5 10 15 20 25 NUMBER OF SNAILS Figure 8: Relative tendency of normal Littorina planaxis to follow mucus trails of other inter-tidal snails; A - mu- cus of Acmaea digitalis (n= 16); B-mucus of Acan- thina spirata (n= 12); C- mucus of Tegula funebralis (n=8). ments were carried out using each sex as a source of mucus and each sex as a test animal. Two specific ex- amples of typical results obtained appear in Figures 4b, c. Figures 5, 6, and 7 summarize the results of all tests performed. They clearly indicate that the animals do em- ploy their tentacles in following Littorina planaxis mucus trails, and that they follow trails regardless of the sex of the animal making the trail. This result suggested that perhaps the tentacles are sensitive to any mucus or mate- rial that noticeably changes the surface texture of the substrate. Therefore the mucus from several other inter- tidal molluscs was employed, using the same method as described. The results for this set of investigations is shown in Figure 8. In most cases it seems that the mucus from species living in close proximity to the L. planaxis populations exhibit properties close enough to the Litto- rina mucus to elicit at least partial following. Artificial trails made with methyl cellulose and granular mucin were tried, but neither provided positive results. FIELD OBSERVATIONS For observations concerning activities of both normal and tentacleless animals while in regular field conditions, 100 males and 100 females were taken from a large rock sur- face. All were anesthetized using magnesium chloride, the tentacles were removed from one half of the males and one half of the females, the animals were marked, and all were placed back on the rock in a large fenced area from which all other Littorina were removed. Reg- 50 PAIRED TS oO NUMBER wy) [o) TIME — DAYS Figure 9: Pairing frequencies for all four combinations of normal males and females and males and females lack- ing tentacles. In the field, animals were considered paired when the male was on the back of a female; A - normal males on normal females; B - extirpated males on normal females; C-normal males on extirpated females; D - extirpated males on extirpated females. Page 148 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 2 ular daily observations were recorded pertaining to pair- ing, clustering, and single activity for 12 days. Figure 9 shows pairing frequencies for all four combinations of normal males and females and extirpated males and fe- males. Field observations suggest that the males locate the females for copulation. Therefore Figure 10 shows the comparative pairing, with any type female, of normal and extirpated males. Both of these results indicate that the animals without tentacles, especially males, are less able to locate female Littorina for pairing. This result follows NUMBER PAIRED TIME — DAYS Figure 10: Pairing frequencies for normal and extirpated males, based on data of Figure 9; A-normal males; B - extirpated males. the conclusions drawn from the mucus trail experiments, in that the tentacles are pertinent for following another mucus pathway and for sex recognition on contact. RESPONSES AFTER EXTIRPATION OF A SINGLE TENTACLE After removing one tentacle and placing the animal on a clean glass plate, the path assumed by the snail while in the dark was determined by again using the carbon bath. Such experiments did not give clear cut results, but merely hinted at tendencies. Twenty-four snails were tested, 12 with the left tentacle removed and 12 with the right taken off. The results were that 8 of the animals lacking a ten- tacle on the left side exhibited circus movements to the right, and € snails without a tentacle on the right side moved in circus motions to the left. Perhaps the nature of the substrate did not lend to more consistent results, but circus movements are suggested, indicating a depend- ency on tactile assurance. SUMMARY 1. The cephalic tentacles of Littorina planaxis are not critical to general movement, but are used, while the snail moves, for tactile surveillance, and they enable the animal to perform more easily such maneuvers as righting. 2. Removal of the tentacles does not impair the ability to detect diffusible substances from the predaceous snail Acanthina spirata or from female Littorina planaxis. 3. The tentacles appear necessary for sex recognition on contact. 4. The tentacles are employed in following mucus trails on the substrate. The trails of other Littorina planaxis are followed more consistently than are trails laid down by other species of mollusks. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I am happy to acknowledge the advice of Dr. Donald P. Abbott. LITERATURE CITED CarrikeR, MELBOURNE RoMAINE, & JoHN W. BLAKE 1959. ) thus be- coming separated from the genuine distribution. Evidently erroneous indications of habitat have been omitted. CyprRAEDAE Gray, 1824 Cypraeorbinae Scuitper, 1939 Bernaya JOUSSEAUME, 1884 (Protocypraea ScuILpER, 1927) teulére: (CAZENAVETTE, 1846) ERY: 19my’a PER: 12h*(op) fultoni (SowerBy, 1903) CAP: 17n(a) (Bernaya JoussEAuME, 1884) catei SCHILDER, 1963 DAM: 15s’ Zoila JouSSEAUME, 1884 decipiens (Smiru, 1880) DAM: 15bes° venusta (SowerBy, 1846) DAM: 15e (TAS: 58f’) (s)episema Irepate, 1939 TAS: 58f° THE VELIGER cervus (Linnaeus, 1771) Vol. 7; No. 3 (m)sorrentensis ScuitpER, 1963 (DAM: 15s’) TAS: 58f* thersites (GasKotn, 1849) TAS:58s (c)contraria IrEDALE, 1935 TAS: 58b friendii (Gray, 1831) TAS: 58f (c)vercoi ScuitvER, 1930 TAS: 58a marginata (GasKotn, 1849) DAM: 15s’ TAS: 58f*(a") rosselli (Cotton, 1948) TAS: 58f Siphocypraea Heiprin, 1887 (Akleistostoma GarpINER, 1948) mus (Linnagus, 1758) ANT: 81cv(a) Cypraeinae ScuiLper, 1939 (Cypraeini ScuLper, 1927)* Trona JoussEAUME, 1884 stercoraria (Linnagus, 1758) SEN: 83s GUI: 84* Macrocypraea ScHILDER, 1930 zebra (LINNAEUS, 1758) FLO:82*(—b) ANT: B1* (—g) (i) dissimilis (ScuiLper, 1924) ARG: 73c FLO: 82* ANT: 81j(da’) (p) cervinetta (Kiener, 1843) CAL: 89cgm PAN: 88*—cw ECU: 87* x MIC: 42) BRA: 86pbr Mauritia TroscHEL, 1863 valentia (PERRY, 1811) QUE: 47t mappa (Linnazus, 1758) (ZAN: 18z) (LEM:11m) DAM: 15c QUE: 47cqt FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48*—gv RYU:49tr MIC:42*—o POL: 44*—g]j (c) geographica ScHILDER & ScHILDER, 1933 SUM: 14aj(ms) (s) alga (Perry, 1811) ZAN: 182 LEM: 11* (ERY: 19tm) (IND: 13c) eglantina (Ductos, 1833) SUM: 14j(ms) DAM: 15*—s ZEA: 54h QUE: 47*—s FIJ: 46*—t MEL: 41* MAL: 48* -gbv RYU:49tr(c) MIC:42cjg(e) 2 Ed. note: As we have no typographical provision for Dr. Schilder’s taxon, the “infrafamily”, we now introduce this type style to desig- nate this taxon: (Infrafamily). While each lower taxon is indent- ed one full space (an m-space), the infrafamily is indented only one half space more than the Subfamily. Vol. 7; No. 3 histrio (Gmeuin, 1791) (CAP: 17n) ZAN: 18imz LEM: 11* IND: 13* SUM: 14* —tm (c) westralis (IREDALE, 1935) DAM: 15: dbe grayana SCHILDER, 1930 ZAN: 18s’g (LEM: 11s) ERY: 19* PER: 12* IND: 13b arabica (Linnaeus, 1758) SUM: 14* DAM: 15* ZEA: 54h: QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL:41* MAL:48* RYU:49* MIC: 42* (c) dilacerata SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1939 IND: 13* (s) immanis ScHILDER & ScHILDER, 1939 CAP: 17an ZAN: 18*—g LEM: 11* maculifera ScHILDER, 1932 FIJ:46sf(cht) (MAL:48p) RYU: 49trs MIC: 42*—o POL: 44* HAW :43*—m «PAN: 88cs depressa (Gray, 1824) FIJ: 46* MEL: 41b MAL: 48p (RYU:49trs) MIC:42*—o POL: 44*—j x PAN: 88c (i) dispersa SCHILDER & ScHILDER, 1939 ZAN: 18z LEM: 11s] IND: 13mc SUM: 14sjk mauritiana (LinNaEus, 1758) (CAP: 17an) ZAN: 18* LEM: 11* ERY: 19tma (PER: 120) (i) regina (GmeEtin, 1791) IND: 13*—b SUM: 14* DAM: 15b QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48* RYU: 49*(—c) MIC: 42* POL: 44* HAW: 43* scurra (GMELIN, 1791) ZAN:18mz LEM: 11* IND: 13mc SUM: 14asj DAM: 15x (s) indica (GMELIN, 1791) (SUM: 14j)) QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48*(*) RYU: 49tr MIC: 42*—o POL: 44* HAW: 43* x PAN: 88c Talparia TroscHE, 1863 talpa (Linnaeus, 1758) CAP: 17n ZAN: 18* LEM: 1 ERC Ose PE Resl20 IND: 13mcd SUM: 14tas; DAM: 15*—s QUE: 47cqt FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48*—sgv RYU: 49trs MIC: 42*—o POL: 44* HAW: 43* exusta (SowerBy, 1832) ERY: 19*—s(a) Cypraea Linnaeus, 1758 tigris LinnaEus, 1758 CAP: 17n ZAN: 18* LEM: 11* ERY: 19ta THE VELIGER Page 177 (i) pardalis Suaw, 1795 IND: 13*—b SUM: 14* DAM: 15bes ZEA: 54h QUE: 47cqt FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48*_» RYU: 49*(—y) MIC: 42* POL: 44*—j (c) schilderiana Cate, 1961 POL: 44j HAW: 43* (hybrid) catulus ScurtperR, 1924, 1962 19a(t) pantherina SOLANDER, 1786 ERY: ERY: 19* Lyncina TroscHEL, 1863 FIJ: 46* MEL: 41sb MIC:42*—o aurantium (GMELIN, 1791) MAL: 48p* POL: 44cst broderipi (Sowersy, 1832) CAP: 17n (LEM: 11m) nivosa (Broperip, 1827) (LEM: tir) IND: 13cd SUM: 14t leucodon (Broverip, 1828) LEM: 11d argus (LinnaEus, 1758) ZAN: 182 LEM: 11* IND: 13cd SUM: 14asj DAM: 15es° QUE: 47cqt FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48%—g RYU: 49%tr MIC: 42*—o POL: 44up lynx (LinnaEus, 1758) CAP: 17n ZAN: 18* LEM: IE Rs 9% tN a3 ed SUM: 14*DAM: 15*—s ZEA:54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48* RYU: 49*—cy MIC: 42*—o POL: 44* HAW: 43* vitellus (LinNAEuS, 1758) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18* LEM: 11* (ERY: 19a) IND: 13cd SUM: 14* DAM: 15* (TAS: 58f) ZEA:54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL:41* MAL: 48* RYU: 49%—c MIC: 42* POL: 44*_9 HAW: 43* « PAN: 88c camelopardalis (Perry, 1811) ERY: 19*—s(a) reevel (SOWERBY, 1832) TAS: 58fabs ventriculus (LAMaRcK, 1810) FIJ:46* MEL:41sb MAL:48p MIC:42*—o POL: schilderorum (IrEDALE, 1939) FIJ:46cfs (MAL:48p) MIC:42*--o POL:44* HAW: 43* >< PAN:88c (1) kuroharai (KuropA & Hane, 1961) RYU:49rs sulcidentata (Gray, 1824) HAW: 43* carneola (LinnazEus, 1758) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18* EMEA ERY: 19%) PERes2% IND: 13* SUM: 14%-tk DAM: 15* ZEA: 54kh QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* Page 178 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 MEL: 41* MAL: 48* RYU: 49%-c MIC: 42* POL: 44* HAW: 43h (m) titan SCHILDER & SCHIIDER, 1962 ZAN: 18mz LEM: 11mr (m) leviathan (ScHILDER & SCHILDER, 1937) (POL: 44*-hu) HAW:43hf (Luriini ScuivpEr, 1932) Chelycypraea ScHILDER, 1927 testudinaria (LinNaEus, 1758) (QUE: 47*-s FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48mp RYU: 49trs MIC: 42*-0 POL: 44*-j (1)¢ngens (SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938) (CAP: 17n) ZAN: 18mz LEM:11* IND: 13c Luria JoussEAUME, 1884 tessellata (Swainson, 1822) (POL: 44h) HAW: 43* pulchra (Gray, 1828) ERY: 19tma [s=fossil only] PER: 12oph isabella (LinNazus, 1758) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18* LEM: 11* ERY: 19* IND: 13c (c) lekalekana (Lapp, 1934) SUM: 14*-tm DAM: 15* ZEA: 54kh QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48* RYU: 49*-c MIC: 42* POL: 44*(-j) (c) controversa (Gray, 1824) HAW: 43* (p) mexicana (StEaRNs, 1893) CAL: 89cgmr PAN: 88cw (ECU: 87g) cinerea (GMELIN, 1791) FLO: 82* ANT: 81* BRA: 83*-r lurida (Linnazus, 1758) MED:95* CAN: 96* SEN: 83* GUI: 84*-m (1) oceanica ScuitpER, 1930 ATL: 85* Nariinae ScuiLpEr, 1932 (Pustulariini Scuiiper, 1932) Pustularia Swainson, 1840 (Annepona IrEpDALE, 1939) mariae SCHILDER, 1927 FIJ: 46* MEL: 41sb MAL: 48p RYU: 49r MIC: 42*-o POL: 44* HAW: 43h (Pustularia Swainson, 1840) globulus (Linnagus, 1758) IND: 13c SUM: 14asj DAM: 15s? QUE:47xt FIJ: 46*-t MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-g¢ RYU: 49trs MIC: 42*-0 (POL: 44p) (s) brevirostris SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938 (CAP: 17n) ZAN: 182 LEM: 11* (p) nov. prospec. HAW: 43h margarita (Dittwyn, 1817) FIJ: 46*-t MEL: 41sba MAL: 48p MIC: 42* POL: 44*- gmj (i) tricornis (JousSEAUME, 1874) (ERY: 19a) cicercula (LinnaEus, 1758) SUM: 14tasj DAM: 15e QUE: 47c(s) FIj: 46*(-s) MEL: 41*-m MAL: 48*-v RYU: 49trs MIC: 42c POL: 44c (i) lienardi (JousszaumE, 1874) ZAN: 18z LEM: lirsd ERY: 19a (s) tetswakii Kirra, 1959 RYU: 49r HAW: 43* bistrinotata ScHILDER & ScHILDER, 1937 (IND: 13c) SUM: 14*-t DAM: 15c (ZEA: 54h) QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48-v RYU: 49trs* MIC: 42* POL: 44* HAW: 43* (Ipsa JousSEAUME, 1884) childreni (Gray, 1825) FIJ: 46* MEL: 41sba MAL: 48ebp RYU: 49trs MIC: 42*-o POL: 44* HAW: 43* (i) lemurica ScHILDER & ScHILDER, 1938 LEM: ; lird SUM: 14;° Propustularia Scur1LpER, 1927 ANT: 8lav’(g) LEM: 11r(s) surinamensis (PERry, 1811) (Nariini ScuiLper, 1932) Monetaria TroscHEt, 1863 annulus (LinNaEus, 1758) CAP: 17an(m) ZAN: 18* LEM: 11* ERY: 19* PER:120 IND: 13* SUM: 14* DAM: 15*-es ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48* RYU: 49*-c JAP: 37kf MIC: 42* POL: 44hucfp (c) obvelata (Lamarck, 1810) moneta (Linnazus, 1758) CAP: 17man ZAN: 18* LEM: 11* ERY: 19* PER: 120 IND: 13* SUM: 14* DAM: 15* ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48* RYU: 49*-c JAP: 37f MIC: 42* POL: 44* HAW: 43h _ & PAN: 88cw x ECU: 87g Naria BroveriP, 1837 irrorata (Gray, 1828) FIJ: 46s(c) MEL: 41sb MIC: 42*-op POL: 44*-j POL: 44cstgmf Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 179 Erosaria TRoscHEL, 1863 (Paulonaria IREDALE, 1930) dillwynt (Scuitver, 1922) FIJ: 46ft’s (MIC: 42mg) POL: 44ucstg becki (Gasxoin, 1836) (FIJ: 46c) MEL: 41bg MAL: 48m’p RYU: 49trs MIC: 42*-o POL: 44u (HAW: 43h) macandrewi (SowerBy, 1870) ERY:19t’ms (Erosaria TroscHEt, 1863) labrolineata (Gasxoin, 1849) SUM: 14) DAM: 15e ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46*-t MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-v RYU: 49*(-c) MIC: 42* POL: 44u cernica (SowERBY, 1870) (CAP: 17n) LEM: 1ird (1) wiridicolor (Cate, 1962) DAM: 15es(c) (TAS: 58f) (s) tomlini Scuitper, 1930 ZEA: 54knh QUE: 47sb FIJ: 46c(h) (s) ogasawarensis ScHILpER, 1944 RYU: 49rsy MIC: 420 POL: 44h HAW: 43* citrina (Gray, 1825) CAP: 17an > LEM: 11m gangranosa (Dittwyn, 1817) (CAP: 17n) ZAN: 18z(m) LEM: 111 ERY: 19ta IND: 13mc(a) SUM: 1|4asj MEL: 41g MAL: 48mt'cjs boivint (KiENER, 1843) SUM: 14; MAL: 48*-av RYU: 49sy (p) ostergaardi (Dati, 1921) HAW: 43* helvola (LinnaEus, 1758) CAP: 17n ZAN: 18* LEM: 11* ERY: 19ta(m) IND: 13cd(m) SUM: 14*-t DAM: 15* TAS: 58fa* ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48* RYU: 49*-c JAP: 37f MIC: 42* POL: AAS EVAW 2437) PAN 88 (c) meridionalis ScHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938 CAP: 17an caputserpentis (LINNAEUS, 1758) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18*-sg LEM: 11* IND: 13mcd SUM: 14* DAM: 15*-s ZEA: 54kn (QUE:47t) FIJ46* MEL:41* MAT: 48 RYU 49% JAP 3i7/f MIC:42* POL: 44*-j x PAN: 88cs (c) kenyonae ScHILDER & ScHILDER, 1938 DAM: l5es TAS: 58fa (c) caputanguis (PHttprr, 1849) ZEA: 54h QUE: 47sbc (c) caputophidu Scuitper, 1927 HAW: 43* caputdraconis (Metvit1, 1888) RAP: 45e albuginosa (Gray, 1825) CAL: 89*-d PAN: 88cw(sp) ECU: 87* spurca (LinnaEus, 1758) MED: 95* CAN: 96* SEN: 83* GUI: 84*-m (s) sanctaehelenae ScuitpER, 1930 ATL: 85* (p) acicularis (GmeutIn, 1791) FLO: 82*-be ANT: 81*-hnc BRA: 86* poraria (LinnaEus, 1758) ZAN:18z LEM: 11* IND: 13c SUM: 14s; DAM:15e (i) scarabacus (Bory, 1827) ZEA: 54kh QUE: 47s FIJ: 46* MEL: 41sba MAL: 48mbp RYU: 49%-c MIC: 42* POL: 44*-gm HAW: 43* erosa (LinNAEus, 1758) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18%-sg LEM: 11* IND: 13cd SUM: 14* DAM: 15*-s ZEA: 54k QUE:47*-s FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48%*-v RYU: 49* MIC: 42* POL: 44*-m HAW: 43h (c) pulchella Coen, 1949 ZEA: 54h QUE: 47sb (p) nebrites (Metvit1, 1888) ZAN: 18zs¢e ERY: 19* PER: 120hk IND: 13b ocellata (Linnaeus, 1758) LEM: 111 (ERY: 19ta) PER: 12hk IND: 13* SUM: 14; marginalis (DiLLwyNn, 1827) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18* LEM: llrs ERY: 19a PER: 120 miliaris (GMELIN, 1791) SUM:14j) DAM: 15* QUE: 47* MEL: 41mg MAL: 48* RYU: 49* MIC: 42p x ZAN: 18z (s) eburnea (Barnes, 1824) QUE: 47bcq FIJ: 46chf(t) MEL: 41* (MAL: 48p) (p) lamarcki (Gray, 1825) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18*-g LEM: llam (c) redimita (MeEtvitt, 1888) LEM: 11*-a PER: 12k IND: 13*%-a SUM: 14tmas turdus (Lamarck, 1810) ZAN: 18z’sg ERY: 19* (c) winckworthi ScHILDER & SCHILDER. 1938 BER 22 VEL: 46* MEL: 41* MAL:48* RYU: 49trs MIC: 42*-0 POL: 44c (Melicerona IREDALE, 1930) felina (GmeEtin, 1791) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18imz LEM: 11m(a) (c) fabula (Krener, 1843) ERY: PER: 12* (p) listert (Gray, 1824) LEM: 11*-am IND: 13*-a 19tma SUM: 14as} TAS: 58v’° ZEA:54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46% MEL:41* MAL: 48%-jsgv RYU: 49trs MIC: 42mpc(g) POL: 44c CAP: 17n Notadusta ScHitpER, 1935 punctata (LinnaEus, 1771) (CAP: 17n) ZAN: 18z LEM: 11*-1 (ERY: 19ta) IND: 13c SUM: 14asj DAM: 15*-s QUE: 47*-s FIJ: 46% MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-sv RYU: 49tr(s) MIC:42*-o (i) trizonata (SowerBy, 1870) POL: 44cstmf rabaulensis ScuipER, 1964 MEL: 41b MAL: 48p katsuae (Kuropa, 1960) MAL: 48p RYU: 49rs martini (SCHEPMAN, 1907) QUE: 47c MAL: 48mp superstes (SéHILDER, 1930) FIJ: 46h Palmadusta IrEDALE, 1930 asellus (LINNAEUS, 1758) ZAN: 18z LEM: 11* IND: 13c SUM: 14tasys DAM: 15* ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-y RYU: 49*-c MIC: 42*-0 POL:44fp(hu) clandestina (Linnazus, 1767) CAP: 17n ZAN: 18*-sg LEM: 11* ERY: 19ta IND: 13mc SUM: 14asj DAM:15*-s ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48%-sgv RYU: 49*-c MIC: 42*-0 POL: 44cp(hu) artuffelt (JoUSSEAUME, 1876) RYU: 49*-c JAP: 37f MIC: 420(m) saulae (GasKotn, 1843) SUM: 14t DAM: 15b QUE: 47* MAL: 48p (RYU: 49s) MIC: 42p [rare, scattered] contaminata (SoweRBy, 1832) CAP: 17n LEM: lLirs SUM: 14a DAM: 15e QUE: 47bc FIJ:46c MEL:41b MAL: 48cjsgbp RYU: 49r lutea (GmeEuIN, 1791) (IND:13c) SUM: 14s] DAM: 15* MEL: 41g MAL: 48*%-y RYU: 49*-c (p) humphreys: (Gray, 1825) ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46*-h(s) MIC: 42) ziczac (LinNAEuS, 1758) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18*(-sg) LEM:11* ERY:19* PER: 12oh(p) IND: 13mc SUM: 14aj(s) DAM: 15e QUE: 47*-s FIJ: 46*-s MEL: 41b(s) MAL: 48mtcp RYU: 49%-c MIC: 42mpc diluculum (REEvE, 1845) CAP: 17n ZAN: 18imz ERY: 19a Page 182 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 (c) virginalis ScHILDER & ScHILDER, 1938 LEM: 11*-l ERY: 19a lentiginosa (Gray, 1825) (ERY: 19a) IND: 13bmc PER: 12*(-0) Purpuradusta ScHILpDER, 1939 gracilis (Gasxoin, 1849) IND: 13c SUM: 14masj ZEA: 54h QUE:47* MEL: 4lb(m) MAL: 48* RYU: 49* JAP: 37f(c) MIC: 42mc(op) (c) wrescens (SoweERBy, 1870) DAM: 15* TAS: 58f (i) notata (GrtL, 1858) ZAN: 18z’(sg) ERY: 19* PER: 12* hammondae (IrepaxE, 1939) DAM: 15*-s QUE: 47*-s (Ss) raysummersi ScHILDER, 1960 MAL: 48p fimbriata (GmeEuin, 1791) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18z(im) LEM: 11* (ERY: 19at) IND: 13c SUM: 14asj DAM: 15be MEL: 41g MAL: 48mtcbp RYU: 49trs MIC: 42mp (i) unifasciata (MicHeEts, 1845) FIJ: 46fs MIC: 42} POL: 44stgimp HAW: 43* minoridens (Metvitt, 1901) (SUM: 14a) ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41sb MAL: 48p RYU: 49rs MIC: 42p © POL: 44*-mpj(g) serrulifera (SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938) (huc) microdon (Gray, 1828) SUM: 14j (ZEA: 54h) (QUE: 47cqt) FIJ: 46* MEL: 41sb MAL: POL: 44*-j 48mtbp(g) RYU: 49trs (s) chrysalis (Kiener, 1843) ZAN: 182 LEM: llamr ERY: 19ta Blasicrura IREDALE, 1930 quadrimaculata (Gray, 1824) SUM: 14msj DAM: 15* QUE:47cqt (FIJ:46f) MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-v RYU: 49tr MIC: 42pj(c) luchuana (Kuropa, 1960) RYU: 49r (s) dayritiana (Cate, 1963) MAL: 48p coxeni (Cox, 1873) MEL: 41s (m) hesperina ScuiLtpER & Summers, 1963 MEL: 41bmag pallidula (Gasxon, 1849) SUM: 14) DAM: 15* ZEA: 54h QUE: 47cqt FIJ: 46chf MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-g RYU: 49tr MIC: 42p (c) summersi (ScuipER, 1958) FIJ: 46fts interrupta (Gray, 1824) IND: 13mc SUM: 14*-k MAL: 48matjp rashleighana (MeEtvitt, 1888) FIJ: 46c (s) eunota (Taytor, 1916) HAW: 43hf x PAN: 88w (p) latior (MeEtvitt, 1888) HAW: 43* teres (GmeEtIn, 1791) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18*-sg LEM: 11* IND: 13c SUM: 14*-k DAM: 15* ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-sgv RYU: 49*-c MIC: 42* POL: 44*-9(t) HAW: 43* x PAN: 88cp (p) subteres (WeinKAUFF, 1881) POL: 44cstg goodalli (SowersBy, 1832) FIJ: 46s MIC: 42ge(m) POL: 44*-j Bistolida Cossmann, 1920 kieneri (Hiwatco, 1906) ZAN: 18imz LEM: 11* IND: 13c (s) depriesteri (ScuiLpER, 1933) SUM: 14*-k ZEA: 54h QUE: 47* FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-v RYU: 49tr(s) MIC: 42m (i) landeri ScHILDER & GriFFITHS, 1962 POL: 44p oweni (SowerRBy, 1837) ZAN: 182 LEM: 11*-1 (i) .vasta (ScHILDER & ScHILDER, 1938) CAP: 17n(a) hirundo (Linnaeus, 1758) ZAN: 18z LEM: 11* (ERY: 19t) IND: 13mc SUM: 14* DAM: 15* ZEA: 54h QUE: 47*-s FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48* RYU: 49*-c MIC: 42* POL: 44huc ursellus (GmeuIN, 1791) SUM:14*-tk (DAM:15b) ZEA: 54h QUE: 4/7cqt FIJ: 46*(-s) MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-gv RYU: 49trs MIC: 42g(e) erythracensis (SowERBY, 1837) ERY: 19* stolida (LinnaEus, 1758) CAP:17n ZAN: 18imz LEM: llamrs (IND: 13c) SUM: 14tsj DAM: 15be QUE: 47*-s FIJ:46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48mjsbp RYU: 49*-c JAP: 37k MIC: 42* POL: 44hufp Ovatipsa IREDALE, 1931 chinensis (Gmeuin, 1791) SUM: 14; DAM: 15*-s QUE: 47* FIJ: 46*-- MEL: 41* MAL: 48mtp RYU: 49*-c MIC: 42* POL: 44p(hu) (i) amiges (MELVILL & STANDEN, 1915) HAW: 43h Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 183 (i) variolaria (LAMaRcK, 1810) CAP: 17an ZAN: 18*-sg LEM: 11* (ERY: 49tax) (m) tortirostris (SoweRBy, 1906) CAP: 17a(n) (p) coloba (MeEtvitt, 1888) ERY: 19a (PER: 12k) IND: 13bmc SUM: 14ma) Cribraria JoUSSEAUME, 1884 cribraria (Linnagus, 1758) LEM: 11redl ERY: 19ta(m) IND: 13c SUM: 14*-k DAM: I5bes TAS: 58f QUE: 47*-s FIJ: 46* MEL: 41* MAL: 48*-acsv(j) RYU: 49trs MIC: 42*-o POL:hp x HAW:43h (c) comma (Perry, 1811) CAP: 17n ZAN: *-sg LEM: llams ERY: 19a cribellum (Gasxorn, 1849) LEM: 11r esontropia (Ductos, 1833) LEM: 1Ir catholicorum SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938 QUE: 47c FIJ: 46ch MEL: 41sb gaskoim (Reeve, 1846) HAW: 43hf x MIC: 42] cumingt (SowerBy, 1832) FIJ: 46s MIC: 42g(ce) POL: 44*-mpj SUMMARY This accurate and concise method to catalogue reliable and probable localities facilitates both to map the dis- tribution of each species and subspecies, as well as to com- pose lists of cowries collected or expected at any locality. The communicated data answer our present knowledge which surely will be increased by future investigations. LITERATURE CITED BorrabalLe, L. A. 1914. Bibliography of the marine fauna: Synopsis of the classification. 2nd. ed. London: Challenger Soc. EKMAN, SVEN 1935. Tiergeographie des Meeres. Leipzig. 142 pp.; 242 figs. HeErTLEIN, LEo GreorcE & Epwin C. ALLISON 1960. Species of the genus Cypraea from Clipperton Island. The Veliger 2 (4): 94-95; plt. 22 (1 April 1960) Hatco, Joaquin GONZALES 1906. Monografia de las especies vivientes del género Cypraea. Mem. Acad. Cienc. Madrid, 25: 1 - 240; (1907) 241 - 588; I to XV. IncramM, WILtiAM Marcus & Kart WALTON KENYON 1945. Cypraeidae of the Admiralty Islands. 58 (4): 129 - 134 Nomura, SHICHIHEI & Kotora Hatat Nautilus 1936. A note on the zoological provinces in the Japanese Seas. Bull. Biogeogr. Soc. Japan 6 (21): 207 - 214; plt. 13 SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED 1924. Systematischer Index der rezenten Cypraeidae. Arch. Naturgesch. 90 (A.4): 179-214; 1 diagram 1927. Revision der Cypraeacea (Moll. Gastr.). Arch. fur Naturgesch. 91 (for 1925) (A. 10): 171 pp.; 1 diagram 1932. Cypraeacea. In Fossilium Catalogus I: Animalia, part 55: 276 pp. 1941. Verwandtschaft und Verbreitung der Cypraeacea. Arch. Molluskenk. 73 (2-3): 57-120; 2 plts. 1943. Zur Verwandtschaft der Litoralfaunen. luskenk. 75 (2-3): 68-82; 2 maps 1952. Einfiihrung in die Biotaxonomie (Formenkreislehre) . Jena, 162 pp.; 121 maps. Arch. Mol- 1956. Lehrbuch der allgemeinen Zoogeographie. Jena, 150 pp-; 134 maps and diagrams. 1960. Probleme der Zoogeographie. Zool. Anz. Suppl. 23: 369 - 373; 4 maps 1964. The distribution of Erronea walkeri SowERBy (Cyprae- idae) . Hawaiian Shell News, n.ser. 49: 7-8; 1 map SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED, & MARIA SCHILDER 1938 - 1939. Prodrome of a monograph on living Cypraeidae. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London, 23(3- 4): 119 - 231. 1940. Die Verbreitung und Haufigkeit der rezenten Cypraeidae. Arch. Moll. 72 (2-3): 33 - 56 7 ScHuott, GERHARD 1926. | Geographie des Atlantischen Ozeans. burg. 368 pp.; 28 plts.; 115 figs. 1935. | Geographie des Indischen und Stillen Ozeans. burg. 413 pp.; 38 plts.; 114 figs. Spicer, VARNUM DENNIS PHILIP 1941. Shells from Midway. 2nd. ed. Ham- Ham- Nautilus 55 (1): 1-2 SreapMan, W. R. « BERNARD C. Corton 1946. A key to the classification of the cowries (Cypraeidae) . Rec. So. Austral. Mus. 8: 503 - 530; 6 plts. Wuit Ley, G. P. 1937. The Middleton and Elizabeth Reefs. gist 8: map on p. 199 Austral. Zoolo- Page 184 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 A Proposed Reclassification of the Family Marginellidae (Mollusca ; Gastropoda ) BY EUGENE COAN Department of Biological Sciences, Stanford University Stanford, California 94305 (9 Text figures) THIS ARTICLE IS INTENDED as an advance treatment of the Marginellidae in preparation for the Treatise on Inver- tebrate Paleontology, as was Coan (1964) for three of the families of the Rissoacea. Advance treatment is useful for three reasons. First, the references to the original descrip- tions may be included in the bibliography. Second, discus- sion can be included regarding the choices made and arrangement used. Third, the position of the west Ameri- can species can be stated in terms of a world-wide look at the genera available. Most authors reviewing the Marginellidae have in- cluded a summary of the systems of classification used by previous workers, with a list of most of the available generic names described prior to that time. Each of these major reviewers has come to much the same conclusion, that no matter which features of morphology are chosen as a basis for division, these occur in nearly every possible combination, so that the resulting classification is anything but satisfying. Nearly all of these workers have felt the necessity of adding one or more new generic names for unusual forms or for purposes of clarification. A brief history of this sort is in order. The genus Mar- ginella was named by Lamarck (1799). Kiener (1834- 41) discussed the species in his set of monographs. Swain- son (1840) was the first major reviewer. He used the gen- era Volutella and Persicula and he described Gibberula and Glabella. Persicula and Hyalina had been named by ScHUMACHER (1817) and Volutella was a contribution of Swainson in 1829. Hinps (1844a) tried to simplify the situation by dividing the family into two sections, not realizing that he was adding two more genus-level names for later systematists to struggle with, Cryptospira and Phaenospira. In addition, he named Volvarina as a subgenus. SowErsy’s monograph in his Thesaurus was published in 1846. The next reviews of significance were those of Gray (1847), who divided the family into three groups, and of Petirr (1851), who used three different groups. HERRMANNSEN (1852) named Prunum. Gray again re- viewed the family in 1857, and he used three divisions of still another nature. At the same time he named Rabicea and Closia. From 1860 on, individual genera were named in various publications, and we need not mention these. ReEve’s monograph in Conchologia Iconica was pub- lished in 1864-1865. In 1870, RepFreLp catalogued the existing species and commented on the proliferation of use- less generic names. JoUSSEAUME (1875), just five years after REDFIELD’s comments, named six new genera in his review, making a total of thirteen divisions of the family in his work. The story continues with WeinxaurrF (1879, 1880), who monographed all of the known species, leav- ing all species in the genus Marginella, but the appendix to his work contains a proposed outline of classification. This outline employed shell characters that have not been used by subsequent workers. He also added the genus Eratoidea to the growing list of names. Tryon (1882-1883), like WemnKAUFF, made no at- tempt to divide the listed species into genera, other than Marginella, but he, in contrast to WeINKAUuFF, did sub- divide the species into meaningful but unnamed categories. Sacco (1890) provided two new generic names for fossil forms. In his review of Marginellidae, Cossmann (1899) proposed a classification using three genera, seven sub- genera, and a larger number of sections. He made an effort to analyze critically, and his arrangement proved to be a useful one. He contributed two more generic names. Tomuin (1917, 1919) merely listed the genera, but he made no attempt to use them. His two papers give a complete catalogue of all known species and their syn- onyms. It is a most useful work for students of the family. TurELe (1929) discussed this family in his Handbuch Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 185 and he used three genera, but a still different three than any preceding author. The Hyalina-like forms were in- cluded in the genus Marginella, while he added Marginel- lona Martens, 1903, a strange form from the Indian Ocean, as a full genus. The next work of importance is that of GRANT & GALE (1931). They adopted a three-part classification, using the genera Marginella, Persicula, and Hyalina. WENz (1943) used ten genera in his review. The situation remained stable for several years more. In 1951 Haze named three genera, Volvarinella, Micro- vulina, and Kogomea, for the Japanese species. He later (1960) synonymized his genus Microvulina with Crithe Goutp, 1860, a genus whose monotypic species was first illustrated by YEN (1944). Wenz /1941) had placed the form in another superfamily. Although YEN’s figure is not useful, one can tell that Goutp had a marginellid in mind. In 1957 LAsEeron named thirty new genera. This nearly equals the total number of genera that had been published prior to that time. BarnarpD (1962) described the genus Diluculum. He felt that genera should be founded on a knowledge of the soft parts, and he named his new genus based on a species of which he had studied the radula and external aspects of the living animal. He states, “These names [specific names of three South African Marginellidae], however, are merely names given to shells of molluscs whose anat- omy is unknown. They may be useful to shell collectors, but really they have no status as species, and should have no place in a fauna-list.” Generic and specific names are based on real animals, and it is the task of the systematist to find out more about the characters of the hard and the soft parts of the animals of the seventy-four genera that have been named in the Marginellidae prior to 1962. Hinps (1844a) named his two new genera in order to simplify the classification of the group, which at that time consisted of six genera. MacPHERSON & GasrieL (1962) made an effort to reconcile the many Australian names with the work of WENz (1943). There is a slightly stronger basis for the classification here adopted, because a little more is now known about the animals and radulae of a few species. In addition, when all the genera are studied at one time, patterns ap- pear with regard to the distribution of the forms, both in time and geographically. Relating these various lines of evidence—geological, geographical, shell-character, radu- lar, and that from the external morphology of the soft parts—we can draw some conclusions. The family apparently originated in the ancient Tethys Sea. These first forms are preserved in the Eocene strata of the Paris Basin and from as far east as Australia. The family spread rapidly through the tropical seas, for some species have been found in the Oligocene of Washington State. Today, species may be found in tropical and sub- tropical seas throughout the world. There seem to be three major divisions in the family. There are many relatively large species with brightly col- ored shells. These species are said to possess long, thin tentacles (Figures 1, 2). For discussion of the animals in Figure 1: Aninal of Volvarina (Haloginella) mustelina {ANncas, 1871), x 4. (after Laseron, 1957, p. 290, figure 35) Figure 2: Animal of Marginella (Austroginella) johnstoni (PETTERD, 1884) x 6. (after Murray, 1959, p. 25, figure 2) recent papers, useful works are Cotton (1944), BuRN (1958), Laseron (1957), and Murray (1959). In ad- dition, a few radulae have been figured. The radula of the Marginellidae consists of a single rachidian plate. The group of larger species, or the Marginellinae, has a flat or curved plate with many cusps (Figures 3 - 5). The subfamily Marginellinae reaches its maximum pro- liferation on the west coast of Africa, where it represents an appreciable portion of the gastropod fauna. This sub- family extends to the Caribbean, where the subgenus Figure 3: Rachidian plate of Volvarina (Haloginella) philippinarum (REDFIELD, 1848), x 150. (after TROScHEL, 1867, plate 5, figure 8) Page 186 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 Figure 4: Rachidian plate of Volvarina (Sinuginella) pygmaea (Sowersy, 1846), x 820. (after PowELL, 1932, plate 35, figure 20) Prunum and the genera Bullata and Persicula are the predominant forms. The Marginellinae also reach the Mediterranean and spread around Africa to the Red Sea and to the Indian Ocean. Today, most of the members of this subfamily in the rich Australian fauna are small species. It is probable that the species in the Panamic Province of west America are derived from those in the Caribbean " Figure 5: Rachidian plate of Persicula persicula (Linnatus, 1758) magnification unknown. (after THIELE, 1929, p. 354, figure 425) fauna, having arrived through the Panama area when it was a connecting link between the two great seas. Nearly every west American species has a Caribbean analogue. There is also a large number of very small species with characteristically white shells. The small species are de- scribed as having short, triangular tentacles (Figures 6, 7). Figure 6: Animal of Cystiscus cystiscus (REDFIELD, 1870), x 6. (after Stimpson, 1865, plate 8, figure 2d) Za Figure 7: Animal of Cystiscus angast (Crosse, 1870), x 15. (after Lasgron, 1957, p. 290, figure 34) The rachidian plate of the group of smaller species, the Cystiscinae, is small, arched, and has fewer cusps (Figure 8). TroscHEL (1867) and Barnarp (1959) have sup- plied good figures of radulae. It is unfortunate that the rules of priority force us to use the name Cystiscinae for these small species, as the type species of C'ystzscus is poorly known, while the subfamily could be based, for instance, on the more common Mediterranean form. Figure 8: Rachidian plate of Cystiscus cystiscus (REDFIELD, 1870), magnification unknown. (after Stimpson, 1865, plate 8, figure 2c) The subfamily Cystiscinae, although found throughout the world, is the dominant group in the eastern Pacific. One species, Cypraeolina pyriformis (CARPENTER, 1865a), may be found as far north as Alaska, making that species the most northern representative of any member of the family. 2 The new subfamily Marginelloninae is here named for the genera Marginellona Martens (1903) and Afrivolu- ta Tomun (1947). Although there are some pronounced differences between the shells of these two rare forms, both are relatively large and have a rachidian plate with numerous cusps (Figure 9). For further discussion con- Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 187 Sunn Figure 9: Rachidian plate of Afrivoluta pringlei Tomuin, 1847, x 27. (after BaRNarD, 1963, p. 199) cerning Afrivoluta see BARNARD (1963) and vAN BRUGGEN (1963), and concerning Afarginellona see THIELE (1903). Two taxonomic questions should be commented on. Gibberulina MonTeErosaTo, 1884, was named with the words “‘nom. sost.” (substitute name) for the reason that Bullata bullata causes tautonomy. According to ICZN Rules 18b and 67i (see SToLt, 1961), the type of MonTE- ROSATO’s genus must be Voluta bullata Born, 1778, and his genus is a junior synonym of Bullata JousSEAUME, 1875. Subsequent use of Gibberulina by authors for mem- bers of the Cystiscinae is, therefore, incorrect. Hyalina ScHuMACcHER, 1817, remains problematical. SCHUMACHER’s monotype is H. pellucida SCHUMACHER, 1817. Dopcr (1955) gives substantial reason to believe that this species is Voluta pallida Linnaeus, 1767, and that Voluta pallida is a recognizable Caribbean species. Therefore, Hyalina is a prior name of Neovolvaria FiscHer, 1883. I suggest the following outline of classification for west , American species: Marginellinae Marginella Lamarck, 1799 (Prunum) HERRMANNSEN, 1852 M. albuminosa Dati, 1919 M. curta Sowersy, 1832 M. sapotilla Hinps, 1844a = M. evax Lt, 1930 M. woodbridge: HERTLEIN & STRONG, 1951 Persicula SCHUMACHER, 1817 P. adamsiana Pitssry & Lowe, 1932 P. dubiosa Datu, 1871 PR. frumentum (Sowersy, 1832) [Marginella] P hil (Smrru, 1950) [Marginella] P imbricata (Hinps, 1844a) [Marginella] P maculosa (KiENER, 1834) [Marginella] P. phrygia (Sowersy, 1846) [Marginella] P. porcellana (GMELIN, 1791) [Voluta] =P. tessellata (LAMARCK, 1822) [Marginella] Volvarina Hinps, 1844a (Haloginella) Lasrron, 1957 V. californica (Tomutn, 1916) [Marginella] = V. parallela (Datu, 1918) [Marginella] V. myrmecoon (Dati, 1919) [Hyalina] V. rosa (SCHWENGEL, 1938) [Marginella] V, taeniolata Morcu, 1860 Cystiscinae Cystiscus Stimpson, 1865 C. jewettii (CARPENTER, 1857b in GouLD & CarPENTER) [Marginella] == C. nanella (T.S.Oxproyp, 1925) [Marginella] C. minor (C. B. Apas, 1852) [Marginella] C. polita (CARPENTER, 1857a) [Marginella] C. politula (Dati, 1910, ex Cooper MS) [Marginella] C. regularis (CARPENTER, 1865b) [Marginella] Cypraeolina CeRULL-IRELLu, 1911 C. margaritula (CARPENTER, 1857a) [Marginella] = (?)C. pyriformis (CARPENTER, 1865a) [V olutella] Kogomea Haze, 1951 K. subtrigona (CarPENTER, 1865b) [Marginella] = (?) K. oldroydae (Jorpan, 1926) [Marginella] K. morchii (RepF1exp, 1870) [Marginella], nom.nov. = K. coniformis (M6rcu, 1860) [Gibberula], non Marginella coniformis Sowersy, 1850 genus uncertain Marginella anticlea Dati, 1919 Marginella eremus Daur, 1919 References are in the bibliography for all of these spe- cies. I hope to review the Eastern Pacific species at a later date, figuring some of the yet unfigured type specimens. It is probable that the arrangement used in that review will differ significantly from this. CONVENTIONS anv ABBREVIATIONS The conventions and abbreviations used here are, for the most part, those used in the Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology (see Moore, 1960). The asterisk and square brackets set off the name of the type species; the type of designation is then indicated by the abbreviations given below. Page 188 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 The date and letter (if present) indicate the work where the associated taxon was named or subsequent designation made. The numbers following the date refer to the place in the work where the name or subsequent designation appears. These words are listed in the bibliog- raphy in the case of genera, their homonyms, or subse- quent designations. The interested student may consult the works of Tomuin (1917 and 1919) for references to species. If the author of a species is not given, it is to be assumed that the species was first described by the author of the associated genus and in the same work. The type species are listed as they were designated, originally, or sub- sequently, with the exception that abbreviations are filled out and the authors of the species have been added. Abbreviations are as follows: ? (before a name) - position questioned ? (after = ) - synonymy questioned = - synonym auctt. (auctores) - of authors emend. - emendation ex - from ICZN - International Commission of Zoological Nomenclature . (see Stott, 1961) in synon. + generic name proposed in the synonymy of another inv. - invalid M - type fixed by monotypy MS - manuscript of nom. correct. -name with an intentionally (nomen correctum) altered spelling of the sort allowed under the ICZN rules nom. nov. (nomen novum) - new name nom. nud. (nomen nudum) -a name which, as originally published, fails to meet the requirements of the ICZN rules, and has no status in nomenclature. - name derived by valid emen- dation of a previously pub- lished name as the result of transfer from one taxonomic category to another within the “family-level.” nom. transl. (nomen translatum ) non - not of OD - type fixed by original designation SD - type fixed by subsequent designation sp. err. - spelling error T - type fixed by tautonomy ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This work was made possible by NSF Undergraduate Science Education Program Grant No. G. 22775. I would also like to acknowledge the help of Dr. Myra Keen of the Geology Department of Stanford University, Dr. Leo Hertlein of the California Academy of Sciences, and James McLean of the Los Angeles County Museum. The illustrations are the work of Barry Roth and Perfecto Mary. MarcINELLIDAE FLemine, 1828: 328, nom. correct., H. & A. Avams, 1853: 188, ex Marginelladae [ = Marginellaceae Hinps, 1844b |] Marginellinae FLEmine, 1828, nom. transl., Swainson, 1840: 98 Marginella Lamarck, 1799: 70 [*Voluta glabella LinnaEus, 1758; M] = Marginellana H. & A. ApamMs, 1853: 189, sp. err. = Marginellarius FroriEP in Dumériz, 1806: 338, inv. emend. ==: Marginellus Montrort, 1810: 558, inv. emend. == Marginilla Swainson, 1831: (2) 2, 87, sp. err. = Porcellana Gray, 1847: 142, non Lamarck, 1801: 153 [*Voluta glabella Linnazus, 1758; OD} -==Cucumis DesHAyEs, 1830: 35 (in synon.) == Pseudomarginella MALtzan, 1880: 108 [*P. adansoni == Voluta glabella Linnaeus, 1758; M] (see Cook [1922]) = Pterygia, auctt., non Ropine, 1798: 51 = Stazzania Sacco, 1890: 318 [*Marginella emarginata SIsMoNDA, 1847, ex BonELLI MS; M] = Stazziana CossMANN, 1919: 68, sp. err. (Marginella) (Alaginella) Lasrron, 1957: 286 [*Marginella ochracea Ancas, 1871; OD] (Austroginella) Lasrron, 1957: 285 [*Marginella muscaria LaMarcK, 1822; OD] (Carinaginella) LasEron, 1957: 286 [*Marginella carinata SmirH, 1891; OD] (Denticuloglabella) Sacco, 1890: 317 [*Marginella deshayest MictteLoTti, 1847; M] Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 189 (Euryentome) Cossmann, 1899: 95 [*Marginella crassilabra ConraD, 1833, non Bory DE St. VIN- cENT, 1827 = Marginella silabra PatmeEr, 1937, nom. nov.; OD] (Gibberula) Swainson, 1840: 323 [*G. zonata = Volvaria oryza Lamarck, 1822=(?) Voluta miliaria LinNAEUS, 1758; M] = Gibbernia, auctt., sp. err. —= Giberula Sowersy, 1842: 153, sp. err. = Gibrerula JoussEAUME, 1884: 177, sp. err. = Eratoidea WeinKkaurF, 1879: 140 [*Marginella margarita KieENER, 1834; SD Cossmann, 1899:87] (Mioginella) LasEron, 1957: 287 [*Marginella regula Corton, 1949; OD] (Protoginella) LasERon, 1957: 285 [*Marginella lavi- gata Brazirr, 1877 = M. laevigata, emend., Hep- LEY, 1901, non ErcHwatp, 1830 = (?) M. valida Watson, 1886; OD] (Prunum) HERRMANSEN, 1852: 113 [*Voluta prunum Gmetin, 1791; M] = Egouena JoussEaumE, 1875: 192 [*E. egouen = Marginella amygdala KiENER, 1841; SD ToMuin, 1917: 244) (ICZN Rule 32b. First reviser is NegavE, 1939: 2: 199) = Eguoena JoussEAuME, 1875: 167, sp. err. = Egouana JoussEauME, 1875: 207, sp. err. = Egociena Cotton, 1949: 199, sp. err. = Leptegouana Wooprine, 1928: 237 [*Voluta guttata Dittwyn, 1817, ex SoLanpeR MS, non Linx, 1807 = Marginella longivaricosa LAMaRcK, 1822; OD] = Septegouana, auctt., sp. err. = Porcellanella Conrap, 1863: 564, nom. nud. [*P bella, nom. nud.; Mj, non Wuite in Mac- Giiuivreay, 1852, 2: 394 = Porcellana CossMan, 1899: 92, sp. err., non Lamarck, 1801: 153, non Gray, 1847: 142 (Simplicoglabella) Sacco, 1890: 313 [*Marginella tau- rinensis MicHELOTTI, 1847; SD Eames, 1952: 119] (Stromboginella) LasEron, 1957: 289 [*Marginella crassidens CHAPMAN & CRESPIN, 1928; OD] Balanetta JoussEauME, 1875: 168 & 269 [*B. bayli; M] (Balanetta) (Ovaginella) Laseron, 1957: 280 [*Marginella ovulum SoweErBy, 1847; OD] Bullata JousseauME, 1875: 167 & 250 [*B. bullata (Born, 1778) =Voluta bullata Born, 1778; T| — Gibberulina MonTErRosATo, 1884: 139, inv. emend. (as “nom. sost.”) — Volutella Swainson, 1829: (2)1: Marginella pl. 1, non Perry, 1810: pl. 2, no. 1 [*Marginella bullata Lamarck, 1822 = Voluta bullata Born, 1778; OD] (Bullata) (Closia) Gray, 1857:36 [*C. sarda (Kener, 1834) = Marginella sarda KrenrEr, 1834; M] (Cryptospira) Hinps, 1844a: 76 [C. tricincta = Mar- ginella tricincta Hinps, 1844a; SD Gray, 1849: 142] = Crystospira Cotton, 1949: 199, sp. err. Canalispira JoussEAUME, 1875: 168 & 270 [*C’. olivellaeformis; M} Cassoginella Lasrron, 1957: 287 [*Marginella palla Corton, 1949; OD} Dentimargo CossMaNN, 1899: 90 [*Marginella denti- fera Lamarck, 1803; OD] Glabella Swatnson, 1840: 133 & 324 [**P” faba = Voluta faba Linnaeus, 1758; SD Gray, 1847: 142] = Glabrella, auctt., sp. err. = Faba Fiscuer, 1883: 602 [*Marginella faba (LinnaEus, 1758) = Voluta faba Linnagus, 1758; M] a == Phaenospira Hinps, 1844a: 72 [*P “noduta”? = Marginella nodata Hinps, 1844; SD Gray, 1847: 142] == Phoenospira Petir, 1851: 40, sp. err. Hiwia Marwick, 1931: 129 [*Marginella (H.) amplificata; OD} Hyalina ScHumacueR, 1817: 234 [*H. pellucida =(?) Voluta pallida Linnatus, 1767; M] = Neovolvaria FiscHEr, 1883: 602 [*Marginella pallida (Linnagus, 1767) = Voluta pallida Lin- NAEUS, 1767; M] Mesoginella Laseron, 1957: 282 [*Marginella turbina- ta SowErBy, 1846; OD] (Mesoginella) Page 190 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 (Plicaginella) Lasrron, 1957: 285 |*Marginella for- micula Lamarck, 1822; OD] (Spiroginella) Laseron, 1957: 283 [*Marginella leia Corton, 1944; OD] (Urniginella) LasEron, 1957: 287 [*Marginella cassidiformis Tate, 1878; OD] Microspira Conran, 1868 [*“P” (M.) oviformis = Volutella (M.) oviformis Conran, 1868; M] Persicula ScuuMacueER, 1817: 235 [*P variabilis — Voluta persicula Linnarvs, 1758; M] = Persigula Ayres, 1916: 107, sp. err. =Persicola Swainson, 1840: 323, sp. err. == Rabicea Gray, 1857: 37 [*Persicula interrupta (Lamarck, 1822) = Marginella interrupta Lamarck, 1822 = Voluta interruptolineata MecertE, 1816; M] Serrata JoussEAUME, 1875: 167 & 230 [*S. serrata (Gasxon, 1899) = Marginella serrata GaskoIN, 1849; T] (Serrata) (Baroginella) LasEron, 1957: 286 [*B. infirma; OD] (Conuginella) LasERon, 1957: 288 [*Marginella iner- mis TATE, 1878; OD] (Dentiginella) Laszron, 1957: 288 [*Marginella metula Corron, 1949; OD] (Exiginella) Laseron, 1957: 289 [*Marginella winteri Tater, 1878; OD] (Hydroginella) Lasrron, 1957: 284 [*H. dispersa; OD] (Vetaginella) LasEron, 1957:288 [*Marginella doma Corton, 1949; OD] Volvarina Hinps, 1844 a: 75 [*Marginella nitida = Volu- ta mitrella Risso, 1826; SD Reprietp, 1870: 221] = Volvaria JoussraumeE, 1875: 219, sp. err., non Lamarck, 1801: 93 = Volvorina Joussraume, 1875: 225, sp. err. (Volvarina) (Diluculum) Barnarp, 1962: 14 [*D. inopinatum; OD] (Haloginella) Lasrron, 1957: 284 [*Marginella mus- telina (Ancas, 1871) =H yalina mustelina An- cas, 1871; OD] == Pillarginella Gasrter, 1962: 197 [*Marginella columnaria HEDLEY & May, 1908; OD] (Neptoginella) Laseron, 1957: 283 [*N. fascicula; OD] (Phyloginella) Lasrron, 1957: 280 [*P compressa; OD] (Sinuginella) LasEron, 1957: 282 [*Marginella in- conspicua SoweErRBy, 1846; OD] Volvarinella Hast, 1951: 101 [*V makiyamai; OD] == Longinella LasEron, 1957: 286, non Gros & LE- sTacGE, 1927: 161 [*Marginella maugeana HeEp- LEY, 1915; OD] Cystiscinae Stimpson, 1865: 55, nom. transl., Coan, herein, ex Cystiscidae Cystiscus Stimpson, 1865: 55 [*C. capensis, non Margin- ella capensis Krauss, 1848, ex DunKer MS = Marginella cystiscus REDFIELD, 1870 (nom. nov.) ; M] = Cysticus, auctt., sp. err. = Euliginella LasEron, 1957: 282 [*Marginella angasi Grosse, 1870, ex Brazier MS; OD] Crithe Goutp, 1860: 384 [*C. atomaria; M] —= Microvulina Hane, 1951: 105 [*M. nipponica; OD] (Crithe) (Epiginella) Lasrron, 1957: 279 [*E. ablita; OD] Cypraeolina Creruul-IrELuI, 1911: 231 [*Cryptospira (Cypraeolina) clandestina (Broccui, 1814) = Voluta clandestina Broccui, 1814; M] == Cypreolina Patiary, 1912: 189, sp. err. = Merovia Dau, 1921: 86 [*M. pyriformis (Car- PENTER, 1865) = Volutella pyriformis CaRPEN- TER, 1865 = (?) Marginella margaritula Car- PENTER, 1857; M] = Mervia Corton, 1949: 198, sp. err. = Microginella LasEron, 1957: 280 [*Marginella anxia Hep.ey, 1909; OD] Deviginella Lasrron, 1957: 283 [*Marginella brachia Watson, 1886; OD] Extra JouSSEAUME, 1894: 98 & 101 [*E. extra; M] Granula JoussEAUME, 1875: 167 & 246 [*G. bensoni (Reeve, 1865) == Marginella bensoni REEVE, 1865; SD herein] Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 191 Granulina JouSsSEAUME, 1888 (Ge pygmaea (IssEL, 1962. A new genus in the family Marginellidae. Proc 1869) = Marginella pygmaea Isse, 1869, non Malacol. Soc. London 35(1): 14-15; 1 fig. ( April) Sowersy, 1846 = Marginella isseli G. & H. NE- 1963. The family position of Afrivoluta pringlet ToMLIN. VILL, 1875 (nom. nov.); M| Journ. Conch. 25 (5): 198-199: 1 fig. (October) Hianoginella Lasrron, 1957: 288 [*Marginella physa Cotton, 1949; OD] Kogomea Hane, 1951: 103 [*Marginella novemprovin- cialis (Yokoyama, 1928) == Erato novempro- vineialis YOKOYAMA, 1928; OD} (Kogomea) (Lataginella) LAasrron, 1957: 288 [*Marginella kit- sont CHAPMAN, 1921; OD] Marginellopsis Bavay, 1911: 241 [*M. serrei; M] Nudifaba Eames, 1952: 122 [*Marginella (N.) rakhi- ensis; OD] ?Topaginella Lasrron, 1957: 288 |*Marginella octo- plicata TENIsoN-Woops, 1877; OD| Triginella LAsERon, 1957: 280 [*Marginella malina Hep- Ley, 1915; OD} Marginelloninae Coan, subfam. nov. Marginellona Martens, 1903: 103 [*M. gigas; M| = Marginelloma CossMANN, 1906: 225, sp. err. Afrivoluta ToMuin, 1947: 244 [*A. pringle:; OD} LITERATURE CITED Apams, Henry, & ARTHUR ADAMS 1853-1858. The genera of Recent Mollusca, arranged according to their organization. | London; 1: vi-xl, 1-484; 2: 1-661; 3: plts. 1-138. (Marginellidae - 1: 188-195, October 1853) ApAMS, Cares BAKER 1852. Catalogue of shells collected at Panama, with notes on synonymy, station, and habitat. Ann. and Lyceum Nat. Hist. New York 5: 229 - 344 (June) ; 345 - 548 (July) Ayres, BERNARDO 1916. Catalogo das conchas exoticas existentes no Museu Zoologico da Universidade de Coimbra, 1: | - 386 Portugal. Coimbra, BarNarp, KeppeL Harcourt 1959. Contributions to the knowledge of South African marine Mollusca, Part II :Gastropoda: Prosobranchiata: Rhachiglossa Ann. South Afric. Mus. 45 (1): 1-237: 52 figs. (June Bavay, ARTHUR 1911. Une marginellidée nouvelle de Cuba. Bull. Mus. Nation. Hist. Nat., Paris 17: 240 - 243; 1 fig. Bruccen, A.C. vAN 1963. A re-examination of the types of Recent Mollusca of the Port Elizabeth Museum. Ann. Cape Province. Mus. 3: 75-81; 6 figs. Burn, Ropert 1958. Molluscan field notes, Part I. 75: 97 - 99 (October) CARPENTER, PHILIP PEARSALL 1857 a [1855-1857]. Catalogue of the collection of Mazat- lan shells in the British Museum collected by Frederick Reigen. London; xvi + 552 pp. [July 1855 - June 1857, each part dated at foot of first page]. 1857 b. see: Goutp, A. A, & — Victorian Naturalist 1865 a. Diagnoses des mollusques nouveau provenant de Cali- fornie et faisant partie du Musée de I’Institution Smithsonienne. Journ. de Conchyl. (3) 5 [13]: 129 - 149. (April 1865) 1865 b. Diagnoses of new forms of Mollusca, collected by Col. Jewett. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (3) 15: 394 - 399 (May 1865) (section containing Marginellidae) . CrrRu ut-IRELLI, SERAFINO 1911. Fauna malacologica marina, Part 5. Paleontogr. Ital., Mem. di Paleonto). 17: 227 - 275; plts. 21-26 (Marginellidae: 231 - 233) Coan, EuGENE 1964. A proposed revision of the rissoacean families Rissoidae, The Veliger 6 (3): 164 to (1 January 1964) Rissoinidae, and Cingulopsidae. 171; 1 text fig. Conrap, TrimotHy ABBOTT 1863. Catalogue of the Miocene shells of the Atlantic slope. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 1862. 14: 559 - 583. 1868. Descriptions of Miocene shells of the Atlantic slope. Amer. Journ. Conch. 4 (2): 64-68; 2 plts. (October 1868) Cooke, ALFRED Hanps 1922. On the pseudo-genus Pseudomarginella, v. Maltzan. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London 15 (1): 3-5 (April 1922) CossMANN, ALEXANDRE EDOUARD MAURICE 1899. Essais de paléoconchologie comparée 3: 1 - 201; 8 plts. (Marginellidae: 79 - 99) 1906. — Essais de paléoconchologie comparée 7: 1 - 261; 14 plts. 1919. | Supplément aux mollusques éocéniques de la Loire-in- férieure. Bull. Soc. Sci. Nat. ?Ouest France (3) 5: 53 to 141; 4 plts. Corton, BERNARD CHARLES So. Austral. (30 November 1944) 1944. Australian margin shells: Marginellidae. Natural. 22 (4): 9- 16; 1 plt. Page 192 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 1949. Australian Recent and Tertiary Mollusca, family Mar- ginellidae. | Rec. So. Austral. Mus. 9 (4): 197 - 224; plts. 17 to 20 Dati, Wi1LLt1AM HEALEY 1871. Descriptions of sixty new forms of mollusks from the west coast of North America and the north Pacific Ocean, with notes on others already described. Amer. Journ. Conch. 7 (2): 93 - 160; plts. 13 - 16 (2 November 1871) 1918. Descriptions of new species of shells. chiefly from Mag- dalena Bay, Lower California. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 31:5-8 (27 February 1918) 1919. Descriptions of new species of Mollusca from the North Pacific Ocean in the collection of the United States National Museum. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 56 (2295): 293 - 371 (30 August 1919) 1921. | Summary of the marine shellbearing mollusks of the northwest coast of America, from San Diego, California, to the Polar Sea... . Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. 112: 1 - 217; plts. 1-22 (24 February 1921) DesuayeEs, GERARD PAUL 1830. Histoire naturelle des vers. 2:1-144. Paris Dopct, HENRY 1955. A historical review of the mollusks of Linnaeus, Part 3: The genera Bulla and Voluta of the class Gastropoda. _ Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 107 (1): 1- 158 (7 November 1955) Dumert., C. see FrOriEpP, 1806 Eames, FRANK EvELYN 1952. A contribution to the study of the Eocene in Western Pakistan and western India. C. The description of the Scapho- poda and Gastropoda from standard sections in the Rakhi Nala and Zinda Pir areas of the Western Punjab and in the Kohad District. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London (B) 236: 1- 168; 6 plts. (2 January 1952) FiscHER, PauL Henri 1883. | Manuel de conchyliologie et de paléontologie con- chyliologique ou histoire naturelle des mollusques vivantes et fossiles 2 (6): 513 - 608. Paris (20 December 1883) (Marginellidae: 602 - 604) FLEMING, JoHN 1828. A history of British animals, exhibiting the descriptive characters and systematical arrangement of the genera and species of quadrupeds, birds, reptiles, fishes, Mollusca, and Radiata of the United Kingdom. Edinburg and London. Froriep, L. FE 1806. C. Duméril’s Analytische Zoologie. GasrizEL, Cuartes J. Weimar. 1962. _ Additions to the marine molluscan fauna of south eastern Australia including descriptions of new genus Pilarginella, six new species and two subspecies. Mem. Nation. Mus. Melbourne, no. 25: 177-210; 1 plt. (1 May 1962) GMELIN, J. F. 1791. | Systema naturae per regna tria naturae. Editio decima tertia, aucta, reformata, 1 (6): 3021 - 3910. Leipzig. Gou.p, Aucustus ADDISON 1860. Descriptions of shells collected in the North Pacific Exploring Expedition under Captains Ringold and Rogers. One part: Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 7: 382 - 385 (Decemb.) Goutp, Aucustus AppIson & Pump PEARSALL CARPENTER 1857. Descriptions of shells from the Gulf of California and the Pacific coasts of Mexico and California, part 2. Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1856: 198 - 208 (7 January 1857) Grant, Utysses S., IV &« Hoyt Ropney GaLz 1931. Catalogue of the marine Pliocene and Pleistocene Mollusca of California and adjacent regions. Mem. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist. 1: 1- 1036; 15 figs.; plts. 1-32 (3 November 1931) (Marginellidae: 628 - 633) Gray, JoHN Epwarp 1847. _A list of the genera of Recent Mollusca, their synonyma and types. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 15 (178): 129 - 219 (10 November 1847) 1857. Guide to the systematic distribution of Mollusca in the British Museum. Part I: xii + 230 pp. London. Gros, A. J. & J. M. Lestace 1927. Contribution 4 étude des larves des Ephéméropteéres. Series 4: Le group Euthyplocien. Ann. Biol. Lacust. Brus- sels 15: 119 - 162; 20 figs. Hase, TADASHIGE 1951. Illustrated catalogue of Japanese shells, edited by Dr. Tokubei Kuroda. 16: Marginellidae and Hydrocenidae in Japan: 101-107; 12 figs. (10 December 1951) 1960. Notes on the species of Japanese shells described by A. A. Gould. Venus 21 (1): 10-31 (July 1960) HERRMANNSEN, AucusT NICOLAUS 1852. Indicis generum malacozoorum supplementa et corri- genda. Kassel, London, Paris. v + 140 pp. Hertvein, Leo Georce « ARCHIBALD McCiureE STRONG 1951. Descriptions of three new species of marine gastropods from West Mexico and Guatemala. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 50 (2) : 76 - 80 (May/August 1951) Hinps, RicHarp BRINSLEY 18444. Descriptions of Marginellae collected during the voyage of H. M.S. Sulphur, and from the collections of Mr. Cuming. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 7: 72 - 77 (September 1844) 1844b. The zoology of the voyage of H. M. S. Sulphur, under the command of Captain Sir Edward Belcher . . . during 1836 - 1842, 2(Mollusca) (2): 25-48; plts. 8-14 London (October 1844) JorpAN, Eric Knicut 1926. Molluscan fauna of the Pleistocene of San Quintin Bay, Lower California. (Expedition to Guadalupe Island, Mexico, in 1922 — No. 4) Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci. 15 (7) : 241 - 255; 1 fig.; plt. 25 (26 April 1926) JoussEAuME, FEeLrx P. 1875. Coquilles de la fainille des marginelles. Zool. (3) 3: 164 - 271; plts. 7-8 Rev. Mag. Vol. 7; No. 3 1884. Descriptions des mollusques nouveaux. Bull. Soc. Zool. France 9: 169 - 192; plts. 1888. Descriptions des mollusquces receuillis par M. le Dr. Faurot dans la Mer Rouge et le Golfe d’Aden. Mem. Soc. Zool. France 1 (2): 165 - 223 (October 1888) 1894. Diagnoses des coquilles de nouveaux mollusques. Bull. Soc. Phil. Paris (8) 6: 98 - 105 Krener, Louis Cuarves [continued by P. FiscHer after 1873] 1834-1841. Spécies général et iconographie des coquilles vivantes: genre marginelle (livr. 1-6: 1-30 - December, 22, 1834; livr. 59-71: 31-44 - 1841) Lamarck. JEAN-BaprisTE PIERRE ANTOINE DE MONET DE 1799. Prodrome d’une nouvelle classification des coquilles. Mém. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris 1: 63 - 91 1801. | Systéme des animaux sans vertébres, ou tableau général des classes, des ordres, et des genres de ces animaux; ... .: viii + 432 pp. Paris 1822. Histoire naturelle des animaux sans vertébres. 7: 711 pp. Paris LasEron, CHARLES F. 1957. A new classification of the Australian Marginellidae (Mollusca), with a review of species from the Solanderian and Dampierian zoogeographical provinces. Austral. Journ. Marine and Freshwater Res. 8 (3): 274 - 311; 84 figs. Li, Cor CuHanc 1930. The Miocene and Recent Mollusca of Panama Bay. Bull. Geol. Soc. China 9: 249 - 296; plts. 1-8 (October 1930) MaccILLivray, JOHN 1852. Narrative of the voyage of H. M.S. Rattlesnake, com- manded by the late Captain Owen Stanley, . . . during the years 1846 - 1850. London, 2 vols. [Appendix 4 in 2: Descriptions of some apparently new species of Annulosa, (col- lected by Mr. Macgillivray during the voyage of H.M.S. Rattlesnake), by Apam WuitTeE; 387 - 395; 1 plt.] MacpuHerson, J. Hope « CHar.es J. GaBRiEL 1962. Marine mollusks of Victoria. xv + 475 pp. Melbourne Univ. Press, MALTZAN-FEDEROW, HERMANN VON 1880. Eine neue Molluskengattung. Nachrichtsblatt der Deutsch. Malakozool. Gesellsch. 12: 106 - 109 (Nov./Dec.) Martens, Enuarp [Cart] von 1903. Die beschalten Gastropoden der deutschen Tiefsee-Ex- pedition 1898-1899. A: Systematisch-geographischer Teil: 1 - 146; plts. 1-5; 1 fig. Marwick, JoHN 1931. The Tertiary Mollusca of the Gisborne District. Paleont. Bull. New Zealand Geol. Surv., No. 13: iii + 177 pp.; 17 plts. Morcu, Orro AnprEAs Lowson 1860. Beitrage zur Molluskenfauna Central-Amerikas. Malak. Blatter 7: 66-96 (July 1860); 97- 106 (Aug. 1860) THE VELIGER Page 193 Monrerosato, Tommaso pi Maria ALLERI DI 1884. Nomenclatura generica e specifica di alcune cochiglie mediterranea: 152 pp. Palermo (after August 1884) MonrTrort, DENYS DE 1810. | Conchyliologie systématique et classification métho- dique des coquilles. Paris, 2 vols. (Marginellidae in vol. 2) Moore, RayMonp Ceci (editor and director) 1960. Treatise on invertebrate paleontology. Part I (Mollus- ca 1): xiii + 351 pp.; figs. 1-216 Murray, FLORENCE V. 1959. The animal of Austroginella johnsoni (PETTERD). Journ. Malacol. Soc. Austral. 3: 23-25; 2 figs. NEAVE, SHEFFIELD AIREY 1939 - 1940. Nomenclator zoologicus. Zool. Soc. London. 4 vols. O.proyp, THomaAs SHAW 1925. The fossils of the Lower San Pedro fauna of the Nob Hill Cut, San Pedro, California. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 65 (22) [No. 2535]: 1-36; 2 plts. (16 January 1925) PaLLaRY, PAUL 1912. Catalogue des mollusques du littoral méditerranéen de Egypte. Mém. Inst. Egypt. 7 (3): 69 - 205; 4 plts. PERRY, GEORGE 1810 - 1811. Arcana or the museum of natural history: containing the most recent discovered objects. London [Plate 1 was issued in 1810] PETIT DE LA SAUSSAYE, S. 1851. Notice sur le genre marginelle, Marginella, Lamarck, suivi d’un catalogue synonymique des éspéces de ce genre. Journ. de Conchyl. 2: 38-59; part of plts. 1 and 2 Pitspry, Henry Aucustus « Hersert N. Lowe 1932. | West Mexican and Central American mollusks collec- ted by H. N. Lowe 1929-31. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadel- phia 84: 33 - 144; 6 figs.; plts. 1-17; 2 photographs (21 May 1932) Powe, ARTHUR WILLIAM BaDEN 1932. The Recent Marginellidae of New Zealand, with des- criptions of some new species. Trans. New Zealand Instit. 62: 203 - 214; plts. 33 - 36 (31 March 1932) REDFIELD, JOHN H. 1870. | Catalogue and synonymy of the genera, species and varieties of Recent Mollusca, described prior to January 1st, 1867. Part 5: Marginellidae. Amer. Journ. Conch. 6 (2): 215 - 269 (6 October 1870) REEvE, Lovet, Aucustus 1864 - 1865. Conchologia iconica: or, illustrations of mollus- cous animals, 15: Monograph of the genus Marginella. plts. 2 - 13 (August 1864) and plts. 1 and 14 - 27, Index & Erra- tum (January 1865) Ropinc, PETER FRIEDERICH 1798. | Museum Boltenianum, pars secunda contiens conchylia: vii + 199 pp. Hamburg. Page 194 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 Sacco, FREDERICO 1890. I mollusc!ii dei terreni terziarii del Piedmonte e della Ligura descritti da Luigi Bellardi. Part 6 (Volutidae, Margin- ellidae, Columbellidae) . Mem. R. Acad. Sci. Torino (2) 40: 295 - 368; pits. 1-2 SCHUMACHER, CRETIEN FREDERIC 1817. | Essai d’un nouveau systeme des habitations des vers testacés. Copenhagen, iv + 287 pp.; 22 plts. SCHWENGEL, JEANNE S. 1938. Zoological results of the George Wanderbilt South Pacific Expedition, 1937. Part I, — Galapagos Mollusca. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia 90: 1-3; 3 figs. (13 May 1938) SmitH, MaxwELi 1950. New Mexican and Panamic shells. 60-61; pit. 4 Nautilus 64 (2) : (27 October 1950) Sowersy, Grorce BReTTINGHAM (first of name) 1832. | Characters of new species of Mollusca and Conchifera collected by Mr. Cuming. Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1832: 50-61 (5 June 1832), 104-108 (31 July 1832) Sowersy, GEorGE BRETTINGHAM (second of name) Ed. 2; London 1846. Thesaurus conchyliorum, or figures and descriptions of 1842. A conchological manual. Recent shells. 1 (7): 341-406 (Marginellidae: 373 - 406; plts. 74 - 78) : Stimpson, WILLIAM 1865. On certain genera and families of zoophagous gastro- pods. Amer. Journ. Conch. 1 (1): 55-64; plts. 8-9 (25 February 1865) StotL, Norman Rupo.pH et al. 1961. International code of zoological nomenclature adopted by the XV International Congress of Zoology. London xviii + 176 pp. SwaINnson, WILLIAM 1820 - 1833. Zoological illustrations or original figures and descriptions of new, rare, or interesting animals, selected chiefly from the classes of ornithology, entomology, and conch- ology, and arranged according to their natural affinities. London, 6 vols. [series 1: 1-3; series 2: 1 - 3] 1840. A treatise on malacology, or the natural classification of shells and shellfish. London, pp. 1 - 419; text figs. (Marginellidae: 323 - 324 in part 2) THIELE, JOHANNES 1903. Die geschalten Gastropoden der deutschen Tiefsee- Expedition 1898 - 1899. B: Anatomisch-systematische Unter- suchungen einiger Gastropoden: 149-174; plts. 6-9 1929. Handbuch der systematischen Weichtierkunde. (Jena, Gustav Fischer, 1929 - 1935) ; 1154 pp.; 893 text figs. (Marginellidae: 353 - 356) Tomuin, Joun Reap te BrocKTON 1916. Note on the Marginella varia of Sowerby. Nautilus 29 (12): 138-139 (April 1916) 1917. A systematic list of the Marginellidae. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London 12 (5): 242 - 306 (22 August 1917) 1919. A systematic list of the fossil Marginellidae. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London 13 (3): 41-65 (16 April 1919) 1947. A new South African volutid. Journ. Conch. 22 (10): 244-245; 1 fig. TroscHEL, Franz HERMANN 1867. Das Gebiss der Schnecken zur Begriindung einer na- turlichen Classification. 2 (2): 49-96; plts. 5-8 (Dec.) (Marginellidae: 57-60; plt. 5) Tryon, GeorcE WASHINGTON, JR. 1882-1883. Manual of conchology; structural and systematic, (1) 5 (17): 1-64 (December 21, 1882); (1) 5 (20): 193 to 276 (18 October 1883) (Marginellidae: (17): 5-58; plts. 2-13; (20): 197 - 255) WEINKAUFF, HEINRICH CONRAD 1879. Systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet von Martini und Chemnitz: die Gattungen Marginella und Erato. Nurnberg 141 pp. and plts. 1880. Catalog der Arten der Gattung Marginella Lam. Jahrb. Deutsch. Malakozool. Gesellsch. 1880: 40 - 64 WENz, WILHELM 1941. | Handbuch der Palaozoologie 5: 961 - 1200. Berlin. (October 1941) 1943. | Handbuch der Paldozoologie 6: 1201-1506. Berlin. (Marginellidae: 1372 - 1380) Wooprinc, WENDELL PHILLIPS (October 1943) 1928. Miocene mollusks from Bowden, Jamaica. Part 2: Gas- tropods and discussion of results. | Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publ. 385: vii + 564 pp.; 3 figs.; plts. 1-40 (28 Nov. 1928) (Marginellidae: 236 - 242) YEN, TENG-CHIEN 1944. Notes on some unfigured type-specimens of Chinese mollusks from the North Pacific Expedition. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., (4) 38: 561 - 586; plts. 50-51 (22 August 1944) Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 195 Burrowing Limitations in Pelecypoda BY LEE R. ARMSTRONG Diablo Valley College, Concord, California’ (4 Text figures) INTRODUCTION STUDENTS OF LAMELLIBRANCHS have given attention to their several modes of locomotion. Some clams creep or crawl through sand and mud (Trachycardium quadragenarium Conrab, 1837) ; others swim (Pecten irradians Conrap, 1837); most burrow downward (Tresus nuttalli (Conrap, 1837) or Panope generosa GouLp, 1850), leaving only the tip of the siphon to protrude above the surface. Observations on the bur- rowing of clams have been made by MacGinitigz & Mac- GinitrE (1949, pp. 80-81, 329, 352), GutsELtt (1930, pp. 569-625), BorrapatLe et al. (1961, pp. 622-635), Ricketts & Carvin (1952, pp. 196-197, 268-305), and BucussBauM (1955, pp. 188-198). However, no one has established the existence of a mechanism whereby clams, once in position and covered with sand, could elevate themselves back toward the surface. This I intend to do in this paper. As one attempts to understand how lamellibranchs might maintain themselves at certain depths in the me- dium in which they are buried, certain hypotheses may be drawn regarding beneath-the-sand locomotion: (1) there is no movement in the burrow but rather adjust- ment to water-sand level through action of the siphon alone; (2) upward movement of the clam in the burrow may be achieved by such means as (a) rapid extension of the foot “downward,” resulting in an “upward” push- ing movement, (b) continual digging in an arc, thus placing the clam near the surface or (c) shell action, perhaps coordinated with foot action, involving filling the mantle cavity then ejecting water forcibly, resulting in elevation; and (3) the clam may elevate through the effect of buoyancy, the clam being less dense than the medium in which it lives. These hypotheses are based upon illustrations, references, and discussions of clam locomotion and under-the-sand position found in the * This study was part of a thesis for the Master of Arts Desree in Biology at San Francisco State College. above listed references plus those of Pohlo (1963, pp. 98- 103) (1964, pp. 321-330), Frrent (1950, pp. 285-311), Licut et al. (1954 pp. 219-238), Fraser & SmitH (1928, pp. 249-268), FrAsER (1930, pp. 569-626), WeyMouTH (1920, pp. 29-63) and observations of the writer. MATERIAL anp OBSERVATIONS Ten species of clams were selected for this study, and re- sults are based upon observations of these. The species studied were (1) Macoma nasuta (Conran, 1837), (2) Macoma secta (Conran, 1860), (3) Protothaca staminea (Conrap, 1837), (4) Saxidomus nuttalli Conran, 1837, (5) Mya arenaria Linnaeus, 1758, (6) Tresus nuttalli (Conran, 1837), all studied in field experiments at Drakes Estero, Marin County, and Bodega Bay, Sonoma County, California, (7) Tivela stultorum (Mawe, 1823), Pismo Beach, California, (8) Panope generosa Gouwp, 1850, Puget Sound, Washington, (9) Siliqua patula (Drxon, 1788), Copalis Beach, Washington, and (10) Chione californiensis (BropErRtpP, 1835), two specimens of which were obtained alive from Baja California but were not observed under field conditions. All clams did not respond identically. To test the hypotheses outlined above, clams were dug up and then reburied in aquaria, five gallon cans, or in the sand in open clam beds. It was soon evident that the conditions inside an aqua- rium or can are quite different from those in the open clam bed with natural wave action. Temperature, water action, water oxygenation, and the proportion of solid media suspended in water are all factors which are very dif- ficult to duplicate when trying to reconstruct the natural environment for the clam inside the aquaria or cans. No clams planted in aquaria or five gallon cans showed any ability to elevate. All clams in this study extended their siphon tip to or very near to the surface of the sand for exchange of water (Licur et al. 1954, p. 232). In normal posture the posterior end bearing the siphon is nearer the surface; the: Page 196 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 ventro-anterior end with the extensible foot points down- ward. The clams used appeared to be in normal posture when near a 90° vertical angle, regardless of the depth or age of the clam; Macoma was a partial exception, being inclined nearly 30-60° with the incurrent siphon mak- ing a soft bend to reach the surface. All clams studied have an extensible downward-pointing foot. It serves as a probe, anchor, and contractor during digging. In downward digging, generally speaking, the clam ex- tends the foot and simultaneously changes the foot shape into a thin, blade-like projection, the tip inserting into the sand if digging from on top the sand, or probing deeper into the sand if already buried. The sinuses fill with blood, the body of the foot enlarges and may exceed the shell diameter, and then the foot contracts, drawing the shell into or through the sand. Under the sand this movement is accompanied by spurts of water through the excurrent siphon. Digging action below the sand can be seen in part by using aquaria, and in all clams so examined the over-all foot action was similar, but degree of extension, frequency of contractions, and intensity of contraction differed markedly in different species. In no case was any action seen or felt which might suggest the clam could reverse this mechanism and push upwardly. EXPERIMENTS anp RESULTS Replanting and Depth Experiments: To check a clam’s ability to move upward or show directional movement other than downward, clams were dug and replanted in a series of planting experiments at various depths in open clam beds, in aquaria, and in five-gallon cans. The aquaria and cans were then planted at different depths in the clam bed. Controls of two types were used in all cases: (1) clams of about the same size were marked in the bed and ieft untouched; (2) other clams were dug up, reburied at the same depth and marked. This allowed size, age, and natural depth comparisons between ex- perimental clams and controls. Stakes were used for marking in all cases. Of the species used in this study, 25 were planted at depths less than extended siphon length plus two to four inches, all 25 clams lived and within one week each estab- lished its burrow. In all experiments where the clam was planted in excess of extended siphon length plus about seven inches, they all perished within seven days. Of 25 Protothaca staminea planted in excess of three to four inches deep, 18 were dead within a week and the seven remaining were dead at one month. Twenty-five planted at extended siphon length plus two inches re- mained alive, Critical depth for this species is about two inches. Tivela stultorum, when planted at approximately 18 inches, reestablished at normal depth within 48 hours if planted within bounds of active surf. Normal depth for Twela is 2-6 inches, fully extended siphon approximately 4-6 inches. Plantings on the beach above the region of wave action showed the clams did not change position. Using 20 Siliqua patula, a similar experiment showed the clam regaining normal depth by the next low tide from an 18 to 24 inch burial. Normal depth for Siliqua is 2-10 inches, with fully extended siphons 6-9 inches. The above measurements are of mature clams with shell length of ap- proximately 6 inches. As in the experiments with Tivela, Siliqua also failed to show any movement when planted in moist sand above the level of wave action. A single Panope generosa was planted at six inches below extended siphon depth, and when checked in one month was found alive. It had created a six-inch-deep conical depression in the surface layer of sand, and the siphon tip emerged from the lowest point. The clam had not elevated. Additional Cover Experiments: Using Tresus nuttalli and Protothaca staminea, a variation of the planting ex- periment was devised. Four-sided wooden frames with sides from four to twelve inches high were built (see diagram, figure 1). These were then placed around undis- turbed clams in various regions of the beds. The frames were anchored in place and filled with sand. Sixteen T. nuttallt covered with approximately four inches or more of sand were all dead at the end of three weeks, while 16 covered with approximately two to three inches of sand Figure 1: Wooden frame in position for adding environmental sand to clams, where siphons are at surface level. (Surface view looking down onto the clam bed) [the size of the frames varied, depending upon the species involved; for Protothaca staminea the frames were 4 feet by 4 feet, while for Tresus nuttalli they were 6 feet by 8 feet] Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 197 were alive at the end of three weeks. Ten P staminea covered with one inch of sand remained alive while 14 having three inches of additional cover had perished in the same length of time. As a final check to determine a clam’s ability to move upward, Tresus nuttalli with enlarged concave burrow openings were selected. Ten selected burrows were meas- ured and marked; the depressions were then filled gently with sand. The ten clams occupying burrows with de- pressions about two inches deep were alive with the bur- row depressions partly reformed at the end of two wecks. Ten clams in depressions four or more inches deep were dead (see diagram, figure 2). In any of these cases one might conclude that if the clam could have elevated rather than perish, it would have done so. Clams used for the experiments with reburial, addi- tional cover, and burrow depression filling appeared un- able to move upward and adjust to these modifications of the environment. They did show some ability in siphon extension of about one to four inches and thereby re- mained alive. Posture and Reorientation Experiments: In order to de- termine directional movement other than downward, a series of posture experiments was devised and executed using 15 Tresus nuttalli, 10 Protothaca staminea, 10 Tive- la stultorum, and 25 Siliqua patula in each experiment. The clams were immediately replanted at the depths at which they were located. Posture variations in the ex- periments involved (1) a 180° reversal of the clam, siphon straight down, foot up; (2) a 135° inclination, siphon down; (3) 90° inclination of three types: (a) mantle edge up, (b) mantle edge down, and (c) mantle edge to the side; and (4) a 45° inclination with the siphons up (see diagram, figure 3). Results of these experiments show that two species, Tresus nuttalli and P staminea, could not reorient and survive in any position except the 45° inclination. Twelve Tivela stultorum and 24 S. patula repostured in the 45° inclination within 24 hours. In no case could the species used reestablish themselves from a complete reversal (all 51 specimens died) ; 90° inclination (all 50 specimens died) ; mantle edge up (all 50 specimens died) ; or 135° inclination, siphon down (all 50 specimens died). Relative Density and Water Action: The clams studied have no known method of self-elevation by voluntary means, yet some elevate in the field. It is therefore strongly suggested that they may be elevated by water action. Ten species of clams were subjected to quantitative analysis in their individual densities in relation to the density of their immediate environment. The data from this work show that each clam is less dense than its environment (see Table No. 1: Table of Comparative Addition of sand covering to concave burrows. Natural burrow depressions are marked and filled flush with sand. The depth of these burrows ranged from about one to six inches Figure 2: and the diameter from about two to ten inches. Natural burrow depressions Covered After three weeks Density ). This evidence led to the hypothesis that relative density resulting im a positive buoyancy will. under pre- scribed conditions, clevate a clam in its burrow. This suggests that clams must dig down to establish themselves within the sand at depths appropriate to their anatomy. that depth in general in dictated by the siphon length, and that clam buoyancy causes any elevation that occurs. In either case the problem of the clam is to dig downward only. My experiments show that they cannot actively, Page 198 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 Figure 3: Diagram of posture studies (illustrating the general procedure used in this study) a - 45° inclination b - 90°, flat c - 180°, reversed d - control(s), natural depth and posture for each species used e - 90° inclination, mantle edge down f - 90°, mantle edge up g - 135° (reverse) inclination voluntarily elevate even when not to do so causes them to perish. Effect of Water Action on Clam Buoyancy Inside an Aquarium: To check the effect of density on the buoyancy and digging of clams, the following experiment was con- ducted. Clams of different species and sizes were placed at the bottom of an aquarium (see diagram, figure ae). The aquarium was placed on a log and filled with water. Varying amounts of sand were added and the aquarium Table 1 Table of Comparative Density of Clams and Sand Base Reference = Density of sand at 3.00 gm/cc as an average of ten observations. Panope generosa 1.38 Mya arenaria 1.31 Twela stultorum 1.83 Tresus nuttalli L2G Saxidomus nuttalli 1.47 Siliqua patula 1.14 Chione californiensis ill Macoma nasuta 1.21 Macoma secta 1.24 Protothaca staminea 2.04 was then rocked. If the difference in buoyancy between clam and medium were similar to that in nature, and the buoyancy hypothesis correct, the clams would be buoyed up. In all cases this did occur. Demonstration of effect of buoyancy under controlled experimental conditions. [figures indicate density in gm/cc] a - living clams, sand, water and aquarium at start of experiment b - same aquarium after rocking 30 tilts per minute for 10 minutes 1 — Macoma secta 2 — Protothaca staminea 3 — Tresus nuttalli 4 — Tivela stultorum Figure 4: Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 199 re The density of the clam as compared to the environ- ment determines the relative buoyancy and appears to be the basis for variation in the clam’s digging ability and related activity. For example, Tivela and Siliqua represent clams which can move upward in the field. They live in an environment of rapid, severe, and forceful interaction of water, sand and clam. They are constantly affected by the difference in relative density which serves to buoy them upward through the sand. They maintain correct depth and position by digging downward. Conversely, Tresus and Panope live in areas of calm, slow-moving waters and are not affected by such an interaction of water, sand and self. Burrow construction, depth, bur- rowing ability and anatomical differences of species used clearly demonstrate adaptation to sand-buoyancy. Burrowing and Geographical Orientation: General observations on a clam’s position in the sand, which I found interesting but which were not resolved in this study, concern the geographical direction of some clams. It has been noted (WryMouTH, 1920) that certain clams, e.g. Siliqua patula and Tivela stultorum, are always found in a given position or direction relative to the wave front. This fact was confirmed during this study. The apparent reason for such directional orientation is the action of the wave front on the clam. It is suggested that regardless of the geographical direction of the wave front these types of clams would show this definite orientation on the beach, and East and West are used for convenience in these remarks, because both 7? stultorum and S. patula were so oriented in the beaches studied. Those two species of clams are found with the hinge and excurrent siphon facing the ocean (west), and the mantle edge and in- current siphon facing the land (east). In rechecking these observations (WEyMouTH, 1923), 50 T° stultorum were carefully dug at Oceana, California, and in each case they were in the sand as indicated above. Ten individual T.: stultorum were placed in an aquarium and observed as they dug into the sand. East-west orientation was not ob- served as they covered themselves. The orientations of well over 200 S. patula were observed (FRASER, 1930). In this case one needs only to walk along the ocean side of a sand spit in about one to two inches of water and observe the exposed siphon tips to see the position. In every case each clam of over 200 observed was in an east-west orientation. Twenty-four S. patula, with shell lengths of two to four inches, were placed in about six inches of water in a lagoon adjacent to the spit and observed as they dug back in. No directional orientation was noted. Ten clams of similar size were then placed on the ocean side of the same spit so that they were partially covered by wave action. The waves did not move or dislodge the clam and hit the clams when each wave was almost completely spent, re- sulting in a gentle flushing action over the clam. The clams buried in from 20 to 60 seconds, the smallest bury- ing the most rapidly. It appeared that those clams most severely affected by wave action would be positioned by the action of the in-coming wave so that the foot was oceanward (west), and the siphon landward (east), when the wave was spent. Then as the wave withdrew the clam made a few quick initial thrusts with the foot in the soft sand and was in a diagonal position, partially buried by the time the next wave struck it. This resulted in the clam’s beginning to dig back in with partial east- west orientation. However, by the time the clam was buried it was not completely east-west oriented. Two very small clams with shell size of one-half inch dug back completely within two wave actions, in 15-20 seconds, and although each began to dig while on the side, with hinge north and mantle south, they were east-west oriented by the time they had buried. From these limited observa- tions it is suggested that clams that bury rapidly and that are affected by waves and surf (such as Siliqua patula) would be affected thusly: the wave has more force when incoming than retreating; as the hinge side of the clam is narrowed and offers less water resistance than the wider and rougher mantle edge, the clam is turned like a weather vane as the incoming wave hits it. Then the more gentle retreating wave flushing back over it assists the clam in obtaining an upright digging posture because of the re- sistance against the rough mantle edge and shell edges. It is again hit by the next wave and as it continues to dig would be swung around to the observed east-west position by the time it buries. The same clams when placed in a quiet lagoon burrowed, but no east-west position was noted. Twela stultorum and Siliqua patula were the only two species of clams in this study living in heavy surf beaches, subjected to intense wave action during each tidal change. It is my opinion that wave action is the reason for their east-west orientation. Fifty Panope generosa and 50 Tresus nutall. were observed in Puget Sound, near Olympia, Washington, and no orientation was evident. The clams appeared to be buried completely at random even though they were affected by gentle water action because of in- coming and outgoing tides. The method of observation of these two species at the site was merely to walk along, observe the siphon tips and note the direction of each. In this area the species can be distinguished without digging because, when adult (four to six years), Tresus nuttall frequently has barnacles on the cornified part of the siphon tip, while Panope was never observed with them. The reason for this was not apparent and I have not found an explanation in the literature. Well over 500 Tresus nuttalli have been observed in Limatur Inlet, adjacent to Drakes Estero, Marin County, and only random positions have been noted. Two hundred Page 200 Saxidomus nuttalli were observed in Bolinas Bay. The clams checked did not show any pattern in position, in- cluding those closest to the channel. Of 200 burrows checked, in six cases two clams shared the same burrow. The clams of this species are found at about 14 to 18 inches in depth, and, because the burrows are large enough at this site, one can determine orientation by reaching into the burrows. Judging only from these limited observations it is most probable that wave action coupled with the anatomical differences in the two edges of the clam account for an east-west orientation while the species living in more quiet waters bury in a random pattern. SUMMARY Experiments with ten species of clams revealed that they did not voluntarily elevate in their burrows or show direc- tional movement other than rotational and downward. (1) Clams replanted four to seven inches or more in excess of extended siphon length died, unless they were affected by heavy surf. If clams normally found in the beds are covered by additional sand they will perish unless they can extend the siphon through the new cover to the surface, or form a sand-free cone- shaped depression by which they have access to the surface. If the clams studied have their burrows de- stroyed, but the clam itself is not moved, a new burrow will be formed, provided the clam is completely cov- ered by water for a period of time following burrow destruction. (2) Clams living in beds subject to severe surf action can regain normal posture if they are placed in ab- normal positions involving something less than a com- plete reversal with siphons down, a position from which no clam in this study recovered. Clams living in very calm waters cannot regain normal posture, although some do continue to live by bending their siphons to reach the surface. (3) All clams used in this study were found to be less dense than the medium in which each species lives. If placed in aquaria and agitated along with sand and water all were buoyed upward. This study suggests that those clams which dig down- ward, and continue digging downward as environmental conditions may dictate, cannot move upward without the buoyancy produced by differences in relative density and the action of the water. Tivela stultorum and Siliqua patula showed definite orientation, with the hinge seaward and mantle edge THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 shoreward. The other species studied showed no direc- tional position in the sand. Limited observation suggests that this is due to the active and forceful effect of water in the form of waves and surf on the former two species of clams. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author wishes to thank Dr. Jack T. Tomlinson for guidance, discussion and direction in resolving many facets of this study, and Dr. Joseph G. Hall and Mr. Henry C. Scott for comments and criticisms. LITERATURE CITED Borrapalte, L. A., E A. Ports, L. E. EastHaM, J. T. SAUNDERS & G. A KERKUT 1961. The invertebrata. 4th ed. Cambridge Univ. Press. London; xvii + 820 pp.; 523 figs. BucHsBauM, RALPH 1955. Animals without backbones. Press. xii + 405 pp. illust. Fircu, Joun E. 1950. The Pismo clam. 285 - 311 Fraser, McLean C. 1930. . The razor clam, Siliqua patula of Graham Island. Roy. Soc. Canad. Proc. and Trans., Ser. 3, 24( ): 141 - 154 Fraser, McLean C. & GertrupE M. Smrrn 1928. Notes on the ecology of the little neck clam. Roy. Soc. Canad. Proc. and Trans., Ser. 3, 22 (5) : 249 - 268 GurtseLL, J. S. 4th ed. Univ. Chicago Calif. Fish and Game 36 (4): 1930. Natural history of the ray scallop, Pecten irradians. U.S. Bur. Fish. Bull. 46: 569 - 626 Licut, Sox Frtty et al. 1961. Intertidal invertebrates of the central California coast. Univ. Calif. Press, Berkeley; xiv + 446 pp.; 138 figs. MacGrniTigE, Georce, & Nettie MacGinrrie 1949. Natural history of marine animals. McGraw-Hill, New York. Pou to, Ross H. 1963. | Morphology and mode of burrowing in Siliqua patula and Solen rosaceus. The Veliger 6 (2) : 98 - 104; figs. 1 to 6 (1 October 1963) 1964. | Ontogenetic changes of form and mode of life in Tresus nuttalli. Malacologia 1 (3): 321 - 330; figs. 1-6 WEYMOUTH, Frank W. 473 pp.; illus. 1920. The edible clams, mussels and scallops of California. Calif. Fish & Game Bull. 4: 77 pp. 1923. Life history and growth of the Pismo clam. Bur. Marine Fish., Fish and Game Comm., Fish Bull. 7 Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 201 Growth of Three Species of Acmaea PETER W. FRANK Department of Biology, University of Oregon, Eugene (1 Text figure) IN CONJUNCTION with a more general investigation of Acmaea digitalis EscuscHottz, 1833 (FRANK, 1965), we have observed changes in shell length of a consider- able number of individually marked limpets belonging to several species. Specifically the data reported here are from 668 A. digitalis, 140 A. paradigitalis FrrrcHMAN, 1960 and 16 A. pelta EscuscHo.tz, 1833, measured in June 1963 and again in June 1964. Maximum shell length was determined to the nearest tenth millimeter using vernier calipers. The animals are from a single rock inside Coos Bay, Oregon. However, since this rock exhibits a considerable moisture and insolation gradient, the data probably ap- proximate average growth for these species in this region. Certainly the species differences they reveal are general. Unfortunately the animals can not be separated by sex. There are indications that, in Acmaea digitalis at least, any difference in growth rate of the sexes must be very small. Table 1 presents the data for the two species for which this can be done as a size-specific frequency distribution. It is evident that Acmaca digitalis of all sizes grow faster than do A. paradigitalis. It may be of some interest that this latter species (FrIrcHMAN, 1960) was first distin- guished by us from A. digitalis by its slower growth rate as well as its smoother shell. For both species absolute growth of the shell decreases with size in a non-linear manner. Although variability is quite great, the data show enough precision in their means to permit critical exami- nation of various theories of mollusk growth (e. g. von BerTALANFFY, 1957). From the table and from the data on Acmaea pelta, Figure | has been constructed by graphic integration. It is intended primarily to furnish a visual index to the relative growth of the three species. The curve is least precise for A. pelta, and is not particularly useful as a means of determining age of shells for the other species either. IN MM. WwW (eo) 20 SHELL LENGTH O 2 3 4 5 6 AGE IN YEARS Figure 1: Average size as a function of age for three species of intertidal limpets (1963 - 1964, Central Oregon Coast) This is because of the large standard deviations illustrated in the table. Moreover, since we are unable to identify or mark very small limpets, the early portions of the growth curves are largely conjectural. No implications regarding longevity should be drawn from the curves. From our observations, A. digitalis occasionally reaches 6 years and A. paradigitalis 4 years of age. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This research was aided by a grant from the National Science Foundation (GB-977). A number of undergradu- ate and graduate assistants helped gather data. Page 202 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 Table 1 Annual change in shell length of Acmaea digitalis and Acmaea paradigitalis A. digitalis A. paradigitalis IL MC N sD MC N SD mm mm mm 8.0 2.83 4 0.77 8.5 6.78 5 124. PEs 9 1.05 9.0 6.95 15 0.94 2.42 26 1.46 9.5 6.23 29 1.65 2.64 19 1.57 10.0 6.16 50 1.21 1.86 28 0.78 10.5 5.74 52 1.35 1.81 22 1.11 11.0 5.69 62 1.05 1.08 13 0.45 11.5 5.36 58 1.40 0.79 7 0.47 12.0 5.24 42 1.22 0.60 5 0.72 12.5 4.47 26 1.38 0.59 7 0.71 13.0 5.12 26 0.93 13.5 3.89 17 1.27 14.0 3.99 10 1.28 14.5 3.73 25 1.26 15.0 DSM) 27 0.77 15.5 2.56 16 0.65 16.0 2.62 27 1.24 16.5 2.21 21 1.15 17.0 2.62 20 0.91 17.5 2.37 14 0.89 18.0 2.13 21 0.71 18.5 1.67 20 1.16 19.0 1.63 18 1.43 19.5 2.14 10 0.97 20.0 1.27 12 0.94 20.5 1.90 12 1.23 21.0 1.14 8 0.98 2nd IO 3 0.74 22.0 1.26 5 1.09 (apart 1.14 9 0.89 23.0 0.55 2 0.24 23.5 0.90 3 0.73 24.0 0.50 3 0.78 IL = initial length; MC = mean change; N-number SD = standard deviation LITERATURE CITED BERTALANFFY, LUDWIG VON 1957. | Quantitative laws in metabolism and growth. Rev. Biol. 32: 217 - 231 FRANK, PETER W. 1965. _ The biodemography of an intertidal snail population. Ecology 46: in press FrrrcHMan, Harry K., II 1960. Acmaea paradigitalis, sp. nov. (Acmaeidae, Gastropoda) The Veliger 2 (3) : 53 - 57; plts. 9 - 12 (1 January 1960) Quart. Vol. 7; No. 3 THE VELIGER Page 203 NOTES & NEWS A. M. U. Pacific Division Members of the Pacific Division of the American Malaco- logical Union, gathered at Asilomar during late June for their 1964 Annual Meeting, elected officers for the follow- ing year: Epwin C. ALLison, Chairman Aan J. Koun, Vice-Chairman BarBara J. Goon, Secretary Fay H. Wotrson, Treasurer All of these new officers, except Dr. Kohn, reside in the San Diego area. Ned Allison teaches geology and pale- ontology at San Diego State College. Alan Kohn, a member of the Department of Zoology at the University of Washington is widely known for his studies of living mollusks, particularly his biologic and taxonomic investi- gations of the Conidae. Barbara Good has continued to to be one of the San Diego Shell Club’s most consistent and enthusiastic supporters. Fay Wolfson, a past president of the San Diego Shell Club, is occupied as a teaching assistant and graduate student of the San Diego State College’s Zoology Department. A beautiful San Diego site bordering the Pacific Ocean will be the setting for the 1965 AMU-PD Annual Meet- ing. That will be the Campus of California Western University which is located on the west side of Point Loma. The meeting will convene June 24 and end on June 27. Information concerning campus accommoda- tions, prices, and meeting plans will be published at a later time. Those who are not members of the AMU but who wish to be notified individually as final arrangements are prepared may send their names and addresses with 50 cents to the Secretary, Mrs. Barbara Good, 3142 Larga Court, San Diego, California 92110. U. M. E. The Unitas Malacologica Europaea will hold its second European Malacological Congress in Copenhagen (Den- mark) from August 10 in the morning until August 11, 1965, in the evening. Details for the program of the Congress, to be held at the Zoological Institut and Museum of the University, may be obtained from Dr. G. Hopner Petersen, % Zoologisk Museum, 5. Afdeling Universitetsparken 15, Copenhagen, Denmark. All mala- cologists are invited to attend. BOOKS, PERIODICALS, PAMPHLETS On the Hawaiian scallops of the genus Pecten Muller (Pelecypoda) by C. A. Fremine. Pacific Science, Volume 16, Number 2, pages 181 - 185, figures 1-4; April 1962. The author of this paper earlier (1957) discussed the relationships of the species of pectens in the Pacific which have convex right and concave or flat left valves. That study revealed that relationships of species in a family may be obscured by differentiating very small groups into genera and subgenera. The present paper deals principally with two species described from the Hawaiian Islands by Dall, Bartsch and Rehder. Pecten waikikius is placed as a subspecies of P jacobaeus Linnaeus, a species living in the Medi- terranean, and PR diomedeus is placed questionably as a subspecies of P benedictus Lamarck which was origi- nally described from strata of Pliocene age in France. LGH Shallow-Water Marine Climates and Molluscan Provinces by Crarence A. Hatt, Jr. Ecology, Volume 45, No. 2, pages 226 to 234, 6 figures. I have been asked by the editor of The Veliger to com- ment on this paper, and must confess that I had not considered it a significant enough communication to warrant such notice. However, in reading it over, I have become aware of a peculiar manner of quotation that deserves comment. On page 227 HAtt states “An animal that lives in a marine environment with a particular winter minimum sea-surface temperature in one area may live in a wholly different winter temperature in another geographic region. HepcpeTH (1957, p. 373) states: “5/06 WE BIRE dealing with reproductive steno- therms requiring not some minimum or maximum mean, but a narrower range .... This range must also be of some minimum duration — that is, the required temperature for reproduction tes This is quoted from a discussion of the “longitudinal discontinuity of certain species”. The complete statement from which Hatt has selected his excerpts reads as follows: “Although the data are as yet incomplete, enough are available to suggest that we are here dealing with reproductive stenotherms requiring not some mini- mum or maximum mean, but a narrower range within the extremes (as suggested by Hutcuins’ Type 1). This range must also be of some minimum duration — that is, the required temperature for reproduction is quanti- Page 204 tative as well as qualitative — and the duration of the temperature must also be taken into consideration. If an organism requires two successive months of a given mean temperature range for reproduction, it can not, of course, reproduce in an otherwise favorable region where the two months may be separated by periods of higher or lower temperatures.” It appears that Hart has missed the point of this argument, which has nothing to do with dissimilar winter temperatures as such but with similar means in geogra- phically separated localities during the breeding season. Indeed, regions with similar winter but different summer temperatures could be involved. Hat does conclude that “The critical factor that probably determines the limits of marine shallow-water climates [sic — he means bio- geographic regions] is the number of consecutive days or months that shallow sea water is at temperatures re- quired for reproduction and early growth.” This may be true for some species, but no data are submitted to sub- stantiate this conclusion as a universal generalization. In all, this paper is a review of previous papers and adds nothing new to the literature of biogeography. JWH CauirorNia MaracozootocicaL Society, Inc. announces: Backnumbers of THE VELIGER and other publications Volumes | and 2 are out of print Volume 3: $3.75 Volume 4: $5.- Volume 5: $5.- Volume 6: $7.- Subscription to Volume 7: $7.50 domestic; $7.90 in the Americas; $8.10 all other foreign countries. Subscription to Volume 8: $10.- domestic; $10.60 in Canada, Mexico, Central and South America; $10.80 all other foreign countries. THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 3 Affiliate Membership in the C. M.S., Inc. is $5.- for the fiscal year July 1, 1965 to June 30, 1966. Postage for members living in Canada, Mexico, Central and South America 60 cents, for members living in any other foreign country 80 cents additional. Membership open to indi- viduals only - no institutional memberships. Members receive The Veliger free of further charges and are entitled to purchase one copy of all supplements published after July 1, 1964, at a discount (to be deter- mined for each supplement). Supplement to Volume 3: $3.- plus $ -.25 postage (plus $ -.12 sales tax for California residents only) [Opisthobranch Mollusks of California by Prof. Ernst Marcus] Supplement to Volume 6: $4.- plus $-.25 postage (plus $-.16 sales tax for California residents only) [Biology of Tegula funebralis (A. ApAms), edited by Abbott, Blinks, Phillips and Stohler] {Members of C. M.S., Inc. may purchase one copy with a 25% discount} Please, note: Back numbers sold in complete volumes only with a handling charge of $ -.25 on each order; sub- scriptions for the current volume accepted until March 15 of each year and on a per volume basis only. Send orders with remittance to: Mrs. Jean M. Cate, Manager, 12719 San Vicente Boule- vard, Los Angeles, Calif. 90049. Please, make checks payable to C. M. S., Inc. Shipments of material ordered are generally made within two weeks after receipt of remittance. Backnumbers of the current volume will be mailed to new subscribers, as well as to those who renew late, on the first working day of the month following receipt of the remittance. The same policy applies to new members. THE VELIGER is open to original papers pertaining to any problem concerned with mollusks. This is meant to make facilities available for publication of original articles from a wide field of endeavor. Papers dealing with anatomical, cytological, distributional, ecological, histological, morphological, phys- iological, taxonomic, etc., aspects of marine, freshwater or terrestrial mollusks from any region, will be considered. Even topics only indi- rectly concerned with mollusks may be acceptable. In the unlikely event that space considerations make limitations necessary, papers dealing with mollusks from the Pacific region will be given priority. However, in this case the term “Pacific region” is to be most liberally interpreted. It is the editorial policy to preserve the individualistic writing style of the author; therefore any editorial changes in a manuscript will be sub- mitted to the author for his approval, before going to press. Short articles containing descriptions of new species or lesser taxa will be given preferential treatment in the speed of publication provided that arrangements have been made by the author for depositing the holotype with a recognized public Museum. Museum numbers of the type specimens must be included in the manuscript. Type localities must be defined as accurately as possible, with geographical longitudes and latitudes added. Short original papers, not exceeding 500 words, will be published in the column “NOTES & NEWS”; in this column will also appear notices of meetings of the American Malacological Union, as well as news items which are deemed of interest to our subscribers in general. Articles on “METHODS & TECHNIQUES” will be considered for publication in another column, provided that the information is complete and tech- niques and methods are capable of duplication by anyone carefully fol- lowing the description given. Such articles should be mainly original and deal with collecting, preparing, maintaining, studying, photo- graphing, etc., of mollusks or other invertebrates. A third column, en- titled “INFORMATION DESK,” will contain articles dealing with any problem pertaining to collecting, identifying, etc., in short, problems encountered by our readers. In contrast to other contributions, articles in this column do not necessarily contain new and original materials. Questions to the editor, which can be answered in this column, are in- vited. The column “BOOKS, PERIODICALS, PAMPHLETS” will attempt to bring reviews of new publications to the attention of our readers. Also, new timely articles may be listed by title only, if this is deemed expedient. Manuscripts should be typed in final form on a high grade white paper, 812” by 11”, double spaced and accompanied by a carbon copy. EDITORIAL BOARD Dr. Donatp P. Assott, Professor of Biology Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University Dr. J. Wyatr Duruam, Professor of Paleontology University of California, Berkeley Dr. E. W. Facer, Associate Professor of Biology Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California, La Jolla (San Diego) Dr. Cavet Hann, Professor of Zoology and Director, Bodega Marine Laboratory University of California, Berkeley Dr. G Datias Hanna, Curator, Department of Geology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Joet W. Hepereth, Professor of Zoology Director of the Pacific Marine Station Dillon Beach Dr. Leo G. HERTLEIN, Curator, Department of Geology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Myra KEEN, Associate Professor of Paleontology and Curator of Conchology Stanford University Dr. Joun McGowan, Assistant Professor of Oceanography Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California, La Jolla (San Diego) Dr. FRANK PrrEe.Ka, Professor of Zoology and Chairman Department of Zoology University of California, Berkeley Mr. Attyn G. SmitTH, Associate Curator, Department of Invertebrate Zoology, California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Ratpu I. Smirn, Professor of Zoology University of California, Berkeley Dr. Donato Witson, Assistant Professor of Zoology University of California, Berkeley EDITOR-IN-CHIEF Dr. Rupotr SToHLER, Associate Research Zoologist University of California, Berkeley ASSOCIATE EDITOR Mrs. Jean M. Cate, Los Angeles, California A Quarterly published by CALIFORNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY, INC. Berkeley, California VOLUME 7 APRIL 1, 1965 NUMBER 4 CONTENTS The Color Pattern of Hermissenda crassicornis (EscuscHoitz, 1831) (Gastropoda: Opisthobranchia: N udibranchia) (9 Text figures) WERIcE MES DURGING Mera aR iy teu) cS het ibaa MaMa draw aisle! cy Yay 205 Kitchen Midden Mollusks of San Luis Gonzaga Bay (Plate 28; 1 Table) EIU GEINE AO OANG GN UP ler 2). acta i A Ral aE ONY nl Ay Poy aR Go Cypraea: A List of the Species ERR ADON OTUs tet RM aiid Ar te OMe ta I Re 219 A New Cowrie Race from North West Australia (Plate 29; 6 Text figures) FRANZ ALFRED SCHILDER & WALTER OLIVER CERNOHORSKY ....... . 225 Predator-Prey Reactions Between ‘Two Marine Prosobranch Gastropods JERHERS OND) CONOR: sues a yma 3! 0c earl ae ee ee ig Note on a Range Extension and Observations of Spawning in Tegula, a Gastropod BRAN CISBERDERCHG give, mene Beet mem tec! Nu Tae Se 233 Three Dimensional Reconstructions of the Nests of Helix aspersa (Plate 30) PRE DBEIERIZBERGy Sion te Some Va) ae ROE rae Rl Me a ad 234 A Statistical Study in Fossil Cowries BRAN ZV AL EREDE SCHITPDER Brinn fra 2//1) 4 a. eigehaoemale amen n dit GH Sahay oa, . 236 [Continued on Inside Front Cover] re Distributed free to Members of the California Malacozoological Society, Inc. Subscriptions (by Volume only) payable in advance to Calif. Malacozoological Soc. Inc. Volume 8: $10.- Domestic; $10.60 in the Americas; $10.80 all other Foreign Countries. $3.50 for single copies of current volume only. Postage extra. Send subscriptions to: Mrs. Jean M. Cate, Manager, 12719 San Vicente Boulevard, Los Angeles, California 90049. Address all other correspondence to: Dr. R. STOHLER, Editor, Department of Zoology, University of California, Berkeley, California 94720. Second-Class Postage paid at Berkeley, California. Note: CONTENTS — Continued New ‘Terebrid Species from the Indo-Pacific Ocean and from the Gulf of Mexico, with New Locality Records and Provisional Lists of Species Collected in Western Australia and at Sabah, Malaysia (Mollusca: Gastropoda) (Plate 31) R. D. Burcu PCE ee re ere sen ANG re Sg Bai K NOTES :& NEWS) 0228 900 sere ig te eee en ee ee BOOKS, PERIODICALS & PAMPHLETS . . The various taxa above species are indicated by the use of different type styles as ‘shown by the following examples: ORDER, Suborder, DIVISION, Subdivision, SECTION, SUPERFAMILY, Famity, Subfamily, Genus, (Subgenus). New Taxa Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER The Color Pattern of Hermissenda crassicornis (ESCHSCHOLTZ, 1831) (Gastropoda : Opisthobranchia : Nudibranchia) BY ULRIKE F BURGIN 552 Palomar Avenue, La Jolla, California (9 Text figures) INTRODUCTION “The highly variable color of the living animals is generally transparent yellowish to bluish-grey, yellow- green or grass-green. The cerata may be translucent like the body, reddish with light blue, green, orange or white specks, probably cutaneous glands. . .The cnidosacs are transparent and separated from the rest of the ccrata by a white, orange, yellow, purple or sometimes blue ring. On the outer side of the cerata runs a white line up to this ring. The smooth digestive diverticulum in the ceras is sand-colored, reddish to chocolate-brown, or black.” READING THIS DESCRIPTION of Hermissenda crassicornis (EscuscHoitz, 1831) as given by Marcus, 1961, one realizes that it is difficult if not impossible to give a des- cription of the “typical” color pattern in Hermissenda, since there is so much variation. However, a careful analysis of a large number of individuals shows that each individual’s coloration is composed of the same basic elements according to the same basic rules. In the first part of this study we shall describe the elements that make up the color pattern, and in the second part we shall consider some of the many color variants and the factors that may be responsible for color variation. A similar and more extensive study has been done on a European aeolid, Trinchesia coerulea (Monracu) (Burcin, 1961). It is worth noting that, although the two species differ in many details of color pattern, the basic principles of coloration were found to be the same in Trinchesia and in Hermissenda. I wish to express my gratitude to all who, through their help and advice, have made this study possible: To Professor Dr. A. Portmann, University of Basel (Swit- zerland), for reading the manuscript and helpful criti- cism; to Professor Dr. E. W. Fager, Scripps Institution of Oceanography, La Jolla (California), and his assistant, Miss Thea Schultze, for lending me optical instruments and laboratory equipment; to Mrs. Fay Wolfson, Mr. Wesley M. Farmer, and Mr. Clinton L. Collier for help with collecting specimens, and to Miss Esther Sandmeier, Zoological Institute of the University of Basel, for making the histological sections. MATERIAL Specimens of Hermissenda crassicornis were collected at the following locations: 1. La Jolla, rocky area near the “Cove” a) at low tide (—O.1 and lower) in tide pools, in May and June, specimens of up to 20 mm were abundant b) smaller specimens (up to 10 mm) were found in red algae collected from the rocks at low tide 2. San Diego, Point Loma, in tide pools, specimens up to 20 mm 3. San Diego, Dana Landing, specimens up to 40 mm in June (coll. Farmer & Collier) 4. Ensenada, Baja California, Mexico, in tide pools. The largest specimens recorded in literature measured 55 mm (O’DonocHveE, 1927). The largest specimens in our collection were 40 mm, the smallest ones 3.5 mm. Marcus (1961) gives a detailed account of the morpho- logy and anatomy of the species, which will not be repeated here. However, the following points may be mentioned (Figure 1): Marcus (l. c.) speaks of 11 groups of cerata, and a total of about 500 cerata. In our specimens there was always one distinct group in front of the pericardium, and a second one, equally distinct, behind the pericar- dium. Posterior to this the cerata of the different groups are so Close together as to conceal their arrangement in Page 206 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 Figure 1: Left - living animal. specimen of 15 mm total length. Right - second group of cerata and pericardium with blue and orange pattern. P - pericardium 1, 2, 3, 4 - designate groups of cerata distinct groups. However, if all the cerata were removed, their arrangement in groups could be seen (6 in a speci- men of 17 mm total length). The smallest specimen found (3.5 mm) had a total of some 24 cerata arranged in 3 groups. No attempt was made to ascertain the very com- plicated distribution pattern of the cerata within one group. The longest cerata are found in the median region of the first two groups immediately in front of or behind the pericardium. It is not always the same pair that is the longest, nor are the longest cerata always corresponding ones on the right and on the left sides, respectively. Some of the median cerata (as well as others) are always in the process of regeneration, being much smaller, and usually hidden among the long cerata. A. Components of the Color Pattern Coloration of the ceras: The brown color of the cerata is due to the digestive gland shining through the partly transparent skin. The lower part of the long cerata and most of the smaller ones are dark brown; the upper por- tions of the longer cerata are lighter brown. Whereas the dark brown color is fairly uniform among all speci- mens, the lighter parts vary greatly in intensity and color shade, sometimes being almost yellow, in other individuals deep red-brown. Further observation will show that the light and dark brown colors are due to two different kinds of cells in the digestive gland. The skin of the cerata contains a varying amount of white, bluish- or greenish-white, light yellow or sky-blue granules. They may be scattered over a large area of the ceras like fine dust or form distinct lines, rings or patches. and they often display a high lustre. There occurs yet another color, a deep orange, which is a true pigment dissolved in the cells of the epidermis. Where this diffuse orange pigment overlies the patterns formed by the white granules, the latter appear golden yellow. Coloration of the body: The body pattern consists of blue lines running along the middle of the body and tail, forming two rhomboid patterns, one behind the rhino- phores, a second one outlining the pericardium. White or bluish lines also run along the sides of the body between the groups of cerata. They all converge on the tail. Within the first, and sometimes within the second of the rhomboid patterns, and on the sides of the head there are very conspicuous orange markings. The orange patches on the back (though not those on the head) are composed of the same two color elements that were found on the cerata, yellow granules again forming a clear-cut line, the orange pigment being more diffuse, yet more intense in color. In the laboratory the blue lines described above appear almost white or intensely blue, depending on the back- ground. They show a metallic lustre and are composed of the same kind of granules as the white and blue designs on the cerata. If the animal is observed in one of its natural habitats, the tide pools with their lining of deep green eel grass, the lines on the bedy and tail appear in a very conspicuous shining green color. Histological structure of the ceras — : Comparison of living tissues with sections: The ceras of Hermuissenda, like aeolid ceraia in general, has the following structure (Figure 2): 1. The epidermis consists of one layer of vacuolated cells with a thin cuticle and cilia. Between the ordinary epider- mis cells gland cells are to be found (Figure 4. The cilia, except those at the tip of the ceras, are usually lost during fixation). 2. Next to the epidermis there is a layer of both circular and longitudinal muscles. The space between this outer layer of skin and muscles and the central digestive diver- ticulum is occupied by loose strands of connective tissue and filled with blood lacunae. It is this part of the ceras - the muscle layers, connective tissue and blood spaces - that give to the ceras of Hermissenda its extreme mobility and capability to contract and extend. Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 207 3. The central portion of the ceras is occupied by the diverticulum of the digestive gland with the cnidosac at its tip. Although our study is confined to the cerata, it may be of general interest to note that in Hermissenda the cerata (Gs) cr BL Figure 2: Left - side view of living ceras, showing dorso-ventral symmetry in pigmentation. Right - reconstruction of ceras from several histological sections (Bouin-Azan technique). BL - blood lacunae CS - cnidosac CT - connective tissue D - digestive diverticulum W - white granules (sometimes light yellow) alone contain the glandular tissue of the digestive gland. The ducts in the body are composed of flat, non-glandular epithelium. In this paper histological details are given only as far as the color pattern is involved. For a more extensive description of the histology of an aeolid ceras the reader is referred to the paper on Trinchesia (Birctn, 1961). Skin pigments (Figures 3 and 4): Both the orange pigment and the white, blue or yellow granules are located in the epidermis. The orange pigment is more or less uniformly dissolved in the vacuoles of the epidermis cells. In cerata with little orange the pigment forms very light patches, leaving some parts entirely uncolored. In some specimens round bodies of deep orange are scattered in the pigmented area. They are located in the muscle layer underlying the epidermis. The clements producing white, blue or yellow are located in the lower part of the epidermis cells as bodies of various shapes. Histological sections show that they occupy the enlarged basal portion of the cells, the nuclei having a distal position in relation to them. In these struc- tural details Hermissenda is similar to Trinchesia. Digestive diverticulum: The digestive epithelium in the ceras is not straight, but forms crypts and folds. The aspect presented by the microscopic preparation of a Op Un D a Jers Figure 3: Tip of living ceras (side view), showing white granules and orange pigment (hatched). The white granules are shown only along the edge of the white area, in order to let cnidosac and di- gestive diverticulum shine through in the central area of the triangle. CS - cnidosac W - white granules (sometimes D - digestive diverticulum light yellow) O - orange pigment living ceras is at first confusing. The following types of cells may be discerned in the digestive diverticulum (Figure 5) : a) Cells with thin-walled vacuoles, all of equal size, yellow, ochre, light green, colorless or orange b) Cells with thin-walled vacuoles of varying size, colors as above except orange. Page 208 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. + O0OSS Oo ~— Te = ——- Si = wor ae gb RY GTB gy L055 SSS Figure 4: Epidermis of ceras. Histological section (Bouin-Azan). Top - Epidermis from region with white granules. Large holes are seen, where granules were in living tissue. Bottom - Epidermis from non-white area. M - muscles, circular and longitudinal G - gland cell Gr - granule or hole where granule was Figure 5: Part of digestive diverticulum of living ceras showing both digestive (a, b) and vacuole cells (c) in different aspects. (Letters refer to descriptions in text) c) Cells with thick-walled polygonal vacuoles, densely packed, all of equal size, brown or red brown. d) Cells with brown, purple or colorless granules of ir- regular shape, smaller than the vacuoles in (c). In addition large vacuoles and round bodies, either yellow or colorless may be seen circulating in the lumen. In a histological section fixed with Bouin’s fluid and stained with either Hemalum-Benzopurpurine, Azan or Haematoxylin (Prenant) three different kinds of cells arc found (Figure 6): Figure 6: Histological sections of digestive diverticulum (Bouin- Azan). Left - apical part of ceras, no dark granules; in their place are Cells with net of vacuoles and few small granules (CGr). Right - basal part of ceras, many vacuole cells with dark granules. CGr - cell with granules VC - vacuole cell DC - digestive cell 1) Club-shaped cells with rounded bodies of equal or varying size, stained blue or orange in Azan, pink in Haemalum, green in Prenant (DC in Figure 6). 2) Cells of pyramidal shape with granules or vacuoles, all of the same size, which are not affected by the staining procedure but retain a dirty yellow or brown color of their own (VC in Figure 6). 3) Club-shaped or, less often, cylindrical or pyramidal cells with a net of vacuoles. Small granules may be found in the vacuoles. The plasma-net is stained orange in Azan; the granules are light brown (probably a color of their own) both in Azan and in Haemalum, but black in Pre- nant (CGr in Figure 6). The club-shaped cells with round bodies of equal or varying size (1) are easily identified as the cells described Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 209 in the living tissue under (a) and (b). They will be called digestive cells. In many living animals digestive cells filled with vacuoles of an extremely intense orange are found at the base of the ceras. These vacuoles are stained deep red in Azan. All the other color differences often so conspicuous in the living tissue disappear upon fixation. The pyramidal cells with brown granules (2) of the histological sections correspond to the cells with thick- walled vacuoles (c) of the living ceras. They will be called vacuole cells. Their distribution is character- istic: they are most numerous in the basal part of the ceras; toward the upper portion they become more and more scarce. There may be another cluster of them at the very tip of the digestive diverticulum, or they may be completely lacking there. These cells are more numerous in the dorsal part of the ceras than in the ventral one. They almost invariably occur at the periphery of the digestive diverticulum, in those parts of the crypts ori- ented towards the outside, the digestive cells occupying the more central parts along the folds. The nature of the third kind of cells described under (3) in the living tissue and (c) in the histological sections is not clear. These cells are distributed along the entire height of the epithelium. In Trinchesia coerulea two different kinds of cells had been found in the epithelium of the digestive gland, which correspond to the first two types described in Hermissenda. They were called “Verdauungszellen” (digestive cells) and “Kornerzellen” (cells with granules, corresponding to the vacuole cells) *. According to GRAHAM (1939) the digestive epithelium of aeolids (Acolidina, Cratena) con- sists of only one type of cell, the digestive cell, which carries out all the major functions of the digestive gland: production and secretion of enzymes, absorption of food, intracellular digestion, production and secretion of both fecal matter and (probably) true excretory products. In the paper on Trinchesia the extensive literature on this subject is discussed, and both from references in the liter- ature and from personal observation the conclusion is drawn that the digestive cells in Trinchesia only “excrete” fecal matter, whereas the “Kornerzellen” produce true excretory products. These latter cells are considered to represent a cell type of their own. In the present brief study on Hermissenda this question was not investigated any further; yet the general resem- blance between the epithelium of Trinchesia and that of Hermissenda suggests that in Hermissenda too the diges- tive cells carry out all the functions of the digestive gland 1 Cells similar to the third kind in Hermissenda were found in Trinchesia, but they were less numerous. They were then con- sidered to be a variety of the Kérnerzellen. except the production of excretory substances, the latter being done by the vacuole cells. The varying aspects of the third kind of cells may perhaps represent different stages in the metabolic cycle of either the digestive cells (production and secretion of enzymes?) or of the vacuole cells (excretion of vacuoles). Our comparison shows that the digestive cells are responsible for the very variable component in the colora- tion of the digestive diverticulum. We shall see that their color is directly dependent on the intake of food. The vacuole cells, on the other hand, which impart to the ceras its dark color, retain their color even during long periods of fasting, and the dark brown color is far more constant among individuals feeding on various diets. This is in accordance with the assumption that the metabolic cycle of these cells is relatively independent from that of the digestive cells, and that the contents of the vacuole cells are a particular endproduct of metabolism. Physical and chemical properties of color-producing structures — In discussions concerning animal colors, a distinction is generally made between “pigment colors” and “structural colors.” Pigment colors are due to a chemical substance (i. e. pigment) that can be extracted and analysed. and that retains its identity and more or less its color under varied conditions. Structural colors, on the other hand, are due to a physical effect that is produced not by the molecular structure of a pigment, but by certain special structures within the animal tissue, and only under certain defined external conditions such as the incidence of light. These colors disappear or are altered as soon as the special structures or the external conditions are changed. The orange color found in Hermissenda is clearly due to a pigment, for it remains unchanged, whether viewed in reflected or transmitted light, and it can be dissolved _ (and could be extracted) by organic solvents. According to the above definition the white, blue and yellow colors in Hermissenda and other aeolids are a combination of pigment and structural effect: there is an identifiable substance present in bodies of various shapes, which can be dissolved by certain chemicals. But the specific color of these bodies and their striking metallic lustre are presented only in reflected light. If they are viewed in transmitted light, there is no iridescence, and they appear dull grey-brown instead. The iridescent white, blue and yellow of Hermissenda must therefore be due to a structural peculiarity of these bodies. If these color-structures are viewed in reflected light at low magnifications (10 < 10), each element has a color of its own. Some of them show a metallic lustre, others do Page 210 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 not. If the light source is moved, the distribution of irides- cent and opaque elements is changed. The color that each element shows in transmitted light is roughly complemen- tary to its color in reflected light, blue corresponding to yellow, bluish-green to copper red or purple, and vice versa. In transmitted light very often the margin of each body is yellow or ochre, and its centre either green or purple. Further magnification of these color-structures (10 < 40 to 10 < 100) shows that they are vacuoles with an elastic wall, filled with small particles of oval shape (Fig- ure 7). These small particles are colored yellow, green, blue or purple. Sometimes the particles in one vacuole are all of the same color, sometimes particles of different colors occur in one vacuole, such as yellow ones around the margin, red or green ones in the center. The same general structure of these vacuoles was ob- served in Trinchesia and a number of other Mediterra- nean aeolids, and two species of Glossodoris. The size of the particles was then determined as follows: Diameter about 1p; Thickness 0.4 - 0.54 Particles of less than 1 in diameter are often found, and, although more rarely, large ones having a diameter of 2 to 3u. No measurements were made in Hermissenda, but the particles are of the same order of magnitude as in other aeolids. Vacuoles which are blue or green in transmitted light usually contain larger particles less densely packed than those which have a red color in transmitted light. In one instance the structure of blue-producing ele- ments on the tail of Hermissenda could be seen more clearly than usual: around the margin of the vacuole thin platelets were arranged side by side like the spokes of a wheel. They appeared yellow. The center of the vacuole was red, and small round particles were indistinctly seen. In the paper on Trinchesia the physical principles causing this structural effect are discussed in some detail, and the conclusion is drawn that the yellow and blue color and the metallic lustre of yellow, blue and white in Trinchesia are most probably due to interference pheno- mena. Interference colors arise when light waves are reflected from the surfaces of thin multiple laminations, which are surrounded by material possessing a contrasting refractive index and whose thickness is of the order of magnitude of the lightwaves. In our case the oval particles about 4 in thickness enclosed in the vacuoles represent the thin lam- inations. Since these small structures are at the limit of resolution of an ordinary light microscope, it is difficult to obtain information on the exact way of color produc- tion. Yet the following observations may be worthy to recorded, Certain relationships between the color effect and the structure of the vacuole were observed. The color effect produced depends partly on the arrangement and shape of the entire vacuoles and partly on the size of the particles within them. On some of the largest cerata, white of a diffuse, dusty appearance occurs. The color-structures mn these areas are slender, widely branched bodies distrib- uted loosely in the skin. Definite lines along the cerata, or the triangles on the tip of the ceras on the other hand are composed of vacuoles of a more compact shape lying close together (Figure 7). Figure 7: Vacuoles producing iridescent biue, white or yellow, fro: living ceras. Left - part of yellow triangle, vacuoles of compact shape Right - diffuse, dusty white, very slender vacuoles. Within the vacuoles particles producing interference phenomenon are seen. On the tail of Hermissenda both white and blue lines lie side by side. The white is sometimes opaque, sometimes iridescent, the blue is always lustrous. In the opaque white lines vacuoles with very small particles, which are hardly distinguishable at a magnification of 10 < 100, are crowded very close together. They appear dirty brown in transmitted light, and no color is seen. White with a metallic lustre is produced by vacuoles with larger par- ticles less tightly packed. The individual elements here have the typical colors mentioned above. According to Mason (1926-1927, quoted by Fox, 1953), who observed similar degrees of opaque and iridescent white in butter- flies, opaque white is the result of diffuse reflection of light, and iridescence is due to interference. If vacuoles of all colors are mixed randomly, as in some of the lines on the tail of Hermissenda, white is produced. In a blue region, such as the blue lines on the tail and body, and the blue patches on some cerata, most Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 211 elements are either plain blue (in reflected light) or green-blue, and yellow or red elements are extremely rare or lacking altogether. In some specimens of Hermissenda yellow lines occur on the cerata below the range of the orange pigment. In these regions vacuoles golden yellow or copper-red in reflected light prevail, and green or blue elements are rare. It must be noted, however, that most of the yellow color seen superficially in Hermissenda is either due to the orange pigment combining with white producing structures, or to the effect of the underlying brown digestive diverticulum that gives the white pigment a yellow appearance. At the tip of the ceras, where there is neither orange pigment nor digestive gland, yellow was not found, but only white. In Trinchesia coerulea, on the other hand, structures such as those described in Hermissenda, produce a golden yellow color which is very intense even if the orange pigment is lacking. Solubility: The solubility of the color elements in Her- missenda \vas tested (see below). The solubility of the orange pigment in chloroform and in alcohol suggests that it is a carotenoid. The white, yellow and blue color elements, being soluble in dilute acids and alkali, and insoluble in organic solvents, might belong to the group of purines and pterines. No difference in solubility between white and blue regions could be detected. Slight differ- ences between the effect of HCl and NH:OH on irides- cence and dissolution of the vacuoles were observed, but the differences were not consistent. Sometimes the bodies would be dissolved more readily in NH:OH, sometimes more rapidly in HCl. Table 1 shows that any treatment with chemicals, whether organic or inorganic, immediately alters the structures responsible for iridescence. Ordinary fixation for histological purposes (Bouin, alcohol) leads to the destruction of both the orange and white or blue colors. The white structures can be preserved if fixing fluids free of acids, such as Helly’s fluid, are used. The orange pigment always disappears because of the extensive treatment with alcohol. B. Variation of the Color Pattern Description of different variants: One of the most con- stant features in the pattern of Hermissenda is a white or very light yellow triangle at the tip of the ceras, over- lying the cnidosac and the most distal part of the digestive diverticulum. The extreme tip of the ceras is always un- pigmented. The lower part of this triangle appears golden yellow because of the orange pigment overlying it. There may be more white, blue or yellow in the region proximal to the triangle. It is the arrangement and colcr of these color structures that vary most in the cerata of different individuals and even in cerata of a single speci- men. There may be: — a single straight line, or a broken line, white, bluc, light yellow or greenish-yellow Table 1 Solubility white, blue, yellow structures orange dissolved in cells orange bodies in muscle layer Inorganic Solvents 1% HCl structure immediately altered, iridescence disappears, vacuoles dissolved after 10 to 30 minutes 1% NH:OH as above Organic Solvents Chloroform structure immediately altered, iridescence disappears, vacuoles remain structure immediately altered, iridescence disappears, white changed to pink! vacuoles remain 90% Isopropyl alcohol unchanged color changed, bodies remain unchanged unchanged dissolved not dissolved within 30 min. dissolved not dissolved Page 212 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 — a large blue patch covering most of the dorsal side of the ceras — several white or blue or partly white, blue, light yellow, and greenish patches of irregular shapes — white granules scattered like fine dust, non-iridescent — no white, blue or yellow at all. In Figure 8 are shown a few examples of the various patterns found on the cerata of Hermissenda. Figure 8: Largest cerata of five different specimens, showing some of many color patterns. Orange = hatched; white or blue = dotted The intensity and extent of the orange pigment is also variable. The orange may be present only as a narrow ring in the upper zone of the ceras, overlying the region where the digestive diverticulum and the cnidosac meet, or it may extend more than half way down the ceras. In relatively few specimens is it completely lacking. The digestive diverticulum is usually dark brown at its base. Sometimes the extreme tip is also darker than the middle zone. The color of the middle zone, which is due to the digestive cells and dependent on food will be described in a later section. Pigment distribution: In the study on Trinchesia two general rules concerning the pigmentation of aeolid cerata were stated: 1. The visible, dorsal (“upper”) part of the ceras is always more heavily pigmented and carries a more com- plete color pattern than the invisible, ventral (“lower’’) part of the ceras. The most conspicuous elements of the color pattern in Hermissenda, i. e. the yellow triangle and white or blue lines or patches are confined exclusively to the dorsal part of the ceras. The orange pigment most often extends farther down the ceras on the dorsal than on the ventral side. Even the vacuole cells of the digestive diverticulum, which are responsible for the dark brown color, are much more numerous in the dorsal half of the digestive diverticulum than in the ventral one. 2. The proportions of the color patterns are not the same in cerata of different sizes. Elements of the pattern such as rings, lines, triangles, patches, spots, are relatively larger on small lateral than on long median cerata (the cnidosacs also are proportionately larger in short lateral cerata). In Trinchesia the golden yellow and blue rings could be measured fairly accurately. Since the color pattern in Hermissenda is less clear-cut, and the cerata are very mobile and contractile, no such measurements were made. But Figure 8 clearly shows that in Hermissenda the yellow triangle is relatively larger on small cerata. The number of vacuole cells too is relatively larger in small cerata. In lateral cerata the entire digestive diverticulum is dark brown, whereas in long median cerata only the basal part and sometimes the tip are dark brown. Factors influencing coloration: The factors influencing coloration may be roughly stated as follows: . Age of specimen . Food or other environmental factors . Constant features in one individual. = ON Age: In some of the Mediterranean aeolids it is very obvious that as individuals grow they accumulate an increasing amount of those pigments, which are distrib- uted evenly over a large area of the cerata or body, such as the violet in Coryphella pedata, the dark brown in Facelina rubrovittata, and to a lesser degree the orange in Trinchesia coerulea, whereas the relative amount of color- structures, such as the white, blue, or yellow, remains about the same. It is true that our very small specimens of Hermissenda (3-5 mm) had little orange pigment, yet there does not seem to be a direct relationship between growth and the increase in orange pigment. Specimens of 10 to 20 mm may have a much deeper orange color than large ones of 30 to 40 mm. 2. Food: In order to study the influence of food on the color of cerata, feeding and regeneration experiments were carried out. Specimens of Hermissenda were fed with: — Cerata or parts of body of other Hermissenda (being cannibalistic, the animals have to be kept separately!) — Various species of hydroids — Anthopleura — Gonads of sea urchins In one instance, where a deep red hydroid was used as food, the cerata of Hermissenda became distinctly red brown within one or two days. Otherwise a simple change of diet does not produce significant color changes in the cerata. Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 213 If normal healthy animals are kept without food for days or even months, the digestive diverticula in the cerata become extremely slender, and the upper light brown part eventually becomes almost transparent. The dark brown color at the base and in the small cerata, however, remains practically unchanged. Figure 9: Sets of large, medium and small cerata of two different specimens, showing that color pattern is relatively larger on small cerata. Left - front view; Right - side view. Orange = hatched. Regeneration: All the large cerata of a healthy animal are removed, and the animal is then kept in fresh sea water that is changed daily, for several days. Even without food the animal will usually regenerate its cerata within about a week or ten days to about one third of the original length. The regenerated cerata are transparent and have almost no color. If the animal is then given food, for example sea urchin eggs, the foodstuff is seen to enter and color the stomach and from there the digestive diverticula within a few hours. It is the digestive cells of the digestive gland that take in the food particles, and these vary in color according to the food. The dependence of their color on food is a very direct one. The most extreme results were obtained with the orange gonads of sea urchins, and with hydroids, whose endoderm was red, producing yellow or red-brown digestive cells respectively. With the other diets, such as Hermissenda-parts, other hydroids or sea anemones the correlation was not as striking. In contrast to the digestive cells, the contents of the vacuole cells are not influenced in the same degree by the nature of food. The dark elements of the ceras do not appear immediately after the fasting regenerating animal has been fed, but only two days later, and the color of the vacuoles is fairly constant irrespective of the food. Other environmental factors that might affect the coloration of a specimen, such as water temperature or salinity, were not investigated in the present study. 3. Stability of individual differences: | Regeneration experiments were carried out in order to determine whether the particular color pattern of an individual is a constant feature in that particular individual, and is reproduced during regeneration in the same way as it had been before. All the longer cerata of 18 specimens were removed, the characteristics of their color pattern having been recorded. The animals were kept singly in aquaria and fed with cerata of other Hermissenda or sea urchin gonads (all specimens were given the same type of food at the same time). The process of regeneration will briefly be described: Small transparent humps are visible as early as the second day after operation. On the fourth day tiny cerata with a light brown digestive diverticulum and a transparent cnidosac, but otherwise unpigmented, are present. About the seventh day the first color structures appear, usually a light-yellow or greenish-white dot at the site of the triangle. From the tenth day onward some orange pigment may be found. After two weeks the typical color pattern begins to be recognizable. The distal white elements form a triangle, and there may be some white, yellow or blue basally to it. The cerata have now attained an average length of 2 mm, that is half or two thirds of their original length. Of the 18 specimens in this particular experiment (some 20 others had been operated on for preliminary experiments to determine the general course of regenera- tion), 14 survived for two weeks or more after the operation. The longest survival was 30 days. With regard to the color pattern the following results were obtained: The amount and arrangement of the orange pigment clearly is not fixed individually, but must depend on external factors. In the appearance or lack of blue or white, on the other hand, a certain tendency to produce the same individual pattern as before the operation can be recognized. No blue appeared in specimens which had not had it before the operation, and all those which had possessed a large amount of it originally deposited at least some blue in some of the regenerated cerata. It must be noted, however, that the distribution of blue on the many cerata of an individual is completely random; it is not the same ceras that is marked with blue before and after regeneration, and the shapes of the deposits also vary. Page 214 THE VELIGER Vol. 7: No. 4 Table 2 original pattern, before operation Blue Color regenerated pattern 14 to 30 days after operation 6 animals _ conspicuous blue on some cerata 4 animals _ some blue 4 animals no blue at all Orange 10 animals _—_— orange present 2 animals _—_ orange absent 1 animal very much orange 1 animal orange blue present on some cerata some color-structures on cerata basally to triangle, blue or white no blue orange present, but arrange- ment on cerata different orange present almost no orange in the same way as before General remarks on regeneration: The following obser- vations made during these regeneration experiments may be worth recording. Specimens of Hermissenda can survive without food for over a month in the aquarium; they even regenerate their cerata up to a certain point. During this time the tail is resorbed progressively until it is no more than a very short stump. Even if the animals are fed regularly, their tails become shorter during the regeneration process, and the animals decrease in body length as much as 25% (reducing from 20 mm to 15 mm, for example). In Trinchesia we observed that in cerata regenerated without the animal being fed, the structures producing the yellow and blue in the skin appeared, but the fat-sol- uble orange pigment was lacking. This was considered to be further evidence that the orange pigment is a carotenoid derived from food. In Hermissenda the orange pigment does appear in cerata regenerated without food; but the animal seems to have considerable reserves of carotenoids in the body, in the gonads and also in the orange stripes on the back and on the head. If all the cerata of a Hermissenda are removed - they can be picked off easily with watchmaker’s forceps - some tiny ones which are too small to be grasped with the forceps, always remain, mostly on the sides, but a few on the back. The latter must have appeared after the loss of a ceras, but were prevented from regenerating as long as all the other ones were present. We observed in fact that if only two median cerata are removed, they never grow longer than one quarter of their original length during the period of one month. If, however, all the other cerata are lost suddenly, these remaining “buds” grow very rapidly during the first days following operation, until they are almost twice as long. Lateral cerata do not grow out of proportion, but the median ones can be recognized as the longest and most developed ones even as long as three weeks after the operation. A typical example of regeneration is given here. Length of animal 12 mm Longest cerata 2 mm fourth day after operation: regenerating cerata 0.5 mm left-over cerata on back 1.2 mm left-over cerata on sides about 1 mm 19th day after operation: Length of animal 8 mm most regenerating cerata 1-15 mm left-over cerata on back 2 mm left-over cerata on sides about 1 mm It seems that the cerata which are prevented from regenerating to full length serve as a reserve among the full-grown, functioning ones and take over only if an accident occurs. SUMMARY The color pattern of Hermissenda crassicornis consists of the following elements: 1. Epidermis a) Fat-soluble orange pigment, probably a carotenoid, dissolved in the cells of the epidermis. Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 215 b) “Color structures” or granules, soluble in dilute acid and alkali, located in the lower part of the epidermis cells, that produce white, blue or yellow, sometimes iridescent color. 2. Digestive diverticulum a) Digestive cells, giving the ceras a light brown, ochre or red brown color, depending on food. b) Vacuole cells, dark brown in color, which are less directly dependent on food. The structure of the white, blue or yellow producing elements is described in some detail. It is assumed that iridescence is due to an interference phenomenon caused by minute particles contained in vacuoles. Some of the color patterns found most often in cerata of Hermissenda are described. The extreme variability of coloration observed in this species is due on the one hand to differences in the amount and distribution of the four basic color elements, and on the other hand to actual color differences of the digestive cells, whose color depends on food. Feeding and regeneration experiments throw some light on the question as to which features of the color pattern are influenced by external factors, and which are constant in an individual. LITERATURE CITED BUrcin-Wyss, ULRIKE 1961. Die Riickenanhange von Trinchesia coerulea (Mon- Rev. Suisse Zool. 68: 461 - 582; plt. TAGU). Fox, Denis L. 1953. | Animal biochromes and structural colours. Cambridge Univ. Press; 379 pp.; 3 plts.; 37 text figs. GRAHAM, ALASTAIR 1938. The structure and function of the alimentary canal of aeolid molluscs, with a discussion on their nematocysts. Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 59: 267 - 307 Marcus, ERNST 1961. | Opisthobranch mollusks from California. The Veliger 3 (Supplement, pt. I): 1-85; plts. 1-10. (Feb. 1, 1961) O’DonocHuE, CuHartes H. 1927. Notes on a collection of nudibranchs from Laguna Beach, California. Journ. Ent. Zool. Pomona Coll. 19: 77 to 119; plts. 1-3. Page 216 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 Kitchen Midden Mollusks of San Luis Gonzaga Bay BY EUGENE COAN Department of Biological Sciences, Stanford University Stanford, California 94305 (Plate 28; 1 Table) ON A COLLECTING TRIP to San Luis Gonzaga Bay, Baja California, Mexico, in December, 1963, a large Indian midden was observed. The species present in the midden were noted and photographs were taken of what appeared to be figures made on the surface of the ground using arrangements of shells. After returning to California I learned that Mrs. Faye B. Howard of Santa Barbara had made similar obser- vations during her visit to the same area in May, 1957. Because residents have recently disturbed the deposit by the construction of an air strip (i.e. since Mrs. Howard’s visit in 1957), the location of this extensive midden, a list of the species present, and photographs of the figures are put on record. Midden material occurs along the entire west end of the bay, from the swampy channels on the south to the present settlement on the north. Mrs. Howard visited the southern end of this area, while the members of the 1963 trip camped near the northern end. In the latter area, the midden is underlain by a well consolidated Late Pleistocene marine deposit, while the midden itself is loosely consolidated and contains typical midden species. Three published reports include lists of the shells in Indian middens in the Gulf of California area; they are: Girrorp (1946) on Puerto Penasco, ScHENCK & GIFFORD (1952) on San Felipe, and Emerson (1960) on San José Island. The first two lists were published prior to Keen (1958), and some names of the mollusks do not agree with current usage. In order to bring these two lists up to date, and for purposes of comparison, the three lists are added to mine from San Luis Gonzaga Bay (see Table 1). ScHinck & Girrorp (I. c.) gave no measure of species-frequency. This table gives an indication of the relative abundance of the various species used as food by Indians throughout the area of the Gulf of California. It is probable that most of the small and uncommon gastropods were attached to pelecypods or picked up out of curiosity. The only gastropods that seem to have been of importance are Muricanthus nigritus and Strombus gracilior. There are many species of clams, which formed an important item in the Indian diet. Figures 1 and 2 (Plate 28) show the midden and some of the species contained in it. Of the species present in the San Luis Gonzaga midden, only Trachycardium consors has not recently been collected in the bay and has not been reported north of Bahia de Los Angeles, Baja California. Two similar figures were observed in 1963, and one of these is illustrated here (Figure 3, Plate 28). Because the figure is on the crest of a hill, a clear perspective could not be achieved, and the representation, presumably that of a man, is indistinct. The other figure, a few feet away, was not photographed. Both were surprisingly clear when seen in the field. Mrs. Howard cleared the area Explanation of Plate 28 Figure 1: Midden on west side of San Luis Gonzaga Bay. The most abundant species is Strombus gracilior. Figure 2: Close-up of midden surface, showing valves of Glycymeris gigantca, two fragments of Muricanthus nigritus (center and left), and one specimen of Strombus gracilior (left). Figure 3: Human figure made with Strombus gracilior. Cluster in background represents head; body is in foreground. Figure 4: Figure of a fish. Surrounding area has been cleared of other shells and rocks. The figure is composed of Anadara multi- costata (tail), Strombus gracilior (most of body), Muricanthus nigritus (center of foreground), Dosinia ponderosa (on either side of Muricanthus, and Pecten vogdesi (to right of rightmost Dosinia valve). Figures 1 and 4 were taken by Mrs. Faye Howard in May, 1957, while figures 2 and 3 were taken by the author in December, 1963. All four figures are reproductions from kodachrome slides. [Coan] Plate 28 Tue VE.IicER, Vol. 7. No. 4 2 Figure Figure 1 gure 4 13H Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 217 around the one that she photographed (Figure 4, Plate 28). It apparently represents a fish. It is possible that these figures are of later origin than the midden. The shells used in the drawings are species common throughout the midden. The figures seen in 1963 were partially overgrown with vegetation, and each shell was half-buried in sand. LITERATURE CITED EMERSON, WILLIAM K. 1960. Results of the Puritan-American Museum of Natural History Expedition to Western Mexico, 12: Shell middens of San José Island. Am. Mus. Novitates, No. 2013: 1-9, 4 figs. (18 August 1960) Girrorp, E, W. 1946. | Archaeology in the Punta Pefiasco Region, Sonora. Am. Antiquity 11 (4): 215-221; 1 fig. Kern, A. Myra 1958. Sea shells of tropical west America; marine mollusks from Lower California to Colombia. Stanford Univ. Press, xi + 624 pp.; illus. Stanford, Calif. Scuenck, W. Ecpert &« E. W. Girrorp (April 1946) 1952. Archaeological sites on opposite shores of the Gulf of California, Am, Antiquity 17 (3): 265. (January 1952) Table 1: Indian Midden Mollusca PELECYPODA Arca pacifica (SowERBy, 1833) Barbatia reeveana (pD’OrBicNy, 1846) Anadara formosa (SoweErsy, 1833) Anadara multicostata (SoweERBy, 1833) Glycymeris gigantea (REEVE, 1843) Glycymeris maculata (BRopEriP, 1832) Glycymeris multicostata (SowERBY, 1833) Mytella guyanensis (LAMaRcK, 1819) Modiolus capax (Conran, 1837) Pteria sterna (Gouxp, 1851) Pinctada mazatlanica (HANLEy, 1856) Ostrea angelica RocHEBRUNE, 1895 Ostrea fishert DALL, 1914 Ostrea palmula CarPENTER, 1856 Pecten vogdest ARNOLD, 1906 Aequipecten circularis (SowERBY, 1835) Lyropecten subnodosus (SowERBy, 1835) Spondylus sp. (unidentifiable) Spondylus princeps Broverip, 1833 Anomia peruviana p’Orsicny, 1846 Cardita affinis californica DesHayEs, 1854 Chama buddiana C. B. ApaMs, 1852 Chama frondosa Broverip, 1835 Trachycardium consors (SowERsBy, 1833) Trachycardium panamense (Sowersy, 1833) Trigoniocardia biangulata (BRoDERIP & SoweErsy, 1829) Laevicardium clatum (Sowersy, 1833) Periglypta multicostata (SowERBy, 1835) Megapitaria squalida (SowerBy, 1835) Dosinia ponderosa (Gray, 1838) Chione californiensis (BrRopERtIP, 1835) Chione undatella (SoweErBy, 1835) 121 SHES Gip eS ay Lon 1 x 5 8 7 6 6 7 2 x 7 8 2 x 4 7 1 x 9 3 x 9 9 x 4 9 9 4 9 4 9 7 2 x 7 1 x 3 x 9 5 8 1 x 7 2 x 6 7 4 8 2 x 6 3 6 9 4 8 Page 218 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 Chione fluctifraga (SowERBy, 1853) Protothaca grata (Say, 1831) Tagelus affinis (C. B. Anas, 1852) Tagelus californianus (Conrap, 1837) GASTROPODA Diodora inaequalis (SowErRBy, 1835) Tegula mariana Dax, 1919 Tegula rugosa (A. Apams, 1853) Turbo fluctuosus Woop, 1828 Turbo squamiger REEveE, 1843 Cerithium maculosum Kiener, 1841 Cerithium stercusmuscarum VALENCIENNES, 1833 Crepidula cf. C. onyx Sowersy, 1824 Crucibulum scutellatum (Woop, 1828) Crucibulum spinosum (Sowersy, 1824) Polinices reclusianus (DrsHayes, 1839) Cypraea annettae Dat, 1909 Strombus galeatus Swainson, 1823 Strombus gracilior SowERBY, 1825 Strombus granulatus Swainson, 1822 Muricathus sp. (unidentifiable) Muricanthus nigritus (Puivippi, 1845) Acanthina angelica I. OtpRoyp, 1918 Anachis coronata (SowERBY, 1832) Cantharus macrospira (BERRY, 1957) (?) as “Solenosteira anomala”’ Melongena patula (BRopERIP & SoweErRBY, 1829) Oliva incrassata (SOLANDER, 1786) Conus princeps LINNAEUS, 1758 PyP: 1 1 S) 18: x x * SHlaGs Sujal on > i | > i I 1 Puerto Pefiasco (Girrorp, 1946) 1 = found in one site 3 = found in three sites ? San Felipe (ScHENCK & Girrorp, 1952) 2 = found in two sites xX = present, no quantitative measure given ® San Luis Gonzaga Bay 4 = present 5 = common 6 = very common ~ San José Island (Emerson, 1960) 7 =rare or uncommon 8=common 9 = very common Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 219 Cypraea: A List of the Species BY JERRY DONOHUE Allan Hancock Foundation for Biological Research * University of Southern California, Los Angeles, California 90007 OF INTEREST TO COLLECTORS, malacologists, students, specialists, and others, is a definitive list of the living spe- cies comprising the genus Cypraea s.l. This field is, unfor- tunately, a rather fluid one, and specific names flit in and out, appear, then disappear into synonymy with discon- certing frequency. It is probably not fair to place the entire blame for this state of affairs on the controversy between the splitters and the lumpers, because the ever increasing activity of collectors in the field continually makes additional material available to the specialists for analysis and study. The literature on Cypraea is, as is well-known, vast, scattered, and confusing, and it is accordingly impossible, indeed, inadvisable, to attempt a complete review of all of the developments which have taken place since the original enumeration of the genus by Linnaeus. We choose, instead, as a starting point, the familiar Prodrome of the ScuttpErs (1938 - 1939). In this paper, which is still a standard reference, 165 species were listed. Some, but not all, of the developments since then are traced below, with the emphasis, of course, placed on the work of ScHILDER. In 1940, in a paper on the distribution and abundance of Cypraeidae, the ScuiLpers (1940a) listed the same 165 species, but in a drastically altered systematic order. It seems appropriate to point out that this revised order is the one used by the Scuixpers in their subsequent publi- cations, and that, notwithstanding, the previous order used by them in the Prodrome is the one usually used by other authors up to the present time. The Scui_pers (1940b) then increased the number of species to 171 by elevating 6 former subspecies to speci- fic rank. These are: listeri (from felina), acicularis (from spurca), eburnea (from miliaris), succincta (from onyx), tortirostris (from chinensis), and thersites (from friendiz). Shortly thereafter ScumtpERr (1941), in a paper on the affinity and distribution of Cypraeacea, tabulated the large number of known fossil and recent examples of the superfamily, and at the same time reduced the number of living species of Cypraea s. 1. to 156 by lowering 15 former species to subspecific rank. These are: acicularis ? Contribution No, 267, (into spurca), eburnea (into miliaris), succincta (into onyx), tortirostris (into chinensis), thersites (into friendii) , maculifera (into histrio), broderipu (into nivo- sa), leviathan (into carneola), macandrewi (into becki), gambiensis (into zonaria), petitiana (into pyrum), nigro- punctata (into arabicula), comptoni (into piperita), mayt (into angustata), and hesitata (into armeniaca). It may be noted that the first five of these pairs are among the six which had just previously been split (see preceding paragraph). Somewhat later, STEADMAN & Corton (1946) pub- lished a key to the subfamilies and genera of Cypraeidae, and addended a systematic list of 172 species. The order in this list is roughly that used by the ScuiLpErs (1938 to 1939); the differences in the assignments among the genera need not concern us here. What is of interest, on the other hand, is the increase of seven in the number of species over the 165 listed in the Prodrome of the Scui1- pers. Unfortunately, this increase is not due merely to the splitting off of seven subspecies by STEADMAN & Cort- TON. Detailed analysis of the two lists shows that Sre«p- MAN & Cotton included 26 taxa as species which were either unknown to or ignored by the ScuILpErs, or which they classed as subspecies or synonyms. Conversely, the ScHILDERS included 19 taxa as species which STEADMAN « Corton cither classed as subspecies or relegated to the synonymy of other species. It is this rather messy situation which leads to the net increase of seven mentioned above. The classification of STEADMAN & Corton follows closely that of others of the Australian school - notably IREDALE - and it has not won universal acceptance. For this reason, interesting though they may be, the individual differences between the list of SrEADMAN & CoTTON on the one hand and that of the Scuipers on the other hand will not be detailed here. It would seem, however, that the total num- ber of these differences is considerably larger than one would expect to find between different authorities. In the next catalog of the ScuitpERs (1952*) the 165 species listed are identical with those of the Prodrome. * Written in 1940, but (due to WW ITI) not published until 1952. Page 220 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 The compilation by ALLAN (1956) includes approxi- mately 171 species. This work follows closely the list and arrangement of STEADMAN & Cotton, but does not always make it clear just what her analysis of the situation is. She apparently assigns specific rank to five subspecies of STEADMAN & Corton, while at the same time reducing seven of the species of the latter to subspecies or synonyms. ALLAN also adds one species, rosselli, which had been established after the paper of STEADMAN & CoTTON by Corton (1948). [Note: The reference in ScHILDER (1961a) for the original description of rosselli is incorrect. | The subspecies aequinoctialis was split from annettae by ScuitpER (1958). [Note: The date 1938 for this reference as given in ScuHitpER (1961a) is apparently a misprint. | Next, ScHILpEr (1961 a) listed the new names accepted by him since the publication of the Prodrome. These include one name change, viz., from the preoccupied arenosa Gray to schilderorum IREDALE, the elevation of aequinoctialis out of annettae, two admissions of former synonyms as species, viz., ostergaardi, distinct from helvo- la, and latior, distinct from teres, and nine newly described species, viz., langfordi, teramachti, episema, hammondae, euclhia, rosselli, wilkinsi, katsuae, and raysummersi. The total increase over the number of species listed in the Prodrome is thus eleven. GrirFirHs (1961) then proposed a revision of the subgenus Notocypraea. He increased the four Notocypraea 5.1. of ScumpEr (1941) to ten by adding the species compton, dissecta, emblema, euclia, moelleri, and wilkinsi to the list. As a part of a discussion of size variations in cowries, ScHILDER (1961b) presented a list of 176 species which was stated to “have been arranged, with some slight emendations, according to the writer’s last catalog (ScH1L- pER, 1941).” It will be recalled that this last catalog contained 156 species; the “slight emendations” (aside from some minor changes in the systematic order) are: deletion of one species, viz., wazkikiensis, addition of five new species, viz., rosselli, ostergaardi, langfordi, terama- chu, and raysummersi; elevation of 16 subspecies, viz., thersites (from friendii), maculifera (from histrio), bro- deripu (from nivosa), leviathan (from carneola), marga- rita (from cicercula), macandrewi (from beckii), tomlini (from cernica), acicularis (from spurca), eburnea (from miliaris), gambiensis (from zonaria), aequinoctialis (from annettae), petitiana (from pyrum), nigropunctata (from arabicula), reticulifera (from declivis), and bicolor and comptonii (from piperita) ; the overall increase in the number of species is accordingly 20. It should be pointed out that of the above 15 subspecies now classed as species, 11 were among the 15 previously demoted from specific to subspecific rank by ScHILpER (1941); it is therefore obvious that there is a total difference of opinion with regard to eight species-subspecies in the two lists. Further- more, of the nine new species accepted by ScHILDER (1961 a), only four are included in ScuitpER (1961 b) ; those omitted are: episema (included in venusta), ham- mondae (possibly included in raysummersi - even though hammondae is the prior name), euclia and wilkinn (a revision of Notocypraea is promised), and katsuae (which simply vanished). Somewhat later, Scu1LtpER (1961c) pointed out some additions to the earlier paper (ScHiLpErR, 1961 a). These include recognition of luchuana and katsuae as species, withholding recognition of the specific status of the recently described kuroharai and musumea as species (Die Abbildungen sind mir z. Zeit noch unzugang- lich”), and a short discussion of the situation with regard to Notocypraea. The list of species compiled by GrirrirHs (1962) num- bers 185. Referring back to the Prodrome, we find that the following twelve have been added: langfordi, tera- machi, wilkinsi, eucha, musumea, raysummersi, ham- mondae, katsuae, luchuana, episema, rosselli, and kuro- harai; the following ten former subspecies or synonyms have been elevated: thomas: (from macandrewt), oster- gaardi (from helvola), aequinoctialis (from annettae), mollert (from angustata), emblema (from angustata), dissecta (from pipcerita), latior (from teres), tortirostris (from chinensis), thersites (from friend), and contraria (from friendiz) ; furthermore mayi is considered a syno- nym of comptonii, and waikikiensis has disappeared into unspecified synonymy. More recent activity includes the following proposals: ScHILDER (1962a) nominated titan as a new species. It is a large African form of carneola, but said to be specifically distinct from it. ScHILDER (1962b) elevated luchuana to specific status, and placed it intermediate between pallidula and quadmi- maculata. ScuILpER (1963a) nominated catei as a new species. The unique shell had previously been recorded as venusta (Cate, 1962). SCHILDER & SUMMERS (1963) nominated casta, a white, unspotted form recalling comptonii, as a new species. As an example of the vicissitudes of a new species, the sub- sequent chronicle of casta is of rare interest. GrirFiTtHs (1963) came to the conclusion on the basis of the examination of 25 shells from the same locality, that it was likely that the tendency to albinism (of the Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 221 form called casta) was a function of environment alone, and that it did not merit taxonomic separation (from comptonit) . ScHILper (1964a) then replied on the basis of certain characteristics of 39 specimens, that casta was not an extreme variant of comptonii, but rather a mutant deserv- ing of taxonomical separation (at the species level as implied by the title of the paper). Branp (1964) reported the results of the examination of 26 specimens, and concluded that there was an uninter- rupted series from the “dark end” of comptonii to the “white end” of casta, but then, curiously, stated that the name casta was essential for clarity even if it did not represent a true species. GrirFitHs (1964a) then asserted, after a short discus- sion of the statistical data of ScuitpER (1964a) and Branp (1964) that it was not possible to accept the name casta for clarity, as BRANn suggested, unless the species were accepted, but that the International Rules clearly forbade that position. Finally (it is to be hoped), Scui_pER (1964b) demoted casta from specific rank to that of, in his notation, an infraspecies of a subspecies (comptonii) of the species piperita. A new species, dayritiana, was nominated by CaTE (1963). It was described as being related to coxeni, luchu- ana, pallidula, interrupta, and quadrimaculata, but, of course, specifically distinct from them. The total number of living cowrie species was then placed at 170 by Scuttper (1963 b) in a paper on nomen- clatorial problems. This number was stated to have been arrived at by adding the number of cowrie species dis- covered since 1941 to those in “my last catalog”, i.e., Scuitper, 1941. The number of living species in Scut- DER (1941) is 156; it therefore follows that ScHmpER considers that 14 species were discovered since then, unless the number 170 is a misprint. There is an obvious dis- crepancy here, because the number of species listed in ScHILpeR (1961b) is 176. A possible explanation here is that the “170” of ScHitpER (1963b) should read “180”, in which case four species described since 1961 must be added to the list of Scui_peR (1961 b). It just so happens that four new species were in fact created during that period, viz., titan, luchuana, catei, and dayritiana (see above). The status of kuroharai and katswae was then discussed by ScuiLper (1963 c) ina short paper, in which they both were recognized as species. In this same paper musumea was said to be indistinguishable from katsuae. The list of CeERNoHoRSKy (1963) enumerates 186 spe- cies, with two more added in the Addenda. The excess of eight over 180 comes about as follows: CERNOHORSKY reduces tomlini and acicularis to subspecies (of cernica and spurca respectively), but adds ten species by accepting the ten Notocypraea of GrirrirHs (1961) in place of the seven of Scuitper (1963), listing hesitata as distinct from armeniaca, raysummersi as distinct from hammondae, tortirostris as distinct from chinensis, summersi as distinct from pallidula, and accepts katsuae, kuroharai, and musu- mea. The situation is not quite that simple, however, for CERNOHORSKY, at the end of his list, classes aequinocti- alis, armeniaca, latior, listert, raysummersi, titan and tortirostris as “doubtful Cypraea species.” To further complicate things, this list of doubtful species, which comes after the presumably definitive list, is inconsistent with some of the “notes” which follow. It is mentioned in the notes that further research is necessary in the case of armeniaca, stated that it is doubtful that latior is a valid species, and suggested that raysummersi might prove to be a subspecies of hammondae. (The same opinion was recently attributed to R.H.Summers by an anonymous (1963) author. On the other hand, GrirrirHs (1964b) expressed the opinion that hammondae and raysummersi were both distinct, valid species, on the basis of consider- able and distinct differences between them.) Moreover, CERNOHORSKyY does not give his reasons for the doubts concerning aequinoctialis and listeri, the questioning of tortirostris is equivocal, and, finally, titan is not questioned, but accepted. Even more contradictory is the rejection, in the notes, of species not included in the “doubtful” category, viz., margarita and musumea, and the impli- cation that katsuae is the Japanese race of hammondac; margarita, which was considered a subspecies by the ScHILDERS in the Prodrome, in 1940a and 1940b, and by SCHILDER in 1941, but elevated by him in 1961b, is considered by CerNoHorRsKy to be merely an extreme variant of cicercula, an opinion with which ScHILpER, in a private communication, is stated to concur, while musu- mea is stated “with all probability” to be identical with katsuae (the reasons why CERNOHORSKY retained mar- garita and musumea in his list are not given). With regard to suwmmersi, to which CeRNoHORSKY accords specific status, additional (later) opinions support this conclusion, such as those of R.H.Summers (see ANoNy- mous 1963) and CerNoHorsky (1964a and 1964b). The Notocypraea tangle was recently unravelled by Scuitper (1964b), who allowed four or five species, namely, pulicaria, bicolor, piperita, angustata, and, pos- sibly, dechuis. SCHILDER & SCHILDER (1964) then listed 160 species, as well as 41 “well-recognizable” subspecies, in an interesting paper which gives the lengths of the largest and smallest Page 222 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 ii aE ae ne ee eee ne i ee known examples of each species. The systematic order, with a number of minor rearrangements, follows that of Scuitper (1961 b). It should be noted that the total of 160 differs not only from the 176 of Scuitper (1961b), but also from the 170 (conjectured above, apparently erroneously, to be a misprint for 180) of ScHILDER (1963 b). The decrease of 16 from 176 to 160 comes about as follows: four new species, catci, rabaulensis, katsuae, and luchuana, are added; one former subspecies, superstes is accorded specific status (split from martini) ; one spe- cies, leviathan, disappears from the list (and hence is not now considered an even well-recognizable subspecies) ; and 20 species are demoted to subspecies, mexicana into isabella, cervinetta into cervus, obvelata into annulus, tomlini into cernica, ostergaardi into boivint, acicularis into spurca, nebrites into erosa, eburnea and lamarcki into miliaris, granulata into nucleus, gambiensis into zonaria, petitiana into pyrum, acquinoctialis into annettae, reticuli- fera (as occidentalis) into bicolor, comptonii into piperita, declivis into angustata, listeri into felina, latior into rash- leighana, subteres into teres, and coloba into chinensis. It is interesting that dayritiana is classed as a subspecies of luchuana, raysummersi as a subspecies of hammondae, that t?tan and suwmmersi do not even appear as “well- recognizable” subspecies, and that margarita is listed as a distinct species. Finally, a species accepted in 1963, kuroharai, is not on the list. The list of WacNER & Appotr (1964) contains 163 species of Cypraea, in alphabetical order. As might be expected, the difference of three between this list and the 160 species of ScHILDER & SCHILDER (1964) does not arise in a simple way. Analysis of the two lists reveals the following differences: relative to the species of the Scuit- DERS, WAGNER & ABBOTT consider 14 of them subspecies, viz., artuffeli (of clandestina), bicolor (of piperita), cath- olicorum (of esontropia), diluculum (of ziczac) erythrae- ensis (of stolida), grayana (of depressa), hammondae (of gracilis), kienert (of ursellus), luchuana (of pallidu- la), macandrewi (of becki), margarita (of cicercula), minoridens (of microdon), owenti (of ursellus), and serrulifera (of microdon) ; in addition, ovum is included in the synonymy of errones, fuscodentata in that of angustata, superstes in that of martini, and catei in that of venusta, while four names not in the ScHILDER-SCHILDER list are used: coffea (considered by ScHiLDER & SCHILDER (1938) a synonym of ursellus), darwini (apparently a sub-fossil specimen of nigropunctata, according to ScuiL- DER (1961a)), facifer (a subspecies of limacina in SCHILDER & SCHILDER (1938) ), and verconis (a subspe- cies of angustata in (1964b) ). [Note: WAGNER & ABBOTT use angustata for the South African species called fuscodentata by ScuiprR, and verconis for the South Australian species called angustata by ScuiLper.] Fur- thermore, WaGNER & ApnoTT assign specific rank to the following 18 taxa classed as subspecies by ScHiL- DER & SCHILDER (1964): casta, cervinetta, coloba, declivis, eburnea, granulata, hesitata, kuroharai, la- marckii, latior, moelleri, musumea, ostergaardi, ray- summersi, thomasi, titan, tomlini, and wilkinsi. It is interesting that nine of these are among the 20 recently demoted by the Scui~pEerRs (1964), and that WAGNER « ABBort really give ambiguous status to casta (“may be comptont’”’), raysummersi (“may be hammondae”), and titan (“probably large carneola with aberrant radula”). Finally WAGNER & ABBott make no mention of rabaul- ensis: one suspects that this is the unique, undescribed specimen alluded to by Summers (see ANONYMOUS, 1963). This suspicion is confirmed by the recent paper by ScuiLper (1964c) in which rabaulensis is nominated as a new species, on the basis of a unique specimen in the Summers collection. CONCLUSION As must be obvious from the foregoing discussion, it is not possible at the present time - indeed, one doubts whether it will ever be possible - to devise a definitive list of the species of living C'ypraea. It is probably expect- ing too much to hope that unanimity will ever be attained among the numerous authorities. Accordingly, we present four lists: first, 142 “non-controversial” species recognized both by Scui_pErR (1964) and by WacNER & ABBOTT (1964) ; second, 18 “provisional” species recognized by SCHILDER, but not by WAGNER & AssotT; third, 18 “pro- visional” species definitely recognized by WAGNER & AB- BoTT but not by ScHILpER; and fourth, 29 “controversial” species, i.e.,most of those which at one time or another during the past quarter century have been accorded speci- fic status. Following each entry in the second, third, and fourth lists is given, in parentheses, the species of List One to which each of the subspecies or synonyms( as presently considered) comprising these three lists is assigned. In view of the past history of this field, it should not be surprising to find, at some future date, some of the occu- pants of the last three lists transferred to List One (or vice versa). Because the systematic arrangement is in a state of flux, the order in all four lists is alphabetical, for easy reference. Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 223 LIST ONE Non-controversial species achatidea caurica felina leucodon picta subviridis albuginosa cernica fimbriata limacina piperita sulcidentata algoensis ceruus friendu lurida poraria surinamensis amphithales childreni fultoni lutea pulchella talpa angustata chinensis fuscodentata lynx pulchra teramachu annettae cicercula fuscorubra maculifera pulicaria teres annulus cinerea gangranosa mappa punctata tessellata arabica citrina gaskoini marginalis pyriformis testudinaria arabicula clandestina globulus marginata pyrum teulerei argus contaminata goodalli mariae quadrimaculata __ thersites armeniaca coxent gracilis martini rashleighana tigris asellus cribellum guttata mauritiana Teevel turdus aurantium cribraria helvola microdon robertsi ursellus barclayi cumingi hirasei miliaris rosselli valentia becku cylindrica hirundo moneta sanguinolenta ventriculus bistrinotata decipiens histrio mus saulae venusta boivinit depressa hungerfordi nigropunctata schilderorum vitellus broderipu dillwyni interrupta nlvosa scurra vredenburgi camelopardalis edentula irrorata nucleus semiplota walkeri capensis eglantina isabella ocellata spadicea xanthodon caputdraconis erosa katsuae onyx spurca zebra caputserpentis errones labrolineata pallida staphylaea ZICZAC carneola esontropia langfordi pallidula stercoraria zonaria exusta lentiginosa pantherina stolida LIST TWO LIST FOUR “Provisional” species, recognized by SCHILDER Controversial species artuffeli (clandestina) luchuana (pallidula) acicularis (spurca) listeri (felina) bicolor (piperita) macandrewi (beckit) aequinoctialis (annettae) mayi (piperita) catei (venusta) margarita (cicercula) bregeriana (walkeri) mexicana (isabella) catholicorum (esontropia) minoridens (microdon) casta (piperita) nebrites (erosa) diluculum (ziczac) ovum (errones) comptoni (piperita) obvelata (annulus) erythraecnsis (stolida) owen (ursellus) contraria (friendit) pericalles (pulchella) grayana (depressa) rabaulensis dayritiana (luchuana) petitiana (pyrum) hammondae (gracilis) serrulifera (microdon) dissecta (piperita) raysummersi (hammondae ) kieneri (ursellus ) superstes (martini) emblema (angustata) reticulifera (bicolor) episema (venusta) subteres (teres) LIST THREE euclia (bicolor) succincta (onyx ) “Provisional” species, not recognized by SCHILDER gambiensis (Conan eS (gallica) icterina (moneta) titan (carneola) cervinetta (cervus) kuroharai (schilderorum) leviathan (carneola) tortirostris (chinensis) coffea (ursellus) lamarcku (miliaris) waikikiensis (fimbriata) coloba (chinensis) latior (rashleighana) darwini (nigropunctata) moelleri (angustata) declivis (angustata) musumea (katsuae ) LITERATURE CITED eburnea (miliaris) ostergaardi (boivinit) facifer (limacina) thomasi (macandrewi) ALLAN, JOYCE granulata (nucleus ) tomlini (cernica) 1956. Cowry shells of world seas. Georgian House, Mel- hesitata (armeniaca) wilkinsi (bicolor) bourne. i-x; pp. 1-170; plts. 1-15 Page 224 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 ANONYMOUS 1963. Personality of the month. Raymond H. Summers. Hawaiian Shell News 12 (1): 7 (November 1963) Brann, D. J. 1964. Notocypraea casta. The Cowry 1 (6) :85 - 87 (18 January 1964) Cate, Crawrorp NEILL 1962. Comparison of two rare cowrie species (Gastropoda) The Veliger 5 (1): 6 - 14; plts. 1-4; 2 text figs. (1 July 1962) 1963. A new cowrie from west-central Philippines. The Veliger 5 (4): 140 - 143; plt. 15; 1 text fig. (1 Apr. 1963) CrerNouorsky, WALTER OLIVER 1963. Catalogue of living Cypraeidae. _C. G. Smith, Frank- furt/Main; 24 unnumbered pages The Cowry 1 (6): 81-82 (18 January 1964) 1964b. The Cypraeidae of Fiji (Mollusca : Gastropoda). The Veliger 6 (4): 177 - 201; plts. 21-26; 1 Text fig.; 1 map (1 April 1964) 19644. Note on C. summersi. Corton, BERNARD CHARLES 1948. Southern Australian Gastropoda. Part III. Roy. Soc. South Austral. 72 (1): 30-32 GrirFiTHs, R. JoHN 1961. Notocypraea - the shells. [renumbered from 10 - 14 in 1 (3): 48} (April 1961) The Cowry 1 (3): 35-38 (1 February 1962) The Cowry 1 (5): 67 - 68 (1 March 1963) The Cowry 1 (6): 87 (18 January 1964) The Cowry 1 (6): 88-89 (18 January 1964) Trans. The Cowry 1 (2): 26-30 1962. List of species. 1963. A note on Cypraea casta. 1964a. Yet another note on C. casta. 1964b. C. hammondae. SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED 1941. Verwandtschaft und Verbreitung der Cypraeacea. Arch. Molluskenk. 73 (2-3): 57-120; 2 plts. 1958. | Uber drei seltene Cypraeacea. Arch. Molluskenk. 87: 81 - 87 1961 a. New cowries described since 1938. The Cowry 1 (2): 17 - 21 [renumbered from 1 - 5 in 1 (3): 48] (April 1961) 1961b. Another statistical study in size of cowries. The Veliger 4 (2): 107-112 (1 October 1961) 1961c. Nachtrage zum Katalog der Cypraeacea von 1941. Arch. Molluskenk. 90: 145 - 153 1962a. Zur Kenntnis der Cypraeidae. 5. Eine neue Riesen- form aus Ostafrika. Arch. Molluskenk. 91: 207 - 212 1962 b. Note on Bistolida luchuana Kuropa. The Cowry 1 (@)3 B (1 February 1962) 1963 a. Further remarks on two rare cowrie species. The Veliger 5 (4): 125 - 128 1963 b. Lumpers and splitters. (1 April 1963) The Veliger 6 (2): 104-110 (1 October 1963) 1963c. Zur Kenntnis der Cypraeidae. 6. Uber zwei seltene Arten aus Japan. Arch. Molluskenk. 92: 123 - 130 1964a. A further note on N. casta. The Cowry 1 (6): 83 - 84 (18 January 1964) 1964b. Provisional classification of the genus Notocypraea ScuiLper, 1927. The Veliger 7 (1): 37-42 (1 July 1964) 1964c. Zur Kenntnis der Cypraeidae. 7. Eine neue Notadusta aus Melanesien. Arch. Molluskenk. 93: 141 - 144 SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED, & MARIA SCHILDER 1938. | Prodrome of a monograph on living Cypraeidae. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London, 23 (3): 119-180; (1939) 23 (4) : 181 - 231; 1 text fig.; 9 maps. 1940 a. Die Verbreitung und Haufigkeit der rezenten Cyprae- idae. Arch. Molluskenk. 72 (2/3): 33-56 1940 b. Die Bestimmung der relativen Haufigkeit einer Art. Arch. Molluskenk. 72: 160 - 169 1952. Ph. Dautzenberg’s collection of Cypraeidae. Mém. Inst. Roy. Sci. Nat. Belgique (2) 45: 1 - 243; 4 plts. ScuiLpEr, Maria & FRANZ ALFRED SCHILDER Hawaiian (October 1964) ScHILper, Franz ALFRED & RayMonp H. SumMERS The Cowry 1 (5): (1 March 1963) 1964. Maxima and minima in cowry shells. Shell News 12 (12): 6-8 1963. | One more species of Notocypraea. 65 - 66 STEADMAN, W. R., & BERNARD C. Corton 1946. A key to the classification of the cowries (Cypraeidae) . Records South Austr. Mus. 8: 503 - 530; 6 pits. Wacne_r, Rosert J. L. « R. Tucker ABBotr 1964. Standard catalog of shells. ix + 190 pp.; illustr. Van Nostrand, Princeton; (16 November 1964) Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 225 A New Cowrie Race from North West Australia FRANZ ALFRED SCHILDER University of Halle, German Democratic Republic AND WALTER O. CERNOHORSKY Vatukoula, Fiji Islands (Plate 29; 6 Text figures) In CypRAEFIDAE, ESPECIALLY IN Cypracovulinae with a restricted range of distribution, many species show distinct subspecific differences between the populations inhabiting the North West coast of Australia and those living along the East coast of that continent. We recall the pairs of: Western races Eastern races Erosaria cernica (Sowrersy, 1870) viridicolor (CATE, 1962) tomlini ScHILpDER, 1930 Erronea subviridis (REEve, 1835) dorsalis SCHILDER & SCHILDER, 1938 subviridis (REEVE, 1835 Erronea cylindrica (Born, 1778) sowerbyana SCHILDER, 1932 cylindrica (Born, 1778 Palmadusta lutca (GMELIN, 1791) lutea (GMELIN, 1791) humphreysi (Gray, 1825 Purpuradusta gracilis (GAsKoIn, 1849) irescens (SOWERBY, 1870) macula (ANGAs, 1867 Cribraria cribraria (LINNAEUS, 1758) fallax (Smiru, 1881) melwardi (IREDALE, 1930) and several other species. To these species we add Purpuradusta hammondae (IrEDALE, 1939, p. 312, plt. 28, figs. 19, 20 [adult holo- type] and figs. 21, 22 [juvenile paratype]), the type locality of which is Clarence River in northern New South Wales. Its range extends from Woolgoolga to Clarence River, Moreton Bay, Stradbroke Island, Caloundra, Moo- loolaba, Maroochydore, Gladstone and Tryon Island off Yeppoon, and has also been reported from Yirrkala in eastern Arnhem Land (IrEDALE, 1939, p. 313); it has been collected in North West Australia, viz. at Broome (Cate, 1964, p. 18), at Point Samson (near Roebourne) and in the Dampier Archipelago(Bezout Island, Delambre Island, Sholl Island). The West Australian (““Dampierian”) specimens differ from the typical East Australian ones at least statistically in several characters so that we propose to separate them as Purpuradusta hammondae dampierensis SCHILDER & CERNOHORSKY, subsp. nov. (Plate 29, Figures 1, 2; Text figure 1) Shells smaller than the East Australian Purpuradusta hammondae (IrEDALE, 1939), much more slender, sub- pyriform (instead of rather ovate), with the anterior extremity attenuated, right side less margined, left side rather rounded, labial teeth less close as their relative number is smaller; dorsum greyish (instead of whitish) with the continuous true dorsal bands more accentuated while the transverse rows of square spots become obsolete, brown dorsal specks less close, dark lateral spots often sparse, base very pale brownish (instead of white). The formula expressing the length (in mm), the relative breadth (in %of length), the absolute number of labial: columellar teeth (the left anterior terminal ridge excluded) and the closeness of the teeth (according to ScuiLper, 1958, pp. 77-80) is 13.0/5816:1607 in the holotype in the British Museum, Natural History (No. 1964500), 12.1/59 18:16 7s in paratype 1 (coll. Schilder, No. 18197), and 11.8/60 16:13 om in the male paratype 2 (coll. Cernohorsky). These three type specimens were collected alive at Point Samson, West Australia, by D. Hurrell and L.J. Dorward in 1963. Other specimens studied by us came from Point Samson (coll. E. D. Harton), Delambre Island (coll. E.Fobes), and from Page 226 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 three islands in the Dampier Archipelago (coll. Ray Sum- mers) ; the measurements published by Cate (1964, p. 18) also refer to Purpuradusta hammondae dampierensis, whereas there are no data about the shell from Yirrkala, Arnhem Land (Irepate, 1939, p. 313). There is also a close relationship between Purpuradusta hammondae (especially the West Australian P h. dampi- erensis) and the Malayan P raysummersi ScHILDER, 1960 (p. 190, plt. 15, fig. 5) which seems to be restricted to the Philippine Islands. Though GrirrirHs (1964, p. 89) classified P hammondae and P. raysummersi as distinct species, we now think the latter to be a third race of P hammondae only: P raysummersi is larger and more slender, and its teeth of both lips are finer, more close and more numerous: the average formula is (adult speci- mens only) 14 P hammondae dampierensis 32 P hammondae hammondae 13.8/61 17:15 pp 38 P hammondae raysummersi 14.9/56 20:17 rr Furthermore, Purpuradusta hammondae raysummersi differs from the other two races by the more saturate colour, the more accentuated dorsal zones, and the tips of the extremities which are brownish-purple instead of rosy. ; The correlation between the length and relative breadth as well as that between the closeness of labial and colum- ellar teeth has been shown in two diagrams, in which Purpuradusta hammondae hammondae is indicated by circles, P h. dampierensis by crosses, and PR. h. raysummersi by black dots (the squares indicate the mean or median of each character). In size P h. hammondae is inter- mediate between the other two races, while in breadth it differs much from them (P h. dampierensis and Ph. raysummerst follow the usual line of regression small/ broad to large/slender, which can be observed in many cowrie species); in dentition R h. hammondae is also intermediate between the other two races. Extreme specimens without indication of habitat often cannot be identified exactly, as is usually the case with geographical races of cowries; the geographical distribu- tion of the three subspecies, however, viz. the East Australian Purpuradusta hammondae hammondae, the West Australian Ph. dampierensis and the North Malay- an Ph. raysummersi is well separable, as there are discon- 12.7/58 15:15 np tinuities in the range of the species P hammondae in the Torres Straits and in southern Indonesia. The species Purpuradusta hammondae can be easily separated from P gracilis (Gasxotn, 1849) by the blackish-brown spire blotch and by the regular dorsal zones and square-spotted bands, while a real dorsal blotch is absent (only in a few specimens from Moreton Bay, leg. A. Schelechoff, the crowded dorsal specks begin to coalesce into a small central blotch) ; in the Australian races the outlets are rosy (but in some specimens of the East Australian P hammondae, there is an accessory chest- nut spot above the left part of the rosy anterior extremity ). The radula of paratype 2 of Purpuradusta hammondae dampierensis (text figure 1, median tooth 0.091 mm o.I mm. eared uo)))) Figure 1: Purpuradusta hammondae dampierensis SCHILDER & CERNOHORSKY subspec. nov., male Paratype 2 from Point Samson broad) seems to differ from that of a P h. hammondae from Moreton Bay (text figure 2; leg. A. Schelechoff, coll. o.1 mm. Cee Figure 2: Purpuradusta hammondae hammondac (IREDALE) specimen from Moreton Bay Explanation of Plate 29 Figure 1: Purpuradusta hammondae dampierensis ScHILDER & CERNOHORSKY, subsp. nov., Holotype (British Museum, Natural History) ; length 13.0 mm. Figure 2: P hammondae dampicrensis, Paratype 2 (coll. Cernohorsky) ; length 11.8 mm. Figure 3: Three specimens of P hammondae hammondae (IrEDALE) from Stradbroke Island (coll. Cernohorsky) ; length: 15.0 mm, 13.9 nim and 13.4 mm respectively. Figure 4: Two specimens of P hhammondae raysummersi ScuiLpER, from Siasi Island (coll. Cernohorsky) ; length: 15.0 mm and 15.8 mm, respectively THE VELIGER, Vol. 7. No. 4 [ScuHILpER & CERNOHORSKyY] Plate 29 W. O. CeRNonorsky pho/o. 5 5 3 r ; ' ii \ \ ee ~ et a ; ic, P aa Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 227 Schilder No. 18389, shell 15.3 mm long, median tooth 0.097 mm broad) by the median and admedian teeth ary Figure 3: Purpuradusta hammondae raysummersi (SCHILDER) small specimen from Siasi Island MoV) Figure 4: Purpuradusta hammondae raysummersi (SCHILDER) large specimen from Siasi Island 66 BREADTH 5 ® « ® (op) Oo De) SS (0)) @ 56 54 52 lO ° Tl = 72 2 fe > [4 > Is 9 16° Ir > tt LENGTH © Purpuradusta hammondae x Ph. damprerensis means or e P raysummers! medians Figure 5: Diagrain showing the correlation between length and relative breadth of Purpuradusta hammondae (IREDALE) being elongate longitudinally, with the accessory lateral denticle less accentuated, and by the lateral teeth lacking the inner denticles. Such differences, however, occur also among Ph. raysummersi from Siasi Island: text figure 3 shows the radula of a specimen (coll. Summers, shell 12.3 mm long, median tooth 0.078 mm broad) which ap- proaches P h. dampierensis, whereas text figure 4 shows another specimen (coll. Schilder No. 11355, shell 15.7 mm long, median tooth 0.073 mm broad) which agrees with P h. hammondae. Therefore we think these differ- ences in radulae to be possibly sexual, but not racial. COLUMELLAR TEETH | SeaRIT\ an Ome O> mC MatanmerSoe nie ooUilm ny, LARVAL reerh Figure 6: Diagram showing the correlation between the closeness of labial and columellar teeth of Purpuradusta hammondae (IREDALE) LITERATURE CITED Cate, CrawrorpD NEILL 1964. | Western Australian cowries. 7 - 28; pit. 5; 1 map GrirFirHs, R. JoHN 1964. C. hammondae. The Veliger 7 (1): (1 July 1964) The Cowry 1 (6): 88-89 (18 January 1964) IREDALE, Tom 1939. Australian cowries: Part II. 9 (3) : 297 - 323; plts. 27 - 29 SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED Austral. Zoologist 1958. Die Bezeichnung der Zahndichte der Cypraeacea. Arch. Mollusk. 87 (1-3): 77-80. 1960. Zur Kenntnis der Cypraeidae. 89 (4/6): 185 - 192; plts. 14-15 Arch. Molluskenk. Page 228 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 Predator-Prey Reactions Between Two Marine Prosobranch Gastropods JEFFERSON J. GONOR Institute of Marine Science, University of Alaska and Organization for Tropical Studies, Ciudad Universitaria, Costa Rica’ INTRODUCTION SPECIFIC BEHAVIOR PATTERNS elicited from many mollusks by the touch of certain starfish or extracts from them have been demonstrated in experiments performed under la- boratory conditions (BuLLock, 1953; Marco.in, 1964a). ‘These experiments indicate that such actions could func- tion in nature as effective escape reactions to potential predators. Such escape reactions may be demonstrated with many prosobranch gastropods, particularly intertidal forms such as limpets and turban snails. Escape reactions are not restricted to gastropods among the mollusca but are also shown by pectens and cockles (Ray, 1959) to the presence of certain starfish. While the experimental evidence of the effectiveness of these reactions is convincing, there is a lack of information on the spontaneous occurrence of these reactions in pred- ator-prey confrontations under entirely natural conditions. Marco iin, 1964b, found that the escape response shown by Acmaea to starfish did not prevent their eventual capture in an aquarium and concluded that his results may indicate a lack of survival value for the flight reaction, at least in the laboratory. FepER, 1959, on the other hand, found that gastropods were not eaten in the field by Pisaster ochraceus in proportion to their numbers and concluded that the known escape responses of Acmaea spp., Tegula spp., and Haliotis spp. may be protective to the species. Field observations on spontaneous prey-pred- ator contacts would make possible an evaluation of the effectiveness of these mechanisms in nature and _ their importance as selective factors in the evolution of the mollusks involved. Most predatory marine gastropods feed upon seden- tary prey organisms such as bivalves, barnacles, coelenter- ates, tunicates, and worms. Consequently, the more * Research Participant in the Program of the Organization for Tropical Studies supported by the National Science Foundation. Present Address: Department of Oceanography, Oregon State University, Corvallis, Oregon 97331. complicated aspects of their feeding behavior usually involve the mechanisms used in detecting food, holding and opening the shells of prey or boring into them, rather than the pursuit and capture of prey. Notable exceptions are the stalking and capture of fishes by Conus spp. observed by Koun, 1961, and the trailing of prey species by Navanax inermis observed by Paine, 1963. Naticids are common predatory marine gastropods of soft bottoms which feed principally upon clams, but also upon other gastropods. Information on their method of feeding upon clams has been summarized by FRETTER & GRAHAM, 1962. Clams are held in the extensive foot of the naticid while a hole is bored in the shell. Capture and feeding take place below the surface of the bottom. An example of active pursuit by a naticid of a gastro- pod prey species, together with an escape reaction by the prey was observed under field conditions on the Pacific coast of Costa Rica. Predator induced escape reactions involving two gastropod species appear to have been observed in the field and described briefly only once before (Criark, 1958), and the observations recorded here pro- vide some information on how naticids capture other, active gastropods in nature. The field observations were made on an intertidal flat of sandy mud near the town of Golfito, Costa Rica, on the Golfo Dulce (83° 10’W, 8° 38’N). According to Keen, 1960, both species involved are common on inter- tidal mud flats from the Gulf of California to Ecuador, which should permit detailed anlysis of their behavior later. The predator species involved is a variant of Natica (Natica) chemnitzi PFEIFFER, 1840, called Natica unifasciata, which is characterized by one white band on the upper part of the whorls of the brownish shell. There are unresolved taxonomic difficulties with this species complex. Some of the specimens used have been deposited in the collections of the California Academy of Sciences so that the taxonomic status of the Natica species involved may be verified at a later time. The prey snail is readily identified as Nassarius (Arcularia) luteostoma (BRoDERIP & SOWERBY, 1829). Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 229 PREY CAPTURED BY Natica unifasciata Natica unifasciata is abundant on the mud flats at Golfito, crawling rapidly about on the surface at low tide. The gross morphology of this naticid is typical of the family. There is an extensive, wide anteriorly extended portion of the foot (the propodium) and a large, flat ventral mesopodium which is expanded posteriorly into a thin, widened posteriorly trailing portion. Many N. unifasciata were found crawling about with a clam, covered with thick sticky material, firmly stuck to the underside of the posterior foot lobe which covered it like a sucker. The largest snails found had shell diameters of about 2 cm and a total length of the body when extended of about 5 cm. Most of the clams being carried about were small in relation to the snail and scarcely protruded from beneath the posterior foot lobe. However, some were dragging clams of about 4 cm shell length, much larger than the posterior foot lobe; thus demonstrating the effectiveness of the hold exerted on the prey by the bottom surface of the foot. Natica unifasciata were also found carrying Nassarius luteostoma. The nassarid is small enough to be completely covered by the foot. It is held in an inpocketing of the bottom surface and is thus virtually entirely enveloped. This produces a lump in the dorsal surface of the posterio1 foot lobe, permitting those Natica carrying nassarids to be identified and followed. Natica carrying either a clam or Nassarius could be followed as they crawled about the surface for a distance of one or two feet, after which they pushed into the mud and slowly burrowed from sight, carrying the captured prey. If they are disturbed while on the surface, they will continue to crawl about, but buried Natica immediately re-burrowed when uncovered. Capture and carrying of the prey across the surface appears to be a peculiarity of this naticid, but it burrows with its prey, and like other members of the family, feeds upon it below the surface. The method of capture of the prey snail and the manner in which prey are attached to the foot were also observed in the field as they occurred spontaneously. Natica uni- fasciata crawls rapidly about the mud flat, apparently without direction. If the prey snail was contacted directly by the anterior foot lobe, capture was immediate. When the trail left in the mud by a crawling Nassarius was crossed, the Nafica immediately began to follow it and overtook the slower crawling nassarid if the proper direc- tion was chosen. This was observed several times as Natica crossed the trails of nassarids about 6 inches away. The details of escape reactions of the prey upon contact are described below. When contact is made, the nassarid becomes very active and moves rapidly and erratically. Natica unifasciata is able to sense the changes in direction of the nassarid trail and accurately pursues them. Usually several attempts at capture were tried before a successful hold was obtained upon the prey. Capture is effected by lifting the wide propodium above the surface of the mud with the thin, flat edges extended laterally, and bringing it down rapidly over the small prey snail. If the prey is successfully covered, the front edge of the propodium is curved down and rolled partially around the struggling nassarid. As the prey is slowly enrolled in the propodium, the Natica falls on its side as the more posterior portions of the foot are brought ventral and forward, free of the substrate. The head area is brought ventral and posterior, meeting the posterior portion of the foot curving forward. The prey is thus entirely surrounded by the foot. The long axis of the shell of the nassarid is held across the width of the anterior part of the foot and is slowly rotated as it is moved posteriorly. As it is rolled by the propodium, it is covered with a thick, sticky mucus. Nassarids exam- ined at this point had stopped struggling and were with- drawn into their shells. The prey is slowly transferred poteriorly to the apron-like posterior foot lobe which holds it in a sucker-like fashion. As the prey reaches the posterior end of the foot, the Natica rights itself with the propodium and begins to crawl away, carrying the prey. Clams being carried were also found completely covered with this thick mucus, which is apparently important in both subduing the more active prey and maintaining the hold by the posterior foot. Capture of a second prey individual was not observed to occur naturally. All Natica carrying prey that were followed eventually burrowed below the surface. In the field Natica pursued Nassarius placed in their immediate vicinity. Other snails found on the mud flat and placed in contact with the Natica were not taken. Clams removed from the foot lobe and left next to the Natica were re-secured by the propodium and re-attached to the posterior foot lobe. Specimens of Natica, Nassarius, and several other species of prosobranchs from the mud flat were placed together in bowls of sea water. The Natica continued to follow Nassarius about, but showed no reactions to the other species of snails when they touched them, even when left together with them overnight. A variety of sizes including individuals of the size of the Nassarius were used in this experiment. Natica unifasciata does not react to shells of Nassarius luteostoma occupied by small hermit crabs. Page 230 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 ESCAPE REACTIONS OF Nassarius luteostoma The behavior of Nassarius luteostoma when confronted with Natica unifasciata was observed as spontaneous con- tacts were made by undisturbed animals in the field and also by placing the species together both on the mud flat and in bowls of sea water. The reactions are the same in all cases. It is evident from the precise directionality of its pursuit that the Natica can sense some substance left by the nassarid in its trail across the mud. The nassarid also appears to be able to detect the predator by chemosensory means. Nassarius placed in small puddles on the beach containing several Natica very rapidly crawled out and away. When the two species are placed together in bowls, the nassarids slowly crawl about at random and occasion- ally toward a Natica. However, if they approach a Natica within about 14 to 2 cm, they will turn and crawl rapidly away. If Natica is picked up, it will slowly withdraw into the shell, releasing a little water from the pallial cavity and the foot surface as it does so. This fluid was collected with a pipette and released near quiet nassarids in a bowl of sea water. The fluid invariably elicited the entire series of escape reactions described in detail below, without any actual contact with the body of a Natica. A flow of ordinary sea water is without effect. These observations establish that the Nassarius can sense the predator a short distance away by some chemo- sensory means and will then begin to crawl away rapidly. Closer contact with a Natica produces more active behav- ior similar to the escape reactions shown by other proso- branchs to starfishes. If any of the parts of the body of Nassarius luteostoma come into contact with those of Natica, the Nassarius immediately begins a series of rapid actions. In nature, the course of these actions proceeds as follows. Upon contact, the nassarid extends the foot and head from the shell maximally and usually falls upon its side as the shell is swung from side to side. The foot assumes an clongate, slender shape and the head and foot region thrashes about rapidly. The elongated foot acts as a lever and its violent jerks from side to side move the snail erratically, but rapidly, over a distance of about three inches. If this violent leaping removes the nassarid from the vicinity of the Natica, it then rights itself and crawls rapidly away, with the shell held high over the foot. After crawling about six inches, it slows and lowering the shell, resumes its slower undisturbed crawling. One contact with Natica will induce very active escape behav- ior of about 30 seconds duration. Efforts made to demonstrate fatigue of the escape reaction were not successful. Nassarids were touched against Natica held in bowls with them. The entire sequence of actions was induced repeatedly, without failure, even if repeated at intervals of one minute, as soon as the nassarid stopped the thrashing action induced by earlier contacts. Gradual fatigue of the response of limpets to starfishes by repeated frequent contact was demonstrated by Marcon, 1964a. Individuals of Nassa- rius luteostoma continued to react violently as long as they were held against the Natica. DISCUSSION anp CONCLUSIONS Natica unifasciata carries both clam and snail prey for some distance about on the surface before feeding and in this behavior differs from related species which capture and feed on clams below the surface. Other naticids also cover clam prey with mucus and are able to drag the prey with the foot down below the surface, but apparently not for any distance across the surface (FRET- TER & GRAHAM, 1962). There is no comparable informa- tion available on the method used by other Naticidae to capture gastropod prey. The carrying of the snail prey by Natica unifasciata is related to its pursuit and capture of active Nassarius luteostoma on the surface of the mud flat, and its extension to carrying clams, which might be taken under the surface, is probably secondary. The observations indicate that the mechanism used by Natica to sense its prey is sufficiently sensitive to permit the detection and pursuit of prey capable of active avoidance. It is probable that the capture of gastropods by other members of the Naticidae is different from the slow means which they use on clams. The observations made under natural field conditions demonstrate that Nassarius luteostoma possesses an escape reaction mechanism toward its predator, Natica unifasci- ata, which can allow the Nassarius to successfully escape attack by its predator. However, the initial violent move- ments of the reaction do not always move the Nassarius away from the Natica, and thus may fail to prevent capture. Such failure was observed directly in the field and is also demonstrated by the number of Natica found carrying captured Nassarius. It may be concluded that escape reactions in gastropods produce some success under natural conditions and are thus of selective importance. They do not, however, insure individual survival. Escape reactions, mediated by chemoreception, are known for other species of Nassartus, which, however, respond to the presence of or extracts from starfishes predatory on the Nassarius rather than to another snail. Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 231 The literature on the reaction of these Nassarius species has recently been summarized by both Koun (1961) and FreTTeR & GRAHAM (1962). The use of the foot in the movements involved in the reaction is essentially the same as in N. luteostoma, even though induced by very different predators. The presence in N. luteostoma of a specific escape reaction to a predatory gastropod indicates that these reactions in prosobranchs are devel- oped in response to predators which are relatively slow moving ancl not exclusively to carnivorous starfish. The sensory basis in both cases is chemosensory detection of material released by the predator. Flight reactions of normally sedentary animals would not be expected to be an efficient response to fast moving predators such as fishes and indeed, only slow moving predators are involved in the known flight reactions of marine invertebrates. This is the most important common characteristic of the reactions between otherwise diverse predator-prey pairs such as Aeolidia/Stomphia (Roxsson, 1963), Natica/Nassarius and Pisaster brevispinus/Dendr- aster excentricus (MacGinitie & MacGrnitiz, 1949). Reese (1964), in a general review of the behavior of marine animals, also concluded on different grounds that convergence of adaptive behavior patterns in species confronted with similar problems is a general phenom- enon. Reactions of herbivorous gastropods to predatory snails were described for a number of species by CLarK (1958). One of these reactions was observed as it occurred spon- taneously in the field and bears some resemblance to the Natica/Nassartus reaction. CLARK observed that when the thaisid whelk Lepsia haustrum touched the trochid Melagraphia aethiops the latter exhibited rapid reactions which involved violent swinging of the body in a manner similar to that described here for Nassarius. However, contact between the two snails was apparently random and the predatory Lepsia was not observed to pursue the trochid or feed upon it. It was not clear whether the responses shown by the other species studied by CLark in the laboratory were specific responses to a snail predatory on these species, and operative under natural conditions or whether the respon- ses to the carnivorous snails were fortuitous and not of survival importance in nature. The species studied by CiarK also showed escape responses to carnivorous star- fishes, and he found no correlation between the co-occur- rence of the snail species and reactions between them. Some pairs of snail species reacted which probably never meet in nature. In other cases (Marco.in, 1964a) escape reactions have been demonstrated experimentally between snails and starfishes which either never take the reacting species naturally or which do not occur in the same habitat. Ronson (1963) showed that an escape reaction of the anemone Stomphia coccinea to its predator, Aeoli- dia papillosa is also evoked by certain starfishes which are not predators of the anemone, but which also produce a substance which will induce the reaction. In these cases, the reactions seem to have been developed as a specific adaptive response in one prey-predator relationship, and are operative in response to species which are not normal predators because of chance production by these species of substances which will elicit the response. No such ambi- guity is present in the relation between Natica and Nassarius described here. Observation in the natural habitat demonstrated that a prey-predator relation exists between the two species and that the reaction can allow successful escape from the attacking predator and is thus adaptive. The ecological significance of the many flight reactions of marine invertebrates demonstrated under laboratory conditions cannot be evaluated until these ob- servations are extended to observations of the species involved under entirely natural field conditions. An instance of an apparent escape reaction shown by one snail to another carnivorous snail species was men- tioned by Peters (1964). In this case Littorina planaxis showed an escape flight from the carnivorous Acanthina spirata in the laboratory and also to a substance released into the water by the predator, as does Nassarius to the fluid from Natica. Acanthina and Littorina are known to occur in the same general habitat on the Pacific coast of North America, but a prey-predator relationship under natural conditions has not been demonstrated. Similarly, Ropertson (1961) found that in an aquar- ium, Strombus gigas, S. costatus and S. raninus leaped violently away from the carnivorous snail, Fasciolaria tulipa. The escape reaction was not observed under natural conditions. However, in this case a prey-predator relation was established by field observation. RoBertson fre- quently found F tulipa feeding on S. gigas and considered it to be the principal predator of Strombus at Bimini. It would appear that in this case the escape reaction is only partially effective against attack by the predator, as it is in the Natica-Nassarius case. SUMMARY Natica chemnitzi, a predator of both clams and Nassari- us luteostoma on the mud flats at Golfito, Costa Rica, carries its captured prey across the surface of the flat by holding them with the posterior lobe of the foot. Page 232 Natica can detect and follow the trails of Nassarius across the mud. It captures the snail by throwing the wide anterior end of the foot over the prey, rolling it in a sticky mucus and then holding it securely by the sucker-like action of the posterior foot lobe. Nassarius luteostoma can detect the presence of Natica through the water at a short distance and exhibits specific escape reactions to the presence or touch of Natica. Under natural conditions these quick actions often but not invariably allow the Nassarius to escape the pursuing predator. Note added in proof: YARNALL (1964) has recently investigated the response of Tegula funebralis to Acanthina spirata and Thais emar- ginata, both carnivorous prosobranchs from the same general habitat as the Zegula. The behavioral response of T: funebralis to pieces of the foot of these carnivores was considered essentially the same as the known escape reac- tion of Jegula spp. to starfish normally predatory on Tegula. The exact nature and function of this response, its spontaneous occurrence in the habitat and the existence of a true predator-prey relationship were not sufficiently established to make possible a comparison with the Natica-Nassarius interaction and others mentioned here. (JJG - 21 Dec. 1964) LITERATURE CITED BuLLock, THEODORE HoLMEs 1953. Predator recognition and escape responses of some inter- tidal gastropods in the presence of starfish. 5 (2): 130-140 Crark, W. C. 1958. Escape responses of herbivorous gastropods. 181 (4602): 137 - 138 Feper, H. M. 1959. The food of the starfish. Pisaster ochraceus, along the California coast. Ecology 40 (4): 721 - 724 FRETTER, VERA, & ALASTAIR GRAHAM Behaviour Nature 1962. British prosobranch molluscs, their functional anatomy and ecology. London, Ray Soc. xvi + 755 pp.; 316 figs. THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 Keen, A. MyRA 1958. Sea shells of tropical west America; marine mollusks from Lower California to Colombia. Stanford Univ. Press, xi + 624 pp.; illus. Stanford, Calif. Koun, ALan J. 1956. _ Piscivorous gastropods of the genus Conus. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 42: 168 - 171. 1961. | Chemoreception in gastropod molluscs. Am. Zool. 1: 291 - 308. MacGinirtrz, G. E., & Nett MacGrnirie 1949. Natural history of marine animals. McGraw- Hill Book Co., Inc. New York. pp. 1 - 473; 282 text figs. Marcoun, A. S. 1964a. The mantle response of Diodora aspera. Animal Behavior 12 (1): 187 - 194 1964b. A running response of Acmaea to seastars. Ecology 45 (1): 191-193 PAINE, ROBERT T. 1963. Food recognition and predation on opisthobranchs by Navanax inermis (Gastropoda: Opisthobranchia). The Veliger 6(1): 1-9; plt. 1; 1 text fig. (1 July 1963) PETERS, RONALD L. 1964. Function of the cephalic tentacles in Littorina planaxis Philippi (Gastropoda: Prosobranchiata). The Veliger 7(2): 143-148; 10 textfigures. Ray, D. L. 1959. Trends in marine biology. pp. 1-8 in I. Pratr « J. E. McCautey, eds. Marine Biology, 20th Ann. Biol. Collogq., Oregon State College, Corvallis, Ore. Regsg, E. S. 1964. Ethology and marine zoology, pp. 455-488 in H. Barnes, ed., Oceanogr. Mar. Biol. Ann. Rev., vol. 2. Allen and Unwin, London. (1 October 1964) RoBERTSON, ROBERT 1961. The feeding of Strombus and related herbivorous marine gastropods. Notulae Naturae Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.; no. 343; 9 pp. Rosson, E. A. 1963. The swimming behavior of the sea anemone Stomphia Proc. XVI Internat. Congr. Zool., vol. 1: 61. YARNALL, JOHN L. coccinea. 1964. The responses of Tegula funebralis to starfishes and pre- datory snails (Mollusca: Gastropoda). The Veliger 6, Sup- planent: 56 - 58 (15 November 1964) Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 233 Note on a Range Extension and Observations of Spawning in Tegula, a Gastropod BY FRANCIS P. BELCIK Orcgon State University and Oregon Institute of Marine Biology, Corvallis, Oregon 97331 THE NORTHERNMOST RECORD for Tegula brunnea here- tofore has been from Mendocino County, California. However, I collected T. brunnea from Cape Arago, Ore- gon, Lat. 43° 18’ 10” N, Long. 124° 20’ W, in the summers of 1960, 1963 and 1964. It seems to be a regular inhabitant of the outer intertidal zone there. In 1960, it was collected at Middle Cove of Cape Arago and in the two later years at North Cove, which is 2° 52’ further north than the for- mer California record; here it is usually associated with T. pulligo in the Macrocystis area. KEEN & Doty (1942) record only two species from this area; they are T. funeb- ralis and T: pulligo. The known range for T. brunnea is now from Coos Bay, Oregon south to Santa Barbara, California. The characteristics of Tegula brunnea in Oregon are: shell with umbilicus closed; shell either gray above with orange or red-brown body whorl or totally orange or red-brown; no teeth on columella evident; foot black with a prominent orange or red-brown border, mantle lobes near head (collar) black but with yellow borders. Epipodia wholly black. According to Dr. Rudolf Stohler (in litt., 1964), these northern forms appear larger than similar Californian material. Body coloration coupled with shell characteristics seems to afford a good guide for separating the Oregon species of Tegula. A short key to the known Oregon species is offered below. Key to the Oregon Species of Tegula 1. Umbilicus covered by a callus, closed; epipodia of LIMORI COO WAKE cooscococcscadguegac 2 — Umbilicus open; epipodia lighter near base Mec aeletnnitereten meena Tegula pulligo (GMELIN, 1784) 2. Shell color purplish or black; tooth evident on colu- mella Tegula funebralis (A.. ApaMs, 1855) Shell greyish above, with red-brown to orange body whorl or entirely brown; no teeth on columella evi- dent Tegula brunnea (Puuutppi, 1848) Tegula funebralis differs from T. pulligo in that the tentacles, head, upper portion of the foot and the epipodia as well as the collar or mantle lobes are wholly black. In T. pulligo the head is black dorsally, epipodia light colored at bases; antennae black, foot black with lavender-purple blotched or wine-colored to red-brown border; mantle lobes (collar) above head pinkish with yellow borders. Additionally, the shell color of T: pulligo is gray on top or with light colored blotches apically; body whorl with thin yellow or red-orange bands; sometimes entire shell magenta in color. On August 8, 1964, several specimens each of both Tegula brunnea and T. pulligo were collected in the outer Macrocystis area of North Cove, Cape Arago, Oregon. They were placed in aquaria with running sea water at the Oregon Institute of Marine Biology, Charleston, Ore- gon; the water temperature was maintained at 15° to 16° C. The next night, alerted by the cloudiness of the water in the tank, I noted that one of the 7) brunnca was discharging puffs of white sperm. Further observation revealed that female 7: brunnea were laying eggs, bright erass-green in color. These eggs seemed to cover the body whorl in a single sheet as the snail held on to the side of the aquarium. After a time these eggs dropped off and fell to the bottom of the tank, which by this time was covered by large masses of the green eggs. At no time did the males appear to be attracted to the females, but they remained at a distance of from five to six inches. However, the possibility remains that one may stimulate spawning in the other. No egg capsules were built, the gametes being shed directly into the immediate environ- ment. Gametes were removed separately and fertilization was attempted. Upon fertilization most of the eggs ap- peared to have a fertilization membrane and several turned light green (moss-green) in color. Most of the zygotes attained the two-cell stage after about 50 minutes. Development continued until the 16-cell stage and then stopped. No later stages were found. In speaking of Tegula funebralis, Dr. Peter Frank (in litt., 1964), says that on August 13, 1964, three females of this species were observed with eggs within the shell when they retracted the foot upon being picked up. Many eggs were noted in the immediate vicinity. One of the snails was collected and its eggs were watched, in the Page 234 laboratory at Charleston; most did not cleave, only a few developed to the 4-cell stage or to subsequent stages. The three snails in question were found during low tide at about the plus 3.5 foot level. These two observations, both made in August, appear to be the only recorded cases of spawning noted in these common snails. THE VELIGER Vol. 7: No. 4 LITERATURE CITED Keen, A. Myra & CuHarotte L. Doty 1942. An annotated check list of the gastropods of Cape Arago, Oregon. Oregon State Monogr. 3. Corvallis, Oregon. Three Dimensional Reconstructions of the Nests of Helix aspersa (Mollusca : Gastropoda : Pulmonata) FRED HERZBERG Department of Anatomy, University of California at Los Angeles Center for the Health Sciences Los Angeles, California 90024 (Plate 30) THE GROSS ASPECTS of the reproductive process in Helix aspersa have been reported at some length. The courtship process was described in detail by Trron (1882), while other reports have dealt with the copulatory act, oviposi- tion, hatching, and movement out of the nest (BASINGER, 1931; Incram, 1946 and 1947; Herzperc & HERZBERG, 1962). In addition to the above factors which contribute to the total picture of reproductive behavior in this animal there must be added nest building, also a repro- ductive trait. A search of the literature failed to reveal any description of the actual three-dimensional structure of the nest in the ground in which this animal deposits its eggs. This experiment was designed to determine the nest structure of Helix aspersa. MATERIALS anp METHODS Twenty pairs of snails were placed separately in quart glass jars with aluminum screening covers. To permit clear observation of oviposition the bottom of each jar had moist soil about 5 cm in depth. It had earlier been determined that this amount of soil permitted observation of oviposition (HERZBERG & HERZBERG, 1962). The animals were observed several times daily through the sides or bottom of the jars until they were found actually depositing eggs. When such animals were found they were disturbed by tapping with a pencil on their shells, followed by a slow lifting of the shell away from the soil. As the animal ceased oviposition and withdrew its body from the soil and toward the shell, it was further lifted out of the nest until the body was entirely freed. When conducted with much care, this procedure per- mitted removal of the animal without any visible distor- tion of the nest, thus leaving the nest cavity open with eggs visible at its bottom. Into the nest opening a loose mixture of plaster of Paris was poured, and gently vibrated into the nest opening until it overflowed the.top, and then left to dry. After drying, the hard plaster mass was withdrawn from the soil and the particles of soil Explanation of Plate 30 Figures 1a, b, c: Three views of the plaster of Paris models of the blunt thumb-shaped nest of Helix aspersa. Figures 2.a, b, c: Three views of the plaster of Paris models of the nest of Helix aspersa showing the long neck and the rounded bottom. THE VELIGER, Vol. 7. No. 4 [HerzBERG] Plate 30 Figure 2a Figure 2c Figure 2b a ne Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 235 adhering to the plaster were removed by washing with water, thus leaving a plaster model with the eggs attached to its lowest portion. The eggs were painted with a very thin mix of plaster to preserve their outward shapes. Twenty-seven such models were poured. The remaining animals either failed to deposit eggs, or the deposited eggs were in a position where they could not be seen. RESULTS It was found that the nests of Helix aspersa were of two types. The models from the first type revealed that the animal’s entire body occupied the nest space. This resulted in a blunt thumb-shaped nest with a rounded bottom, in which were seen the eggs deposited (Plate 30, Figure 1). The second type had a rounded bottom which was joined to the top of the nest by a relatively thin neck. The eggs were found in the rounded bottom portion of the nest. In this type it appeared as though the animal had extended its head downward, and did not expand its body during oviposition (Plate 30, Figure 2). Twelve nests fell into the first category and 15 were clearly of the second type. SUMMARY Three-dimensional plaster of Paris reconstructions of the nests of Helix aspersa were made and from this population two types of nests were apparent. In one type the bottom of the nest was joined to the top by a long thin neck, while in the other the nest was blunt throughout. ACKNOWLEDGMENT I gratefully acknowledge the assistance of Miss Katherine Hand who photographed the nest models. This study was supported in part by USPHS grant GM 09748. LITERATURE CITED BasinceEr, A. J. 1931. | The European brown snail in California. Rep. Calif. Agric. Exper. Sta. Bull. 515; 20 pp. Univ. Calif. Berkeley. Incram, WiLLt1aAM Marcus 1946. | The European brown snail in Oakland, California. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 45: 152 - 159 1947. | Egg laying of the European brown snail in terraria. Bull. So. Calif. Acad. Sci. 46: 55 - 56 HeERzBeERG, Frep & ANNE HERZBERG 1962. Observations on reproduction in Helix aspersa. Amer. Midland Naturalist 68: 297 - 306 Tryon, GrorcE WASHINGTON, Jr. 1882. Structural and systematic conchology Vol. 1, Acad Nat. Sci. Phila.; 312 pp. Page 236 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 A Statistical Study in Fossil Cowries FRANZ ALFRED SCHILDER University of Halle, German Democratic Republic HetLprin (1887, p. 86) established the monotypic genus Siphocypraea as the type species Cypraca (Siphocyp- raea) problematica Hettprin (ibid., p. 87, pl. 4, fig. 12) differs from all fossil and living cowries by the curious posterior outlet which turns to the right so that its top opens towards the base (the name Szphocypraea is deplor- able because its peculiarity consists in the posterior outlet and not in the quite normal anterior one, from which the animal’s sipho protrudes). The species was said to be common in the Pliocene (“Floridian”) beds at Fort Thompson, Caloosahatchee River, south western Florida. Though the characters of the posterior outlet of Sipho- cypraea problematica are unique, Hetvprin (I. c., p. 87) compared it with Cypraea carolinensis Conrap (1841, p. 346, pl. 2, fig. 6) and Day (1890, p. 167) with the living Cypraca mus Linnaeus, 1758. Scumper (1926, p. 367) recognized that Siphocypraea problematica is an “abnor- mal descendant” of Cypraea carolinensis and adopted the generic name Siphocypraea in all subsequent papers (1932, p. 119; 1941, p. 82) to designate the group of cowries which includes, besides the two species named above, also S. henekeni (SowerBy, 1849) and its Amer- ican allies including the only Recent survivor §. mus from the north coast of Colombia and Venezuela. Nevertheless, GARDNER (1948, p. 213) established a “section” AKLEISTOSTOMA with carolinensis as type species on account of the weak columellar teeth and the absence of the “curious hook shaped opening” of prob- lematica; GARDNER observed that the tendency of colum- ellar teeth to become obsolete also occurs in the Recent S. mus. Moreover, Wooprine (1957, p. 88) established the subgeneric name Muracypraeca with the just men- tioned mus as type species, including also its Tertiary allies henekent, etc. In a recent paper, however, O_sson « Petir (1964, pp. 556-560, pl. 83) have demonstrated that there is a gradual evolution in development of the posterior outlet from the late Miocene Siphocypraea carolinensis carolin- ensis (Conrap, 1841) (Duplin beds of North Carolina) over S. carolinensis floridana (MANSFIELD, 1931) and two new subspecies of S. carolinensis, viz. S. c. hughesi and S. c. transitoria (all three from Upper Miocene Pinecrest beds of Florida) to S. problematica (HEtLpRIn) (over- lying Pliocene Caloosahatchee marls of Florida). In 1963 and 1964 I received as gift from Mrs. J. W. Donovan (Palm Beach, Florida) many Neogene cowries from Florida, true Siphocypraea problematica as well as specimens which evidently are intermediate between S. problematica and the less singular species of Siphocypraea, especially S. carolinensis. 1 prepared a statistical paper and intended to name the connecting link (see DoNovAN 1963), but I postponed to publish the paper when I learned that Dr. A. A. Olsson had a paper on this subject in press, naming the intermediates hughes: and transi- toria. As this paper is now published (OLsson & PEtiT, 1964), I should like to integrate it with my statistical research. The examined specimens are not very numerous if compared with the several hundred Siphocypraea preserved in American collections. Nevertheless, they seem sufficient to demonstrate my methods of investigating such a problem of gradual evolution. In this paper I have restricted the study to the geo- logically younger members of the non-tuberculate branch of Siphocypraea, viz. the species S. carolinensis and S. problematica. The total range of variation in each essen- tial character has been divided into six equal classes, numbered from 1 to 6, so that the extreme development in S. carolinensis is called 1, the other extreme occurring in S. problematica is called 6. The five chief characters are: a) the length of the shell (measured in tenths of a mm) ; b) the relative breadth (expressed in percent of the length) ; c) the average closeness of teeth on both lips (classi- fied by letters according to ScHiLpEeR, 1958; the formula of labial : columellar teeth zJ becomes k, as well as the formula li, hm, mh, etc., while the mean of kl, im, etc. becomes k.5) ; d) the width of the aperture in its central part (vary- ing from the very broad aperture in S. carolinensis to the narrow one in S. problematica) ; e) the turning of the posterior outlet to right (charac- terized by the flattened terminal part of the canal which tends towards the dorsum in S. carolinensis Vol. 7; No. 4 but almost towards the base in S. problematica, and by the upper part of its right wall which, when seen from behind, is about vertical or even bent to the left in S. carolinensis as it is in most cowries, but becomes about horizontal in S. transitoria and invertedly ver- tical in extreme S. problematica: therefore one can classify the outlet by the turning of the top of its right wall from 0° to almost 180°, i.e. through two right angles). The six classes have been defined as follows (the quoted figures illustrating the aperture and the posterior outlet refer to OLsson & Petit, 1964, pl. 83): THE VELIGER Page Dail p 45655, p 34646, p 45456, p 35556 Fort Lhompson, Caloosahatchee River, Hendry Cty.: * Hemprin, 1887, pl. 4, fig. 12 (holotype of problema- tica): p 56556 * Du Bar, 1958, pl. 11, fig. 1 (problematica): p 36x56 Caloosahatchce River, Hendry and Glades Counties: * Hripprin, 1887, pl. 16a, fig. 73 (problematica) : p 35xx6 * Cossmann, 1903, pl. 7, figs. 3, 7 (problematica) : p 45655 CS (from an old collection) : p 45556 BM (No. 11809, from W. E Webb, Albion, N. Y.) : s class 1 2 Gs 5 6 length (mm) 27 - 35 35 - 45 45 - 55 55 - 65 65-75 75 - 81 breadth (%) 69 - 73 66 - 68 63 - 65 60 - 62 57 - 59 53 - 56 teeth g5-h5 i-k k.5 - 1.5 m-n n.3 - 0.5 p-q aperture very wide wide rather wide rather narrow narrow very narrow == NG, la 2a 3a 5 - 4a post. outlet 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° NGO) == ine. lb 2b 5b - 3b 4b It seems useful to publish a complete list of the exam- ined specimens (preserved in CS = coll. Schilder or BM British Muscum, Natural History) and good pictures published in various papers (marked with an asterisk *) so that students can plot other pairs of characters (or sums of characters) against each other if they think such an arrangement more apt to distinguish the species than the way I have published below. Each specimen is indicated first by a letter designating the species to which it seems to belong according to my investigations, viz. : ¢ = carolinensis h==hughesi p= t =transitoria the letter is followed by a formula composed of figures which indicate the observed class in the five characters enumerated above: the first figure indicates the length, the second figure indicates the class of breadth, etc. (for each character the low figures indicate tendency toward carolinensis, high figures characterize problematica; x = class unknown). problematica Florida St. Petersburg, Pinellas Cty.: * Ox_sson & Harsison, 1953, pl. 27, fig. 2 (problema- tica): p 35455 Acline, Charlotte Cty., “Pliocene”: CS (don. Helen Tucker. 1933): p 30556, p 56646 Fort Denaud, Caloosahatchee River, Hendry Cty. CS (leg. Donovan, 1943; don. Donovan, 1964) : p 44556, p 55646, p 45556, p 45556, p 46456, p 56556, p 55656 BM (Nos. 4782 and 9523, no collector): p 45454, p 34455, p 46456 Harney Pond Canal, Glades Cty. (WNW of Lake Okee- chobee) : *Oxsson & Petit, 1964, pl. 83, fig. 4 (problematica, Caloosahatchee marl): fp 65466 Cs) (less Raethles 1961: idon Old, 1963) 35445; p 45455, p 44446 CS (leg. Emerson, 1960; don. Old, 1964): p 45445, p 45455, p 46556, p 46556 Clewiston, Hendry Cty. (SW of Lake Okeechobee) : CS (leg. Donovan, 1962; don. Donovan, 1964) : h 21223, t 54345, p 46556 CS (leg. Donovan, 1963, don. Donovan, 1964) : h 31123, h 33334, t 43444, p 35446, p 45556 Kissimee, Okeechobee Cty. (15 miles NNW of Lake Okee- chobec) : CS (leg. Donovan, 1963; don. Summers, 1963) : h 23232, h 22332, h 22223, h 32423, h 42423, ¢ 46244, t 44454, t 43335, t 44445, p 33456, p 45456, p 35466 CS (leg. Donovan, 1963; don. Donovan, 1964) : h 43323, h 53233, t 34554, ¢ 55245, t 54355, p 35545, p 44455, p 44456, p 45456, p 46666 Brighton, Okeechobee Cty. (NW of Lake Okeechobee) : *Ousson «& Petit, 1964, pl. 83. fig. 3 (holotype of transitoria, Pinecrest beds): t 64335 *Oxsson & Petit, 1964, pl. 83, fig. 5 (holotype of hughesi, Pinecrest beds): h 51343 Page 238 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 CS (leg. Donovan, 1962; don. Summers, 1963) : 8 BZD ins, 10 VIP), 0 DEBE), eo DIB, [Ip 48839, h 52333, h 44314, h 53224, h 43424, t 43235 juv., t 33345, p 59456 CS (leg. Donovan, 1962; don. Donovan, 1964) : h 32222, h 33123, h 64324, ¢ 44354, t 62435 CS (“Brighton or Clewiston” don. Donovan, 1963) : h 42334, h 23244, ¢ 54335 Tarrytown, Indian Pierce Canal near Brighton, ibid.: CS (leg. Donovan, 1963; don. Summers, 1963) : p 54556 Tamiami Trail 42 miles W of Miami, Dade and Monroe Counties (13 miles E of Pinecrest) : * MansFIELD, 1931, pl. 1, figs. 2, 7 (holotype of flori- dana): f 64221 * MaNsFIELD, 1931, pl. 1, fig. 6 (paratype of florida- 0G) 8 jf DALAM *Oxrsson e& Petit, 1964, pl. 83, fig. 2 (floridana, Pinecrest) : f 66321 Acline, Charlotte Cty. (see also above) : * Tucker & Witson, 1932, pl 5, figs. 4, 5 (floridana) : f 64211 Port Charlotte, Charlotte Cty.: CS (don. Du Bar, 1964: “Tamiami beds’): f 32111, 1, SUDAN 7) AL, jp REIL, 97 A eVeil ye Axe I 2 North (and South) Carolina Natural Well, Duplin Cty., North Carolina: * GARDNER, 1948, fig. 2 (carolinensis) : c 44xx1 *O.sson & Petit, 1964, pl. 83, fig. 1 (carolinensis) : c 63111 Duplin Cty., North Carolina: * Conrap, 1841, pl. 2, fig. 6 (holotype of carolinensis) : c 43211 BM (No. 7893): North Carolina: *Emmons, 1858, fig. 131 (carolinensis): c 42111 * CossMANN, 1903, pl. 7, figs. 5, 9 (carolinensis) : ¢ 94111 G SMNN G SEZ Pee Dee, Horry District, South Carolina: * Tuomey & Homes, 1857, pl. 27, figs. 1, 2 (carolin- ensis) : ¢ 42311 Cape Fear River, North Carolina: *IncrAM, 1939, pl. 9, fig. 2 (holotype of pilsbryt) : c 12211; ibid. p. 120 (paratype of pilsbryz) : ¢ 11xxx There is a distinct correlation between the four last named characters, e. g. the classes of breadth and denti- tion, and the classes of aperture and posterior outlet: breadth aperture 2D 99) ob BoB eid) 5B 6 2| 8 6|- - ee 5 2 6) 8:5) >) =.)5eaae S4 9) = 4) 1 3 Sg iraie 3 1) 83. oo 3 2 | 20 2)| 2) 250, 2eeamee ne 1 =| “alll. 5) =e The length, however, varies rather independently from the other characters, e. g. from the posterior outlet: posterior outlet Be NO PRP OID Therefore we can add the figures indicating the breadth, dentition, aperture, and three times the figure indicating the posterior outlet, as it is evidently the most important character in the evolution of Siphocypraea; the length should be omitted altogether. If we plot these sums of characters against the various localities we obtain the following diagram: Sum 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 SHROQOUDTNOMO AH St. Petersburg Acline Fort Denaud § Fort Thompson . Caloosahatchee Harney Pond Clewiston Kissimmee Brighton . hughes . : eink Hee) Teel es be Pee Haseena 1 1 Tamiami , Acline, P Char.|} 1 Carolina [_]} valid taxa (with names) ie SM yi teetaual( Dio ri ' ' gS a ORE See Ome eee. [Il Bin@ Pa, floridana LETS aimee Pleas Paella eS ata batik eZ se piste ene eee te ee . problematica transitoria O holotypes Wol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 239 EE ene In this table the localities have been arranged according to the presumable geological age of the strata in which the fossil shells have been collected. According to OLsson & Perir (1964, p 514) the Upper Miocene Duplin age of Carolina (A) is contemporary with the Pinecrest beds of Florida; but from the successive development of characters in Siphocypraea I suspect that they are slightly older, even older than the Pinecrest beds from which S. floridana came (B, C). In the (possibly upper) Pinecrest beds around Lake Okeechobee (D- F) the two intermediates named by Orsson & Perir in 1964 occur in different percentages, but these localities also supply the true S. problematica, probably coming from the uppermost cowrie-bearing beds, the Pliocene Caloosahatchee marls. The absence of these intermediates in the remaining localities (G - L) may be accidental, as the Pinecrest beds also occur there underlying the Caloosahatchee marls from which the collected S. problematica undoubtedly came. The taxonomy of the six taxa pilsbryi, carolinensis, floridana, hughesi, transitoria and problematica is difficult to be decided, as there is a continuous development of characters; these characters do not change equally as in every specimen some characters may be rather primitive, while other characters are more advanced, so that the sum of characters only indicates the place of the shell within the trend of evolution. In my opinion three species can be distinguished: Siphocypraea HEILPRIN (differs from the other Cypraeorbini with smooth fossula by the flat, slightly umbilicate spire ) (Akleistostoma) GARDNER (posterior outlet vertical as in other Cypraeidae ) 1. S$. (A.) carolinensis (Conrap) from late Miocene beds of Carolina with the local dwarf variety pilsbryi (INGRAM) and the often more callous geographical (and probably also stratigraphical) subspecies flor- idana (MANSFIELD) from the late Miocene Pinecrest beds of Florida. (Siphocypraca) HEILPRIN (posterior outlet dilated above to being recurved) 2. S. (S.) hughesi Ousson & PETIT with its ecological (or also younger stratigraphical?) subspecies transitoria Otsson & Petit from Pinecrest beds of central Florida: hughesi approaches floridana, while transi- toria gradually passes into problematica. 3. S. (S.) problematica (Hertrprin) from the Pliocene Caloosahatchee marls of Florida with exaggerated characters of the posterior outlet which probably caused this extreme terminal offspring to become extinct since Pleistocene times. The following key may be useful to identify the taxa of Siphocypraea. 1 Posterior outlet vertical, parallel-sided as in other GOWNS saosoasnov0g0nondDDCdoUDODODODOGCGdG 2 - Posterior outlet dilated or recurved in its upper EAE -sedccovovoocbedoDoddoduOd Joon oaGDG0DS 4 2 lee HEMI! 6 oo oboadn gO dDOGbO0GG0Ob0000090 3 - Base mostly convex to swollen ........-..0-- S. carolinensis floridana 3 Shell less than 30 mm long .. S. carolinensis pilsbryi - Shell more than 30 mm long .............. S. carolinensis carolinensis 4 Posterior outlet dilated above, but hardly recurved S. hughesi hughes - Posterior outlet distinctly recurved to the right .. 5 5 Posterior outlet rather recurved, aperture wide S. hughesi transitoria - Posterior outlet extremely recurved, aperture NTO cocopdcndes00D0d0nd000 S. problematica Color. One Siphocypraea carolinensis (British Muse- um) seems to exhibit large brown blotches on the dorsum, while in S. hughesi and in S. problematica the dorsum is more finely punctate with fulvous; in S. floridana, S. hughesi and S. problematica several specimens show still the brown color of the teeth as it is in the recent S. (Mura- cypraea) mus (LINNAEUS). SUMMARY There is a gradual evolution of several morphological characters in the Neogene Siphocypraea, by the sum of which three species and two subspecies can be distin- guished; the excessive development of the posterior outlet in the Pliocene S. problematica seems to have caused the extinction of this group of cowries. In future collecting these fossils the exact position of each specimen within the stratigraphical beds should be indicated carefully so that the chronological development of characters could be shown more accurately than in this paper. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I wish to express my sincere thanks to American scientists who donated many specimens of Siphocypraea so rarely represented in collections in Europe: especially to Mrs. J. W. Donovan who supported my studies by giving me many shells as well as maps of Florida, etc.; to Mr. J. R. Du Bar; W.E. Old, Jr.; R.Summers; Dr. A. A. Olsson; and Miss H. ‘Tucker who sent me specimens, papers or information concerning the present study. Page 240 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 LITERATURE CITED Conrap, TimortHy ABBOTT 1841. | Appendix to J. T. Hodge, Observations on the Tertiary of the southern Atlantic states. Silliman’s Amer. Journ. Sci. 41: 346; plts. CossmMann, ALEXANDRE EDOUARD MAURICE 1903. Essais de paléoconchyliologie comparée, vol. 5 (Paris) Da, WILLIAM HEALEY 1890. Contributions to the Tertiary fauna of Florida. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. 3 (1) - Donovan, James W. & VirciniA DoNovAN 1963. Letter. Seafari (a type-written periodical published by the Palm Beach County Shell Club) , October 1963 Du Bar, Jutes R. 1958. Stratigraphy and paleontology of the late Neogene strata of the Caloosahatchee River area of southern Florida. Florida Geol. Survey, Geol. Bull 40; 267 pp.; 12 plts. Emmons, EBENEZER 1858. Mollusca, in: Report North Carolina Survey. Raleigh. GaRDNER, JULIA 1948. Mollusca from the Miocene and Pliocene of Virginia and North Carolina (II.) U.S. Dept. Inter., Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 199B, p. 179 HerLprin, ANGELO , IncrAM, Wi_it1am Marcus 1939. A new fossil cowry from North Carolina. The Nau- tilus 52 (4): 120-121; plt. 9, fig. 2 MansFIELp, W. C. 1931. Some Tertiary mollusks from southern Florida. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus, 79 (21): 12 pp.; 4 plts. Otsson, AxEL A. & ANNE HARBISON 1953. Pliocene mollusca of southern Florida. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Monogr. 8: 1 - 457; plts. Otsson, Axe. A. & RicHarp E. Petir 1964. Some Neogene mollusca from Florida and the Carolinas. Bull. Amer. Pal. 47 (217) : 505 - 574; plts. 77 - 83 SCHILDER, FRANZ ALFRED 1926. Additions and corrections to Vredenburg’s classification of the Cypraeidae. Rec. Geol. Surv. India 58 (4) : 358 to 379 1932. Cypraeacea. In Fossilium Catalogus I: Animalia, part 55: 276 pp. 1941. Verwandtschaft und Verbreitung der Cypraeacea. Arch. Molluskenk. 73 (2-3): 57-120; 2 plts. 1958. Die Bezeichnung der Zahndichte der Cypraeacea. Arch. Molluskenk. 87 (1/3): 77 - 80 Tucker, HELEN I. « DrupD Witson 1932. Some new or otherwise interesting fossils from the Flor- ida Tertiary. | Bull. Amer. Pal. 18 (65) 1887. Explorations on the west coast of Florida and in the r M«ES.H Okeechobee wilderness. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. 1: 1 to US erase ea Grinee 1857. Pliocene fossils from South Carolina (Charleston) 134: 19 plts. Wooprtnc, WENDELL PHILLIPS 1957. Muracypraea, a new subgenus of Cypraea. The Nautilus 70 (3): 88-89 Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 241 New Terebrid Species from the Indo-Pacific Ocean and from the Gulf of Mexico, with New Locality Records and Provisional Lists of Species Collected in Western Australia and at Sabah, Malaysia (Mollusca ; Gastropoda ) BY R. D. BURCH Post Office Box 461, Winton, California 95388 (Plate 31) THE CONTINUED INTEREST in the collection and study of mollusca, coupled with improvements in equipment for dredging and diving, keeps adding to the known fauna of relatively well-explored waters and makes possible the compilation of check lists for less-known areas and the description of species heretofore not recorded in the literature. Through the interest and generosity of a number of individuals and institutions new locality records or range extensions can be noted here, and provisional lists of terebrid species are possible for several areas for which there is little reference material available. The new locali- ty records are noted here immediately following the description of the last new species described from the particular area. It is my intention to avoid, if possible, adding to the confusion of the taxonomic problems of this family; therefore, I have conservatively assigned all species to the broad generic groups of Duplicaria, Hastula and Terebra, with the use of such other supraspecific taxa as have been employed by previous authors. Since it has not been possible to make anatomical examina- tions necessary for an exact generic assignment of the various species, all such designations are made tentatively on the basis of shell characters alone. In some areas such as Hawaii and Japan, from which new species or new locality records are noted, the collec- ting has been relatively intensive for many years and several lists of species have been compiled and published. All new records and range extensions noted here for such areas have been set down only after an examination of the literature. Hastula (Hastula) tiedemani R. D. Burcu, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 6) Description: Shell very small, moderately subulate in shape, with flat-convex whorls; sculpture of straight, sharp, strong axial ribs extending from suture to suture on each whorl, fading at the periphery of the body whorl; interstitial spaces between the ribs smooth with no spiral sculpture; protoconch of three and one-half conical whorls, amber colored, darker on the anterior part. Shell color a shining white, with a faint light-brown wide band on the anterior portion of the whorls, extending around the base of the body whorl anterior to the periphery. Aperture narrow; columella straight, simple; siphonal canal a little reflected. Length 6.0 mm; width 1.5 mm. Holotype: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, No. 251237. Type Locality: The holotype was collected at 50 foot depth with the use of diving equipment by Mr. Alan Tiedeman in Maalaea Bay, off Kihei, Maui, Hawaii, in January, 1964. Lat. 20° 46’ N; Long. 156° 30’ W. Discussion: This minute species must be considered very rare since only a single specimen has been obtained during the extensive collecting in the Hawaiian Islands. This may be partially attributable to the very small size; it is the smallest species of Hastula known to me. The holotype is an adult specimen of six complete whorls in addition to the protoconch, and the body whorl exhibits the characteristics found in adult specimens of the genus. Hastula tiedemani resembles H. albula (MeENxeE, 1843) (=H. casta (Hinps, 1844)), except that H. albula Page 242 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 is very much larger with wider and more obese whorls. Hastula tiedemani differs from H. medipacifica PitsBry, 1921, which has also suture-to-suture axial ribs, in that the former is very much shorter, with a narrower apical angle and a different color arrangement. The sculptural variations of both H. albula and H. medipacifica, the two species which most closely resemble H. tiedemani, are in all instances much larger and wider, with a greater apical angle, and the width of the aperture propor- tionately greater. An effort has been made to secure additional specimens; however, the rarity and small size of this species have combined to prevent the collection of any other specimens. These factors have determined that this species be described from the unique specimen designated as the holotype. This species is named in honor of Mr. Alan Tiedeman for his numerous additions to the knowledge of the terebrid species indigenous to Hawaii. Hastula (Hastula) maryleeae R. D. Burcu, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 4) Description: Shell small, moderately subulate, with flat- concave whorls; color dark brown, with an obscure white band at the periphery of the body whorl; sculpture of low, thin axial ribs on the posterior one-third of each whorl; anterior portion unsculptured ; body whorl with a series of low, thin, weak semi-nodules at the periphery, not con- necting with the crenules on the posterior portion and not extending to the base of the shell; protoconch of two glassy whorls; aperture effuse and moderately laminated on the columellar wall; columella short, straight, with a single strong plication. Length 23.7 mm; width 5.0 mm. Holotype: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University No. 251235 Type Locality: The holotype and 20 paratypes were collected in sand at low tide on March 16, 1961, by Mrs. Mary Lee Burch at Surfside Beach, Freeport, Texas. Lat. 28°57’N; Long. 95° 38’ W. Paratypes: Since this species has been taken in numbers by several collectors, paratypes are being deposited in a number of major institutions. Additional paratypes will remain in the collections cited in Table 1. Discussion: This small species is regarded as uncommon along the Texas coast in a area bounded by Freeport, Texas, on the east and by Padre Island on the west. It is rather variable in both sculpture and color, with about 40% of specimens examined having the peripheral cren- ules on the body whorl entirely obsolete and replaced with a continuous swelling that forms a wide convex belt. The peripheral crenules or swellings on the body whorl, together with the crenules of the subsutural band, com- bine to give the outline of the whorls a concave appear- ance. As with many other species of the genus Hastula, this species often produces colorless or albino varieties; hypotype (21) is a solid opaque white. Other color vari- ations between the dark brown of the holotype and the pure white of hypotype (21) most often show a light area immediately anterior to the suture, followed by a dark gray or purplish color which extends to the periphery of the body whorl where it is interrupted by a band of white before continuing to the base of the whorl. Hastula maryleeae differs from H. hastata (GmeEutN, 1791) in that the former is more slender in form and does not have the continuous suture-to-suture axial ribs of the latter. It also differs from H. cinerea (Born, 1780) and H. salleana (DesuHayes, 1859) in that it possesses a row of small crenules, occasionally coalesced into a broad belt at the periphery of the body whorl. This species is named in honor of Mrs. Mary Lee Burch for her understanding and assistance during the sometimes tedious days of this study and for having collected the first specimens which brought this species to my attention. Hastula (Hastula) maryleeae Table 1 Specimen Collection Locality Collector Holotype M. C. Z. No. 251235 Surfside Beach, Freeport, Texas M. L. Burch Paratypes 1, 2 M. C. Z. No. 251236 Surfside Beach, Freeport, Texas M. L. Burch Paratype 3 Natal Mus., South Africa Surfside Beach, Freeport, Texas M. L. Burch No. 1067 Paratypes 4, 5 Tiedeman Coll. Surfside Beach, Freeport, Texas M. L. Burch Paratypes 6, 7 Campbell Coll. Surfside Beach, Freeport, Texas M. L. Burch Paratypes 8 - 20 R. D. Burch Coll. No. 023 Surfside Beach, Freeport, Texas M. L. Burch Hypotype (21) R. D. Burch Coll. No. 466 “Padre Island,” Texas C. Ivey Hypotypes (22 - 26) Webb Coll. “Mustang Island,” Texas K. Webb Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 243 Hastula (Punctoterebra) betsyae R. D. Burcn, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 2) Description: Shell small and moderately subulate, with flat-convex whorls, sculptured with low, slightly bent, an- gular ribs which are contiguous with the sutures on the early whorls and fading at the periphery of the body whorl; interstices between each axial rib contain a single depressed punctation at about one-third the whorl’s width from the posterior suture; punctations not connected across the ribs forming an interrupted line of spiral sculpture; color pattern a series of irregular axial brown lines or flammules which occasionally coalesce to form interrupted spiral bands of color on the basically white shell; protoconch with three conical, glassy whorls; aper- ture oblong-ovate; columella straight and slightly angled; siphonal canal recurved. Length 34.0 mm; width 7.0 mm. Holotype: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University No. 251238 Type Locality: The holotype and 47 paratypes were col- lected in sand at 20 feet with the use of diving equipment by Mr. Alan Tiedeman off Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii, in December, 1963. Lat. 21°04’N; Long. 156° 38’ W. Paratypes: This relatively common species, which appears to be endemic to the Hawaiian Islands, has been taken in large numbers by several collectors. Paratypes are deposited in a number of major institutions. Additional paratypes will remain in the collections cited in Table 2. Discussion: Hastula betsyae resembles H. penicillata (Hinps, 1844), except that a single punctation is present in each interstice of the former, while this interstitial space is not punctate in the latter. An examination of numerous specimens of H. penicillata from various locali- ties in the Pacific and Indian oceans, together with a scrutiny of the various check lists and the literature published to date, has failed to disclose a single specimen of H. penicillata with an indication of the punctate sculp- ture displayed uniformly by each of over 400 examples of H. betsyae collected at Hawaiian localities, all of which have been examined under magnification. Except for various arrangements of the color pattern, H. penicillata is remarkably consistent in sculpture throughout its entire range eastward in the Pacific ocean to Easter Island; however, it appears that the species does not occur in the Hawaiian Islands. Hastula betsyae is the species referred to as H. penicillata (Hinps) by Tinxer, 1958 (p. 198) and Weaver, 1960 (vol. 1, no. 5, bottom row). This species is named in honor of Miss Betsy Clarke Harrison for having collected the specimens which first brought the species to my attention, In addition to the new species Hastula tiedemani and H. betsyae described above from the recent collecting in the Hawaiian Islands, a number of additions to the pub- lished records of the fauna can now be noted. Through the efforts and interest of Mrs. Elizabeth Harrison, Mr. C.S. Weaver and Mr. Alan Tiedeman, the following should be included among the terebrids of Hawaii as listed by Prrspry (1921), Mant (1923), TinKER (1952, 1958), Weaver (1960 - 1961), and various issues of The Hawaiian Shell News. Hastula (Punctoterebra) anomala (Gray, 1834) ; Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 62; Fig.: Hinps in Sower- BY, Thes. Conch., Terebra, 1844, pl. 44, fig. 97. This species superficially resembles H. inconstans (Hinps, 1844). It may be distinguished by a single row of punc- Table 2 Hastula (Punctoterebra) betsyae Specimen Collection Locality Collector Holotype M. C. Z. No. 251238 Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii A. Tiedeman Paratypes 1, 2 M. CG. Z. No. 251239 Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii A. Tiedeman ' Paratypes 3 - 7 San Diego Mus. Nat. Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii A. Tiedeman Hist. No. 48930 Paratypes 8 - 10 Natal Mus., South Africa Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii A. Tiedeman No. 1068 Paratypes 11-14 | Tiedeman Coll. Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii A. Tiedeman Paratypes 15-18 | Campbell Coll. Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii A. Tiedeman Paratypes 19 - 22 Weaver Coll. Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii A. Tiedeman Paratypes 23 - 26 Harrison Coll. Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii A. Tiedeman Paratypes 27 - 47 R. D. Burch Coll. No. 172 Honokohau, Maui, Hawaii A. Tiedeman Hypotypes (48-52) R.D. Burch Coll. No. 353 Haleiwa Bay, Oahu, Hawaii B. Harrison Hypotypes (53-56) R.D. Burch Coll. No. 532 Waianae Bay, Oahu, Hawaii C. Weaver Page 244 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 tations that occasionally coalesce to form a thin shallow subsutural groove. Collected at 20 feet off MacGregor’s Landing, Maui, by Alan Tiedeman, Jan., 1964, and littorally at Nanakuli, Oahu, by Mrs. Jean Bromley in 1959. R. D. Burch Coll. Nos. 621, 622. , Terebra (Dimidacus) amanda Hinps, 1844; Proc. Zool. Soc. for 1843, p. 154; Fig.: Hinps in SowerBy; Thes. Conch., 1844, Tercbra, pl. 45, fig. 100. Collected at 35 feet in Pokai Bay, Oahu, by Mrs. Eliza- beth Harrison on June 22, 1962, and at 80 feet, under sand in Waianae Bay, Oahu, by C.S. Weaver on August 29, 1963. R. D. Burch Coll. Nos. 405, 533. Terebra (Strioterebrum) cancellata Quoy & GaIMARD, 1832; Voy. Astrol., Moll., vol. 2, p. 471, plt. 36, figs. 27, 28 (non Ropine, 1798, == T. anilis ROptNG, 1798) ; non Gray, 1834, == T. undatella DrsHayes, 1859; non Cossmann, 1900, = TV. intermedia VREDENBURG, 1921). Iwo specimens collected under four inches of sand by C.S. Weaver at Nawiliwili, Kauai, in April, 1956. CG. N. Cate Coll. No. 052. Terebra (Decorthastula) marmorata DesHayEs, 1859; Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 279, no. 21; Fig.: Reeve, Conch. Icon., 1860, Terebra, plt. 19, figs. 91a, b. Speci- mens collected at 30 feet, in sand, off the Bureau of Standards Timing Station, Kihei Lagoon, Maui, by Mr. Joe Kern during 1964. Excellent specimens are in the Kern Coll. and Tiedeman Coll.; R. D. Burch Coll. No. 661. Terebra (Decorthastula) nebulosa SowErBy. 1825; Tank. Cat. App., p. 25 (non Kiener, 1838, = T. candida (Born, 1780) ; non Lorots, 1858, = T. guttata (Ropine, 1798) ). Collected at 35 feet in Pokai Bay, Oahu, by Mrs. Elizabeth Harrison on June 22, 1962. R. D. Burch Coll. No. 406. Terebra (Perirhoe) tricolor Sowrrsy, 1825; Tank. Cat. App., p. 24. Two specimens collected at 30 feet off MacGregor’s Landing, Maui, by Alan Tiedeman during August, 1964. Tiedeman Coll. No. 1386. Hastula (Punctoterebra) cernohorskyi R. D. Burcu, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 3) Description: Shell of medium size, moderately subulate in form; color light brown or light olive-green throughout; a lighter shade immediately anterior to the sutures, and a darker band below the periphery of the body whorl extends to the siphonal canal with little contrast; early sculpture of low, rounded, close-set axial ribs contiguous with the sutures; ribs becoming shorter in succeeding whorls until they extend only over the posterior one-fourth of the whorl. At the sixth whorl, the axial ribs extend over the posterior one-half of the whorl and are microscop- ically punctate in the rib interstices. The single interstitial punctation, located on the posterior one-fourth of the whorl, intersects the edges of the ribs and forms an obsolete, narrow, shallow subsutural groove which con- tinues to the aperture. Whorls flat-convex; aperture oblong-ovate and slightly effuse at the base; columella short, slightly angled and moderately twisted, with two plications; columellar wall lightly laminated; siphonal canal moderately recurved. Length 54.0 mm; width 7.0 millimeters. Holotype: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University No. 251245 Type Locality: The holotype and 7 paratypes, all dead specimens devoid of animal, were collected littorally or by dredging over a sand bottom in shallow water off Natadola, Fiji Islands, by Mr. W. O. Cernohorsky during 1961 and 1962 and by Mr. A. Morse in 1959. Lat. 18° 06’40”S; Long. 177° 19’30”E. Paratypes will remain in the collections cited in Table 3. Discussion: Hastula cernohorskyi has no closely-resembling species with which it might be confused, although some superficial similarity exists in H. anomala (Gray, 1834). With H. cernohorskyi, the crenules anterior to the suture are smaller, more rounded and close-set than in H. Table 3 Hastula (Punctoterebra) cernohorskyi Specimen Collection : Locality Collector Holotype M. C. Z. No. 251245 Natadola, Fiji Islands W. Cernohorsky Paratypes 1 - 5 Cernohorsky Coll. Natadola, Fiji Islands A. Morse Paratype 6 Jennings Coll. Natadola, Fiji Islands A. Morse Paratype 7 R. D. Burch Coll. No. 633 Natadola, Fiji Islands A. Morse Hypotype 1 Currin Coll. Unknown, “bought from fisher- man in Philippines” Hypotype 2 Miller Coll. Leleuvia Island, Fiji Islands cited from ob- servation of W. Cernohorsky Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 245 anomala and extend only about one-fourth the distance across the whorl, while in H. anomala they extend to and beyond the periphery of the body whorl. The aperture of H. cernohorskyi is less effuse than that of H. anomala, and the columellar wall has less laminations. The distinc- tive uniform color of H. cernohorskyi will distinguish it from H. anomala and H. lauta (Prasr. 1869), as will the greater apical angle and much larger size. Hastula cernohorskyi is considered by the author to be endemic to the southern Fiji Islands and presently very rare. It is probably the second-largest species of the genus, only H. caerulescens (LAMARcK, 1822) exceeding it in size. This species is named in honor of Mr. Walter Oliver Cernohorsky in recognition of his considerable contribu- tions to the literature of the molluscan fauna of the Fiji Islands and for having collected the specimens which first brought the species to my attention. Duplicaria (Duplicaria) crakei R. D. Burcu, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 1) Description: Shell small, moderately subulate, with flat- convex whorls; color pale yellow, occasionally suffused or blotched with brown anterior to the subsutural groove and extending just below the periphery of the body whorl, followed by a wide blue-purple band anterior to the periphery covering the base of the shell; bottom of the subsutural groove colored same as base of shell with the color extending on to and occasionally suffusing the entire subsutural band; sculpture of straight, regularly-spaced, angular axial ribs, contiguous with the sutures and ex- tending to the base of the body whorl. A deep spiral sub- sutural groove divides the whorls about one-third of their width from the posterior suture, setting off a subsutural band of axially-lengthened straight crenules which are continuations of the ribs anterior to them. No other spiral sculpture than that formed by the subsutural groove. Protoconch paucispiral, of two and one-half conical, amber-colored whorls which are a darker shade on the posterior half of each whorl; columella very twisted, of same color as base of shell, with a single strong plication that is yellow or white; siphonal canal very recurved. Length 23.0 mm; width 5.5 mm. Holotype: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University No. 251241 Type Locality: The holotype and 97 paratypes were collected in fine sand at low tide on Cable Beach, Broome, Western Australia, during August of 1962, by Mr. Ted Crake. Lat. 18° 00’S.; Long. 122° 15’E. Paratypes: The collection of sufficient paratypes has allowed for deposit in a number of private and major public collections. Numbered paratypes will be retained in the collections cited in Table 4. Discussion: The distinctive colors and their arrangement, together with the polished shining surface, combine to make Duplicaria crakei one of the most beautiful of the terebrid species. There are infrequent color variations in which the blue-purple color of the predominant form is replaced by various shades of brown, and in these a wide pale-brown color band, occasionally broken into blotches or spots, occupies the area immediately anterior to the subsutural groove and displaces about one-half of the yellow color of the predominant form. Duplicaria crakei is sculpturally similar to several other species but may be readily distinguished from them. It differs from D. dupli- cata (LinnagEus, 1758) in that its crenules of the sub- sutural band are axially straight and sharp, while in D. Table 4 Duplicaria (Duplicaria) crakei Specimen Collection y Locality Collector Holotype M. C. Z. No. 251241 Broome, West Australia T. Crake Paratypes 1-5 M. GC. Z. No. 251242 Broome, West Australia T. Crake Paratypes 6 - 8 San Diego Mus. Nat. Broome, West Australia T. Crake Hist. No. 48935 Paratypes 9, 10 Natal Mus., South Africa Broome, West Australia T. Crake No. 1069 Paratypes 11 - 13 Campbell Coll. Broome, West Australia T. Crake Paratypes 14, 15 Tiedeman Coll. Broome, West Australia T. Crake Paratypes 16-97 R.D. Burch Coll. No. 336 Broome, West Australia T. Crake No. 337 Page 246 duplicata they are slanted or curved and have a flattened or rounded appearance. It differs from D. addita (DEs- HAYES, 1859) in that it has a deeper, wider subsutural groove setting off a less-rounded, less-turreted subsutural band, and a smaller apical angle. The sculptural differ- ences are more apparent from D. fictilis (Hinps, 1844), D. bicolor (Ancas, 1867), and D. fuscobasis (E. A. Smiru, 1877) in that D. crakei has a wide, flat subsutural band set off by the sharp, deeply-cut subsutural groove rather than the narrow, rounded subsutural band and shallow impressed subsutural groove of those species. Both D. macandrewi (E.A.Smiru, 1877) and D. padang- ensis (THIELE, 1925) have distinct microscopic inter- stitial spiral striations, while the interstices between the axial ribs of D. crakei are smooth and polished. This species is named to honor Mr. Ted Crake for having collected the shells from which the species is described and for his generous assistance in providing specimens and information relative to the terebrid fauna of the area. The collecting for terebrid species in Western Australia has been limited to small areas, and the fauna of much of the lengthy coastline remains relatively unknown. No check lists appear to have been published for the general area, although a few limited listings have been made from certain areas along the coast. Through the generous assist- ance of Mr. Anthony Kalnins of Riverton, Mrs. M. Seymour of Port Hedland and Mr. Ted Crake of Broome, the following species can be recorded here from Western Australia localities: Genus Hastula H. (Hastula) diversa (E. A. Smiru, 1901) ; Journ. Conch. vol. 10; p. 115; pit. 1, fig. 6 Littoral, 200 miles south of Broome; R. D. Burch Coll. No. 340. _ H. (Hastula) dispar (DesHayEs, 1859) ; Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 284; fig.: Reeve, Conch. Icon., Terebra, plt. 25, fig. 137. In fine sand at low tide, Broome. R. D. Burch Coll. No. 317. H (Punctoterebra) lauta (Pease, 1869); Amer. Journ. Conch., vol. 5, p. 66; fig.: Weaver, Hawaiian Marine Mollusks, 1960, vol. 1, no. 8. Littoral, Broome; R. D. Burch Coll. No. 534. H. (Punctoterebra) nitida (Hinps, 1844); Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1843, p. 152; fig.: Hinps in Sowersy, Thes. Conch., Terebra, 1844, plt. 45, fig. 103. In sand at low tide. Port Hedland; R. D. Burch Coll. No. 462. H. (Punctoterebra) plumbea (Quoy « Gamarp, 1832) ; Voy. Astrol., Moll., p. 470, plt. 36, figs. 29,30. THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 Littoral; Murumba, King Sound; R. D. Burch Coll. No. 376. H. (Hastula) rufopunctata (E.A.Smiru, 1877); Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., p. 229. No figure seems to have been published for this species until now. - In sand at low tide, Broome; R. D. Burch Coll. No. 314; Port Hed- land; R. D. Burch Coll. No. 628. Genus Duplicaria D. (Duplicaria) addita (DESHAYES, 1859); Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 293; fig.: REEVE, Conch. Icon., 1860, Terebra, plt. 19, fig. 94. - Broome; R. D. Burch Coll. No. 338; and Port Hedland, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 476. D. (Duplicaria) australis (E.A.Smiru, 1873); Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., p. 264; fig.: Hepiey, Proc. Linn. Soc. New So. Wales, 1908, vol. 38, prt. 3, plt. 7, fig. 2. King Sound, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 375; Broome. R. D. Burch Coll. No. 150; Port Hedland, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 464; and Cape Leveque, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 065. D. (Duplicaria) duplicata (LinnakEus, 1758) ; Syst. Nat., Ed. 10, p. 742, no. 419; fig.: GauLtiert, Test., plt. 57, fig. N. This species has been given a number of names which are primarily based on the many color variations and patterns, all of which are to be found among specimens collected in Western Australia. After longitudinally sec- tioning shells of various color and sculptural forms ob- tained from many areas, including eastern Africa and the Red Sea, I am unable to follow the arrangement for this species erected by Bartscu, in which the dark brown color form is given a new name, Terebra duplicato- ides, and a new subgenus, Myurellisca, erected for it. (see Bartscu, Pau, 1923 - Nautilus 37 (2): 63 - 64). Broome, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 111; Port Hedland, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 463; and Albany, King George Sound, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 081. D. (Duplicaria) evoluta (DEsHayEs, 1859); Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 292; fig.: REEve, Conch. Icon., 1860, Terebra, pit. 13, fig. 55 (non HirasgE, 1917, plt. 2, fig. 11 and plt. 4, figs. 42-44; non Kira, 1959, plt. 70, fig. 17). This species is often found in the same localities as D. australis and is occasionally intermingled with it in the same population. There is some question as to the relationship between these two species, since in some instances both forms have been collected together in a single track. For purposes of separating these closely related species it may be noted that D. evoluta has a base color of dark gray, brown or black, with a narrow white band anterior to the periphery of the body whorl. In D. australis the basic color is solid white or light orange. The bottom of the subsutural groove of D. evoluta is finely punctate when examined under magni- fication, while in D. australis it is smooth. [BurcH] Plate 31 THE VELIGER, Vol. 7. No. 4 é ih # Hh ' pst P| i por gs Mag ) i es 4 - J ~~ re. ee j 'e is % T i ’ is Figure 5 Figure 4 Figure 1 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 All figures are of the holotypes of the species described as new in this paper. Figure 1: Duplicaria crakei; MCZ No. 251241 (x 23) Figure 2: Hastula betsyae; MCZ No. 251238 (x 2) Figure 3: Hastula cernohorskyi; MCZ No. 251245 (x 1) Figure 4: Hastula maryleeae; MCZ No. 251235 (x 2%) Figure 5: Terebra campbelli; MCZ No. 251244 (x 24) Figure 6: Hastula tiedemant; MCZ No. 251237 (x 93) Figure 7: Terebra montgomeryi; MCZ No. 251240 (x 14) Figure 8: Terebra kilburnt; MCZ No. 251247 (x 2) Figure 9: Terebra jenningsi: MCZ No. 251248 (x 14) Figure 10: Duplicaria teramachu; MCZ No. 251243 (x 2) G. Bruce CAMPBELL p'olo. Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 247 Broome, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 465; a melanistic color form also occurs here infrequently, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 367. D. (Pervicacia) ustulata (DesHayes, 1857); Journ. Conchyl., p. 97, plt. 3, fig. 12. Albany, King George Sound; R. D. Burch Coll. No. 618. Genus Terebra T. (Decorihastula) amoena Desuayes, 1859; Proc.Zool. Soc. London, p. 297; fig.: Rrerve. Conch. Icon., 1860, Terebra, plt. 18, fig. 80. Port Hedland, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 460. T. (Decorthastula) picta Hinps, 1844; Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1843, p. 156; fig.: Hinps in Sowersy, Thes. Conch., 1844, Terebra, plt. 45, fig. 105. The specimens from Western Australia exhibit consid- erable variation in color, with the large majority being melanistic. Specimens collected at Murumba, King Sound, are of the color and color pattern of Hinps’ description, while those collected from more southern localities are about 95% of the melanistic color variety. King Sound, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 377; Broome, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 339; and Port Hedland, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 477. : (Clathroterebra) violascens Hinps, 1844; Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1843, p. 154; fig.: Hryps in Sowersy, Thes. Conch., 1844, Terebra, plt. 45, fig. 98. Broome, R. D. Burch Coll. No. 536. The terebrid fauna of Australia, particularly that of the area included above, seems to be unique in the high proportion of species of the genera Duplicaria and Hastula to those of the genus Terebra. — Duplicaria (Duplicaria) teramachii R. D. Burcu, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 10) Description: Shell of medium size with tight-wound, flat-convex whorls; basic color ivory-white, overlaid anterior to the subsutural groove with a broad, interrupted band of reddish-brown which, on the body whorl, extends to the base of the shell; body whorl anterior to the peri- phery encircled by a faint, narrow band of color, same as basic shell coloration; sculpture of thin, narrow, close-set, straight axial ribs contiguous with the sutures and extend- ing weakly to the base. A narrow subsutural groove, more deeply impressed in the interstices, cuts the ribs about one-fourth the whorl width from the posterior suture, forming a subsutural band of crenules which are extensions of the axial ribs anterior to the groove; columella straight, with a single strong plication; colum- ellar wall strongly laminated; aperture long and narrow. Length 37.0 mm; width 5.5 mm. Holotype: Muscum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University No. 251243 Type Locality: The holotype was dredged at 70 fathoms off Tosa, in Tosa Bay, Japan, in 1962. Lat. 33° 25’N; Honcwllasimo2akn Discussion: There are no species which closely resemble Duplicaria teramachii in form and sculpture although several species of the genus have a similar color or color pattern. The subsutural groove of D. teramachi is narrow, relatively shallow and more deeply cut at its juncture with the rib interstices; while in D. duplicata (LINNAEUS, 1758), D. dussumieri (KreneEr, 1839), D. evoluta (DEs- HAYES, 1859) and D. spectabilis (Hinps, 1844) the groove is broad and much more deeply cut; a very broad impressed groove such as that displayed by D. kirai Ova- MA, 1962, D. latisulcata (Yokoyama, 1922) and D. recticostata (YOKOYAMA, 1920) is even farther removed from that of D. teramachu. The subsutural groove of D. albozonata (E. A. Smiru, 1875) does not have the deep interstitial cut observed in D. teramachii and the subsutur- al band of that species is composed of slanted, wave-like crenules; with the columellar wall not laminated, a more obese form and different color pattern also distinguishing it from D. teramachu. The apical angle of D. teramachu is also narower than that of each of the above species. The color and color pattern of D. tiurensis (SCHEPMAN, 1913) are similar, but the more widely spaced axial ribs not extending beyond the periphery of the body whorl and the not-laminated columellar wall distinguish it from D. teramachu. The evident rarity of Duplicaria teramachu and the depth from which it was trawled in Tosa Bay indicate that the species may justifiably be described from the unique specimen. This species is named in honor of Mr. Akibumi Tera- machi for his considerable contributions to the knowledge of the molluscan fauna of Japan and for having obtained the specimen from which the species is described. Terebra (Strioterebrum) campbelli R. D. Burcu, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 5) Description: Shell of medium size, very slender, with flat- convex whorls; basic color yellowish-white, with moder- ately-sized square or rectangular blotches of brown on the subsutural band occasionally extending onto the whorl anterior to the subsutural groove and a narrow, obscure white band at the periphery of the body whorl; sculpture of low, curved, rounded axial ribs; interstices of juvenile and sub-adult whorls bisected by numerous microscopic impressed striae; striations join across ribs of adult whorls to form about seven narrow, impressed spiral grooves; Page 248 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 axial ribs obsolete anterior to the periphery of the body whorl; a well-defined subsutural groove cuts the axial ribs about one-fourth the whorl’s width from the posterior suture, creating a flat or slightly rounded subsutural band composed of straight or dextrally-slanted crenules which are occasionally microscopically striated in the interstices; whorls tightly wound, so that the subsutural band is even with, or slightly below, the sides of the adjacent whorl peripheries; columella straight, with no plications; colum- ellar wall not laminated; siphonal canal moderately recurved. Length 25.5 mm; width 4.5 mm. Holotype: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University No. 251244 Type Locality: The holotype and one paratype (R. D. Burch Coll. No. 510; length 30.7 mm, width 5.0 mm) were dredged in 70 fathoms off Tosa, Japan, in Tosa Bay. during 1963. ex A. Teramachi Coll. Lat. 33° 25’N; Long. 133 32¢E- Discussion: Terebra campbelli resembles T. picta Hinps, 1844, except that in the latter the subsutural band is raised, giving the shell a turreted appearance, and the columella is slightly twisted, with a single moderately strong plication, while the subsutural band is level or slightly depressed in T. campbelli, with the columella straight and not plicated. The interstitial striations be- tween the axial ribs of T: campbelli are much finer and more numerous while crossing the ribs of adult whorls, but this interstitial striation does not coalesce in T. picta. Other species which superficially resemble T. campbelli are T. columellaris Htnps, 1844, T: amoena DESHAYES, 1859, T. gotoensis E. A. Smiru, 1879, T. pertusa (Born, 1780), T: marmorata Desuayes, 1859, and T. andaman- ica MELVILL & Sykes, 1899, but all of these have a greater apical angle and a punctate interstitial striation that does not cut across the ribs as in T. campbelli. This species is named in honor of G. Bruce Campbell in recognition of his generous assistance and for his contri- butions to the literature on the terebrid fauna of the western Americas. In addition to the above new species, Duplicaria tera- machu and Terebra campbelli, the efforts of Mr. Akibumi Teramachi have made possible the addition of the follow- ing terebrids to the lists of Japanese species compiled by Hirase, 1917, Kuropa & Hase, 1952, and Oyama, 1961. Terebra (Noditerebra) constricta Tutete, 1925: Deut- sche Tiefsee Exped., Gastr., prt. 2, p. 347, plt. 30, fig. 5. [This specific name may be a homonym; see: Hinps, 1844; Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1843, p.166, no. 116.] Dredged at 50 fathoms off Tosa, in Tosa Bay, Japan; ex A, Teramachi Coll. R. D. Burch Coll. No. 647. Terebra (Noditerebra) pectinata (VREDENBURG, 1921) ; Rec. Geol. Surv. India, p. 355, plt. 10, fig. 20. The present specimens are subfossil, with the proto- conch and early whorls missing, and a heavy black deposit on the shells. The basic color appears to be solid orange, with perhaps a white peripheral band on the body whorl. - Dredged in 50 fathoms in Tosa Bay, Japan; 1962. ex A. Teramachi Coll. R. D. Burch Coll. No. 507. Terebra (Triplostephanus) jenningsi R. D. Burcu, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 9) Description: Shell of medium size, very slender and elongated, with flat-concave whorls; basic color a bright orange throughout, with a white band encircling the whorls anterior to the sutures and including both of the two crenate subsutural bands; protoconch of two and one-half opaque white dome-like whorls; following three whorls of the teleoconch have two rows of microscopic crenules anterior to the posterior suture and one row of similarly small beads at the anterior suture, with the intervening peripheral section of the whorl being flat- concave; succeeding whorls moderately concave between the crenules for about 22 turns, becoming more flat or flat-convex on later whorls. The double row of crenules, the posterior row being larger, becomes progressively ob- solete until it has the appearance of a slightly raised broad belt, which is obsoletely nodular and broken only by the wrinkled axial growth lines. Anterior row of small, less well defined beads continues strongly throughout and around the periphery of the body whorl; at about the fourteenth whorl, the concave peripheral area of the whorls becomes spirally sculptured with four or five shallow, narrow impressed grooves, which are occasionally finely-punctate within, and with curved, arcuate axial growth lines; aperture ovate and flaring, constricted at the base; columella twisted, with the siphonal canal sharply recurved. Length 76.2 mm (with about 3.0 mm broken from apex) ; width 8.5 mm. Holotype: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University No. 251248 Description of animal: I am indebted to Mr. W. O. Cernohorsky for his observations which make possible this description of the animal of Terebra jenningsi. Siphon simple, of a pale yellow color which becomes bright yellow towards the extremity; eye-stalks short and pointed, cream-white with the black eyes situated slightly back from the tips; sole and dorsum of foot cream-white; foot truncated anteriorly and pointedly-rounded posteri- Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 249 orly; operculum narrow-elongate, translucent orange-yel- low in color. Type Locality: The holotype was dredged in three to four fathoms on clean sand substrate at the inner edge of the main barrier reef, one mile to the northwest of Namotu Island, Fiji Islands, by Mr. A. Jennings. Lat. 17° 50'S; Long. 177° 25’ E. This rare species seems to be restricted to the area bounded by Longitudes 115° East and 177° East and Lati- tudes 18° South and 15° North. Paratypes and hypotypes will be retained in the collections cited in Table 5. Discussion: Terebra jenningsi resembles T. triseriata Gray, 1834, and T. cumingi DesHayes, 1857, but is readily distinguished from them. The double row of crenules forming the subsutural band of those species is highly developed into strong beads which continue throughout the growth of the shell, while in T: jenningsi the subsutural collar is nodular and less well defined and is progressively obsolete becoming a flatly-rounded, obscurely nodular belt. Both T. trisertata and T: cumingi have strong, raised axial ribs crossed by numerous small impressed spiral striae which serrate, occasionally bead or cancellate the peripheral area, while in T. jenningsi the ribs are only slightly raised or completely obsolete, the growth lines weak and dextrally arcuate, spirally encircled with about four uninterrupted rounded impressed grooves. The apical angle of T: cumingi is greater than that of T. jenningsi, while the very twisted columella and laminated columellar wall of that species are in contrast to the slightly bent columella and unlaminated columellar wall of T: jenningsi. The aperture of T. jenningsi is more flaring and length- ened, with the columella longer and less sharply bent than in T. triseriata. The whorls of T. triseriata are more numerous (in the ratio of about 3:2) than in T. jennings, and the highly developed subsutural and_ peripheral sculpture creates a more turreted and concave whorl than is formed by T. jenningsi. The color pattern of the shell is often a helpful species- differentiating characteristic of the genus Terebra, though less useful in this respect with species of Duplicaria and Hastula, The basic orange color of T: jenningsi, with the encircling white band at the sutures continuing around the body whorl as a row of small, poorly defined white crenules at the periphery, assist in separating this species from T: cumingi and T. triseriata, both of which are basically a solid deep-amber color, with an occasional rare white or albino specimen. This species is named in honor of Mr. A. Jennings for his generous assistance in collecting quantities of Fiji Islands specimens for study, and for having collected the specimens which first brought this species to my attention. Terebra (Decorihastula) kilburni R. D. Burcu, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 8) Description: Shell small, with turreted, tightly-wound, flat-convex whorls, very slender in proportion to the width; basic color ivory-white, broken by a reddish-brown stain in the rib interstices which forms irregular, disconnected unevenly-sized blotches of color; ribs white or lighter color, with occasional interstices not colored; protoconch paucispiral, consisting of two and one-half conical, glassy, amber colored whorls; teleoconch sculpture of axial ribs contiguous with the sutures, with the anterior three- fourths of the whorl having about four minute, pricked punctations in the interstices; posterior punctations in- crease in size with shell growth to form a deeply-punctate, occasionally obsolete, subsutural groove; axial ribs straight, close-set, rounded, continue to base of shell with the inter- stitial striae, about ten on the penultimate whorl, also extending to base; the indistinct subsutural band formed by deep punctations of the subsutural groove is occasionally microscopically striate; an obscure white band circles Table 5 Terebra (Triplostephanus) jenningsi Specimen Collection Locality Collector Holotype M. C. Z. No. 251248 Natadola, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratypes 1 - 3 Jennings Coll. Natadola, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratypes 4 - 6 Cernohorsky Coll. Natadola, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratypes 7, 8 R. D. Burch Coll. No.034 Natadola, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratype 9 R. D. Burch Coll. No. 521 Nadi Island, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratype 10 Cernohorsky Coll. Vatukoula, Fiji Islands W. Cernohorsky Hypotype 1 R. D. Burch Coll. No. 607 Malawali Island, Sabah, Malaysia M. Saul Hypotype 2 M. Saul Coll., No. 387B Malawali Island, Sabah, Malaysia M. Saul Hypotype 3 R. D. Burch Coll. No. 033 Batangas Bay, Philippines ex D. Dan Page 250 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 the body whorl at the periphery; aperture very narrow and elongate; columella twisted, with a single plication; columellar wall moderately, translucently laminated; siphonal canal recurved. Length 32.0 mm; width 5.0 mm. Holotype: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University No. 251247 Type Locality: The holotype and 15 paratypes were collected by dredging in two to three feet off Wading Island, Fiji Islands, in July, 1962, by Mr. A. Jennings. Kat. 1754578. Wong. 17722508, Paratypes and hypotypes will be retained in the collec- tions cited in ‘Table 6. Discussion: Terebra kilburni resembles several species of similar sculpture which include T. columellaris Hips, 1844, T. undulata Gray, 1834, T: turrita (E. A. Smiru, 1873), T. fijiensis (E.A.Smiru, 1873), and T. pauci- striata (E. A. Smitu, 1873). Terebra kilburni is a smaller and more slender species, with more tightly wound whorls and smaller, more closely-set axial ribs than T. columellaris or T: undulata. The axial ribs of T: paucistriata and T. fijiensis are also larger and more widely spaced, and on all of the above similar species a distinct, well-formed subsutural groove separates a crenate, turreted subsutural band which does not resemble the smaller, flatter, not crenate band of T: kilburni. The axial ribs of T. turrita are sharp and widely spaced, with the interstices bluntly grooved and the whorls very turreted, while in T. kilburni the close-set, rounded ribs possess interstitial shallow, narrow grooves. The color pattern of each of the above species is different from that of Terebra kilburni. The basic dark yellow color of T. paucistriata is broken by a relatively broad band of white which covers the subsutural crenules and a portion of the whorl anterior to them; the periphery of the body whorl has an obscure white band. The color and color pattern of T: fijiensis are similar to that of T. paucistriata, but sculptural differences exist between the two species. The basic white color of T. columellaris is obscured by brown or orange predominant on the adult whorls so that only an occasional white rib is visible, with more of the white color visible in the crenules of the subsutural band and a distinct peripheral band of white at the body whorl. The interstices of T: turrita rib sculp- ture are colored with brown in the same manner as T. kilburni, but the great sculptural differences distinguish these two species very readily. This species is named in honor of Mr. R. N. Kilburn for his patient assistance and advice on the identification and synonymy of this and numerous other terebrid species. : Terebra (Dimidacus) montgomeryi R. D. Burcn, spec. nov. (Plate 31, Figure 7) Description: Shell of medium size, moderately subulate, with turreted, flat whorls; basic color white, with flam- mules of a deep orange color on the early whorls coales- cing to form large blotches of color on the adult whorls; the orange flammules are very concave on the posterior portion of the whorls, with the points thus formed extend- ing to the suture and forming an irregular series of relatively large white spots on the subsutural band; axial sculpture composed only of flexuous, microscopic growth lines; subsutural groove shallow and finely punctate at the bottom, setting off a subsutural band that is slightly Table 6 Terebra (Decorihastula) kilburni Specimen Collection Locality Collector Holotype M. C. Z. No. 251247 Wading Island, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratypes 1 - 5 Jennings Coll. Wading Island, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratypes 6, 7 Natal Mus., South Africa No. 1070 Wading Island, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratypes 8 - 10 R. D. Burch Coll. No. 366 Wading Island, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratypes 11 - 14 Cernohorsky Coll. Wading Island, Fiji Islands A. Jennings Paratype 15 Paratypes 16 - 18 Hypotypes 1, 2 Hypotypes 3 - 10 Hypotype 11 Cernohorsky Coll. M. C. Z. No. 251246 R. D. Burch Coll. No. 649 Lomalagi, Fiji Islands Lomalagi, Fiji Islands Madang, New Guinea R. D. Burch Coll. No. 302 Madang, New Guinea R. D. Burch Coll. No. 479 Thursday Island, Queensland Australia W. Cernohorsky _ W. Cernohorsky I. Pert I. Pert ex W. Eyerdam Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 25] crenate in the teleoconch whorls; progressively obsolete with growth until the band is flattened and broken only by the minute growth lines; anterior to the subsutural groove are four or five rows of unconnected microscopic punctations which give the appearance of spiral striae, with additional obsolete rows anterior to the periphery of the body whorl; aperture narrow-ovate, light-orange with- in; columella white, moderately twisted, with a single plication; siphonal canal recurved and bounded by a strong cord. Length 57.0 mm; width 10.0 mm. Holotype: Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University No. 251240 Type Locality: The holotype was collected in fine sand at four feet, inside the reef of Piti Bay, off Piti, Guam, Mariana Islands. Lat. 13° 27’N; Long. 144° 43’ E. Only the holotype and a single hypotype of Terebra montvomeryi are known to me. Hypotype no. 1 was collected off Natadola Island, Fiji Islands, in 1963, by Mr. A. Jennings and is in the Jennings Collection. Length 50.3 mm; width 8.7 mm. Discussion: Terebra montgomeryi resembles T. cingulifera Lamarck, 1822, except that the latter species has a basic color of plain yellowish-white or pinkish-white, with a spiral sculpture of four or five continuous indistinct grooves which are occasionally punctate within, while the whorls of 7: montgomeryi are not grooved and the punctations are on the shell surface and not connected. The basic color of T: pallida DesHayes, 1857, is a plain dark orange-red, with a series of about six narrow spiral grooves, not punctate within, on the penultimate whorl and a laminated columellar wall, while the colum- ellar wall of T: montgomeryi is not laminated. This species is named to honor Mr. Tom Montgomery for collecting and donating the holotype, and for his assistance with specimens of terebrids of Guam. The limited reference literature for Fijian terebrids seems presently confined to Cate & Burcu, 1964. Collect- ing done subsequently to the publication of that paper, at Fiji by Mr. A. Jennings and Mr. W. O. Cernohorsky, and at Madang, New Guinea by Mrs. Isobel Pert, has resulted in a number of additions to that list, which are included here. Duplicaria concolor (E. A. Smiru, 1873): Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. 11, p. 265; unfigured. - This is the D. australis (E. A. Smarty, 1873) of Cate & Burcu, 1964. The variability often exhibited by Fijian species and the similarity of D. australis and D. concolor \ed to the error in identification of the Fiji specimen cited. Jennings Collection. Duplicaria raphanula (Lamarck, 1822): Anim. s. Vert. vol. 7, p. 288, no. 16; fig.: Krener, Icon. Coq. Viv., 1839, plt. 10, fig. 20. - Fiji Islands. Cernohorsky Collection. Hastula castaneofusca (THIELE, 1925): Deutsche Tiefsee Exped., Gastr., prt. 2, p. 345, plt. 29, fig. 21. Madang, New Guinea. R. D. Burch Collection. Hastula cernohorsky: R. D. Burcu, 1965. Hastula exacuminata Sacco, 1891: I moll. terr. terz. Piem. Lig., Terebra, p. 18, fig.: Rerve, 1860, Conch. Icon., Terebra, plt. 26, fig. 143. - Madang, New Guinea. R. D. Burch Collection. Hastula plumbea (Quoy & GammarD, 1832) : Voy. Astrol., Moll., p. 470, plt. 36, fig. 29. - Fiji Islands. Cerno- horsky Collection; Jennings Collection. Hastula stylata (Hinps, 1844): Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1843, p. 152; fig.: Hinps in Sowersy, Thes. Conch., Terebra, pit. 44, fig. 79; 1844. - Fiji Islands. Cerno- horsky Collection. Terebra chlorata Lamarck, 1822: Anim. s. Vert., vol. 7, p. 288. no. 14; fig.: Kiener, 1839, Icon. Coq. Viv., plt. 4, figs. 8, 8a. - Madang, New Guinea. R. D. Burch Collection. Terebra fijiensis (E. A. SmMitu, 1873): Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., p. 266; unfigured. - Fiji Islands. Cernohorsky Collection; Jennings Collection. Madang, New Guinea. R. D. Burch Collection. Terebra flavofasciata Pitspry, 1921: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, vol. 69, p. 306, plt. 12, fig. 3. Madang, New Guinea. R. D. Burch Collection. Terebra jenningsi R. D. Burcu, 1965. Terebra kilburni R. D. Burcu, 1965. Terebra marmorata Dresuayes, 1859: Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 279; fig.: Reeve, 1860; Conch. Icon., Terebra, pit. 19, figs. 91a, b. - Fiji Islands. Cerno- horsky Collection. Terebra montgomery: R. D. Burcu, 1965. Terebra pallida Desuayes, 1857: Journ. Conchyl., p. 87, plt. 4, fig. 3. - Fiji Islands. Cernohorsky Collec- tion; Jennings Collection; R. D. Burch Collection. Terebra triseriata Gray, 1834: Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 62; fig.: Reeve, 1860, Conch. Icon. Terebra, plt. 13, figs. 52a, b. - Fiji Islands. Cernohorsky Collection. Madang, New Guinea. R. D. Burch Collection. Page 252 THE VELIGER Vol. 7; No. 4 Provisional Check List of Terebrids Collected at Sabah, Malaysia The terebrid fauna of Sabah, Malaysia (formerly North Borneo) is unusual because some of the species found here seemingly do not occur in the neighboring Philippine Islands. Because of this difference in species, the almost non-existent reference literature and the presently restric- ted collecting in the area, the citations below may be of use to students. Through the assistance of Mary Saul, who intensively collected in the area from 1960 to date, the foliowing list of species is possible. Symbols and abbreviations used are as follows: (1) Northwest coast, including Jesselton and offshore islands. (2) Kudat District, including Marudu Bay, the Mala- wali Channel; adjacent islands. (3) Sandakan, the Bay area only, and Berhala Island. (4) East coast; Semporna and offshore islands. S Saul Collection. BR. D. Burch Collection. Genus Hastula H. albula (Menke, 1843). (1) S no. 390; Bno. 110 - H. caerulescens (LAmMaRcK, 1822). (2) S no. 214; B no. 543 H. castaneofusca (Turere, 1925). (1) S no. 462A; B no. 632 H. concinna (Dittwyn, 1817). (1) Sno. 219 H. exacuminata Sacco, 1891. (1) S no. 218; B no. 161 H. lanceata (Linnatus, 1767). (4). S no. 516. H. nitida (Hinps, 1844). (3). S no. 463A. H. plumbea (Quoy & Gamarp, 1832). (3) S no. 462; B no. 550. H. solida (Desuayes, 1857). (3) S no. 545. Genus Duplicaria D. duplicata (Linnaeus, 1758). (2), (3) S no. 215, 456; B no. 103, 544. D. raphanula (Lamarck, 1822). (3) S no. 546. D. spectabilis (Hinps, 1844). (1), (3) S no. 345; B no. 051. Genus Terebra T. affinis Gray, 1834. (2) S no. 216; B no. 545. T. albomarginata Desuayes, 1859. (2) S no. 007. T. anilis (ROpinc, 1798). (3) S no. 347; B no. 548. T. areolata (Linx, 1806). (1), (2), (3), (4) S no. 211; B no. 540. T. babylonia Lamarck, 1822. (2) S no. 543; B no. 610. T. cancellata Quoy & Gatmarp, 1832. (1) S no. 346; B no. 558. T. cerithina Lamarck, 1822. (2) S no. 216A; B no. 686. T. chlorata Lamarck, 1822. (2) S no. 459; B no. 547. T. cingulifera LAMARCcK, 1822. (2) S no. 460; B no. 687. T. columellaris Hinps, 1844. (2) S no. 457A; B no. 549. T. conspersa Hinps, 1844. (2) S no. 541; B no. 609. T. crenulata (Linnagus, 1758). (1), (2), (3), (4) S no. 210; B no. 539. T. deshayesi Reeve, 1860. (2) S no. 385; B no. 210. T. dimidiata (Linnaeus, 1758). (1), (2), (3), (4) Sno. 213; B no. 542. T. exigua DesuayeEs, 1859. (2) S no. 348A. T. funiculata Hinps, 1844. (1) B no. 635. T. guttata (Roprne, 1798). (2), (4) S no. 515. T. jenningsi R. D. Burcu. 1965. (2) S no. 387B; B no. 607. T, laevigata Gray, 1834. (2) S no. 387; B no. 557. T. livida Reeve, 1860. (3) S no. 463; B no. 554. T. longiscata Desuayes, 1859. (3) S no. 461; B no. 556. T. maculata (Linnagus, 1758). (1), (2), (3), (4) S no. 209; B no. 538. T. monilis Quoy & Gatmarp, 1832. (2) S no. 386; B no. 561. T. nebulosa Sowersy, 1825. (2) S no. 457; B no. 546. T. persica E. A. Smiru, 1877. (3) S no. 503; B no. 553. T. subulata (Linnaeus, 1767). (1), (2), (3), (4) S no. 212; B no. 541. T. textilis Hinps, 1844. (2) S no. 008. T. tricincta E. A. Smrru, 1877. (3) S no. 465; B no. 552. T. undulata Gray, 1834. (2) S no. 458. Location of collections from which specimens in the present paper are cited, is as follows: R. D. Burch Coll. (also: B) - Winton, California. G. B. Campbell Coll. - Lynwood, California. Cate Coll. - C. « J. Cate, Los Angeles, California. W. Cernohorsky Coll. - Vatukoula, Fiji Islands. T. Crake Coll. - Broome, Western Australia. N. Currin Coll. - San Diego, California. Harrison Coll. - A. & E. Harrison, Honolulu, Hawaii. A. Jennings Coll. - Nadi Island, Fiji Islands. J. Kern Coll. - Maui, Hawaii. Miller Coll. - Suva, Fiji Islands. MCZ - Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard Uni- versity, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Natal Museum - Pietermaritzburg, Republic of South Africa. San Diego Natural History Museum - San Diego, Calif. Saul Coll. (also: S) - M. Saul, Sandakan, Sabah, Malaysia. Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Races255 Teramachi Coll. - A. Teramachi, Kyoto, Japan. Tiedeman Coll. - A. Tiedeman, Honolulu, Hawaii. Weaver Coll. - C. Weaver, Kailua, Hawaii. Webb Coll. - K. Webb, Chula Vista, California. Genera and subgenera, to which various species in this paper are referred, together with their respective type species, are as follows: Clathroterebra OyaMa, 1961: Venus 21 (2), p. 188. — Terebra fortunei DesHaAyEs, 1857. Decorihastula Oyama, 1961: Venus 21 (2), p. 185 — Terebra affinis Gray, 1834. Dimidacus IrEDALE, 1929: Austral. Zool. 5, p. 341 — Terebra cingulifera V.aMarcK, 1822. Terebrina Bartscu, 1923: Nautilus 37 (2), pp. 62, 63 (non RAFINESQUE, 1815, Ann. Nat., p. 145). Duplicaria Daur, 1908: Nautilus 21, p. 124 — Buccinum duplicata Linnakus, 1758. Diplomeriza Dat, 1919: Nautilus 33, p. 32. Myurellisca Bartscu, 1923: Nautilus 37 (2), p. 63. Hastula H. & A. ApaMs, 1853: Gen. Rec. Moll., 1, p. 225. — Hastula concinna (Dittwyn, 1817) = Terebra strigilata (LinNAEus) of authors. Noditerebra CossMANN, 1896: Ess. d. Pal. Comp., 2, p. 51 — Terebra geniculata Tate, 1886. Perirhoe Dati, 1908: Nautilus 21, p. 124 — Terebra circumcincta DesHayeEs, 1857. Pervicacia IREDALE, 1924 — Terebra ustulata DESHAYES, 1857. Punctoterebra Bartscu, 1923: Nautilus 37 (2), pp. 61, 63 — Terebra nitida Hinps, 1844. Strioterebrum Sacco, 1891: Moll. Piem. Lig., p. 33 — Terebra basteroti Nyst, 1843. Terebra Brucutére, 1789: Encycl. Méthod. Vers, vol. 1, p. 15 — Buccinum subulata LInNAEus, 1767. Triplostephanus Dax, 1908: Nautilus 21, p. 124 — Ter- ebra triseriata Gray, 1834. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS I am sincerely grateful for the generous cooperation given me over a period of many months by the individuals who have contributed so much of their time, advice and specimens toward the completion of this paper. The observations of those in the field who provided specimens with accurate locality data have added much to our knowledge of the distributional ranges of several species, while also adding to our information of species variability, ecology, and density patterns. Much additional informa- tion has been gained through the assistance extended by those who have made their collections available for study. In addition to the individuals and collections cited above, I wish to express my appreciation to Dr. A. C. van Bruggen of the Natal Museum, Dr. W. J. Clench of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, and Mr. Emery Chace of the San Diego Museum of Natural History and the San Diego Society of Natural History for advice and specimens made available to me during the course of this study. I also wish to acknowledge with gratitude the excellent photographs of the holotypes by Dr. G. Bruce Campbell. LITERATURE CITED Cate, Jean M., & R. D. Burch 1964. | Mitridae and Terebridae (Mollusca: Gastropoda) of Malaita, Fiji, and Bileau Island, New Guinea. The Veliger 6 (3): 139 - 147. (1 January 1964) Hirase, YOICHIRO 1917. Terebridae of the Japanese Empire. Illustr.; 131 figs. Kuropa, ToKuBEI & TADASHIGE HABE 1952. Checklist and bibliography of the Recent marine mol- lusca of Japan. 210 pp.; 2 maps. Tokyo, Japan (4 April 1952) Mant, Cnartes F. 1923. | Mollusca from the dredging operations at Kewalo Har- bor, Honolulu, 1921. Nautilus 36 (4): 120 - 123. Oyama, Katura 1961. On some new facts of the taxonomy of Terebridae. Venus: Japan. Journ. Malacol. 21 (2): 176-189 (Jan. 1961) 1961. On Japanese terebrid fossils and a few new facts of the family. Venus: Japan. Journ. Malacol. 21 (3): 281 - 288 (August 1961) 1961. | Biogeographical notes on Japanese Terebridae. Venus: Japan. Journ. Malacol. 21 (4): 442 - 462 Pitspry, HENRY AuGusTus 1921. Marine mollusks of Hawaii. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia; part 9: Terebra, pp. 300 - 309; 1 plt. (5 January 1921) ‘December 1961) TINKER, SPENCER WILKIE 1958. Pacific sea shells; a handbook of common marine mollusks of Hawaii and the South Seas. 2nd. rev. ed.; 239 pp-; illust. C. E. Tuttle Co. Vermont. [The auger shell family, pp. 184 - 200; 7 plts.] Weaver, Cuirton S. 1960 - 1961. Hawaiian marine mollusks; Recent and new species. pp. | - 36; 9 plts. Page 254 THE VELIGER Vol. 7: No. 4 NOTES & NEWS A. M. U. Pacific Division Meetings of the American Malacological Union - Pacific Division will take place in San Diego, California, June 24 through June 27, 1965. An attractive meeting site adjacent to the ocean and reasonable accommodations in dormitory facilities will be provided by California Western University. Field trips of unusual interest are being planned. Members of the A.M.U., the A.M.U.-P.D. and all who are interested in malacology, are invited to attend the meetings and to contribute papers. Titles and abstracts for those papers must be submitted before May 1, 1965. All correspondence should be directed to the Secretary, Mrs. Barbara J. Good, 3142 Larga Court, San Diego, California 92110. Those who are not members of the AMU- PD but who wish to be placed on the meeting mailing list should include 50 cents with their request. CatiForNnIA MaracozoorocicaL Society, Inc. announces: Backnumbers of THE VELIGER and other publications Volumes 1 and 2 are out of print Volume 3: $3.75 Volume 4: $5.- Volume 5: $5.- Volume 6: $7.- Volume 7: $10.- Subscription to Volume 8: $10.- domestic; $10.60 in Canada, Mexico, Central and South America; $10.80 all other foreign countries. Supplement to Volume 3: $3.- plus $-.25 postage (plus $ -.12 sales tax for California residents only) [Opisthobranch Mollusks of California by Prof. Ernst Marcus] Supplement to Volume 6: $4.- plus $-.25 postage (plus $-.16 sales tax for California residents only) [Biology of Tegula funebralis (A. Anams), edited by Abbott, Blinks, Phillips and Stohler] {Members of C. M.S., Inc. may purchase one copy with a 25% discount until the end of June, 1965} Please, note: Back numbers sold in complete volumes only with a handling charge of $ -.25 on each order; sub- scriptions for the current volume accepted until March 15 of each year and on a per volume basis only. Send orders with remittance to: Mrs. Jean M. Cate, Manager, 12719 San Vicente Boule- vard, Los Angeles, Calif. 90049. Please, make checks payable to C. M. S., Inc. Shipments of material ordered are generally made within two weeks after receipt of remittance. Backnumbers of the current volume will be mailed to new subscribers, as well as to those who renew late, on the first working day of the month following receipt of the remittance. The same policy applies to new members. The Veliger is mailed free to all members of THE CALiForNIA MALACOZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY, Inc. Membership open to all individuals; no institutional memberships. Dues for the fiscal year 1964/65 (beginning July 1): $5.- plus a postage fee of $-.40 for members living in the Americas outside of the U.S. A., and $-.60 for members living in other foreign countries. Please, send for membership application forms to the Manager or the Editor. Affiliate Membership in the C. M.S., Inc. is $5.- for the fiscal year July 1, 1965 to June 30, 1966. Postage for members living in Canada, Mexico, Central and South America 60 cents, for members living in any other foreign country 80 cents additional. Membership open to indi- viduals only - no institutional memberships. Members receive The Veliger free of further charges and are entitled to purchase one copy of all supplements published after July 1, 1964, at a discount (to be deter- mined for each supplement). THE CairorniA MALACOZOOLOGICAL Society, Inc. is a non-profit educational corporation (Articles of In- corporation No. 463389 were filed January 6, 1964 in the office of the Secretary of State). The Society publishes a scientific quarterly, the VELIGER. Donations to the Society are used to pay a part of the production costs and thus to keep the subscription rate at a minimum. Donoxs may designate the Fund to which their contribution is to be credited: Operating Fund (available for current production) ; Savings Fund (available only for specified purposes, such as publication of especially long and signi- ficant papers); Endowment Fund (the income from which is available. The principal is irrevocably dedicated to scientific and educational purposes). Unassigned dona- tions will be used according to greatest need. Contributions to the C. M.S., Inc. are deductible by donors as provided in section 170 of the Internal Revenue Code (for Federal i» cme tax purposes). Bequests, lega- Vol. 7; No. 4 THE VELIGER Page 255 cies, gifts, devices are deductible for Federal estate and gift tax purposes under section 2055, 2106, and 2522 of the Code. The ‘Ireasurer of the C. M. S., Inc. will issue suitable receipts which may be used by Donors to substan- tiate their respective tax deductions. BOOKS, PERIODICALS, PAMPHLETS Van Nostrand’s Standard Catalog of Shells, by J. L. Wacner anp R. Tucker Assott. D. Van Nost- rand Co., Princeton, N. J., Nov. 16, 1964. — $4.50. Although publicity releases for this book stress estab- lishment of valuations as its prime feature, the major usefulness, instead, may prove to be the check lists of selected groups, which are gratifyingly complete. Only a few of these are covered in this “first edition” — groups that are especially popular with collectors. The title perhaps should have included a phrase such as “Part I,” for this is only the first volume in a projected series. Comprehensive coverage is for the genera Conus, Cypraea, and Voluta (all in the broad sense - s./.), with more sketchy reviews of Murex, Pleurotomaria, Strombus, Astraea, and a few others. Listing under the broadly-con- ceived genera is alphabetical, by species, with citation of modern subgeneric assignment. Also included are notes as to size, available figures, geographic range, synonymy, and common names. On the latter two, there may be some differences of interpretation: Those who compare the synonymy, say, of Cypraea with that in the latest summary by the cowrie specialist, Dr. F A. Schilder (The Veliger, vol. 7, no. 3, pp. 171 - 183, Jan. 1, 1965) will discover a number of discrepancies as to ranking, which is inevitable in taxonomic work. Common names are said to have been cited “when in use;” however, the term “Gastroverm” for Neopilina is, if not an innovation, surely not one in common use, and other similar examples could be pointed out. Several short chapters compile useful information not readily available elsewhere, such as lists of shell clubs, of dealers, international monetary quotations, world size records, and notable shell auctions of the past. Museum curators have traditionally shied away from the task of setting valuations on shells for a twofold reason — to avoid the possible stigma of commercialism and to forestall the troublesome requests of persons wishing to dispose of collections. A guide that would suggest valuations somewhere between the inconsistent and often high prices of dealers’ sales lists and the disproportionately low prices that dealers may offer to pay for collections could be of real service to the amateur. It could also be a means of facilitating comparisons between exchange lots. Whether this first attempt will serve the intended purposes remains to be seen. The three factors cited as bases for the stated valuations are: relative abundance, the desirability to collectors, and dealers’ prices. The actual formulas for balancing these factors as applied in this book are an enigma, however, when so rare a form as Haloconcha reflexa (unknown to most collec- tors and unavailable in most if not all West Coast museum collections) is priced in the “Quick list for Western North America” at 12 cents for a specimen with good locality data, 8 cents for a “data-less shell.” The “Quick Lists,’ which are eventually to cover all the major faunal regions, are restricted as yet to three American areas — the East Coast of North America, the West Coast, and the Caribbean. Foreign exchangers who take these lists seriously may try to drive hard bargains with their American colleagues, for no American limpet or Thais or Macoma rates more than a dime in price, even with data. A differential of one or two cents between prime and “data-less” shells will not encourage collectors to go to much trouble in providing good mate- rial. One wonders if a 5-point or a 10-point scale of rarity would not have been a better compromise than the at- tempt at precise figures — such as 95 cents for Haliotis rufescens as against 40 cents for the actually much less common H. walallensis. The “Quick Lists,” therefore, would seem to be open to much revision in future editions. Illustrations are in the main black and white line cuts, most of them apparently culled from that classic source of fine engravings, Chenu’s “Manuel de Conchyliologie.” Two color plates serve as covers for the soft-bound book. Aside from the over-deflated prices of the Quick Lists, this book should be useful for its well-organized check lists of those gastropod groups most prized by collectors. Several more volumes will be needed to complete the catalogue of Mollusca. MK Neogastropoda, Opisthobranchia and Basommatophora from the Ripley, Owl Creek and Prairie Bluff Formations. by Norman EF Sout. U. S. Geological Survey, Professional Paper 331-B, pp. 153 - 344; plts. 19 - 52; text figs. 12 - 18; tables 1, 2. The second part of a complete and detailed study of the rich Upper Cretaceous faunas of Tennessee and Mississippi is as well-illustrated and informative as the author’s preceding contribution published in 1960 [Archeogastropoda, Mesogastropoda, and _ stratigraphy of the Ripley, Owl Creek, and Prairie Bluff Formations: THE VELIGER Vol. 7: No. 4 U.S. Geol. Surv., Prof. Paper 331-A, pp. 1-151; plts. 1 - 18]. Two hundred and ten species, 77 of them new, are described and assigned to 95 genera and subgenera. A new genus, Lowenstamia, and subgenus, Ornopsis (Pornosis), are proposed. Fifty-two additional species are represented by material which is inadequate for any but tentative generic assignments and specific identi- fications. Evolutionary, ecological, and biogeographical develop- ments of gastropods in Late Cretaceous seas are illumin- ated strikingly by the Saul’s analysis. Mesogastropoda normally constitute about 50% of Late Cretaceous gastro- pod faunas, culminating their gradual ascendancy over the dominant Archaeogastropoda of the Paleozoic. The Terti- ary increase of Neogastropoda at the expense of the Meso- gastropoda is anticipated, interestingly, in the unusual dominance of Neogastropoda in the Late Campanian- Maestrichtian faunas of the Ripley, Owl Creek, and Prairie Bluff formations. ECA THE VELIGER is open to original papers pertaining to any problem concerned with mollusks. This is meant to make facilities available for publication of original articles from a wide field of endeavor. Papers dealing with anatomical, cytological, distributional, ecological, histological, morphological, phys- iological, taxonomic, etc., aspects of marine, freshwater or terrestrial mollusks from any region, will be considered. Even topics only indi- rectly concerned with mollusks may be acceptable. In the unlikely event that space considerations make limitations necessary, papers dealing with mollusks from the Pacific region will be given priority. However, in this case the term “Pacific region” is to be most liberally interpreted. It is the editorial policy to preserve the individualistic writing style of the author; therefore any editorial changes in a manuscript will be sub- mitted to the author for his approval, before going to press. Short articles containing descriptions of new species or lesser taxa will be given preferential treatment in the speed of publication provided that arrangements have been made by the author for depositing the holotype with a recognized public Museum. Museum numbers of the type specimens must be included in the manuscript. Type localities must be defined as accurately as possible, with geographical longitudes and latitudes added. Short original papers, not exceeding 500 words, will be published in the column “NOTES & NEWS”; in this column will also appear notices of meetings of the American Malacological Union, as well as news items which are deemed of interest to our subscribers in general. Articles on “METHODS & TECHNIQUES” will be considered for publication in another column, provided that the information is complete and tech- niques and methods are capable of duplication by anyone carefully fol- lowing the description given. Such articles should be mainly original and deal with collecting, preparing, maintaining, studying, photo- graphing, etc., of mollusks or other invertebrates. A third column, en- titled “INFORMATION DESK,” will contain articles dealing with any problem pertaining to collecting, identifying, etc., in short, problems encountered by our readers. In contrast to other contributions, articles in this column do not necessarily contain new and original materials. Questions to the editor, which can be answered in this column, are in- vited. The column “BOOKS, PERIODICALS, PAMPHLETS?” will attempt to bring reviews of new publications to the attention of our readers. Also, new timely articles may be listed by title only, if this is deemed expedient. Manuscripts should be typed in final form on a high grade white paper, 812” by 11”, double spaced and accompanied by a carbon copy. EDITORIAL BOARD Dr. Donan P. Assort, Professor of Biology Hopkins Marine Station of Stanford University Dr. Jerry DonouuE, Professor of Chemistry Chairman of the Department of Chemistry and Research Associate in the Allan Hancock Foundation University of Southern California, Los Angeles Dr. J. Wyatt DuruaM, Professor of Paleontology University of California, Berkeley Dr. E. W. Facer, Professor of Biology Scripps Institution of Oceanography, La Jolla University of California at San Diego Dr. Cavet Hanp, Professor of Zoology and Director, Bodega Marine Laboratory University of California, Berkeley Dr. G Datias Hanna, Curator, Department of Geology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. JoeL W. HepcretH, Resident Director, Marine Science Laboratory, Oregon State University Newport, Oregon Dr. Leo G. HERTLEIN, Curator of Invertebrate Paleontology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Myra KEEN, Associate Professor of Paleontology and Curator of Conchology Stanford University Dr. Vicror LoosanorrF, Senior Scientist U.S. Bureau of Commercial Fisheries Tiburon, California Dr. JoHnN McGowan, Assistant Professor of Oceanography Scripps Institution of Oceanography, La Jolla University of California at San Diego Dr. Frank A. PitELKa, Professor of Zoology and Chairman, Department of Zoology University of California, Berkeley Mr. Attyn G. SmirH, Associate Curator, Department of Invertebrate Zoology California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco Dr. Ratpu I. Smiru, Professor of Zoology University of California, Berkeley Dr. DonaLp WItson, Assistant Professor of Zoology University of California, Berkeley EDITOR-IN-CHIEF Dr. RupouF STOHLER, Associate Research Zoologist University of California, Berkeley ASSOCIATE EDITOR Mrs. JEAN M. CaTE Los Angeles, California ys CONE SP. ha ry — ‘i : Stes “1 wun & i]! | lati! ih if iH 4 tm ey “He INCA pa MTV AAS AGN La. REA No ‘0,’ ae ie 5 a ~ al "hi ui HH gE 3 a | all Le ee 2 boa Bag ‘i Se : ail oe (ES ton ou, Wee ee Ma AR) Yo ae ‘e rare Niariste, N ae %, eae. eee See SS eS y FAME Fe ill! | es S gas r & Yh [oo i i °°, oy 4%, 8 i t a ates Y I x) Cee ie or j ' | a 5 a OS | ! % wel ‘ I Ys Bey ie Sp ae i! ! j \ ily ST aldca ae r th] | \ ty, i ee cl UE ee eS a Te, iN ! i & I Ml | 00838 8324 wn Ww [a < a a z 9 = =) = a ) Zz z < Z (e) o a5 E = a 3 9088 mut a Fen ae eer saat 3 3 : : : muha : ‘ eat wor spe iinedy hes i ; : ; : : : Beton Soe % : BY : ve : ee ~ ; ; z : ‘ me 3 ae wks see Ws 045 OF Dh Sabi Shere oe